PROPOSAL - New York State Department of Transportation

PROPOSAL

D263605F.A. PROJECT

Book 2 of 2

Submitted in accordance with the Highway Law and the Standard Specifications officially finalized and adopted on January 1, 2018 as posted on the Department's website.

US CUSTOMARY UNITS

Proposal Description:

NYSDOT/NYS Police Comm. Vehicle Inspection and Highway Safety Operations Facility - HVAC Contract, Town of Champlain.

Letting of 2/8/2018 @ 10:30 A.M.

50 Wolf Road, Albany, NY 12232

IMPORTANT BIDDER INFORMATION

0790 1 of 1 L09/01/17 Contracts/Legal 6/22/17

1. Familiarize Yourself with the Standard Specifications. NYSDOT currently uses the Standard Specifications specified on the front cover of this Project Proposal. The applicable Standard Specifications may be accessed at: https://www.dot.ny.gov/main/business-center/engineering/specifications/busi-e-standards-usc . Be certain you access the correct edition of the Standard Specifications. . 2. Upcoming Projects/ Letting Results/Contract Documents. Advertisements are available at: www.dot.ny.gov/doing-business/opportunities/const-highway and Letting Results are at: www.dot.ny.gov/doing-business/opportunities/const-results. Contract documents may be accessed at: www.dot.ny.gov/doing-business/opportunities/const-notices. 3. Procurement Lobbying Law. www.dot.ny.gov/main/business-center/contractors/contractors-repository/lobbylaw.pdf. NYS Finance Law restricts communication with NYSDOT personnel on procurements and contact can only be made with designated persons. Contact with non-designated persons or other involved Agencies will be considered a serious matter and may result in disqualification. Project-related technical questions or comments must be submitted through the Construction Contracting Section on the NYSDOT website at: www.dot.ny.gov/doing-business/opportunities/const-notices. Contract administration or procurement questions may either be submitted through the website or directed to Robert Kitchen or the Assistant Director/Director of the Contract Management Bureau, (518) 457-2124. 4. D/M/WBE Goals. www.dot.ny.gov/main/business-center/contractors/construction-division/construction-civil-rights/ebo. Projects may have one goal for participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) when Federally funded, or two separate goals for participation by Minority Business Enterprises (MBEs) and Women’s Business Enterprises (WBE), when Non-Federally funded. If the project has (a) D/M/WBE goal(s), you must document your good faith efforts to obtain D/M/WBE participation. Solicitation of D/M/WBEs must begin prior to the submission of your bid. For projects with goals, the Pre-Award Utilization Package must be submitted to the Office of Construction within 7 calendar days after Letting, in accordance with §102-12 D/M/WBE Utilization, using the current version of NYSDOT approved Civil Rights reporting software. 5. Bonds. Statutes require that a low bidder file both a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Bond for the full amount of the contract. Arrangements should be made with a Surety prior to submitting a bid. Failure to secure bonding could result in the loss of your bid deposit. See §103-03 Contract Bonds. 6. Bid Security. Every bid must be accompanied by a bid bond, certified check or bank cashier's check payable to the State of New York. Bid Express bids must include an electronic bid bond. Bonds must be on form CONR 391 and in the sum of 25% of the total bid. Checks must be in the amount specified in the proposal. 7. New York State Can Help You Secure Surety Bonding. The NYS Surety Bond Assistance Program (NYSBAP) provides technical and financial assistance to help New York State small business or MWBE contractors secure surety bonding. Contractors may be eligible to receive a guarantee of up to 30% to secure a surety bond line, bid bond or a performance and payment bond on State projects. Training is also available to contractors requiring technical support on how to become bond-ready. For more information visit esd.ny.gov/BusinessPrograms/BondingAssistance.html or contact Ms. Huey-Min Chuang at Empire State Development at 212-803-3238 or [email protected]. 8. Do Not Alter the Bid Proposal Unless Directed to Do So by Amendment. Unauthorized alterations could lead to your bid being declared informal. See §102-05 Proposal Submission. 9. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all Amendments have been incorporated into its bid. Amendments are posted at: www.dot.ny.gov/doing-business/opportunities/const-notices. 10. Bid on All Items and Sign the Bid. If it is your intent to bid "0", use the numeric symbol. Leaving blank spaces can render your bid informal. See §102-05 Proposal Submission. 11. Bids Should Be Submitted through Bid Express or in a Sealed Envelope prominently labeled “BID ENCLOSED”, addressed to NYSDOT, Contract Management Bureau, 50 Wolf Road, First Floor, Suite 1CM, Albany NY 12232 and delivered during normal business hours(Monday through Friday, 7:00 am to 4:00 pm). Clearly identify the Contractor Name, Address, Federal Identification Number, Project Number and Project Description on the envelope. The same Federal Identification number should be used on both the envelope and the Planholders List. Low bidders must have a current NYS Vendor Responsibility Questionnaire For-Profit Construction (CCA-2) on file or submit one within 10 days of receipt of the contract. Questionnaires are available at: www.dot.ny.gov/bids-and-lettings/construction-contractors/general-info. Please call (518) 457-2421 if a reasonable accommodation is needed to participate in the Letting.

D263605

0800 Per DQAB 2100 L05/07/15

Page 1 of 1

REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS Buy American EEO Goals D/M/WBE Goals Ensuring Pay Equity Form CONR 9k Electronic Bidding Federal Aid Contract Provisions Insurance Coverage List of Additional Insured Railroad Insurance New York State Uniform Contracting Questionnaire NOTE: This form was developed for repetitive use throughout all contract proposals and may identify items not applicable to this specific project.

D263605 17

BUY AMERICA

0815 1 of 1 per Construction L9/1/17

106-11 BUY AMERICA. In accordance with 23 USC 313, 23 CFR 635.410 and Section 146 of the State Finance Law permanently incorporated predominantly steel and/or iron products materials shall be domestically produced, regardless of the percentage they comprise in a manufactured product, or form they take. For Federal-Aid contracts, the Contractor may permanently incorporate in the construction of this contract a minimal amount of foreign steel and/or iron materials that are subject to Buy America requirements, if the combined cost of such materials does not exceed one-tenth of one percent (0.1 %) of the total contract cost or $2,500, whichever is greater. The combined cost of foreign steel and/or iron materials will be the value of the materials as they are delivered to the contract, documented by invoice or bill of sale to the Contractor. To qualify as domestic, all manufacturing processes, including manufacture, fabrication, grinding, drilling, welding, finishing, and coating of any product containing steel and/or iron materials, must have been performed in the United States. To further define the coverage, a domestic product is a manufactured steel and/or iron materials construction material that was produced in one of the 50 States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, or in the territories and possessions of the United States. Raw materials used in the steel and/or iron materials may be imported. Raw materials are materials such as iron ore, limestone, waste products, etc., which are used in the manufacturing process to produce the steel and/or iron materials products. Waste products include scrap; i.e., steel no longer useful in its present form from old automobiles, machinery, pipe, railroad rail, steel trimmings from mills or product manufacturing, and the like. Extracting, crushing, and handling the raw materials which are customary to prepare them for transporting are exempt from Buy America. The use of foreign source steel or iron billets is not acceptable under Buy America. For non Federal-Aid contracts, the Contractor shall provide structural steel, reinforcing steel and/or other major steel items to be permanently incorporated in the work produced or made in whole or substantial part in the United States. The combined cost of foreign steel and/or iron materials will be the value of the materials as they are delivered to the contract, documented by invoice or bill of sale to the Contractor.

A. Control of Materials. All items, regardless of origin, shall comply with their individual specification requirements and with the requirements stated elsewhere in this subsection. In the event the contract is awarded based on using only domestic steel and/or iron materials, the Contractor shall supply only domestic steel and/or iron materials and will be paid the domestic bid prices. The Contractor shall ensure the domestic steel and/or iron materials are supplied in conformance with the above referenced laws. The Contractor shall inform all affected Subcontractors and material suppliers of these specific requirements and ascertain that steel and/or iron materials being supplied is in conformance with these requirements.

B. Waivers. Waivers to the Buy America requirement may be requested by the Contractor if it can be demonstrated that the use of domestic steel and/or iron materials would be inconsistent with the public interest, such materials and products are not produced in the United States in sufficient and reasonably available quantities and of satisfactory quality. Provided one or more of the above requirements are met, the Contractor may submit a request for a waiver to the Engineer. The request shall include copies of all documentation verifying the unavailability of the material or product, and/or justification of the application for a waiver. For Federal-Aided contracts, the Department will submit approved waiver requests to the FHWA for review. The Contractor shall investigate and respond to any public comments made to the FHWA Office of Program Administration, indicating that a domestic supplier can provide the material for which a waiver has been requested. Final approval of the Buy America Waiver request will be made by the Administrator, Federal Highway Administration. The waiver will be effective when it is posted in the Federal Register. For non-Federal-Aid contracts, upon final approval of the affected Department program areas, notification and approval of the Buy America Waiver request will be made by the Deputy Chief Engineer, Construction (DCEC).

D26360518

GOALS FOR EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EEO) PARTICIPATION

0820 Page 1 of 1 Per Construction EI 17-006

The Contractor shall follow the requirements of §102-11 Equal Employment Opportunity Requirements. The goals for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor’s aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, which is the county or counties in which the work is located, are as follows:

GOALS FOR PARTICIPATION OF MINORITIES COUNTY % COUNTY % COUNTY % Albany 3.2 Herkimer 2.1 Richmond TableAllegany 6.3 Jefferson 2.5 Rockland 22.6Broome 1.1 Kings Table St. Lawrence 2.5Bronx Table Lewis 2.5 Saratoga 3.2Cattaraugus 6.3 Livingston 5.3 Schenectady 3.2Cayuga 2.5 Madison 3.8 Schoharie 2.6Chautauqua 6.3 Monroe 5.3 Schuyler 1.2Chemung 2.2 Montgomery 3.2 Seneca 5.9Chenango 1.2 Nassau 5.8 Steuben 1.2Clinton 2.6 New York Table Suffolk 5.8Columbia 2.6 Niagara 7.7 Sullivan 17.0Cortland 2.5 Oneida 2.1 Tioga 1.1Delaware 1.2 Onondaga 3.8 Tompkins 1.2Dutchess 6.4 Ontario 5.3 Ulster 17.0Erie 7.7 Orange 17.0 Warren 2.6Essex 2.6 Orleans 5.3 Washington 2.6Franklin 2.5 Oswego 3.8 Wayne 5.3Fulton 2.6 Otsego 1.2 Westchester 22.6Genesee 5.9 Putnam 22.6 Wyoming 6.3Greene 2.6 Queens Table Yates 5.9Hamilton 2.6 Rensselaer 3.2

(45 FR 65976 – 10/3/1980)

GOALS FOR PARTICIPATION OF MINORITIES BRONX, KINGS, NEW YORK, QUEENS AND RICHMOND COUNTIES

Electricians 9.0 to 10.2 Bricklayers 13.4 to 15.5Carpenters 27.6 to 32.0 Asbestos workers 22.8 to 28.0Steam fitters 12.2 to 13.5 Roofers 6.3 to 7.5Metal lathers 24.6 to 25.6 Iron workers (ornamental) 22.4 to 23.0Painters 26.0 to 28.6 Cement masons 23.0 to 27.0Operating engineers 25.6 to 26.0 Glaziers 16.0 to 20.0Plumbers 12.0 to 14.5 Plasterers 15.8 to 18.0Iron workers (structural) 25.9 to 32.0 Teamsters 22.0 to 22.5Elevator constructors 5.5 to 6.5 Boilermakers 13.0 to 15.5

All others 16.4 to 17.5

GOAL FOR PARTICIPATION OF WOMEN

The goal for the participation of women is 6.9%. (43 FR 14888 – 4/7/1978) These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work (whether or not it is Federal or federally assisted). If the Contractor performs construction work outside of New York State, it shall apply the goals established for the covered area where the work is actually performed.

D263605 19

GOALS FOR DISADVANTAGED/MINORITY/WOMEN’S BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (D/M/WBE) PARTICIPATION

0821 Page 1 of 1 L01/08/09 Per Construction 12/20/16

The Department has established the following utilization goal(s) for this contract, expressed as a percentage of the total contract bid amount. For clarification of Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Utilization, Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) Utilization or Women's Business Enterprise (WBE) Utilization requirements refer to §102-12 D/M/WBE Utilization of the Standard Specifications.

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Utilization Goal % (Federal-Aid Only)

Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) Utilization Goal % (Non Federal-Aid Only)

Women's Business Enterprise (WBE) Utilization Goal % (Non Federal-Aid Only)

Directories and/or Information related to the current certification status of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises can be obtained from the NYS Unified Certification Program website at: https://nysucp.newnycontracts.com/

Direct questions concerning Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization to: NYS Department of Transportation Office of Construction 50 Wolf Road Pod 51 Albany, New York 12232 (518) 457-6472

Direct questions concerning Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Certification to: NYS Department of Transportation Contract Audit Bureau DBE Certification 50 Wolf Road, 6th Floor Avenue F, 1st Street Albany, New York 12232 (518) 457-3180

Directories and/or information related to the current certification status of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises, can be obtained by contacting the:

NYS Department of Economic Development Division of Minority and Women's Business Development 633Third Avenue New York, NY 10017 (212) 803-2414 email: [email protected] https://ny.newnycontracts.com/

0

D26360520

Ensuring Pay Equity by State Contractors

0825 Page 1 of 1 06/15/17 L07/13/17

In accordance with Executive Order 162, issued on January 9, 2017, the Contractor shall provide to the Department – on a monthly basis – detailed workforce utilization reports of the Contractor and each subcontractor that include, in addition to equal employment opportunity information, the job title and salary of each employee directly performing work on a State contract. If the Contractor cannot identify the individuals working directly on a State contract, then the Contractor shall provide such information of each employee in the Contractor’s and each subcontractor’s entire workforce. The reporting period shall be defined as each calendar month, beginning and ending on the first and last day of each such month, respectively. The reporting requirement shall begin on the effective date of the contract and continue for the duration of the contract term. Reports shall be submitted within 15 calendar days from the end of each reporting period. This provision is in effect for the reporting period beginning December 1, 2017, or the effective date of the contract, whichever date is later. This provision shall not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility to submit payroll certification as elsewhere required. If information within the Contractor’s payroll certification is sufficient to fulfill the requirements of Executive Order 162, additional information shall not be required. Detailed workforce utilization reports, as required above, shall be submitted in such form, in such manner, and in such timeframe as shall be required by the Department. The Contractor shall include this provision in every subcontract so that such provision shall be binding upon each subcontractor.

D263605 21

CONR9 (1/19/16)

P.I.N. 7720.9M, D263605 - SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS The information checked in the “Digital” column on this form is available at the Contract Documents tab within the Construction Contracting section of the Business Center on the Department’s web site. The information checked in the “Inspection Only” column on this form is available at the Regional Office having jurisdiction for this project, as identified in the advertisement for bids, for inspection and review prior to the letting date. The bidder’s signature on this proposal certifies that they have made themselves aware of the availability of the information indicated below:

THERE IS NO SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION AVAILABLE FOR THIS CONTRACT:

INFORMATION Digital1 Inspection Only

1. Greyscale PDF of Sealed Plan Set (for printing)2,4 2. Unsealed Layered or 3D PDF Files 3. CADD Information

a. MicroStation DGN b. InRoads DTM and XML format c. InRoads ALG and XML format

4. Cross Sections in ADOBE PDF format 5. Quantity Work-ups3 6. Record Plans 7. Rock Cores (available for inspection only) 8. Sign Face Layouts in ADOBE PDF format 9. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) 10. Subsurface Information

a. Subsurface Exploration Logs (Included in Geotechical Report)

b. Undisturbed Sample Logs c. Laboratory Test Data from Soil Samples d. Tabulated Results of Probing e. Tabulated Depth to Bedrock f. Rock Core Evaluation Logs g. Compression Test Data from Rock Samples h. Rock Outcrop Maps i. Granular Materials Resource Survey Reports j. Terrain Reconnaissance Reports

11. Subsurface Information - Other Information a. Subsurface information from outside sources

b. Source Information - Granular Material and aggregates c. Special Subsurface Reports 12. Anticipated Construction Schedule 13. Asbestos Information a. Asbestos Blanket Variances b. Asbestos Report 14. Special Reports or Other Information: a. Permits b. Design Approval Document c. Design Report Reevaluation Documentation

d. Wetland Compensation Report e. Geotechnical Report f. Phase 1A/Phase 1B Archeological Report

1 – All digital material is provided in ADOBE (PDF) format, unless noted above. 2 – Required for all projects that have 11”x17” plan sets. See HDM Section 21.3.9.2 3 – Required for all projects.

D26360522

https://www.dot.ny.gov/business

CONR9 (1/19/16)

4 – Greyscale PDF’s of sealed plans must be provided at PS&E submittal. An updated version must be provided whenever the plans are modified or amended.

D263605 23

NYSDOT Electronic Bidding - AASHTOWare Project Bids and Bid Express

0850 1 of 2 Contract Management L01/19/17 12/05/16

Project Bids allows bidders to receive electronic proposal bid item information from the Department's web site and Bid Express to produce an electronic bid. Project Bids is provided free of charge, and can be used on almost any Windows-compatible PC. Benefits may include:

Project Bids computes item and overall bid totals as estimators work through the list, and alerts estimators if an item is accidentally omitted.

Electronic files of item bid data will be posted to the NYSDOT website and Bid Express to coincide with advertising and contract document publication dates.

When an amended item bid data is downloaded, recognition of changes is automatic. Electronic bids are processed faster than paper bids, decreasing the time needed for

verification of bids by NYSDOT.

Bid Express allows secure, encrypted bid submittal over the internet. It integrates with Project Bids and includes electronic bid bond verification. Bid Express is a fee-based service. Benefits may include:

Real-time bid submittal from any location. No concerns about driving bids to Albany or mail services arriving after the deadline. The ability to submit a "safety bid" early while continuing to solicit better quotes from

subs and suppliers and to overwrite the safety bid with a new bid right up to the submission deadline.

As data accumulates on Bid Express, there is the ability to search and analyze bids on prior contracts for specific work items, and/or by specific competitors, etc.

The ability to solicit and receive quotes from subcontractors through the Small Business Network on Bid Express.

Contractors who use Bid Express do not submit a paper bid.

First time electronic bidders should:

Allow at least seven business days to obtain a digital ID and password for bidding through Bid Express.

Follow the procedures in "Download AASHTOWare Project Bids", which are posted at http://www.dot.ny.gov/bids-and-lettings/construction-contractors/electronic-bid-system

Enter the Agency as NYSDOT. Use the appropriate Federal-ID and firm name. Federal-ID must be in the format 12-

3456789. Joint ventures must create a new digital ID. Joint ventures must also send evidence of the authority of the agent or attorney-in-fact for the joint venturers to act on behalf of all joint venturers to the Contract Management Bureau prior to the Letting.

All electronic bidders should:

Enter prices for all bid items in the Schedule of Items. Enter days for the B portion(s) of A + B bids on the A+B Days tab (if applicable). Enter the required info in the JURAT and Disclosure of Lobbying Activity folders. Complete the Contract Document Bid-Ability Survey (optional).

D26360524

NYSDOT Electronic Bidding - AASHTOWare Project Bids and Bid Express

0850 2 of 2 Contract Management L01/19/17 12/05/16

Enter the required info in the Bid Bond folder if submitting bid through Bid Express and click Verify to verify the bid bond.

All bids submitted through Bid Express should be 100% complete as noted at the top of the page. Submitting a bid that is less than 100% complete through Bid Express could lead to the bid being declared informal.

Paper Bid Documents: NYSDOT recommends and encourages contractors to bid electronically with Bid Express because of its many advantages, but contractors are not required to bid electronically. If NYSDOT receives both a Bid Express bid and a paper bid from the same contractor, the Bid Express bid will prevail.

Bidders who do not use Bid Express are encouraged to submit an electronic bid file on a CD included with their paper bid. NYSDOT will not accept electronic bids on CD without a paper bid. If there is any discrepancy between an electronic file submitted with the paper bid and the paper bid, the paper bid will prevail.

When submitting an electronic bid file with your paper bid, include only one .ebsx (Project Bids) file on the CD. Do not include any other bid items on the CD. The CD must be labeled with the following information:

Firm name Letting date D number A statement as to whether the paper bid does or does not include any handwritten

changes from the electronic bid file. Do not mix partial printouts with differing date-time groups.

Amendments: Contractors are solely responsible for recognizing and responding to changes by amendment. If an amendment involves changes to item bid data, an amended Project Bids file will be posted to the Department's website and to Bid Express. This file must be applied to your electronic bid. If there is any discrepancy in the itemized proposals published in paper and electronic formats, in either the contract pay items or quantities, the Department will evaluate the bids based only on that portion that is common to all formats. For example, if an item is missing from any format, the bids will be evaluated excluding that item and if item quantities are different in any format, the bids will be evaluated using the lowest item quantity.

Please notify the Department at 518-457-2124 or 518-457-3583 if you find any such discrepancies. However, not all amendments will involve changes to item bid data.

For assistance:

NYSDOT 518-457-2124 or 518-457-3583 Bid Express Help Desk (888) 352-2439 or (352) 381-4888 Third-party Software - Contact the vendor of the software. The Department is neither

authorized nor able to assist with any software package.

D263605 25

FHWA-1273 -- Revised May 1, 2012

REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

I. General II. NondiscriminationIII. Nonsegregated FacilitiesIV. Davis-Bacon and Related Act ProvisionsV. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act

ProvisionsVI. Subletting or Assigning the ContractVII. Safety: Accident PreventionVIII. False Statements Concerning Highway ProjectsIX. Implementation of Clean Air Act and Federal Water

Pollution Control ActX. Compliance with Governmentwide Suspension and

Debarment RequirementsXI. Certification Regarding Use of Contract Funds for

Lobbying

ATTACHMENTS

A. Employment and Materials Preference for Appalachian Development Highway System or Appalachian Local Access Road Contracts (included in Appalachian contracts only)

I. GENERAL

1. Form FHWA-1273 must be physically incorporated in eachconstruction contract funded under Title 23 (excluding emergency contracts solely intended for debris removal). The contractor (or subcontractor) must insert this form in each subcontract and further require its inclusion in all lower tier subcontracts (excluding purchase orders, rental agreements and other agreements for supplies or services).

The applicable requirements of Form FHWA-1273 are incorporated by reference for work done under any purchase order, rental agreement or agreement for other services. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor, lower-tier subcontractor or service provider.

Form FHWA-1273 must be included in all Federal-aid design-build contracts, in all subcontracts and in lower tier subcontracts (excluding subcontracts for design services, purchase orders, rental agreements and other agreements for supplies or services). The design-builder shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor, lower-tier subcontractor or service provider.

Contracting agencies may reference Form FHWA-1273 in bid proposal or request for proposal documents, however, the Form FHWA-1273 must be physically incorporated (not referenced) in all contracts, subcontracts and lower-tier subcontracts (excluding purchase orders, rental agreements and other agreements for supplies or services related to a construction contract).

2. Subject to the applicability criteria noted in the followingsections, these contract provisions shall apply to all work performed on the contract by the contractor's own organization and with the assistance of workers under the contractor's immediate superintendence and to all work performed on the contract by piecework, station work, or by subcontract.

3. A breach of any of the stipulations contained in theseRequired Contract Provisions may be sufficient grounds for withholding of progress payments, withholding of final payment, termination of the contract, suspension / debarment or any other action determined to be appropriate by the contracting agency and FHWA.

4. Selection of Labor: During the performance of this contract,the contractor shall not use convict labor for any purpose within the limits of a construction project on a Federal-aid highway unless it is labor performed by convicts who are on parole, supervised release, or probation. The term Federal-aid highway does not include roadways functionally classified as local roads or rural minor collectors.

II. NONDISCRIMINATION

The provisions of this section related to 23 CFR Part 230 are applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related construction subcontracts of $10,000 or more. The provisions of 23 CFR Part 230 are not applicable to material supply, engineering, or architectural service contracts.

In addition, the contractor and all subcontractors must comply with the following policies: Executive Order 11246, 41 CFR 60, 29 CFR 1625-1627, Title 23 USC Section 140, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 USC 794), Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended, and related regulations including 49 CFR Parts 21, 26 and 27; and 23 CFR Parts 200, 230, and 633.

The contractor and all subcontractors must comply with: the requirements of the Equal Opportunity Clause in 41 CFR 60-1.4(b) and, for all construction contracts exceeding $10,000, the Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications in 41 CFR 60-4.3.

Note: The U.S. Department of Labor has exclusive authority to determine compliance with Executive Order 11246 and the policies of the Secretary of Labor including 41 CFR 60, and 29 CFR 1625-1627. The contracting agency and the FHWA have the authority and the responsibility to ensure compliance with Title 23 USC Section 140, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 USC 794), and Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended, and related regulations including 49 CFR Parts 21, 26 and 27; and 23 CFR Parts 200, 230, and 633.

The following provision is adopted from 23 CFR 230, Appendix A, with appropriate revisions to conform to the U.S. Department of Labor (US DOL) and FHWA requirements.

1. Equal Employment Opportunity: Equal employmentopportunity (EEO) requirements not to discriminate and to take affirmative action to assure equal opportunity as set forth under laws, executive orders, rules, regulations (28 CFR 35, 29 CFR 1630, 29 CFR 1625-1627, 41 CFR 60 and 49 CFR 27) and orders of the Secretary of Labor as modified by the provisions prescribed herein, and imposed pursuant to 23 U.S.C. 140 shall constitute the EEO and specific affirmative action standards for the contractor's project activities under

REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS FOR FEDERAL AID CONTRACTS

2140 L09/06/12Page 1 of 11

D26360526

this contract. The provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) set forth under 28 CFR 35 and 29 CFR 1630 are incorporated by reference in this contract. In the execution of this contract, the contractor agrees to comply with the following minimum specific requirement activities of EEO:

a. The contractor will work with the contracting agency and the Federal Government to ensure that it has made every good faith effort to provide equal opportunity with respect to all of its terms and conditions of employment and in their review of activities under the contract.

b. The contractor will accept as its operating policy the following statement:

"It is the policy of this Company to assure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, religion, sex, color, national origin, age or disability. Such action shall include: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship, pre-apprenticeship, and/or on-the-job training."

2. EEO Officer: The contractor will designate and make known to the contracting officers an EEO Officer who will have the responsibility for and must be capable of effectively administering and promoting an active EEO program and who must be assigned adequate authority and responsibility to do so.

3. Dissemination of Policy: All members of the contractor's staff who are authorized to hire, supervise, promote, and discharge employees, or who recommend such action, or who are substantially involved in such action, will be made fully cognizant of, and will implement, the contractor's EEO policy and contractual responsibilities to provide EEO in each grade and classification of employment. To ensure that the above agreement will be met, the following actions will be taken as a minimum:

a. Periodic meetings of supervisory and personnel office employees will be conducted before the start of work and then not less often than once every six months, at which time the contractor's EEO policy and its implementation will be reviewed and explained. The meetings will be conducted by the EEO Officer.

b. All new supervisory or personnel office employees will be given a thorough indoctrination by the EEO Officer, covering all major aspects of the contractor's EEO obligations within thirty days following their reporting for duty with the contractor.

c. All personnel who are engaged in direct recruitment for the project will be instructed by the EEO Officer in the contractor's procedures for locating and hiring minorities and women.

d. Notices and posters setting forth the contractor's EEO policy will be placed in areas readily accessible to employees, applicants for employment and potential employees.

e. The contractor's EEO policy and the procedures to implement such policy will be brought to the attention of employees by means of meetings, employee handbooks, or other appropriate means.

4. Recruitment: When advertising for employees, the contractor will include in all advertisements for employees the notation: "An Equal Opportunity Employer." All such advertisements will be placed in publications having a large circulation among minorities and women in the area from which the project work force would normally be derived.

a. The contractor will, unless precluded by a valid bargaining agreement, conduct systematic and direct recruitment through public and private employee referral sources likely to yield qualified minorities and women. To meet this requirement, the contractor will identify sources of potential minority group employees, and establish with such identified sources procedures whereby minority and women applicants may be referred to the contractor for employment consideration.

b. In the event the contractor has a valid bargaining agreement providing for exclusive hiring hall referrals, the contractor is expected to observe the provisions of that agreement to the extent that the system meets the contractor's compliance with EEO contract provisions. Where implementation of such an agreement has the effect of discriminating against minorities or women, or obligates the contractor to do the same, such implementation violates Federal nondiscrimination provisions.

c. The contractor will encourage its present employees to refer minorities and women as applicants for employment. Information and procedures with regard to referring such applicants will be discussed with employees.

5. Personnel Actions: Wages, working conditions, and employee benefits shall be established and administered, and personnel actions of every type, including hiring, upgrading, promotion, transfer, demotion, layoff, and termination, shall be taken without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability. The following procedures shall be followed:

a. The contractor will conduct periodic inspections of project sites to insure that working conditions and employee facilities do not indicate discriminatory treatment of project site personnel.

b. The contractor will periodically evaluate the spread of wages paid within each classification to determine any evidence of discriminatory wage practices.

c. The contractor will periodically review selected personnel actions in depth to determine whether there is evidence of discrimination. Where evidence is found, the contractor will promptly take corrective action. If the review indicates that the discrimination may extend beyond the actions reviewed, such corrective action shall include all affected persons.

d. The contractor will promptly investigate all complaints of alleged discrimination made to the contractor in connection with its obligations under this contract, will attempt to resolve such complaints, and will take appropriate corrective action within a reasonable time. If the investigation indicates that the discrimination may affect persons other than the complainant, such corrective action shall include such other persons. Upon completion of each investigation, the contractor will inform every complainant of all of their avenues of appeal.

6. Training and Promotion:

a. The contractor will assist in locating, qualifying, and increasing the skills of minorities and women who are


00860 L09/06/12Page 2 of 11

D263605 27

applicants for employment or current employees. Such efforts should be aimed at developing full journey level status employees in the type of trade or job classification involved.

b. Consistent with the contractor's work force requirements and as permissible under Federal and State regulations, the contractor shall make full use of training programs, i.e., apprenticeship, and on-the-job training programs for the geographical area of contract performance. In the event a special provision for training is provided under this contract, this subparagraph will be superseded as indicated in the special provision. The contracting agency may reserve training positions for persons who receive welfare assistancein accordance with 23 U.S.C. 140(a).

c. The contractor will advise employees and applicants for employment of available training programs and entrance requirements for each.

d. The contractor will periodically review the training and promotion potential of employees who are minorities and women and will encourage eligible employees to apply for such training and promotion.

7. Unions: If the contractor relies in whole or in part upon unions as a source of employees, the contractor will use good faith efforts to obtain the cooperation of such unions to increase opportunities for minorities and women. Actions by the contractor, either directly or through a contractor's association acting as agent, will include the procedures set forth below:

a. The contractor will use good faith efforts to develop, in cooperation with the unions, joint training programs aimed toward qualifying more minorities and women for membership in the unions and increasing the skills of minorities and women so that they may qualify for higher paying employment.

b. The contractor will use good faith efforts to incorporate an EEO clause into each union agreement to the end that such union will be contractually bound to refer applicants without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability.

c. The contractor is to obtain information as to the referral practices and policies of the labor union except that to the extent such information is within the exclusive possession of the labor union and such labor union refuses to furnish such information to the contractor, the contractor shall so certify to the contracting agency and shall set forth what efforts have been made to obtain such information.

d. In the event the union is unable to provide the contractor with a reasonable flow of referrals within the time limit set forth in the collective bargaining agreement, the contractor will, through independent recruitment efforts, fill the employment vacancies without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability; making full efforts to obtain qualified and/or qualifiable minorities and women. The failure of a union to provide sufficient referrals (even though it is obligated to provide exclusive referrals under the terms of a collective bargaining agreement) does not relieve the contractor from the requirements of this paragraph. In the event the union referral practice prevents the contractor from meeting the obligations pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and these special provisions, such contractor shall immediately notify the contracting agency.

8. Reasonable Accommodation for Applicants / Employees with Disabilities: The contractor must be familiar

with the requirements for and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act and all rules and regulations established there under. Employers must provide reasonable accommodation in all employment activities unless to do so would cause an undue hardship.

9. Selection of Subcontractors, Procurement of Materials and Leasing of Equipment: The contractor shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall take all necessary and reasonable steps to ensure nondiscrimination in the administration of this contract.

a. The contractor shall notify all potential subcontractors and suppliers and lessors of their EEO obligations under thiscontract.

b. The contractor will use good faith efforts to ensure subcontractor compliance with their EEO obligations.

10. Assurance Required by 49 CFR 26.13(b):

a. The requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 and the State -approved DBE program are incorporated by

reference.

b. The contractor or subcontractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT-assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as the contracting agencydeems appropriate.

11. Records and Reports: The contractor shall keep such records as necessary to document compliance with the EEO requirements. Such records shall be retained for a period of three years following the date of the final payment to the contractor for all contract work and shall be available at reasonable times and places for inspection by authorized representatives of the contracting agency and the FHWA.

a. The records kept by the contractor shall document the following:

(1) The number and work hours of minority and non-minority group members and women employed in each work classification on the project;

(2) The progress and efforts being made in cooperation with unions, when applicable, to increase employment opportunities for minorities and women; and

(3) The progress and efforts being made in locating, hiring, training, qualifying, and upgrading minorities and women;

b. The contractors and subcontractors will submit an annual report to the contracting agency each July for the duration of the project, indicating the number of minority, women, and non-minority group employees currently engaged in each work classification required by the contract work. This information is to be reported on Form FHWA-1391. The staffing data should represent the project work force on board in all or any part of the last payroll period preceding the end of July. If on-the-job training is being required by special provision, the contractor


00860 L09/06/12Page 3 of 11

D26360528

will be required to collect and report training data. The employment data should reflect the work force on board during all or any part of the last payroll period preceding the end of July.

III. NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES

This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related construction subcontracts of $10,000 or more.

The contractor must ensure that facilities provided for employees are provided in such a manner that segregation on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin cannot result. The contractor may neither require such segregated use by written or oral policies nor tolerate such use by employee custom. The contractor's obligation extends further to ensure that its employees are not assigned to perform their services at any location, under the contractor's control, where the facilities are segregated. The term "facilities" includes waiting rooms, work areas, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, restrooms, washrooms, locker rooms, and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing provided for employees. The contractor shall provide separate or single-user restrooms and necessary dressing or sleeping areas to assure privacy between sexes.

IV. DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACT PROVISIONS

This section is applicable to all Federal-aid construction projects exceeding $2,000 and to all related subcontracts and lower-tier subcontracts (regardless of subcontract size). The requirements apply to all projects located within the right-of-way of a roadway that is functionally classified as Federal-aid highway. This excludes roadways functionally classified as local roads or rural minor collectors, which are exempt. Contracting agencies may elect to apply these requirements to other projects.

The following provisions are from the U.S. Department of

FHWA-1273 format and FHWA program requirements.

1. Minimum wages

a. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work, will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics.

Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions

of paragraph 1.d. of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph 1.b. of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH 1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers.

b.(1) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met:

(i) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and

(ii) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and

(iii) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination.

(2) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.

(3) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Wage and Hour Administrator for determination. The Wage and Hour Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or


00860 L09/06/12Page 4 of 11

D263605 29

will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.

(4) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs 1.b.(2) or 1.b.(3) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification.

c. Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.

d. If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program.

2. Withholding

The contracting agency shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract, or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, orhelper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, the contracting agency may, after written notice to the contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased.

3. Payrolls and basic records

a. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-

Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.

b.(1) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the contracting agency. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee ( e.g. , the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH 347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the contracting agency for transmission to the State DOT, the FHWA or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the contracting agency..

(2) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a

subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following:

(i) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under §5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under §5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete;

(ii) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3;

(iii) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract.


00860 L09/06/12Page 5 of 11

D26360530

(3) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH 347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the

this section.

(4) The falsification of any of the above certifications maysubject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code.

c. The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph 3.a. of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the contracting agency, the State DOT, the FHWA, or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the FHWA may, after written notice to the contractor, the contracting agency or the State DOT, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.

4. Apprentices and trainees

a. Apprentices (programs of the USDOL).

Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice.

The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed.

Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly

rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination.

In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved.

b. Trainees (programs of the USDOL).

Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration.

The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration.

Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed.

In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved.

c. Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30.


00860 L09/06/12Page 6 of 11

D263605 31

d. Apprentices and Trainees (programs of the U.S. DOT).

Apprentices and trainees working under apprenticeship and skill training programs which have been certified by the Secretary of Transportation as promoting EEO in connection with Federal-aid highway construction programs are not subject to the requirements of paragraph 4 of this Section IV. The straight time hourly wage rates for apprentices and trainees under such programs will be established by the particular programs. The ratio of apprentices and trainees to journeymen shall not be greater than permitted by the terms of the particular program.

5. Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract.

6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert Form FHWA-1273 in any subcontracts and also require thesubcontractors to include Form FHWA-1273 in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5.

7. Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12.

8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract.

9. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.

10. Certification of eligibility.

a. By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).

b. No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).

c. The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.

V. CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT

The following clauses apply to any Federal-aid construction contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by 29 CFR 5.5(a) or 29 CFR 4.6. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards.

1. Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek.

2. Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1.) of this section, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1.) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1.) of this section.

3. Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages.The FHWA or the contacting agency shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (2.) of this section.

4. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (1.)through (4.) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1.) through (4.) of this section.


00860 L09/06/12Page 7 of 11

D26360532

VI. SUBLETTING OR ASSIGNING THE CONTRACT

This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts on the National Highway System.

1. The contractor shall perform with its own organization contract work amounting to not less than 30 percent (or a greater percentage if specified elsewhere in the contract) of the total original contract price, excluding any specialty items designated by the contracting agency. Specialty items may be performed by subcontract and the amount of any such specialty items performed may be deducted from the totaloriginal contract price before computing the amount of work required to be performed by the contractor's own organization (23 CFR 635.116).

a. Theto workers employed or leased by the prime contractor, and equipment owned or rented by the prime contractor, with or without operators. Such term does not include employees or equipment of a subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor, agents of the prime contractor, or any other assignees. The term may include payments for the costs of hiring leased employees from an employee leasing firm meeting all relevant Federal and State regulatory requirements. Leased employees may only be included in this term if the prime contractor meets all of the following conditions:

(1) the prime contractor maintains control over the supervision of the day-to-day activities of the leased employees;

(2) the prime contractor remains responsible for the quality of the work of the leased employees;

(3) the prime contractor retains all power to accept or exclude individual employees from work on the project; and

(4) the prime contractor remains ultimately responsible for the payment of predetermined minimum wages, the submission of payrolls, statements of compliance and all other Federal regulatory requirements.

b. "Specialty Items" shall be construed to be limited to work that requires highly specialized knowledge, abilities, or equipment not ordinarily available in the type of contracting organizations qualified and expected to bid or propose on the contract as a whole and in general are to be limited to minor components of the overall contract.

2. The contract amount upon which the requirements set forth in paragraph (1) of Section VI is computed includes the cost of material and manufactured products which are to be purchased or produced by the contractor under the contract provisions.

3. The contractor shall furnish (a) a competent superintendent or supervisor who is employed by the firm, has full authority to direct performance of the work in accordance with the contract requirements, and is in charge of all construction operations (regardless of who performs the work) and (b) such other of its own organizational resources (supervision, management, and engineering services) as the contracting officer determines is necessary to assure the performance of the contract.

4. No portion of the contract shall be sublet, assigned or otherwise disposed of except with the written consent of the contracting officer, or authorized representative, and such consent when given shall not be construed to relieve the contractor of any responsibility for the fulfillment of the contract. Written consent will be given only after the contracting agency has assured that each subcontract is

evidenced in writing and that it contains all pertinent provisions and requirements of the prime contract.

5. The 30% self-performance requirement of paragraph (1) is not applicable to design-build contracts; however, contracting agencies may establish their own self-performance requirements.

VII. SAFETY: ACCIDENT PREVENTION

T h i s p r o v i s i o n i s applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts.

1. In the performance of this contract the contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws governing safety, health, and sanitation (23 CFR 635). The contractor shall provide all safeguards, safety devices and protective equipment and take any other needed actions as it determines, or as the contracting officer may determine, to be reasonably necessary to protect the life and health of employees on the job and the safety of the public and to protect property in connection with the performance of the work covered by the contract.

2. It is a condition of this contract, and shall be made a condition of each subcontract, which the contractor enters into pursuant to this contract, that the contractor and any subcontractor shall not permit any employee, in performance of the contract, to work in surroundings or under conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to his/her health or safety, as determined under construction safety and health standards (29 CFR 1926) promulgated by the Secretary of Labor, in accordance with Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3704).

3. Pursuant to 29 CFR 1926.3, it is a condition of this contract that the Secretary of Labor or authorized representative thereof, shall have right of entry to any site of contract performance to inspect or investigate the matter of compliance with the construction safety and health standards and to carry out the duties of the Secretary under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.3704).

VIII. FALSE STATEMENTS CONCERNING HIGHWAY PROJECTS

T h i s p r o v i s i o n i s applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts.

In order to assure high quality and durable construction in conformity with approved plans and specifications and a high degree of reliability on statements and representations made by engineers, contractors, suppliers, and workers on Federal-aid highway projects, it is essential that all persons concerned with the project perform their functions as carefully, thoroughly, and honestly as possible. Willful falsification, distortion, or misrepresentation with respect to any facts related to the project is a violation of Federal law. To prevent any misunderstanding regarding the seriousness of these and similar acts, Form FHWA-1022 shall be posted on each Federal-aid highway project (23 CFR 635) in one or more places where it is readily available to all persons concerned with the project:

18 U.S.C. 1020 reads as follows:


00860 L09/06/12Page 8 of 11

D263605 33

"Whoever, being an officer, agent, or employee of the United States, or of any State or Territory, or whoever, whether a person, association, firm, or corporation, knowingly makes any false statement, false representation, or false report as to the character, quality, quantity, or cost of the material used or to be used, or the quantity or quality of the work performed or to be performed, or the cost thereof in connection with the submission of plans, maps, specifications, contracts, or costs of construction on any highway or related project submitted for approval to the Secretary of Transportation; or

Whoever knowingly makes any false statement, false representation, false report or false claim with respect to the character, quality, quantity, or cost of any work performed or to be performed, or materials furnished or to be furnished, in connection with the construction of any highway or related project approved by the Secretary of Transportation; or

Whoever knowingly makes any false statement or false representation as to material fact in any statement, certificate, or report submitted pursuant to provisions of the Federal-aid Roads Act approved July 1, 1916, (39 Stat. 355), as amended and supplemented;

Shall be fined under this title or imprisoned not more than 5 years or both."

IX. IMPLEMENTATION OF CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT

This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts.

By submission of this bid/proposal or the execution of this contract, or subcontract, as appropriate, the bidder, proposer, Federal-aid construction contractor, or subcontractor, as appropriate, will be deemed to have stipulated as follows:

1. That any person who is or will be utilized in the performance of this contract is not prohibited from receiving an award due to a violation of Section 508 of the Clean Water Act or Section 306 of the Clean Air Act.

2. That the contractor agrees to include or cause to be included the requirements of paragraph (1) of this Section X in every subcontract, and further agrees to take such action as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such requirements.

X. CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION

This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts, design-build contracts, subcontracts, lower-tier subcontracts, purchase orders, lease agreements, consultant contracts or any other covered transaction requiring FHWA approval or that is estimated to cost $25,000 or more as defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200.

1. Instructions for Certification – First Tier Participants:

a. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective first tier participant is providing the certification set out below.

b. The inability of a person to provide the certification set out below will not necessarily result in denial of participation in this

covered transaction. The prospective first tier participant shall submit an explanation of why it cannot provide the certification set out below. The certification or explanation will be considered in connection with the department or agency's determination whether to enter into this transaction. However, failure of the prospective first tier participant to furnish a certification or an explanation shall disqualify such a person from participation in this transaction.

c. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when the contracting agency determined to enter into this transaction. If it is later determined that the prospective participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the contracting agency may terminate this transaction for cause of default.

d. The prospective first tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the contracting agency to whom this proposal is submitted if any time the prospective first tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.

e. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," "participant," "person," "principal," and "voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, are defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200.

grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds and a participant (such

the participant who has entered into a covered transaction with a grantee or subgrantee of Federal

covered transaction with a First Tier Participant or other Lower Tier Participants (such as subcontractors and suppliers).

f. The prospective first tier participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency entering into this transaction.

g. The prospective first tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include the clause titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transactions," provided by the department or contracting agency, entering into this covered transaction, without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions exceeding the $25,000 threshold.

h. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant is responsible for ensuring that its principals are not suspended, debarred, or otherwise ineligible to participate in covered transactions. To verify the eligibility of its principals, as well as the eligibility of any lower tier prospective participants, each participant may, but is not required to, check the Excluded Parties List System website (https://www.epls.gov/), which is compiled by the General Services Administration.


00860 L09/06/12Page 9 of 11

D26360534

i. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require the establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of the prospective participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.

j. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph (f) of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause or default.

* * * * *

2. Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion – First Tier Participants:

a. The prospective first tier participant certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals:

(1) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded fromparticipating in covered transactions by any Federal department or agency;

(2) Have not within a three-year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property;

(3) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal, State or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (a)(2) of this certification; and

(4) Have not within a three-year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more public transactions (Federal, State or local) terminated for cause or default.

b. Where the prospective participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.

2. Instructions for Certification - Lower Tier Participants:

(Applicable to all subcontracts, purchase orders and other lower tier transactions requiring prior FHWA approval or estimated to cost $25,000 or more - 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200)

a. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective lower tier is providing the certification set out below.

b. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department, or agency with which

this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment.

c. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.

d. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," "participant," "person," "principal," and "voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, are defined in 2 CFR Parts 180 and 1200. You may contact the person to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations.refers to any covered transaction between a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds and a participant (such as the

refers to any covered transaction under a First Tier Covered

refers to the participant who has entered into a covered transaction with a grantee or subgrantee of Federal funds

covered transaction with a First Tier Participant or other Lower Tier Participants (such as subcontractors and suppliers).

e. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency with which this transaction originated.

f. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include this clause titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transaction," without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions exceeding the $25,000 threshold.

g. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant is responsible for ensuring that its principals are not suspended, debarred, or otherwise ineligible to participate in covered transactions. To verify the eligibility of its principals, as well as the eligibility of any lower tier prospective participants, each participant may, but is not required to, check the Excluded Parties List System website (https://www.epls.gov/), which is compiled by the General Services Administration.

h. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.

i. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph e of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the


00860 L09/06/12Page 10 of 11

D263605 35

department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment.

* * * * *

Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion--Lower Tier Participants:

1. The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its principals is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participating incovered transactions by any Federal department or agency.

2. Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.

* * * * *

XI. CERTIFICATION REGARDING USE OF CONTRACT FUNDS FOR LOBBYING

This provision is applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts which exceed $100,000 (49 CFR 20).

1. The prospective participant certifies, by signing and submitting this bid or proposal, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that:

a. No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.

b. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying," in accordance with its instructions.

2. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.

3. The prospective participant also agrees by submitting its bid or proposal that the participant shall require that the language of this certification be included in all lower tier subcontracts, which exceed $100,000 and that all such recipients shall certify and disclose accordingly.


00860 L09/06/12Page 11 of 11

D26360536

0864 Page 1 of 1 L 09/01/16

Use of United States-flag vessels:

The contractor agrees-

(1) To utilize privately owned United States-flag commercial vessels to ship at least 50 percent of the gross tonnage (computed separately for dry bulk carriers, dry cargo liners, and tankers) involved, whenever shipping any equipment, material, or commodities pursuant to this contract, to the extent such vessels are available at fair and reasonable rates for United States-flag commercial vessels.

(2) To furnish within 20 days following the date of loading for shipments originating within the United States or within 30 working days following the date of loading for shipments originating outside the United States, a legible copy of a rated, 'on-board' commercial ocean bill-of-lading in English for each shipment of cargo described in paragraph (b) (1) of this section to both the Contracting Officer (through the prime contractor in the case of subcontractor bills-of-lading) and to the Division of National Cargo, Office of Market Development, Maritime Administration, Washington, DC 20590.

(3) To insert the substance of the provisions of this clause in all subcontracts issued pursuant to this contract.

D263605 37

SPECIAL NOTE ADDITIONAL INSURED PARTIES

IN COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION “107-06 INSURANCE” OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND ANY APPROPRIATE REVISIONS, THE FOLLOWING PARTIES OWN OR OPERATE FACILITIES WITHIN THE HIGHWAY RIGHT-OF-WAY FOR THIS PROJECT:

STATE OF NEW YORK/NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

CLINTON COUNTY

TOWN OF CHAMPLAIN

VILLAGE OF CHAMPLAIN

NEW YORK STATE ELECTRIC AND GAS (NYSEG)

VERIZON, NY, INC.

CHARTER COMMUNICATIONS/SPECTRUM

The above listing supplements Section 107-06 INSURANCE of the Standard Specifications.

Coverage must also be provided for any consultant inspecting engineer or inspector (and their agents) working for or on the project.

As the location(s) of work becomes known, the Engineer-In-Charge will call for the addition of Additional Insured Parties to the contractor's insurance requirements as specified in Section 107-06 A.4. of the Standard Specifications.

D26360538

SPECIAL NOTE

INSURANCE COVERAGE By virtue of the scope, location, type, and/or estimated value, the following types of insurance, listed in the Standard Specifications §107-06B do not apply to this project and the Contractor is under no obligation to furnish proof of such insurance.

BUILDERS’ RISKS INSURANCE:

Builders’ Risks Insurance is not required for this contract.

Railroad Protective Liability Insurance is not required because the project scope does not require work affecting any Railroads as described in §105-09.

Marine Protection & Indemnity Insurance is not required because the project scope does not require any Work performed on a navigable waterway using barges or other watercraft.

Pollution Liability Insurance is not required because the Contractor will not employ mobile equipment or tanks or facilities for fueling vehicles or equipment on-site. The Contractor will only use licensed and registered vehicles that are covered by a Commercial Automobile Policy, or provide the Pollution Liability Insurance.

D263605 39

1100 1 of 1 Per Contracts L01/10/13 DQAB 6/5/09 Contracts 9/28/11, 8/30/12

New York State Uniform Contracting Questionnaire (CCA-2)

In accordance with §103-01 of the Standard Specifications, the NYS Department of Transportation requires that a review of a firm's responsibility be performed prior to the award of a contract or approval of a subcontract. A New York State Uniform Contracting Questionnaire (CCA-2) is the primary tool used to perform this review. A completed CCA-2 must be on file with NYSDOT to be considered for the award of a contract or for the approval of a subcontract. An approved CCA-2 covers NYSDOT work for 12 months from date of receipt. Any low bidder who does not have a completed CCA-2 on file within ten days of receipt of a contract for execution may be subject to the forfeiture of the amount of the bid deposit pursuant to §103-02 of the Standard Specifications. There are three CCA-2 options available on the NYSDOT website https://www.dot.ny.gov/bids-and-lettings/construction-contractors/general-info: online filing (VendRep), a Rich Text fillable form, and an Adobe Acrobat fillable form. No previous versions of the form will be accepted. If a firm chooses to file online at http://osc.state.ny.us/vendrep/popups/vendor_construction.htm (site of the Office of the New York State Comptroller’s VendRep repository), please note that the online VendRep System is only a repository of information with the Office of the State Comptroller (OSC). Although there is a certification completed in VendRep, it is only an electronic signature. This certification does NOT mean the CCA-2 has been reviewed and approved by any Agency. The firm must notify [email protected] by sending an e-mail stating that the online filing has been completed. This notification will initiate the review process. The firm cannot begin work for NYSDOT until a responsibility determination has been made by the Contract Management Bureau. If choosing one of the other options, a firm must print out and MAIL its original, notarized CCA-2 to NYSDOT’s Contract Management Bureau. Whichever format is used, all Attachments must be completed. A firm may use its own spreadsheets, but must provide all of the information requested. Either of the following may be substituted for an Attachment C: the firm’s corporate balance sheet (including any Accountant’s Notes or Reports referenced), or a copy of the Schedule L filed with its IRS Form 1120. Once all of the completed paperwork has been received, the approval process will begin. All responsibility checks must be completed by NYSDOT before a firm is approved to begin work. Questions regarding the CCA-2 may be directed to the Contract Management Bureau, Vendor Responsibility Unit at (518) 457-1564.

D26360540

3400 Per DQAB L09/04/14

Page 1 of 1

SPECIAL NOTES Location Maps Landscape Development Notes R.O.W. Thruway Canal Funding Asphalt and Fuel Price Adjustments Specialty Items Other Special Notes Other Project Special Notes NOTE: This form was developed for repetitive use throughout all contract proposals and may identify items not applicable to this specific project.

D263605 41

SPECIAL NOTES

GREEN CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

3411 Page 1 of 3 EI 09-009 L09/03/09

ULTRA LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL

In order to reduce diesel emissions, the Contractor shall use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel to operate all diesel engines used to complete the work that will operate for 10 hours or more on the contract site. ULSD fuel requirements shall apply to:

All diesel engines/equipment.

Stationary and mobile equipment.

Owned, leased and rented equipment. The hours the piece of equipment is used to complete the work is defined as the actual time the engine is running. The time may be continuous or discontinuous and includes warm-up periods idling, in traffic periods, etc. The term “Contractor” is intended to mean both Prime Contractors and Subcontractors. Materials delivery vehicles not owned by the Contactor/Subcontractor are exempt from this requirement, but should minimize idling time at construction sites when ever possible. The Contractor will be notified when any diesel powered construction equipment is in non-compliance. Non-compliance shall be corrected within a 24-hour period.

D26360542

SPECIAL NOTES


3411 Page 2 of 3 EI 09-009 L09/03/09

CONTROLLING EXPOSURE TO DIESEL EXHAUST

The Contractor shall exercise measures to protect “Sensitive Receptors” from the impacts of diesel exhaust fumes. Sensitive Receptors include, but are not limited to: hospitals, schools, daycare facilities, building fresh air or ventilation intakes, elderly housing or convalescent facilities. The Contractor shall ensure that diesel powered engines are located away from building air conditioners and windows. The goal is to minimize exposure of Sensitive Receptors in close proximity to diesel exhaust, in terms of both concentration and time. In general, close proximity is defined as within 15 meters of a Sensitive Receptor. Mitigation techniques include positioning stationary equipment exhausts greater than 15 meters from Sensitive Receptors, extension of equipment exhausts through the use of flexible tubing; protecting building air intakes; and the use of moving operations. Idling time for diesel powered equipment shall be limited to three consecutive minutes for delivery and dump trucks and all other diesel powered equipment except as follows:

When a “mobile source” (vehicle) is forced to remain motionless because of traffic conditions or

mechanical difficulties over which the operator has no control. When it is necessary to operate a loading, unloading or processing device. When the outdoor temperature is less than - 3°C (27°F). When the “mobile source” is being repaired.

Arrow panels and portable variable message signs shall be solar powered wherever possible or practical.

Whenever possible and practicable, the Contractor shall establish staging areas for diesel powered vehicles waiting to load or unload materials at the work site. Such areas shall be located where diesel emissions have the least impact on Sensitive Receptors and the general public.

D263605 43

SPECIAL NOTES


3411 Page 3 of 3 EI 09-009 L09/03/09

DUST CONTROL

The Contractor shall minimize dust from disturbed soil surfaces or other materials that can cause off-site damage, health hazards and traffic safety problems. Dusty conditions resulting from the Contractor's operations shall be corrected at no additional cost to the State. Buffer areas of vegetation should be left where practical. Water quality shall be considered when selecting materials for dust control. An approved dust palliative may be used in conformance with applicable conditions placed on its use. A list of acceptable dust palliatives is available at: www.nysdot.gov/divisions/engineering/technical-services/geotechnical-engineering-bureau/dust-palliatives . For areas not subject to traffic, products and materials may be applied or placed on soil surfaces to prevent airborne migration of soil particles, including:

Vegetative Cover –provides the most practical method of dust control. Mulch (including rolled erosion control products) –provides a fast, effective method of dust control. Spray Adhesives –Generally composed of polymers in a liquid or solid form mixed with water to form an

emulsion that is sprayed on the soil surface. The mixing ratios and application rates will be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for the specific soils on the site. Adhesives shall not be applied to wet soils or if there is a probability of precipitation within 48 hours.

For areas subject to traffic (traveling public or construction traffic) products and materials may be applied or placed on soil surfaces to prevent airborne migration of soil particles, including:

Water Sprinkling – The site may be sprayed with water until the surface is wet. This is especially effective on haul roads and access routes.

Polymer Additives –Polymers shall be mixed with water and applied to the driving surface using mixing

ratios and application rates in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. No application of the polymer will be made if there is a probability of precipitation within 48 hours of its proposed use. Any polymers must be used in accordance with the NYSDEC issued “Conditions for Use” and “Application Instructions.” This information can be obtained from the NYSDEC website.

Barriers – Woven geotextiles or stone can be placed on the driving surface to effectively reduce dust throw

and particle migration on haul roads. Windbreak – A silt fence or similar barrier can control air currents at horizontal intervals equal to ten times

the barrier height. Preserve existing vegetation that acts as a wind barrier as much as practical. Wheel Washing – Mechanical or manual wet-method cleaning of on-road construction vehicle tires prior to

leaving site.

D26360544

US CUSTOMARY FUEL PRICE ADJUSTMENT

EB 15-010 Page 1 of 2 L 09/01/2015 3520

FUEL PRICE ADJUSTMENT1 CONVERSION FACTORS

MATERIAL DESCRIPTION CONVERSION FACTOR ITEM NUMBER2

Unclassified Excavation 0.35 gal/yd3 203.02

Embankment 0.10 gal/yd3 203.03, 620.xx

Fill 0.45 gal/yd3 203.05, 203.06, 203.07, 203.08xx, 203.20, 203.21, 203.25

Controlled Low Strength Material 1.00 gal/yd3 204.01, 204.02, 204.03, 204.04

Trench/Culvert/Structure Excavation 0.50 gal/yd3 206.01, 206.0201

Bituminous Stabilized Course 1.40 gal/yd3 302.01, 307.01

Sub‐base Course 1.00 gal/yd3 304 Items

Hot Mix Asphalt 2.50 gal/ton 402 Items3, 405.01, 608.0201023, 619.06014, 624.02xxxx3,4, 633.143,4, 633.153,4, 633.163,4

Milling 0.10 gal/yd2 490 Items

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 1.00 gal/yd3 502 Items3, 503.1010, 503.1011, 503.1012

Fill Type Retaining Walls 0.45 gal/yd3 554.30xx5, 554.315, 554.4x5

Footing Concrete & Concrete for Structures ‐ All classes

1.00 gal/yd3 555 Items, 582.05

Approach Slabs 0.33 gal/yd2 557.2001, 557.2002, 557.2003, 557.2009, 557.22

Structural Slabs with bottom formwork

0.25 gal/yd2 557.01xx, 557.07, 557.30

Structural Slabs ‐ no bottom formwork

0.15 gal/yd2 557.05xx, 557.09

Class D Concrete 0.05 gal/yd2 557.13, 584 Items

Concrete Barrier, Type A 0.16 gal/ft 606.3001, 606.3021, 606.3031

Concrete Barrier, Type B 0.19 gal/ft 569.01, 606.3002, 606.3022, 606.3032

Concrete Barrier, Type C 0.22 gal/ft 606.3003, 606.3023, 606.3033

Concrete Barrier, Half Section 0.11 gal/ft 569.02, 606.3004, 606.3024, 606.3034

Concrete Median Barrier, Single Slope

0.23 gal/ft 569.05, 606.3041, 606.3043, 606.3044

Concrete Median Barrier Wide, Single Slope

0.28 gal/ft 606.3051, 606.3053, 606.3054

D263605 45

US CUSTOMARY FUEL PRICE ADJUSTMENT

EB 15-010 Page 2 of 2 L 09/01/2015 3520

FUEL PRICE ADJUSTMENT1 CONVERSION FACTORS


Concrete Barrier Half Single Slope

0.17 gal/ft 569.04, 606.3061, 606.3063, 606.3064

Vertical Faced Concrete Parapet 0.10 gal/ft 569.03

Gravel, Stone, Slag 1.00 gal/yd3 411.01, 411.02, 411.03, 623.1x

Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways 1.00 gal/yd3 608.01xx

Topsoil 0.45 gal/yd3 610.10, 610.11xx, 610.14xx

Notes: 1. In accordance with Standard Specification §698‐3.02, the index value for the fuel price adjustment is

the posted price for the month of bid letting. 2. Item Number ‐ This is the contract pay item number under which these materials are most

frequently paid. Unless indicated otherwise, materials similar to those indicated under the column entitled “Material Description” are also eligible for adjustment using the factor listed for a similar material with the same pay units regardless of the actual contract pay item number.

3. Quality Adjustment Items (402/502/608/624) are not eligible for fuel price adjustment. 4. Fuel Price Adjustment Conversion Factor based on units of TONS of asphalt placed, not the pay units

of this item. 5. Fuel Price Adjustment Conversion Factor based on units of CY of backfill paid under this item, not

the pay units of this item.

D26360546

US CUSTOMARY ASPHALT PRICE ADJUSTMENT

EB 15-010 Page 1 of 2 L 09/01/2015 3530 Rev. 9/17/15

ASPHALT PRICE ADJUSTMENT1 CONVERSION FACTORS


Bituminous Stabilized Course 0.065 t PGB/yd3 302.01

Asphalt Treated Permeable Base, Type 1

0.030 t PGB/t 402.010902

Asphalt Treated Permeable Base, Type 2

0.035 t PGB/t 402.011902

Shim Course 0.0825 t PGB/t 402.058902

6.3 SUPERPAVE HMA 0.067 t PGB/t 402.068xxxx8 RR

9.5 SUPERPAVE HMA 0.062 t PGB/t 402.09xxxx


19 SUPERPAVE HMA 0.049 t PGB/t 402.19xxxx

25 SUPERPAVE HMA 0.045 t PGB/t 402.25xxxx


Paved Placed Surface Treatment, Types A, B, and C

0.064 t PGB/t 415.01xxyy03

Micro‐Surfacing, Quick‐Set Slurry

0.078 t PGB/t 410.102102 RR, 410.103102 RR, 410.104102 RR, 410.202302 RR, 410.203302 RR

Straight Tack Coat 0.0026 t PGB/gal 407.0103

Asphaltic Sealants (ASTM 6690) 0.0027 t PGB/gal 402.75xx RR, 402.76xx RR, 402.76020018

Chip Seal 0.0027 t PGB/gal 410.0105006, 410.07

Asphalt Emulsion for Cold Recycling 0.0027 t PGB/gal 416.02xx

Fog Seal and Dilute Tack Coat 0.0016 t PGB/gal 407.0102, 416.04, 410.0106006

PG Binder for Cold Recycling 0.0043 t PGB/gal 416.03

Asphaltic Sealant – Clean & Seal 0.225 t PGB/LNMI 402.76030008, 412.76030001

Asphaltic Sealant – Treating Cracks 0.240 t PGB/LNMI 412.76040001

Asphaltic Sealant – Rout & Seal 0.270 t PGB/LNMI 402.76010008

Repair of HMA Pavement, Temporary Asphalt

See Note 4 633.14, 633.15, 633.16, 619.06xx

True and Leveling, Asphalt Sidewalks, Driveways, Bike Paths, Gutters

See Note 5 402.017902, 402.01890xxx, 608.020102, 624.02xx

D263605 47

US CUSTOMARY ASPHALT PRICE ADJUSTMENT

EB 15-010 Page 2 of 2 L 09/01/2015 3530 Rev. 9/17/15

ASPHALT PRICE ADJUSTMENT1 CONVERSION FACTORS

Notes: 1. In accordance with Standard Specification §698‐3.01, the index value for the asphalt price

adjustment is the average posted price of Performance Graded Binder (PGB) for the month of bid letting.

2. Item Number ‐ This is the contract pay item number under which these materials are most frequently paid. Unless indicated otherwise, materials similar to those indicated under the column entitled “Material Description” are also eligible for adjustment using the factor listed for a similar material with the same pay units regardless of the actual contract pay item number.

3. Quality Adjustment Items (402/608/624) are not eligible for asphalt price adjustment. 4. Asphalt Price Adjustment Conversion Factor based on units of TONS of asphalt placed, not the pay

units of this item. The conversion factor for HMA Pavement Repair and Temporary Asphalt will be based on the actual asphalt mixture used.

5. The conversion factor for Truing and Leveling, Driveways, and other items that allow asphalt mix options, will be based on the actual mixtures used.

6. A two digit suffix (RR) at the end of a contract pay item indicates a special specification. 7. The conversion factors for HMA mixed with slag shall be increased by 25%. 8. t = tons

D26360548

of 2

SPECIAL NOTE

Relationships Between General Building Contractor and Specialty Contractors

The building(s) are to be constructed under more than one contract. In addition to the Building construction contract (D263604), there will be four other prime contracts for the following types of work:

- Site Work (D263603) - Mechanical (D263605) - Plumbing (D263606) - Electrical (D263607)

Therefore, each Contractor will not have exclusive occupancy of the area within or adjacent to the building site. The Building Construction Contractor and the other Prime Contractors will be required to coordinate their work schedules to ensure the orderly and timely progression of the work. Their respective operations shall be arranged and conducted so that delays will be avoided and the work will be performed in an efficient and workmanlike manner. A. The general construction Contractor and the specialty Contractors shall prepare a work plan

as hereinafter described, for the express purpose of providing a means for the Engineer to coordinate and monitor the activities of all the Contractors.

1. As soon as possible after the opening of bids, the Department shall schedule a pre-

award conference with all of the Contractors for the purpose of discussing their work schedules and establishing a work plan that is acceptable to all Contractors. The work plan shall be a coordinated progress schedule, in graphic format to a suitable scale. It shall include the time of performance and completion date for each significant activity. After the Building Construction Contractor and the other Prime Contractors have developed a Work Plan that is agreeable to all Contractors, the Site Work Construction Contractor (D263603) will furnish the Department with six copies signed by all the Contractors. If such a work plan is not submitted within 25 days of the bid opening, the Department reserves the right to establish a reasonable Work Plan which will be binding on all the Contractors, to reject all bids, or to take any other action which the Department deems to be in the best interest of the State.

2. Each Contractor shall progress its own activities so as to permit the other Contractors to

complete their work in accordance with the work plan. Each Contractor shall notify the Engineer when each significant activity is completed and of any delay to its operations by any other Contractor. The Engineer shall inspect such work, and if it is satisfactory, the Engineer shall document this fact, and advise the Contractor. If a Contractor's work is not completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform any additional work required to allow the next contract activity to start. Should the Work Plan become obsolete, the Engineer shall notify the Site Work Contractor to meet with the other Prime Contractors in order that they provide an acceptable, updated coordinated progress schedule.

D263605 49

of 2

SPECIAL NOTE

Relationships Between General Building Contractor and Specialty Contractors

B. The State cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any Contractor. The State shall not be held responsible or be in any way liable for damages or delays caused to any Contractor in the performance of his/her work, by reason of another Contractor's acts or omissions, or by reason of another Contractor's default in performance. Any affected Contractor shall look to the offending Contractor or Contractors in order to recover any resulting damages caused thereby, and the State shall be held harmless from any liability arising by reason of such delays, acts, omissions, or default.

C. Liquidated damages shall be assessed for each calendar day that any work shall remain

uncompleted after the completion date provided for in all contracts, provided that due account shall be taken of any extension of time granted by the Commissioner of Transportation. The liquidated damages for each Contractor will be established at the daily rate listed in Table 108-1 of Section 108-03 (B) of the Standard Specifications. In addition to liquidated damages, engineering charges shall be assessed as provided for in Section 108-03 (A) of the Standard Specifications. The number of days of liquidated damages and engineering charges levied against each Contractor will be dependent upon how much the late completion of that Contractor's activities contributes to the total delay in completing the contract.

D. No separate payment will be made for any of the work required in this Special Note. The cost

of such work, including but not limited to the costs of attending coordination meetings and preparing coordinated progress schedules, shall be included in the price bid for the various items of the respective contracts.

D26360550

772097_DA_pse_not Page 1 of 1

SPECIAL NOTE

COORDINATION WITH THE UTILITY SCHEDULE - NO ANTICIPATED INVOLVEMENT

COMMERCIAL VEHICLE INSPECTION FACILITY

Utility facility adjustments and/or relocations are not anticipated for this project. If the Department determines that utility facility adjustments and/or relocations will be necessary, the provisions of Section 102-09 Other Contracts, Coordination and Access will apply. Any such adjustments and/or relocations will be performed by the Utility owners and/or the state contractor upon direction by the State Engineer-In-Charge. Suitable time frames for these additions shall be coordinated between the State, the Contractor, and the affected Utility. The contractor is governed by and must adhere to the provisions of 16 NYCRR Part 753 (Protection of Underground Facilities). In the rare occurrence that there is a utility conflict, please contact the Region 7 Utility Engineer at 315-785-2340 for Utility Contact information.

D263605 51

SPECIAL NOTE

CPM SCHEDULING COORDINATION

The Site/General Contractor, P.I.N. 7720.97, D263603 shall be responsible for coordinating and

maintaining the overall project schedule with all other trades. Other trades include building,

plumbing, mechanical and electrical. All trades shall be responsible to provide a timely schedule

update to the Site/ General Contractor. Timely shall be defined as one business day or less. The

cost of maintaining and coordinating the schedule to be paid under item 639.21010011- CPM

(Critical Path Method) Progress Schedule – Type 2.

D26360552

1of 1

Special Note U.S. Army Corps of Engineers

Nationwide Permit

This note is intended to highlight the permit location for the contractor to review the conditions of work as part of the Nationwide Permit Program.

This note is to inform you that, the project work is a permitted activity under the jurisdiction of the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE). The regulatory authority of the USACE is based on the following statutes:

Section 401 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1341) prohibits the discharge of dredged or fill materials into waters of the United States without a certification from the State that such activity will not result in a contravention of water quality standards.

Section 404 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1344) prohibits the discharge of dredged or fill materials into waters of the United States without a permit from the Corps of Engineers.

The appropriate USACE Regional office is located in Auburn, N.Y. for work activities in Jefferson, Lewis and St. Lawrence Counties. The appropriate USACE Regional office is located in Watervliet, N.Y for work activities in Clinton and Franklin Counties.

Please note that the proposed activities fall within the definition of a minor activity under the USACE regulatory program. The proposed work is authorized under the terms and conditions set forth under Nationwide Permit # 23, as noted in the Federal Register/Vol. 82, No. 4/Friday, January 6, 2017. An authorization, from the USACE, to proceed with the planned work is not necessary. USACE Nationwide Permit information can be found at the following link:

http://www.lrb.usace.army.mil/Missions/Regulatory/Nationlwide-Permits/District-Permit-Program/NWP-NY/.

The complete permit language and conditions are available as noted within CONR 9k, supplemental information available to the bidders. USACE District Nationwide Permit conditions are also part of the permit package along with New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (DEC) Article 15 - Water Quality Conditions. Adherence to the Nationwide Permit Conditions has been designed into the project and must be followed to maintain permit compliance.

The permit also includes standards for a N.Y.S. D.E.C. Individual Water Quality certification pursuant to NYSDOT/NYSDEC regarding Environmental Conservation Law Articles 15 and 24 Federal and State permits are in place and are in effect.

D263605 53

GENERAL NOTES 010000 - 1

SPECIAL NOTE

SPECIALTY WORK PAY ITEMS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The proposed project includes specialty work for the construction of a new Operations Building and a new

Inspection Building, with each area of specialty work as described below. Payment for all labor,

equipment, and materials necessary for the Specialty Work shown in the plans and contract documents

will be made under the following items:

Inspection Building Foundation Construction, Shell Erection, General Building Construction

and Interior Fit-Out shall be paid under Item 690.01000105 – Specialty Work (General)

Operations Building Foundation Construction, Shell Erection, General Building Construction

and Interior Fit-Out shall be paid under Item 690.01000205 – Specialty Work (General)

Inspection Building Plumbing and Gas work, including any work related to Fire Suppression shall

be paid under Item No. 690.02000105 – Specialty Work (Plumbing and Gas).

Operations Building Plumbing and Gas work shall be paid under Item No. 690.02000205 –

Specialty Work (Plumbing and Gas). The Operations Building does not contain any Fire

Suppression work.

Inspection Building HVAC work shall be paid under Item No. 690.03000105 – Specialty Work

(HVAC).

Operations Building HVAC work shall be paid under Item No. 690.03000205 – Specialty Work

(HVAC).

Inspection Building Electrical work shall be paid under Item No. 690.04000105 – Specialty Work

(Electrical).

Operations Building Electrical work shall be paid under Item No. 690.04000205 – Specialty Work

(Electrical).

NYSDOT Item numbers shown in the Electrical Plans shall be paid as part of the Site contract under the

respective Item Numbers shown. The intent of placing NYSDOT Item numbers on the Electrical Plan is

to provide clarity on the Electronic Screening System.

The technical and material specifications for Specialty Work is included below. Within the technical and

material specifications, the term “Contractor” refers to the entity holding the Contract.

The Manufacturer's or Supplier’s attention is directed to the fact that some of the technical and material

specifications associated with the specialty work items may contain proprietary references. The intent of

these proprietary references is not to limit the Manufacturer's or Supplier’s selection of products and/or

suppliers, but rather to provide one or more "benchmark" products to serve as a basis for the

Manufacturer's or Supplier’s bid. For these products, the Manufacturer's or Supplier’s may propose the

use of an "equal" product through the standard Shop Drawing / Product Data / Sample submittal process.

D26360554


The following is an index of the technical specifications:

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

010000 – GENERAL NOTES

011000 – SUMMARY

013000 – SUBMITTALS

013100 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

013200 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

013300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

014100 – SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL

TESTING STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

014200 – REFERENCES

014210 – REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

015000 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

017400 – WARRANTIES

017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017823 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

017839 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

END OF SECTION

D263605 55


SECTION 010000 - GENERAL NOTES

PART 1 – COMMON COMPONENTS AND CONCERNS

1.1 GENERAL

A. All work included under this Contract is to be governed by and in conformance with the

New York State Department of Transportation’s (NYSDOT) current “Standard

Specifications” except as modified in these Plans and by the Proposal.

B. Contractor to provide the required insurances and bonds as per NYSDOT’s Standard

Specifications “Section 107-06 Insurance”.

C. The project descriptions are general outlines of the work and shall not be construed as

complete descriptions of the work to be performed under this Contract. In addition, the

project descriptions do not necessarily indicate the construction sequence.

D. The Contractor is advised that additional “Notes” will be found on the drawings. Such

“Notes”, while pertaining to the specific sheets they are placed on, also supplement the

General Notes listed herein.

E. The Contractor shall protect his workers at all times in conformance with applicable

OSHA regulations.

F. Whenever items in the Contract require materials to be removed and disposed, the cost of

using an approved disposal area and transportation to the area shall be included in the unit

price bid for those items.

G. The Contractor is to visit the site before bidding to become familiar with the field

conditions and to judge the extent and nature of the work to be done under the Contract.

No extra compensation will be allowed to the Contractor because of the Contractor’s

failure to include in his/her bid all items and materials the Contractor is required to furnish

in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor must have in his/her

possession a set of project plans and specifications for identification purposes when

visiting the site.

H. All dimensions and existing conditions shall be field verified by the Contractor.

I. The Engineer will determine the location of the Contractor staging area based on available

space and ongoing operations.

J. The Contractor shall be responsible for restoring the site to its original condition unless

indicated otherwise.

K. When used in the Special Specifications / Special Notes for building related work, the

word “State” or the acronym “NYSDOT” means the New York State Department of

Transportation.

D26360556


1.2 CODE COMPLIANCE AND STANDARDS

A. All work to be done under this Contract shall conform to the New York State Uniform

Fire Prevention and Building Code (19 NYCRR) and its reference standards.

B. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws which pertain to the work to be

done. The Contractor shall also comply with the owner’s instructions and regulations

pertaining to signs, advertising, fire and/or smoke.

C. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits, fees and licenses legally

required and shall give all notices, and comply with all laws, rules and regulations

applicable to the work.

D. Where provisions of the pertinent codes, standards, regulations or Contract Documents

conflict, the most stringent provision shall govern.

E. Prior to beginning construction work on or in buildings, the Contractor or any of the

subcontractors involved shall obtain a Construction Permit from NYSDOT.

1.3 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY

A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible to comply with all regulations regarding

worker safety, including confined space entry. Contractor shall submit confined space

plan to the Engineer for review and approval.

B. Confined space and permit-required confined space are defined in Title 29, Part 1910,

Section 146 of the Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR 1910.146).

1. Indicated confined spaces are not intended to limit or define Contractor's or

subcontractors' regulatory compliance requirements. In addition to confined spaces

indicated on the drawings, other confined spaces may be present or created by the

work of this contract.

2. Furnish, at no additional cost to the State, personnel, as directed, to allow the Engineer

to enter confined space and permit-required confined space in compliance with Title

29, Part 1910, Section 146 of the Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR 1910.146).

1.4 MATERIALS AND LABOR

A. All materials, equipment and articles used permanently in the work which become the

property of the State shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Whenever any product is specified by the name, trade name, make or catalog number or

any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition but to establish a

standard of quality which the Director of Construction Management has determined is

necessary. The words “or equal” shall be deemed inserted in each instance. The

Contractor may use any product equal to that named in the Contract Documents which is

approved by the Engineer and which meets the requirements of the Contract Documents,

D263605 57


providing the Contractor gives timely notice of his/her intent in accordance with the

submittal and scheduling requirements of the current version of the NYSDOT’s Standard

Specifications, Section 100.

C. The Contractor shall have the burden of proving at his own cost and expense to the

satisfaction of the Engineer that the proposed product is equal to the named product. The

Engineer may establish criteria for product approval. The Engineer shall determine in

his/her absolute discretion whether a proposed product is to be approved.

D. If the Contractor fails to comply with these provisions, or if the Engineer determines that

the proposed product is not equal to that named, the Contractor shall supply the product

named.

E. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for the extension of time or for damages

because the Engineer requires a reasonable period of time to consider a product proposed

by the Contractor or because the Engineer disapproves such a product.

F. Where optional materials or methods are specified, or where “or equal” submissions are

approved, the Contractor shall make all adjustments to contingent work necessary to

accommodate the option he/she selects.

G. Royalties and Patents: The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall

defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the State

harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the State shall be responsible for all

such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or

manufacturers is specified.

1.5 TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY AND UTILITIES

A. The location, nature, and alignment of underground utilities are based on utility evidence

visible at the ground surface and are considered to be schematic only.

B. Survey information does not claim to show all underground utilities, others may exist in

the work area. Identification of all utilities within the work area shall be the sole

responsibility of the Contractor.

C. The Contractor and subcontractors are directed to contact “DIG SAFELY NEW YORK”

by calling 811 prior to starting work.

D. The Contractor shall protect overhead and underground utilities to prevent damage or

interruption of services. The Engineer and utility owner shall be notified if utility is

disturbed. The cost of the cutting and restoring service or repair of any damage shall be

borne by the Contractor.

1.6 USE OF PREMISES

D26360558


A. For the duration of the construction period, Contractor activities including the use of the

site shall be coordinated to minimize interference with ongoing State operations, the

traveling public, or other Contractors.

B. All Contractor activities are subject to approval of the Engineer.

C. Limit use of premises to work areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas

in which the work is indicated.

D. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the State, other

Contractors and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or

storage of materials.

1. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations.

2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials

and equipment on-site.

E. Work hours shall be established by the State through the Engineer. The Contractor shall

notify the Engineer of the intent to start work 48 hours in advance.

F. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of work area access requirements. The

Engineer will coordinate and schedule access with NYSDOT staff to obtain and ensure

timely availability of work areas.

G. Utility shutdowns shall be approved by the Engineer. Schedule interruptions with the

Engineer for time and duration. Interruptions shall be limited to minimize impact on

operations.

H. Be responsible and accountable for employees, suppliers, subcontractors and their

employees, with regard to their use of the premises. Direct them to comply with NYSDOT

regulations and with the security and traffic regulations.

I. Comply with applicable Federal and State of New York Right-To-Know Law provisions

and supply copies of the appropriate material safety data sheets (MSDS) to the Engineer,

and to the State’s Right-To-Know information officer.

J. Direct employees to be watchful for people in or near the work area where safety hazards

may be present.

K. Report fire and other emergency situations to the Engineer immediately.

1.7 STAGING AREA

A. The Contractor shall limit the staging of materials to the work limits as directed by the

Engineer.

1.8 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL

D263605 59


A. Work Zone Traffic Control (WZTC) shall be complied with throughout the length and

duration of the Contract in accordance with the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control

Devices” and the Contract Documents.

B. Protection of the Public: The Contractor shall maintain and protect State traffic in

accordance with the current version of the NYSDOT’s Standard Specifications Section

619, the traffic control sheets and pertinent provisions of the Manual on Uniform Traffic

Control Devices. The Contractor’s attention is directed to the requirements of Section

107, legal relations and responsibility to the public, of the current NYSDOT’s Standard

Specifications.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Schedule construction operations in the sequence best suited to accomplish the work especially

where one part depends on the installation of the other.

1.10 REMOVAL AND EXCAVATION NOTES

A. The Contractor shall provide all temporary supports, bracing and other devices required

or directed by the Engineer to protect the safety of the adjacent structures, roadway and

utilities.

B. The Contractor shall saw cut (straight line cuts) and remove existing asphalt concrete

pavement and concrete where required for the installation of new work. Pavement and

concrete shall be replaced in kind unless otherwise noted. Re-cut edges damaged by

construction operations.

1.11 REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE

A. All steel reinforcing bars used in concrete components shall be as shown on the Contract

Drawings.

1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

A. Shop drawings include, but are not necessarily limited to, drawings, diagrams,

illustrations, schedules, test date, performance charts, cuts, brochures, manufacturer’s

product data, installation instructions, certifications, material safety data sheet (MSDS),

sample product warranties, special warranties, maintenance data, color samples, and

material samples, etc. These data will be prepared by the Contractor, subcontractor,

manufacturer, supplier or distributor and submitted by the Contractor for approval by the

Engineer.

B. Samples are small physical pieces of actual materials submitted by the Contractor for

review and approval by the Engineer.

D26360560


C. The Contractor and the Engineer shall adhere to the submittal and scheduling

requirements for shop drawings and samples as set out in NYSDOT’s current Standard

Specifications, “Section 105-16 Shop Drawing Approval”.

D. The Contractor shall review shop drawing and sample submittals, to the extent of their

ability, for Contract compliance before stamping as such and forwarding to the Engineer.

E. By approving and submitting shop drawings and samples, the Contractor represents that

he/she has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria,

materials, catalog numbers and similar data and that he/she has checked and coordinated

each shop drawing and sample with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. The Engineer’s approval of shop drawings and samples shall not relieve the Contractor

of responsibility for any deviation from the requirement of the Contract Documents unless

the Contractor has informed the Engineer of the deviation in a separate writing at the time

of submission and received written approval of the specific deviations. The Engineer’s

approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the

shop drawings or samples.

G. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing or sample submission shall be

commenced until the appropriate submission has been approved by the Engineer.

H. Any portion of the work requiring shop drawings and samples shall be installed in

accordance with the approved shop drawings and samples.

I. Substitutions: Defined as changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of

construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by the

Contractor. Substitutions will not be considered during the bidding phase, but only after

the project is awarded. Note, any product identified in the specifications with verbiage

“NO SUBSTITUTION ALLOWED” means that this specific product is the standard of

quality set by the State and as such “OR EQUAL” does not apply. Note, “I.

SUBSTITUTIONS” is in addition to NYSDOT’s current Standard Specifications,

“Section 106 – Control of Material, 106-09 Equivalents”.

1.13 INSPECTION FOR CONFORMANCE

A. The Engineer will inspect and test the work at reasonable times at the site, unless the

Engineer determines to make an inspection or test at the place of production, manufacturer

or shipment. Such inspection or test shall be conclusive as to whether the material and

workmanship inspected or tested conforms to the requirements of the Contract. Such

inspection or test shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss

of the material prior to acceptance, or in any way affect the continuing rights of the

Engineer to reject the completed work.

B. The Contractor shall furnish promptly without additional charge all facilities, labor and

material reasonably needed to perform in a safe and convenient manner such inspection

and test as the Engineer requires.

D263605 61


C. The Contractor shall, without charge, promptly correct any work the Engineer finds does

not conform to the Contract Documents unless in NYSDOT’s interest the Engineer

consents to accept such work with an appropriate adjustment in the Contract price.

D. If the Contractor does not promptly correct rejected work including the work of other

Contractors destroyed or damaged by removal, replacement, or correction, the Director

of Construction Management may (1) correct such work and charge the cost thereof to

the Contractor; or (2) terminate the Contract in accordance with the NYSDOT’s current

Standard Specifications, Section 100.

E. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer informed of the progress of his work and

particularly when he intends to cover work not yet inspected or tested. All inspection and

tests by the Engineer shall be performed in such manner as not to unreasonably delay the

work. The Contractor shall be charged with any additional cost of inspection when the

work is not ready at the time specified by the Engineer for inspection.

F. At any time before acceptance of the entire work, should the Engineer wish to examine

work already completed by removing, uncovering or testing the same, the Contractor shall

on request promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and materials to conduct such

inspection, examination or test. If such work is found to be defective or nonconforming

in any material respect, the Contractor shall defray all the expenses of such examination

and satisfactory reconstruction. If the work is found to meet the requirements of the

Contract Documents, the Engineer shall compensate the Contractor for the additional

services involved in such examination and reconstruction and if completion of the work

has been delayed hereby, he shall, in addition, grant the Contractor a suitable extension

of time.

G. No previous inspection or certificates of payment shall relieve the Contractor from the

obligation to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The final

payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for failing to comply with

the Contract Documents and he shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage

to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from

the date of “Acceptance.” The “Acceptance date” shall be determined at the “Joint

Inspection” when all exception items have been complete to the satisfaction of the

Engineer. See Closeout Procedures below, Part C.

H. Note all special inspections per Section 1704 of the NYS Uniform Fire Prevention and

Building Code (19 NYCRR). Notify the Engineer when ready for such inspections.

1.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Detailed Inspection: The Engineer will advise the Contractor of the date and time of the

detailed inspection (detailed inspection occurs when the Engineer determines the work to

be substantially complete).

1. The Contractor will have already performed the following and must provide items as

listed at the start of the detailed inspection:

D26360562


a. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra material, and similar items to a location

designated by the State.

b. Label all panels, disconnects, equipment. Label type shall be approved by the

Engineer prior to placing labels on the panels, equipment, etc.

c. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to the

Engineer. Advise the Engineer and State of changeover in security provisions.

d. Complete startup testing of systems.

e. Advise Engineer and State of changeover in heat and other utilities.

f. Assemble two (2) complete sets of operation and maintenance data indicating the

operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system. Identify each binder (8 ½” x 11), on front and spine of each

binder, with the printed title “Operation and Maintenance Instructions”, title of

project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. Include

operation and maintenance data required in individual specification sections and

as follows:

1) Operation Data:

i. Emergency instructions and procedures

ii. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including

operating standards

iii. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal,

and weekend operations

iv. Description of controls and sequence of operations v. Piping

diagrams

2) Maintenance Data:

i. Manufacturer’s information, including list of parts

ii. Name, address, and telephone number of installer or

supplier

iii. Maintenance procedures

iv. Maintenance and service schedules for

preventive and routine maintenance

v. Maintenance record forms

vi. Sources of spare parts and maintenance

materials

vii. Copies of maintenance service agreements

viii. Emergency instructions and procedures

g. Demonstration and Training:

1) Instruction: Instruct NYSDOT’s personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. Schedule the

instruction sessions through the Engineer, and provide instructors

experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include instruction for

the following:

D263605 63


i. Review of documentation

ii. Operations

iii. Adjustments

iv. Troubleshooting

v. Maintenance

vi. Repair

2) Provide equipment specific training as required in any applicable

specification sections of the Contract Proposal

2. The Contractor shall submit the following either prior to or at the start of the Detailed

Inspection:

a. List of items to be completed and corrected (Punch List)

b. Test/adjust/balance report/records

B. Final Inspection: The Engineer will advise the Contractor of the date and time of the final

inspection. A copy of the Final Inspection list containing all incomplete or unsatisfactory

items and the time allowed to complete the work will be furnished to the Contractor. The

Contractor shall complete the following at this time:

1. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touch-up painting.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

a. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations

to comply with local laws and ordinances and federal and local environmental

and anti-pollution regulations.

b. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final

cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average

commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with

manufacturer’s written instructions.

1) Clean project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction

activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste

material, litter, and other foreign substances.

2) Sweep paved areas broom clean.

3) Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even- textured

surface.

4) Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material

from project site.

5) Complete removal of temporary facilities not already removed.

6) Remove debris from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,

shafts, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

7) Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces.

8) Clean mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

D26360564


9) Remove labels that are not permanent.

10) Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and

surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily

repaired or restored.

i. Do not paint over “UL” and similar labels, including mechanical and

electrical nameplates.

11) Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar

equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and

other foreign substances.

12) Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including

stains resulting from water exposure.

13) Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grilles.

14) Clean ducts, blowers, and coils.

15) Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full

efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by

hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury

vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

3. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury

debris or excess materials on the State’s property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful,

or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from project

site and dispose of them lawfully.

C. Joint Inspection: The joint inspection for physical completion will be made by the

Engineer accompanied by the Contractor and the representatives from the State to verify

completion of the exception items listed in the Final Inspection list. The verification of

the completeness of all the exception items will enable the “Acceptance” by the Director,

Department of Engineering or his/her designee. The purpose of having the

“Acceptance Date” is to establish and record a date when all physical work of a Contract

is completed in accordance with Contract requirements and to provide for the date of

commencement of any guarantee period and a firm date in the consideration of the

Liquidated Damages.

D. Warranties and Bonds: When the “Acceptance Date” has been established, the Contractor

shall submit specified warranties and bonds.

1. Assemble two (2) complete sets of warranties and bonds. Identify each binder (8 ½”

x 11”), on front and spine of each binder, with the printed title “Warranties and

Bonds” and title of project. Include warranties and bonds data required in

individual specification sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (not used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (not used)

END OF SECTION 010000

D263605 65

SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

1.GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Work under separate contracts.

4. Future work.

5. Purchase contracts.

6. Owner-furnished products.

7. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products.

8. Access to site.

9. Coordination with occupants.

10. Work restrictions.

11. Specification and drawing conventions.

12. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing

temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: COMMERCIAL VEHICLE INSPECTION FACILITY.

1. Project Location: I-90, NYS ROUTE 972A.

B. Owner: New York State Department of Transportation.

C. Architect: Dembling & Dembling , Architects, P.C. [email protected]. Albany, New

York.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

D26360566

http://www.stantec.com/



SUMMARY 011000 - 2

1. Furnish and install materials required for the Commercial Vehicle Inspection Facility

including:

a) All components required for the Operations and Inspection

buildings structures and shells;

b) interior space from the surrounding buildings structures and exterior

envelope;

c) construction of all associated site and building appurtenances,

including parking areas, circulatory roadways, exterior lighting and

building mechanical systems, Electronic Screening System, site

drainage and grading, and all other incidental items shown in the

contract plans

B. Type of Contract:

1. Construction Contract.

1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out

smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts.

Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the construction of the building

shell. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to

occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial

Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the

Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the

total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of

the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited

Owner occupancy.

3. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial services.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public rights of way and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

D263605 67

SUMMARY 011000 - 3

2. Comply with all local ordinances.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Most work on the site shall be completed between the hours of 6:00 a.m.

to 10:00 p.m, unless otherwise indicated. When night work is required, Contractor shall notify

the Engineer in writing two weeks prior and receive written authorization of approval.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and

vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than three days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site

is not permitted.

F. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Manufacturer’s personnel working on

Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of

Manufacturer’s personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to

identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of

the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

D26360568

SUMMARY 011000 - 4

2.PRODUCTS (Not Used)

3.EXECUTION (Not Used)


D263605 69

SUBMITTALS 013000 - 1

SECTION 013000 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions, and other Division 1 through Division 33 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for

performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submittal schedule.

3. Shop Drawings.

4. Product Data.

5. Samples.

6. Quality assurance submittals.

7. Manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Manufacturer’s certificates.

B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents

for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited

to, the following:

1. Permits.

2. Applications for Payment.

3. Performance and payment bonds.

4. Insurance certificates.

5. List of subcontractors.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of

related construction activities to avoid delay.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work

so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

D26360570


a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination

with other submittals until all related submittals are received.

B. Processing Time: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required

to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for

resubmittals.

1. Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect must delay processing

to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.

2. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.

3. Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal.

4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to

the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

C. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for

identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label

or title block.

1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on the label or beside the title

block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the

action taken.

2. Provide separate submittals for each specification section.

3. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.

a) Project name.

b) Date.

c) Name and address of the Architect.

d) Name and address of the Contractor.

e) Name and address of the subcontractor.

f) Name and address of the supplier.

g) Name of the manufacturer.

h) Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

i) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

D. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and

handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a

transmittal form. The Architect will not accept submittals received from sources other

than the Contractor.

1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or

separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including

variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies

with Contract Document requirements.

D263605 71


2. If transmittal forms used by contractors are acceptable, delete both options below.

Otherwise, retain 1 of 2 forms below.

1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a

complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required

for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule.

B. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the

list of products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule.

C. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during the first

90 days of construction. Provide the following information:

1. Scheduled date for the first submittal.

2. Related Section number.

3. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples).

4. Name of the subcontractor.

5. Description of the part of the Work covered.

6. Scheduled date for resubmittal.

7. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval.

D. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the

Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal

dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office.

E. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the

Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.

F. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions

have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of

each meeting.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or

otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract

Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard

information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.

B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules,

patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:

1. Dimensions.

2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.

D26360572


3. Compliance with specified standards.

4. Notation of coordination requirements.

5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

C. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 36 by

48 inches (890 by 1220 mm).

D. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one blue- or

black-line print for the Architect's review. The Architect will return the reproducible print.

E. One of the prints returned shall be marked up and maintained as a "Record Document."

F. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken.

1.6 PRODUCT DATA

A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.

Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions,

catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring

diagrams, and performance curves. Where product data must be specifically prepared

because standard printing data is not suitable for use, submit as “Shop Drawings”.

B. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data

includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the

applicable information. Include the following information:

1. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.

2. Compliance with trade association standards.

3. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.

4. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

5. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.

6. Notation of coordination requirements.

C. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract

Documents has been confirmed.

D. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection

of options is required.

1. Submittals: Submit 3 copies of each required submittal; submit 5 copies where

required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one and will return the

other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required.

2. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal

may serve as the final submittal.

D263605 73


E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers,

manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction

activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's

possession.

G. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.

H. Operations and maintenance data is to be submitted by the Contractor to establish routine

operation and maintenance requirements for the material and equipment provided under

the Contract. Submit 2 copies.

I. Routine maintenance specified by equipment manufacturer’s is to be tabulated.

J. Installation instructions and parts listings shipped with each piece of equipment are to

be delivered to the Architect.

1.7 SAMPLES

A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically

identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of

manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets,

and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.

B. Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare

Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following:

1. Specification Section number and reference.

2. Generic description of the Sample.

3. Sample source.

4. Product name or name of the manufacturer.

5. Compliance with recognized standards.

6. Availability and delivery time.

C. Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for

a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these

characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and

installed.

D. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material

or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that show approximate limits of the

variations.

E. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate

workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and

similar construction characteristics.

D26360574


F. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for

selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard

choices.

G. The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the Architect's notation,

indicating selection and other action.

H. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit 2 sets. The

Architect will return one set marked with the action taken.

I. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons

throughout the course of construction.

J. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may

serve as the final submittal.

K. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with

each set.

L. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors,

manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of

the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

M. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal

forms to provide a record of activity.

1.8 ARCHITECT'S/ENGINEERS ACTION

A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required,

the Architect/Engineer will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and

return promptly.

B. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.

C. Action Stamp: The Architect/Engineer will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action

stamp.

D. Action Taken: The Architect/Engineer will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the

action taken, as follows:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect/Engineer marks a submittal

"Reviewed, No Comments," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided

it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on

that compliance.

D263605 75


2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect/Engineer marks a submittal

"Reviewed, See Comments," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed

provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements

of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect/Engineer marks a submittal as "Revise

as Noted and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal,

including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new

submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to

obtain different action mark.

4. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked " Revise as Noted and

Resubmit," at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

5. Not Reviewed: When the Architect/Engineer marks a submittal "Not Reviewed," do

not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication,

delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the

notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.

6. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked “Not Reviewed “at the Project

Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress

7. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special

processing or other activity, the Architect/Engineer will return the submittal marked

"Action Not Required."

8. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender

without action.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


D26360576

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions, Sections 100, 200, and 300 of the NYSDOT Standard Specifications and other

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures.

2. Conservation.

3. Coordination Drawings.

4. Project meetings.

5. Surveys and records.

6. Limitations on use of site.

7. Special reports.

8. Cleaning and protection.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of

responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for a description of the division

of Work among separate contracts.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of

other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the

Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations included in different

Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components,

before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure

maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

D263605 77


3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Each contractor, when it individually anticipates or deems such action necessary, shall issue

written notice to the other contractors, and the NYSDOT Field Engineer of the need to

coordinate specific items of work which interfere, integrate or otherwise affect the schedule

and work of two or more contracts.

C. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special

procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and

list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

D. Where trenching, excavation, or similar operations by more than one contractor is to occur

in the same area, work requiring the deeper excavation shall normally be accomplished first,

followed by a sequence of excavations of less depth, unless otherwise scheduled, and subject

to approval by the NYSDOT Field Engineer.

E. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid

conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include,

but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

F. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out

with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Each contractor shall provide information and data to other contractors as required to

coordinate and verify conditions affecting the interfacing of the Work.

B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability

necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components

or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate

entities.

1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.

D26360578


2. Indicate required installation sequences.

3. Refer to Division 22, Division 23, Division 26 Sections for specific Coordination

Drawing requirements for plumbing, mechanical and electrical installations.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Coordination/Progress Meetings: The NYSDOT Field Engineer will schedule routine project

coordination and progress meetings at times that are convenient for the attendance of

contractors involved. These meetings are in addition to special meetings he may schedule

for other purposes, such as pre-construction and pre-installation meetings. Required

attendance for progress meetings includes each contractor and, if deemed necessary by the

NYSDOT Field Engineer, subcontractors or manufacturers' representatives. Meetings shall

be conducted in a manner that resolves coordination problems. The NYSDOT Field

Engineer shall preside at each meeting, and may record meeting notes and distribute copies

of same.

1.6 SURVEYS AND RECORDS

A. General: Working from lines and levels established from existing conditions and by the

property survey, each contractor shall establish and maintain his own benchmarks and other

dependable markers. These benchmarks and markers are established to set lines and levels

for work at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each

element of the project. Each contractor shall calculate and measure required dimensions, and

locate his work. Drawings shall not be scaled to determine dimensions.

B. Procedure: Before proceeding with the layout of actual work, each contractor shall verify

the layout information shown on the Contract Documents, in relation to the property survey,

existing benchmarks and existing conditions. As the work proceeds, check every major

element for line, level, and plumb. Record deviations for required lines and levels and upon

detection, promptly advise the Architect of deviations exceeding indicated or recognized

tolerances. Each contractor shall record deviations on their record drawings.

C. Each contractor shall continuously maintain a set of as-built drawings for their work, during

construction.

1.7 LIMITATIONS ON USE OF THE SITE

A. General: Limitations on site usage, as well as specific requirements that impact utilization

are indicated on the Contract Documents. In addition to these limitations and requirements,

each Contractor shall reasonably allocate available space equitably among the other

contractors and other entities needing access and space, so as to produce the best overall

efficiency in performance of the total work of the project. Each contractor shall schedule

deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and

equipment on site.

B. Construction access to the site, for all contracts, is to be via a temporary entrance as indicated

on the drawings.

D263605 79


1.8 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to the NYSDOT Field Engineer within one day of

an occurrence. Submit a copy of the report to the Architect and other entities affected by the

occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at the

site, each Contractor affected shall prepare and submit a special report. The report shall list

observations of the chain of events, persons affected and/or participating, response by

Contractor's personnel and by personnel of other contractors, and similar pertinent

information. It is the responsibility of each contractor to advise the NYSDOT Field

Engineer, in advance, date when such events are known or predictable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Installer's Inspection of conditions - The contractor involved shall require the Installer of

each major unit of work to inspect the substrate to receive work and the conditions under

which the work is to be performed. The Installer shall report all unsatisfactory conditions

in writing to the contractor. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions

have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. Installer's Inspection of conditions - The contractor involved shall require the

Manufacturer's Instructions - Where installations include manufactured products, comply

with the manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to the

extent that these instructions and recommendations are more explicit or more stringent than

requirements indicated in the contract documents.

1. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation. Reject

damaged and defective items.

2. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly.

Secure work true to line and level, and within recognized tolerances. Allow for

expansion and building movement. Provide uniform joint width in exposed work.

Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable

visual effect choices to the Architect/Engineer for final decision.

3. Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting

each installation.

4. Install each unit of work during weather conditions and project status which will

ensure the best possible results in coordination with the entire work. Isolate each unit

of work from incompatible work as necessary to prevent deterioration.

D26360580


C. Enclosure of the Work - Each contractor shall coordinate the closing-in of the work with

required inspections and tests, so as to minimize the necessity of uncovering work for that

purpose.

D. Mounting Heights - Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of

work at industry recognized standard mounting heights for particular application indicated.

Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Architect/Engineer for final decision.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. General: During handling and installation of work at the project site, each Contractor

shall clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on the basis of continuous

maintenance. Apply protective covering on installed work where it is required to ensure

freedom from damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion.

B. Clean and perform maintenance on installed work as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to

ensure operability without damaging effects.

C. Limiting Exposure of Work: To the extent possible through reasonable control and

protection methods, each contractor shall supervise performance and protection of the

work in such a manner and by such means which will ensure that none of the work,

whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging

or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Such exposure

includes, where applicable, not by way of limitation, the following:

1. Excessive static or dynamic loading

2. Excessive internal or external pressures

3. Excessively high or low temperatures

4. Thermal shock

5. Excessively high or low humidity

6. Water or ice

7. Solvents

8. Chemicals

9. Puncture

10. Abrasion

11. Heavy traffic

12. Soiling

13. Bacteria

14. Insect infestation

15. Combustion

16. Electrical current

17. Incompatible interface

18. Misalignment

19. Excessive weathering

20. Unprotected storage

21. Theft

22. Vandalism

D263605 81



D26360582

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of

construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule.

2. Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Construction schedule updating reports.

4. Daily construction reports.

5. Material location reports. B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

2. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,

monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction

schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the

planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as

scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless

otherwise approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction

project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations

determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D263605 83


D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the

network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no

float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is

a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet

schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting

the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without

adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion

of an activity as scheduled.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.

2. Retain one of two subparagraphs below

3. PDF electronic file.

4. (2) Two paper copies.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction

period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire

schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled

to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or

updated) and date on label.

E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports.

Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost

D26360584


and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date,

late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start

date or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in

ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if

known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. F.

Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

H. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

I. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review

methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's

construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.

3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, and partial

Owner occupancy.

4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.

5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.

6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.

7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.

8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies.

9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures.

10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.

D263605 85


11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of

construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal

schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of

final completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows

an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main

element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than (20) twenty days,

unless specifically allowed by Owner or Architect/Engineer.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the long lead items

and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in

schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,

approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division

01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in

Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than (15) fifteen days for startup and

testing.

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Owner or Architect's/Engineer

administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

D26360586


6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than (15) fifteen days for

completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents

and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

D. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.

2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product

3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product.

4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,

including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Submittals.

b. Purchases.

c. Fabrication.

d. Deliveries.

e. Installation.

f. Tests and inspections.

g. Adjusting.

h. Curing.

i. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

5. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the

Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or

integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Completion of mechanical installation.

b. Completion of plumbing installation

c. Completion of electrical installation.

d. Substantial Completion.

E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,

including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final

completion.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to

occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following

issues:

1. Unresolved issues.

2. Unanswered Requests for Information.

3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.

D263605 87


4. Notations on returned submittals.

5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 fourteen or more

calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule

indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.

Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to

achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that

has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

1. Use Microsoft Project, Primavera, or Meridian Prolog operating system as approved

or directed by Owner.

2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule

within (7) seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first

workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction

activities for first (90) ninety days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the

remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-

charttype, Contractor's construction schedule within (10) ten days of date established for

the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional

information received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first

workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.

4. Equipment at Project site.

5. Material deliveries.

D26360588


6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain

or snow.

7. Accidents.

8. Meetings and significant decisions.

9. Any Unusual events.

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

11. Meter readings and similar recordings.

12. Emergency procedures.

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

14. Change Orders received and implemented.

15. Work Change Directives received and implemented.

16. Services connected and disconnected.

17. Equipment or system tests and startups.

18. Partial completions and occupancies.

19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list

of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing

materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of

progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored

away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.

2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.

3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions

and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request

for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

D263605 89


A. Scheduling Consultant: Contractor to employ skilled personnel with experience in

scheduling, planning, evaluation, and reporting.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to

reflect actual construction progress and activities.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions

have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report

of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but

not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity

durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect/Engineer Owner and other

parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties. Delete

parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the

Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.


D26360590

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01through Division 33 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and

procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other

submittals.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings; or to

other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the

Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are

used to help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited.

C. "Directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted"

mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases.

D. "Approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's

submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and

responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

E. "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities

having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction

industry that control performance of the Work.

F. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require

Architect's and Owner’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals

indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

D263605 91


G. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do

not require Architect's and Owner’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not

complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in

individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

H. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to

and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet

protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within

which internal and external users are able to access files.

I. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe

Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display

resolutionindependent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering,

manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time

required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and

additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals

required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of

long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's

construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for

submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal category: Action; informational.

d. Name of subcontractor.

e. Description of the Work covered.

f. Scheduled date for Architect's and Construction Manager's final release or

approval.

g. Scheduled date of fabrication.

h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.

i. Scheduled dates for installation.

j. Activity or event number.

D26360592


1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be

provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract

Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in

AutoCAD.

c. Subject to contract award and prior to the Architect providing digital data drawing

files the Contractor shall execute and sign a data licensing agreement in the form

of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement. The contractor shall

obtain Document C106 from the AIA. Further the contractor shall include any

costs associated with obtaining and executing this document.

d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:

1) Floor plans.

2) Reflected ceiling plans.

3) Roof plans

4) Building elevations.

5) Building and wall sections and details.

6) Door and window Schedules.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal

schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same

Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Architect and Owner reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.

Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the

Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in

advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

D263605 93


1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if

coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a

submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial

submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or

other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's

review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and Owner.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of subcontractor.

g. Name of supplier.

h. Name of manufacturer.

i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point

and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an

alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

m. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless

Architect or Owner observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial

submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies

to Architect and Owner.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for

transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect and Owner

will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use facsimile of sample form included in Project

Manual.

b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following

information:

D26360594


1) Project name.

2) Date.

3) Destination (To:).

4) Source (From:).

5) Name and address of Architect.

6) Name of Construction Manager.

7) Name of Contractor.

8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

10) Category and type of submittal.

11) Submittal purpose and description.

12) Specification Section number and title.

13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of

multiple items.

14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

15) Indication of full or partial submittal.

16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

18) Remarks.

19) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as

follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling

navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal

point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an

alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings

and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic

project management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

h. Category and type of submittal.

i. Submittal purpose and description.

j. Specification Section number and title.

D263605 95


k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of

multiple items.

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

n. Related physical samples submitted directly.

o. Indication of full or partial submittal.

p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

r. Other necessary identification.

s. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name.

b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

c. Manufacturer name.

d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by

Architect and Owner on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract

Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as

related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Owner's

action stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action

submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Owner's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by

individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual

Specification Sections.

D26360596


1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site

specifically established for Project.

a. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and

retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and

retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return two copies.

4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will not return copies.

5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature

of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that

entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications

where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction

and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published

data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

D263605 97


6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two

copies.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop

Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following

information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings

on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


4. BIM File Incorporation: Develop and incorporate Shop Drawing files into Building Information

Model established for Project.

a. Prepare Shop Drawings in the following format: Same digital data software program,

version, and operating system as the original Drawings.

b. Refer to Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for

coordination drawings.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal

and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one

submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

D26360598


3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal

of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification

information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality control

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to

determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification

Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are

the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of

units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture,

or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line.

Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same

material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical

with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations

expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured

or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively

used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components

used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets;

remainder will be returned.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,

connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or

product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show

approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following

information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents

or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.

3. Number and name of room or space.

4. Location within room or space.

5. Submit product schedule in the following format:


b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated. Architect will

return two copies.

D263605 99


F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project

Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200

"Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

I. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and

Maintenance Data."

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm

or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information

of architects and owners, and other information specified.

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply

with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification

and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by

manufacturer for this specific Project.

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material

complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements

in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of

tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive

tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the

following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturers' names.

D263605100


5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.

S. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of

product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

T. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation

of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for

adhesion.

U. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed

either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance

with requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include

list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load

diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include

page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,

provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria

indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,

submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and

other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, three, paper copies

of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product

and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design

professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing

these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination

with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note

D263605 101


corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect

and Construction Manager.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section

017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project

name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of

reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been

reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate

corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with

an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or

will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal

to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial

submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be

returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect

without action.


D263605102

REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals,

applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities

as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including

"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that

control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work

to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on

which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as

if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such

standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

D263605 103


B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar

with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable

standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain

copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated

in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in

Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the

following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of

the date of the Contract Documents.

1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.

2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.

3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control

Officials; www.aapfco.org.

4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;

www.transportation.org.

5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists

and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.

6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association;

www.americanbearings.org.

7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI

International); www.concrete.org.

8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.

9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.

10. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.

11. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.

12. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.

13. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration

Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.

14. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.

15. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.

16. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.

17. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.

18. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.

19. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association

International, Inc.; www.amca.org.

D263605104


20. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.

21. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.

22. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.

23. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.

24. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.

25. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).

26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).

27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.

28. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.

29. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See

ASCE).

30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;

www.ashrae.org.

31. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);

www.asme.org.

32. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.

33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.

34. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International);

www.astm.org.

35. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.

36. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.

37. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.

38. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;

www.awmac.com.

39. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American WoodPreservers'

Association); www.awpa.com.

40. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.

41. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.

42. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association;

www.buildershardware.com.

43. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.

44. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.

45. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association); www.bifma.com.

46. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.

47. BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.); (See

ICC).

48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);

www.bwfbadminton.org.

49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.

50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.

51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.

52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.;

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.

53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.

54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.

55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.

D263605 105


56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.

57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.

58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.

59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.

60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.

61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.

62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.

63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.

64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-

international.org.

65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.

66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.

67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.

68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).

69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers

Association; www.dasma.com.

70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.

71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec-central.org.

72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA).

73. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).

74. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.

75. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.

76. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.

77. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).

78. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.

79. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation);

www.fiba.com.

80. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);

www.fivb.org.

81. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.

82. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.

83. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;

www.floridaroof.com.

84. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.

85. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.

86. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.

87. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.

88. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.

89. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.

90. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).

91. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).

92. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.

93. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.

94. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.

95. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).

96. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).

D263605106


97. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.

98. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.

99. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.

100. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.

101. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.

102. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.

103. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of

North America); www.ies.org.

104. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).

105. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.

106. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.

107. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump

Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu.

108. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.

109. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);

www.intertek.com.

110. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and

Automation Society); www.isa.org.

111. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).

112. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid

Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.

113. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.

114. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).

115. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.

116. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.

117. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).

118. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.

119. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.

120. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.

121. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.

122. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.;

www.metalframingmfg.org.

123. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.

124. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.

125. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding &

Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com.

126. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.

127. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;

www.mss-hq.org.

128. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org.

129. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);

www.nace.org.

130. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.

131. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.

132. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.

133. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.

134. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.

D263605 107


135. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.

136. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.

137. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.

138. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.

139. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.

140. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.

141. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org.

142. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).

143. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.

144. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 145. NLGA - National

Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.

146. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).

147. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.

148. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.

149. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.

150. NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org.

151. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.

152. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.

153. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.

154. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.

155. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.

156. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.

157. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association);

www.plasa.org.

158. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.

159. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.

160. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.

161. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org.

162. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.

163. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.

164. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.

165. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com.

166. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE).

167. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.

168. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.

169. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.

170. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org.

171. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.

172. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.

173. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.

174. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.

175. SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.

176. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.

177. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.

178. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.

179. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.

D263605108


180. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.

181. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.

182. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America);

www.tileusa.com.

183. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.

184. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications

Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org.

185. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).

186. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 187. TPI - Truss Plate Institute;

www.tpinst.org.

188. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.

189. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.

190. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC).

191. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.

192. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.

193. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.

194. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.

195. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.

196. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.

197. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.

198. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.

199. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.

200. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California);

www.wicnet.org.

201. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA).

202. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 203. WPA -

Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This

information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.

2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org.

3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.

4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following

list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.

2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.

3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov.

4. DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.

D263605 109


6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.

7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.

8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.

9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.

10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.

11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy

Technologies Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov.

12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.

13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.

14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program;

www.trb.org.

15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory;

www.ars.usda.gov.

16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.

17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;

www.ojp.usdoj.gov.

18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org.

19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the

following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of

the Contract Documents.

1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;

www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from

Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).

4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).

5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point;

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.

b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.

c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide;

www.wbdg.org/ccb.

6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).

7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.

8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB).

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in

Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities

in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the

date of the Contract Documents.

D263605110


1. CBHF - State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic

Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.

2. CCR - California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24

Energy Code; www.calregs.com.

3. CDHS - California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).

4. CDPH - California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-

iaq.org.

5. CPUC - California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.

6. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.

7. TFS - Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable

Forestry; http://txforestservice.tamu.edu.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


D263605 111

REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 014210 - 1

SECTION 014210 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL




Division 1 through Division 33 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Definitions: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

1. "Indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings; or

to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the

Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified"

are used to help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited.

2. "Directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and

"permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar

phrases.

3. "Approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's

submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and

responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

4. "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by

authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within

the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

5. "Furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,

unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

6. "Install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading,

temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,

working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

7. "Provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

8. "Installer" is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an

employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular

construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar

D263605112


operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are

engaged to perform.

9. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having

successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and

scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and

having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

10. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities

must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic

name, such as "carpenter."

11. "Project site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction

activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as

part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may

or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be

built.

12. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform

specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on

and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

B. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on

the 33-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

C. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language

and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

D. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is

abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not

stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural

and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract

Documents indicates.

E. Streamlined language is generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the

imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Section Text,

subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly

by the Contractor or by others when so noted.

1. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

F. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,

applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied

D263605 113


directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of

the Contract Documents by reference.

G. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.

H. Copies of Standards: Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract

Documents. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,

the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available

on request.

I. Abbreviations and Names: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-

producing organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context

of the text provision. Refer to Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or Columbia

Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S.," which are available in most

libraries.

J. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.




D263605114

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary

utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1. The construction facilities and temporary controls specified to be provided shall be

understood as pertaining to the new Commercial Vehicle Inspection Facility.

2. The construction facilities and temporary controls specified to be provided by a

particular contract shall be kept operational by that contractor for the Work of all

related contracts at all times Work is being performed by a contractor.

3. The construction facilities and temporary controls specified to be provided by a

particular contractor shall be installed as soon after award of the contract as necessary

to enable the Work of each contract to proceed on schedule, and maintained until

completion of the Work of all related contracts unless otherwise directed in writing.

4. Any contractor who requires additions to the construction facilities and temporary

controls specified to be provided by another contractor, shall provide and maintain

them.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION HEAT – ALL CONTRACTS

A. Prior to the time the building or any major part of the building is enclosed, each contractor is

responsible for providing construction heat (as differentiated from temporary heat), of a

nature as required and approved to accomplish the following:

1. Protect materials and equipment being installed as part of the contract

from freezing.

2. Enable workers to accomplish their respective tasks in a satisfactory

manner.

3. Maintain construction schedules. B. Do not use electric heaters.

1.4 TEMPORARY HEAT – BUILDING ENCLOSED –: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION: BUILDING

FOUNDATION AND INTERIOR FIT-OUT A. General Building Construction Contract:

1. Temporary heat shall be provided by the General Building Construction contractor for

all contracts related to the Project.

D263605 115


2. Provide temporary heat, starting at such time as directed, when in the opinion of the

NYSDOT Field Engineer, the building or any major part of it is enclosed.

a. The building, or any part of it, shall be considered enclosed when the exterior walls and roof deck

or overhead closures are sufficiently completed to exclude the elements, except for windows,

doors, ventilators and similar openings which shall be temporarily sealed weathertight with

suitable closures.

3. Include in the contract sum the cost of providing temporary heat for 60 days.

a. The actual number of days required for temporary heat shall be as determined by the NYSDOT

Field Engineer.

b. In the event such determination results in more or less than the specified number of days, the

contract sum will be adjusted by Order on contract.

c. Applicable daily charges for price adjustment (if any) shall be the average daily rate paid during

the period of temporary heat, i.e. (total cost of providing temporary heat divided by the number of

days). Furnish daily records of temporary heat costs to the NYSDOT Field Engineer, so that

necessary price adjustments may be calculated.

4. Temporary heat consists of, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Furnishing and operating a sufficient number of temporary heating units to maintain required

temperatures.

b. Furnishing units of approved manufacture, complete with a combustion chamber and a smoke flue

outlet, so designed that all products of combustion are vented through smoke flue piping to the

exterior of the building. Do not use electric heaters.

c. Furnishing fuel for maintaining temporary heat.

d. Maintaining building temperature between 45 and 55 degrees F. unless higher temperatures are

required for the installation of specified materials.

e. Moving, relocating, and adjusting heating units as required or directed, to protect the Work of all

contracts.

f. Taking precautions necessary to protect all portions of the building from smoke or gas damage and

to prevent hazardous conditions which could result in damage to property or injury to persons.

5. In addition:

a. Provide and maintain (8) eight inch scale direct reading thermometers in the building, at locations

directed.

b. Provide where directed in the building, (3) seven day, self contained recording thermometers, for

the purpose of recording air temperatures in the building.

1) Thermometers: Bacharach Instrument Co. Code No. 14-1010.

2) Charts: Furnish and deliver to the NYSDOT Field Engineer at the site, a supply

of charts and ink, in quantity as required for the duration of temporary heat.

Furnish charts of the 24 hour type, designed for working temperatures from -

30 degrees F to +120 degrees F.

3) The NYSDOT Field Engineer will maintain operation of the thermometers.

D263605116


4) Recording thermometers and charts shall become the property of the State.

B. RESPONSIBILITY

1. General Building Construction Contract :

a. Assume responsibility for damage due to frost and freezing during the period when

temporary heat is required to be provided. Repair damage due to improper

equipment, such as stains, smudges, soot or fire.

2. All contracts:

a. Progress the Work so that temporary heat can be provided as and when specified,

and directed.

C. OPERATION BY STATE PERSONNEL

1. When, in the opinion of the NYSDOT Field Engineer, the permanent heating system is

completed, the NYSDOT Field Engineer will arrange for operation of the heating

system in accordance with the provisions of Article 20 of the General Conditions

concerning State occupation and operation. At such time, contractor will be relieved

of responsibility for temporary heat.

1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

A. Electrical energy for temporary light and power will be the responsibility of the General

Building Construction Contract.

B. General Building Construction Contract : Pay for electrical energy required for the Work

related to this Project until all contracts have attained substantial completion. Energy for

contractors' trailers is not included. The General Building Construction contractor will

monitor and secure access to the power source and will provide all security required to

limit power consumption to a daily time schedule agreed to by all of the contractors.

C. Extent of Temporary Wiring: See paragraph 1.5, D. to ascertain the extent of the

temporary wiring provided under the General Electrical Construction Contract. Wiring

for contractors' trailers is not included. Contractors will be responsible for securing their

own temporary power for their trailers and for providing power wiring and connections to

their trailers.

D. General Electrical Construction Requirements :

1. Make necessary arrangements, through the NYSDOT Field Engineer, for temporary

electrical service at location directed.

2. Make necessary arrangements with the local electrical utility company for the

installation of a 200 ampere, single phase, 120/240 volt temporary electrical service

to the location of the new Inspection and Operations buildings. Pay all utility company

charges.

D263605 117


3. Provide portable source of electricity for temporary light and power of adequate

capacity to supply the needs of all contractors for the performance of their Work until

the temporary electrical service can be utilized for temporary light and power.

4. Provide a pole line for temporary light and power. Install minimum Class 4 poles of

height required to maintain at least 25 feet ground clearance under wires. Space wires

on cross arms to suit voltage.

5. Provide wiring and other equipment within the building for temporary light and

power.

a. Wiring for temporary light and single phase power shall, in general, consist of 4 wire,

120/240 volt feeders, with branch circuits of #12 conductors minimum.

1) Install branch circuits with suitable fluorescent fixtures or incandescent lampholders

for temporary lighting as required to maintain a minimum of 10

foot candles in the work areas. Equip fixtures and lampholders with guards. Fixtures and

lampholders installed in damp or wet locations shall be of the weatherproof type.

2) Install branch circuits with fused grounding type receptacle outlets for single phase

power (for power tools, etc.).

b. Install 2 circuits with fluorescent fixtures or incandescent lampholders in corridors. Space

fixtures or lampholders no more than 30 feet apart in corridors. Install fixture or

lampholder at each stair landing. Also install one fixture or lampholder in each boiler room

and mechanical equipment room (connect to the corridor and stair lighting circuits).

1) Keep the exit lighting maintained and energized 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

6. Provide site lighting for security purposes.

a. Keep the site lighting maintained and energized from dusk to dawn, 7 days per week.

7. Provide a fused sealed service entrance switch for exit lighting circuits and site lighting circuits. Locate

switch adjacent to, and connect to line side of temporary light and power service entrance switch.

Stencil cover "EXIT LIGHTING & SITE LIGHTING".

8. Provide lamps and fuses including replacements required. E. All contracts:

1. Any contractor requiring additional lighting shall provide additional fluorescent

fixtures or incandescent lampholders (with lamps), but in no case shall the load on any

branch circuit or feeder exceed its rated capacity.

2. Install materials for temporary light and power in conformance with the National

Electrical Code.

3. Materials for temporary light and power need not be new if they are in satisfactory

operating condition.

4. Provide ground-fault protection for personnel (such as portable plug-in type ground-

fault circuit-interrupters) on single phase 15 and 20 ampere receptacle outlets which

are in use.

5. Receptacle outlets, portable cord connectors and attachment plugs shall have standard

NEMA configurations.

6. As the progress of the Work allows, and as approved, completed portions of the

permanent wiring and electrical service may be utilized for temporary light and power.

D263605118


1.6 TEMPORARY WATER

A. Water will be made available for the Work without charge at the building service entrance and

yard hydrants.

1. All contracts will be responsible for temporary water requirements. Temporary water

will require transport from off-site onto the project site. Each contractor is responsible

for water transport to site and on-site storage for daily use.

B. General Plumbing Requirements:

1. Make arrangements for water for temporary service, after the new watermain has been

connected to the new building.

2. Provide and maintain a temporary water system, of such size and capacity as to

adequately supply the needs of all contractors during performance of their Work.

3. The permanent water lines may be used for temporary water service if available in a

timely manner.

4. Protect temporary lines against freezing.

5. Repair damages caused by installation of leaky, defective or broken piping,

connections or other fittings.

C. All contracts: Prevent waste of water.

1.7 TEMPORARY TOILETS

A. General Construction Contract: Provide toilet facilities for all contractor's and their

subcontractor's employees engaged on the Project. Locate toilets where directed by the

Field Engineer and maintain them in a sanitary condition.

Number of Employees Minimum Number of Facilities*

20 or less 1 toilet

20 or more 1 toilet and 1 urinal per 40 employees

200 or more 1 toilet and 1 urinal per 50 employees

1 toilet and 1 urinal per 50 employees

*Toilet/Urinal Combinations shall count as only one facility.

1. Provide water closets where water and sewer connections are available, otherwise,

provide approved chemical or electric toilets.

2. Inside buildings, locate toilet facilities no more than 4 stories or 60 feet above or

below, nor more than 500 feet travel on the same level from the work location of any

person.

3. Locate toilet facilities no more than 1000 feet from any work location.

D263605 119


a. Exception: Mobile crews having readily available transportation to nearby toilet

facilities.

1.8 TEMPORARY CLOSURES FOR EXTERIOR WALL OPENINGS

A. General Building Construction Contract:

1. Whenever necessary, after the building is enclosed, to maintain proper temperatures

for the performance of the Work, provide and maintain temporary closures for all

openings in exterior walls that are not closed with permanent materials.

2. Construct temporary closures of 2 x 4 framing sheathed with plywood, waferboard, or

6 mil polyethylene attached to wood frames, as approved and to suit job requirements.

3. Provide closures so that they will afford convenient means of entrance and exit for

persons having business within the building, afford ample light to permit continued

progress of the Work, and exclude inclement weather.

1.9 PROTECTION OF WORK AND EXISTING PROPERTY

A. Protect installed Work and existing property during performance of the Work. (All

contracts responsible for own work).

B. Maintaining the building in a watertight condition during performance of the Work shall

be the responsibility of the General Building Construction Contractor.

C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in

immediate work area to prevent damage. (All contracts responsible for coordination of this

item).

D. General Building Construction Contract or shall provide protective coverings at wall

projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

E. General Building Construction Contract or shall protect finished floors and other surfaces

from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, and movement of heavy objects by covering them with

durable sheet materials.

F. General Building Construction Contract or shall protect smoke detectors from airborne

dust and debris.

1. At the beginning of each work day, provide protective coverings over smoke detectors

in areas where airborne dust and debris will be generated by the Work.

2. At the end of the work day, clean the areas in which the smoke detectors are located

by whatever means necessary to assure that airborne dust and debris will not

contaminate the smoke detectors, then remove protective coverings.

3. Provide signs, instructions and alternate methods for reporting a fire during the periods

that the smoke detectors are covered.

4. Notify the NYSDOT Field Engineer and have procedures approved.

D263605120


G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas and permeable pavement areas. (All contracts)

1.10 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

A. All contracts: Provide barriers during performance of the Work to:

1. Prevent unauthorized entry to work areas.

1.11 WATER CONTROLS

A. Provide and maintain pumping equipment necessary to keep the work areas free from water.

Discharge water into existing storm drainage systems or otherwise disperse as directed.

1.12 FIRE PREVENTION

A. Take precautions necessary to prevent fires.

B. Fuel for cutting and heating torches shall be acetylene or LP-gas only, and shall be

contained in Underwriters Laboratory or Federal Department of Transportation approved

containers.

C. Furnish and maintain a currently inspected 20 pound capacity multi-class ABC fire

extinguisher in the immediate vicinity where welding tools or torches are in use.

D. Do not use flammable liquids, other than those specified, within a building without the

written approval from the Director's Representative.

E. Tarpaulins shall be flameproof and shall be securely anchored when attached to

scaffolding or when used to enclose any portion of a building.

1.13 ACCESS ROADS

A. Routes of ingress and egress on the premises to the location of the work areas shall be as

directed.

B. Keep designated access roads clear of dirt and debris resulting from the work.

C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering paved roads.

1.14 PARKING

A. All contracts:

1. Park vehicles in areas where directed.

D263605 121


2. Keep designated parking areas clear of dirt and debris resulting from the

work.

3. Remove ignition key from unattended vehicles and lock doors. B.

General Building Construction Contract:

1. Remove snow from parking areas allocated to all contractors.

2. Provide a temporary parking lot, approximately 35 x 40 feet, adjacent to the State Field

Office for the exclusive use of State personnel. Surface area with a minimum of 6

inches of compacted Select Granular Material or Subbase Course Type 2. Crown or

slope surface for adequate drainage.

C. NYSDOT will designate parking locations on site for construction personnel.

1.15 RUBBISH REMOVAL

A. All contracts: Clean up and containerize the rubbish (refuse, debris, waste materials, and

removed materials and equipment) resulting from the Work at least once a day and more

often if the rubbish interferes with the work of others or presents a hazard. Leave work

areas broom clean, except where more stringent cleaning is specified, at the end of each

day. Locate containerized rubbish on the Site where directed.

1. Burning of rubbish will not be permitted.

B. General Building Construction Contract: Remove rubbish from State property at least once a

week and more often if the rubbish presents a hazard. Properly dispose of rubbish.

1. Provide trash dumpster at central location for receipt of daily construction clean-up by

individual contracts. Trash dumpster shall be of adequate size.

1.16 RELOCATION AND REMOVALS

A. Should a change in location of any construction facilities and temporary controls be necessary

in order to progress the Work properly, remove and relocate such items as directed.

1. Electrical: Frequently relocate/revise the temporary lighting as contractors progress the

Work of their contracts causing changes to the condition of the building (installation

or relocation of walls, partitions, ceilings, equipment, etc.). Keep pace with the

changes and maintain a minimum of 10 footcandles in each recomposed work area.

B. Remove the construction facilities and temporary controls when they are no longer required.

Restore permanent facilities used for or connected to temporary facilities to their original

condition or better.

D263605122


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART

3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


D263605 123

WARRANTIES 017400 - 1

SECTION 017400 - WARRANTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions, Sections 100, 200, and 300 of the NYSDOT Standard Specifications and

other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and

bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard

warranties on products and special warranties.

B. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's period for correction of the

Work.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" specifies contract closeout procedures.

B. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

C. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner

are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

D. Review limitations below with the Owner's legal counsel to determine if exceptions or

modifications are necessary.

E. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product

warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the

products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve

suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties

with the Contractor.

F. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime contractor is responsible for warranties related to

its own contract.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

D263605124


A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual

manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer

to the Owner.

B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide

greater rights for the Owner.

1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted

construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such

failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted

construction.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been

corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement.

The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable

adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed,

replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of

the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or

rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the

Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied

warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise

available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as

limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations,

rights, or remedies.

E. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit

selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract

Documents.

F. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the

Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work,

until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such

commitments are willing to do so.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial

Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a

commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the

D263605 125


Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the

Architect or the Field Engineer.

B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a

subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written

document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the

required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior

to final execution.

C. Refer to Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular

requirements for submitting special warranties.

D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile 2 copies of each required warranty

properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or

manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the

table of contents of the Project Manual.

E. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide

additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required

manual.




D263605126

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Project Record Documents submittal.

3. Operation and maintenance manuals submittal.

4. Warranties submittal.

5. Final cleaning.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (ALL CONTRACTS)

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial

Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work

claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion

as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of

changes to the Contract Sum.

a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the

value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final

certifications and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and

access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certifications and

similar releases.

5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.

6. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and

maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities

from the site, along with construction tools; mock ups and similar elements.

D263605 127


7. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch up painting. Touch up and

otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed

with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Field Engineer or

the Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection,

or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the

certificate will be issued.

1. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final

acceptance.

1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE (ALL CONTRACTS)

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final

acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not

previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and

completed operations where required.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the

Contract Sum.

3. Submit a certified copy of the Field Engineer's or the Architect's final inspection list

of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or

otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the

Field Engineer or the Architect.

4. Submit consent of surety to final payment.

5. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements.

B. Reinspection Procedure: The Field Engineer or the Architect will reinspect the Work upon

receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has

been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of

circumstances acceptable to the Architect.

1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Field Engineer or the Architect will prepare a

certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or

of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.

2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.

1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS (ALL CONTRACTS)

A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from

deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record

documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours.

D263605128


B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white- prints of

Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where

the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever

drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings

are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings.

Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and

record at a later date.

1. Mark record sets with a red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between

variations in separate categories of the Work.

2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on the

Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings.

3. Note related Change Order information and numbers.

4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover

sheets, and print suitable titles dates and other identification on the cover of each set.

C. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of

manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl

covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate

identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information:

1. Emergency instructions

2. Spare parts list

3. Copies of warranties

4. Wiring diagrams

5. Recommended "turn around" cycles

6. Inspection procedures

7. Shop Drawings and Product Data

8. Fixture lamping Schedule


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires

regular maintenance to meet with the owners personnel to provide instruction in proper

procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed

review of the following items:

1. Maintenance manuals

2. Cleaning

3. Warranties and bonds

4. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments

D263605 129


3.2 FINAL CLEANING (ALL CONTRACTS)

A. General: General cleaning during construction is required for each contract by the General

Conditions and included in Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls".

B. Final Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building

cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for final

acceptance.

a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.

b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision

obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged

transparent materials.

c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust- free

condition, free of stains, films and foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces

to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum

carpeted surfaces.

C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for the

protection of Work during construction.

D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety

standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials

on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into

drainage systems. Remove waste material from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have

become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.


D263605130

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Product maintenance manuals.

5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and

maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual

content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether content of operations

and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions

and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.

Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

D263605 131


a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable

item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance

directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title

pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect, will return two copies.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing

demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether

general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for

Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.

Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's

comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15days of receipt of Architect's

and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and

training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance

data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired

information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and

maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance

manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the

Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE

Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

D263605132


2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.

3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name and contact information for Contractor.

6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.

7. Name and contact information for Architect.

8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.

9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals.

10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to

the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project

Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate

data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment,

and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic

PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file

size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file

names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names

used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and

subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so

that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily

navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening

file.

D263605 133


F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on

spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded

oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross

reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper

operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents,

and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume

number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.

Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components

of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification

Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic

software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use

as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual,

insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and

drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.

2. Emergency instructions.

3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.

4. Water leak.

5. Power failure.

D263605134


6. Water outage.

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and

similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification

of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and

equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams.

8. Piped system diagrams.

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

D263605 135


1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,

and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone

number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification

Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier

where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related

services.

D263605136


F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. Include procedures to follow and

required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source

information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance

and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and

warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or

schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required

lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and

service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts

identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources

of maintenance materials and related services.

D263605 137


G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides

an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies

indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or

component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,

identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data

applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where

the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or

systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to

ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project

Record Documents."

D263605138


G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and

maintenance documentation.


D263605 139

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,

including the following:

1. Record Drawings. B.

Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record

documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit (1) one set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Submittal:

1) Submit (1) one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2) Architect/Engineer will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and

Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation

varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record

D263605140


data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to

provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Locations and depths of underground utilities.

d. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

e. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

f. Actual equipment locations.

g. Duct size and routing.

h. Locations of concealed internal utilities.

i. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive.

j. Changes made following Architect's written orders.

k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

l. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use

personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up

record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted

from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

D263605 141


A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project

record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they

occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in

the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use

project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good

order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide

access to project record documents for Owner and Architect's/Engineer’s reference during

normal working hours.


D263605142

P.I.N. 7720.9M

HVAC WORK

Commercial Vehicle Inspection & Highway Safety Operations Facility Village & Town of Champlain Clinton County New York

D263605 143

Contract H TOC - 1

TOC - 1 Project No. SA9079-H

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

078400 Firestopping

079200 Joint Sealers

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

099103 Mechanical Painting

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING

230000 General Requirements for HVAC Systems

230004 Coordination with Other Trades

230510 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods

230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

230523 Valves

230529 Pipe Hangers and Supports

230550 Vibration Isolation

230552 Flexible Vibration Eliminators

230553 Pipe and Valve Identification

230554 Duct and Equipment Identification

230593 Cleaning and Testing

230594 Balancing of Systems

230719 Insulation

230923 Direct Digital Building Control System

232000 HVAC Piping

232001 Strainers

232003 Thermometers and Gauges

232006 Hydronic Specialties

232119 Glycol Injection System

232123 Pumps

233113 Metal Ducts

233300 Ductwork Accessories

233415 Centrifugal In-Line Fans

233516 Carbon Monoxide Exhaust System

233600 Air Terminal Units

234100 Air Filters

235123 Gas Venting

235216 Condensing Boilers

236200 Condensing Units

237313 Air Handling Units

237423 Gas-Fired Makeup Air Units

238126 Split-System Air-Conditioners

238200 Electric Unit Heaters

238239 Unit Heaters

238316 Hydronic Radiant Floor Heating System

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

P.I.N. 7720.9M

D263605144

078400 - 1 Project No. SA979-H

SECTION 078400

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

B. ASTM E 814 Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. UL Fire Resistance Directory: Product directory published yearly, withsupplements, by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., containing listings and

classifications in effect as of the published date for product categories covered by

UL.

B. Inchcape Directory of Listed Products: Product directory published yearly byInchcape Testing Services containing listings which reflect certifications granted

for materials, products, systems and equipment which have been tested by

Inchcape Testing Services to recognized governing standards.

C. Omega Point Laboratories Listings Directory: Product Directory publishedyearly by Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. containing listed building products,

materials, and assemblies which have been tested by Omega Point Laboratoriesto recognized governing standards.

D. Factory Mutual Approval Guide: Product directory published yearly, with

supplements, by Factory Mutual Research Corp., containing listed building

products, materials, and assemblies which have been tested by Factory MutualResearch Corp., to recognized governing standards.

E. F Rating: Prohibits flame passage through the system and requires acceptable

hose stream test performance.

F. T Rating: Prohibits flame passage through the system and requires the maximumtemperature rise on the unexposed surface of the wall or floor assembly, on the

penetrating item and on the fill material not to exceed 325 degrees F aboveambient, and requires acceptable hose stream test performance.

G. Company Field Advisor: An employee of the Company which lists and markets

the primary components of the system under their name who is certified in

writing by the Company to be technically qualified in design, installation, andservicing of the required products or an employee of an organization certified by

the foregoing Company to be technically qualified in design, installation and

servicing of the required products. Personnel involved solely in sales do notqualify.

D263605 145


1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Devices and materials shall meet the hourly fire resistance ratings required by the

Project as determined by UL 1479, or ASTM E 814 and be listed and detailed inthe UL Fire Resistance Directory, Inchcape Directory of Listed Products, Factory

Mutual Approval Guide, or the Omega Point Laboratories Listings Directory.

1. Exception: Where no listed designs exist that meet the requirements of a

specific project condition, submit details and manufacturer’s writtenrecommendations for a design meeting the requirements. Include

evidence of engineering judgment and extrapolation from listed designs.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Package: Submit the following items specified below the same time

as a package:

1. Product Data.

2. Samples.3. Quality Control Submittals.

4. Firestop Schedule.

B. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for eachfirestop device and material.

1. Indicate design number for each firestop proposed to be used which is

detailed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, Inchcape Directory of

Listed Products, Factory Mutual Approval Guide, or the Omega PointLaboratories Listings Directory.

2. State the specific locations where each firestop system is proposed to be

installed.

C. Samples: One of each product if requested.

D. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Design Data: Show details and include engineering information and

manufacturer’s written recommendations required under DesignRequirements Article for each proposed firestop if other than a design

detailed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, Inchcape Directory of

Listed Products, Factory Mutual Approval Guide, or the Omega Point

Laboratories Listings Directory.a. State the specific locations where each firestop is proposed to be

installed.

2. Installer’s Qualifications Data:a. Name of each person who will be performing the Work and their

employer’s name, business address and telephone number.

b. Names and addresses of 3 similar projects that each person has

worked on during the past 5 years.3. Company Field Advisor Data:

a. Name, business address and telephone number of Company

Field Advisor secured for the required services.b. Certified statement from the Company listing the qualifications

of the Company Field Advisor, and listing of services and each

product specifically listed for this Project for which Company

D263605146


Field Advisor is given authorization by the Company to render

advice.

E. Firestop Schedule: Submit schedule itemizing the following:

1. Manufacturer’s product reference numbers and/or drawing numbers.

2. UL, Inchcape Testing Services, Factory Mutual Research Corp., or

Omega Point Lab design number.

3. Location of firestop material.4. Penetrating Item Description/Limits: Material, size, insulated or

uninsulated, and combustibility.

5. Maximum allowable annular space or maximum size opening.6. Wall type construction.

7. Floor type construction.

8. Hourly Fire resistance rating of wall or floor.9. F rating.

10. T rating, if available.

NOTE: Firestop Schedule is for information only, and will not be acted on for

approval. Refer to Sample Firestop Schedule bound in Appendix.


A. Installer Qualifications: The persons installing the firestopping and their

supervisor shall be personally experienced in firestop work and shall have beenregularly employed by a company installing firestopping for a minimum of 3

years.

B. Pre-Installation Conference: Before the firestop work is scheduled to commence,a conference will be called by the Director’s Representative at the Site for the

purpose of reviewing the Contract Documents and discussing requirements for

the Work. The conference shall be attended by related trade Contractors (if any),

their qualified firestopping installers, and associated firestopping manufacturer’sCompany Field Advisors.

C. Container/Package Labels: Include manufacturer’s name and identifying product

number, date of manufacturer, lot number, shelf life (if applicable), qualifiedtesting and inspecting agency classification marking, curing time, and mixing

instructions for multi-component materials.

D. Company Field Advisor: Secure the services of a Company Field Advisor for the

following:

1. Render advice regarding suitability of firestopping materials and

methods.

2. Assist in completing firestop schedule.

3. Attend pre-installation conference.

E. Field-Constructed Sample Installations: Prior to installing firestopping, erect

sample installations for each type through-penetration firestop system indicated

in the Firestop Schedule to verify selections made and to establish standard ofquality and performance by which the firestopping work will be judged.

D263605 147


1. Build sample installations to comply with the following requirements,

using materials indicated for final installations.

a. Locate sample installations on site at locations where directed.b. Obtain Director’s Representative’s acceptance of sample

installations before start of firestopping installation.

c. Retain and maintain sample installations during construction inan undisturbed condition.

d. Accepted sample installations in an undisturbed condition at time

of substantial completion of Project may become part ofcompleted firestopping work.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver firestopping materials to the Site in original, new unopened containers or

packages bearing manufacturer’s printed labels.

B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to

moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, etc.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Temperature: Do not install firestopping materials when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by manufacturer of

firestopping materials.2. Humidity and Moisture: Do not install the Work of this Section under

conditions that are detrimental to the application, curing, and

performance of the materials.3. Ventilation: Provide sufficient ventilation wherever firestopping

materials are installed in enclosed spaces. Follow manufacturer’s

recommendations.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Leave exposed those firestopping installations that are to be concealed behind

other construction until the Director’s Representative has examined each

installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FIRESTOPPING-GENERAL

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices, Forming Materials, And Fill, Void or

Cavity Materials: As listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, Inchcape

Directory of Listed Products, Factory Mutual Approval Guide, or the OmegaPoint Laboratories Listings Directory.

1. For firestopping exposed to moisture, furnish products that do not

deteriorate when exposed to this condition.

D263605148


2. For firestopping systems exposed to view, furnish products with flame-

spread values of less than 25 and smoke developed values less than 50,

as determined per ASTM E 84.3. For penetrations for piping services below ambient temperature, furnish

moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

4. For penetrations involving insulated piping, furnish through-penetrationfirestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

B. Accessories: Components required to install fill materials as recommended by

the firestopping manufacturer for particular approved fire rated system.

C. Identification Labels:

1. Furnished by fire stopping manufacturer of suitable material for

permanent field identification of through-penetration firestops.

2. Identify the following:a. “WARNING - FIRESTOP MATERIAL”.

b. Company Name.

c. Product Catalog number.

d. F rating.e. T rating, if available.

3. Field fabricated labels are not acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine existing through-penetrations of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings androofs in the Work areas.

B. Where firestopping is missing or not intact, submit a written report to the

Director’s Representative describing the existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean out openings immediately before installation of through-penetration

firestopping. Comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer andthe following requirements:

1. Remove foreign materials from surfaces of openings, and from

penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.

2. Clean opening and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfacescapable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose

particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.

B. Protection:

1. Protect surfaces adjacent to through-penetration firestops with non-

staining removable masking tape or other suitable covering to prevent

firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposedupon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently

D263605 149


stained or damaged by such contact or that would be caused by cleaning

methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials.

C. Substrate Priming:

1. Prime substrates in accordance with the firestopping manufacturer’s

printed installation instructions using recommended products and

methods.

2. Do not allow primer to spill or migrate onto adjoining exposed surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPS

A. Use through-penetration firestop devices, forming materials, and fill, void or

cavity materials to form through-penetration firestops to prevent the passage offlame, and limit temperature rise of the unexposed surface as detailed in the UL

Fire Resistance Directory, Inchcape Directory of Listed Products, Factory Mutual

Approval Guide, or the Omega Point Laboratories Listings Directory.

1. Where applicable design is not detailed in the Directories, use formingmaterials and fill, void or cavity material to form through-penetration

firestop in accordance with approved printed details and installation

instructions from the company producing the forming materials and fill,void or cavity material.

2. If the construction type(s) of the building cannot be determined, provide

firestopping with fire resistance ratings as specified in the Building Code

of New York State, Tables 720.1(1), 720.1(2), 720.1(3), and 302.3.2.

B. Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F ratings which shall equal or

exceed the fire resistance rating of the penetrated building construction.

C. Provide through-penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to Fratings, at floors where the following conditions exist:

1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside the wall

cavities.

2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire resistiveshaft enclosures.

3. Through-penetration firestop systems protecting floor penetrations

require a T-rating of at least 1 hour, but not less than the required floorfire-resistance rating.

D. Firestop through-penetrations of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and roofs.

E. Firestop through-penetrations associated with the new Work.

F. Firestop through-penetration of partitions identified on the Construction WorkDrawings as smoke partitions and fire rated assemblies.

G. Firestop through-penetrations of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and roofs in

accordance with the fire resistance rating assigned to the walls, partitions, floors,ceilings, and roofs on the Construction Work Drawings.

H. In areas where through-penetration items have been installed before the

construction work, firestop the through-penetration items after the construction

D263605150


work has been completed. Furnish drawings or written information to the

Construction Work Contractor covering the provisions to be made in the

construction work to enable firestopping of the through-penetration items.

I. Permanently affix label at each firestop. Use adhesive compatible with surface

construction at firestop location.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to penetrations by methodsand cleaning materials recommended by manufacturers of firestopping products

and of products in which penetrations occur.

B. Remove masking tape as soon as practical so as not to disturb the firestopping’sbond with substrate.

C. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with

contaminating substances, or damage resulting from adjacent Work.

D. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately, and

install new materials as specified in firestop schedule.

END OF SECTION

D263605 151


SECTION 079200

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions foreach product specified except miscellaneous materials.

B. Samples:

1. Sealants: One pint or standard tube.

2. Joint Fillers: 24 inch long full section.3. Gaskets: 24 inch long full section.

4. Joint Primer/Sealer/Conditioners: One pint.

5. Backer Rods: 24 inch long full section.6. Bond Breaker Tape: 24 inch long full section.

C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Installer's Qualifications Data: Affidavit required under Quality

Assurance Article.2. Company Field Advisor Data: Name, business address, and telephone

number of Company Field Advisor.


A. Installer's Qualifications: The persons installing the sealants and their supervisorshall be personally experienced in the installation of sealants and shall have been

regularly employed by a company engaged in the installation of sealants for a

minimum of two years.

1. Furnish to the Director the names and addresses of five similar projects

which the foregoing people have worked on during the past two years.

2. Furnish a letter from the sealant manufacturer, stating that the foregoing

people are authorized to install the manufacturer's sealant materials andthat the manufacturer's specifications are applicable to the requirements

of this Project.

B. Container Labels: Include manufacturer's name, trade name of product, kind ofmaterial, federal specification number (if applicable), expiration date (if

applicable), and packaging date or batch number.

C. Test and validate sealants used for exterior weathersealing per the Sealant

Waterproofing Restoration Institute (SWRI).

D. Warranties:

1. Silicone sealants: 20 years Weatherseal Warranty.

2. Polyurethane or Silicone: 5 year Weatherseal Warranty.

3. Sealants for Granite, Marble and Limestone: 20 year Non-StainWarranty.

D263605152




1. Temperature: Unless otherwise approved or recommended in writing by

the sealant manufacturer, do not install sealants at temperatures below 40degrees F or above 85 degrees F for non silicone sealants and below

minus 20 degrees F or above 125 degrees F for silicone sealants.

2. Humidity and Moisture: Do not install the Work of this section underconditions that are detrimental to the application, curing, and

performance of the materials.

3. Ventilation: Provide sufficient ventilation wherever sealants, primers,and other similar materials are installed in enclosed spaces. Follow

manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Protection:

1. Protect all surfaces adjacent to sealants with non-staining removable tapeor other approved covering to prevent soiling or staining.

2. Protect all other surfaces in the Work area with tarps, plastic sheets, or

other approved coverings to prevent defacement from droppings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SEALANTS

A. Type 1 Sealant, any of the following generic types: High movement vertical

expansion joints.

1. One-part, low-modulus silicone sealant: Dow Corning 790, DowCorning 791,Dow Corning 795, General Electric Silpruf, Pecora 864,

Pecora 890, Pecora 890FTS.

2. One-part, non-sag silicone or polyurethane sealant: Bostik Chem-Calk

900, Bostik Chem-Calk 915, Bostik Chem-Calk 916 Textured, BostikChem-Calk 2020, Pecora Dynatrol I, Sika Sikaflex 1a, Sonneborn

Sonolastic NP I, or Tremco DyMonic (not SWRI), Dow Corning

Contractors Weatherproofing Sealant (CWS), Dow Corning ConcreteSealant (CCS), Pecora 895.

3. Two-part, non-sag silicone or polyurethane sealant: Bostik Chem-Calk

500 (not SRWI), Pecora Dynatrol II, Dow Corning CWS or CCS.

B. Type 1A Sealant: Pavements, walks and curbs.

1. One-part mildew resistant silicone sealant; Dow Corning 789, Dow

Corning Tub and Ceramic, Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicon, General Electric

Sanitary SCS1700, or Bostik silicone Rubber Bathroom Caulk.

C. Type 1D Sealant: Interior wet areas (bathrooms, showers)

1. One-part, mildew resistant silicone sealant; Dow Corning 786, Dow

Corning Tub and Ceramic, Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone, General

Electric Sanitary SCS1700, or Bostik Silicone Rubber Bathroom Caulk.

D. Type 3 Sealant: One-part butyl rubber sealant; Pecora BC-158, PTI 707, or

Bostik Chem-Calk 300 (not SWRI).

D263605 153


E. Type 4 Sealant: Use in high temperature areas.

1. One-part silicone sealant for high temperatures; Bostik 9732 High Temp

Red, Dow Corning Silastic 736 RTV, Dow Corning High Temp, GeneralElectric RTV 106.

F. Pre-formed Sealant: Preformed paintable sealant strips of open cell,

compressible urethane foam, saturated with non-drying, non-staining, and non-

migrating butylene compound.

G. Sealant Colors: For exposed materials provide color as indicated or, if not

indicated, as selected by the Director from manufacturer's standard colors. For

concealed materials, provide the natural color which has the best overallperformance characteristics.

2.02 JOINT FILLERS

A. Self-Expanding Cork Joint Filler: Resilient, non-extruding type pre-molded corkunits; ASTM D 1752, Type III.

B. Cork Joint Filler: Resilient, non-extruding type pre-molded cork units; ASTM D

1752, Type II.

C. Closed Cell Neoprene Joint Filler: ASTM D 1056, Class SC (oil resistant andmedium swell), 2 to 5 psi compression deflection.

D. Closed Cell Polyurethane Joint Filler: Resilient, compressible, semi-rigid; W.R.

Meadows Ceramar or A.C. Horn Closed Cell Plastic Foam Filler, Code 5401.

2.03 GASKETS

A. Adhesive Closed-Cell PVC Gasket: Closed-cell, flexible, self adhesive, non-

extruding, polyvinylchloride foam gaskets; ASTM D 1667.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Joint Primer/Sealer/Conditioner: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer

for the particular joint surface materials and conditions.

B. Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of expanded, extruded polyethylene.

C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene or other plastic tape as recommended by the

sealant manufacturer; non-bonding to sealant; self adhesive where applicable.

D. Cleaning Solvents: Oil free solvents as recommended by the sealantmanufacturer. Do not use re-claimed solvents.

E. Masking Tape: Removable paper or fiber tape, self-adhesive, non-staining.

D263605154


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine all joint surfaces for conditions that may be detrimental to theperformance of the completed Work. Do not proceed until satisfactory

corrections have been made.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant and other materialsspecified in this Section.

1. Remove all loose materials, dirt, dust, rust, oils and other foreign matter

that will impair the performance of materials installed under this Section.2. Remove lacquers, protective coatings and similar materials from joint

faces with manufacturer's recommended solvents.

3. Do not limit cleaning of joint surfaces to solvent wiping. Use methodssuch as grinding, acid etching or other approved and manufacturer's

recommended means, if required, to clean the joint surfaces, assuring

that the sealant materials will obtain positive and permanent adhesion.

B. Set joint fillers at proper depth and position as required for installation of bondbreakers, backer rods, and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps between the ends

of joint filler units.

1. Smooth Edged Joints: For joints between two concrete slabs or where

new concrete abuts smooth edged materials use either cork joint filler orclosed cell polyurethane joint filler.

2. Irregular Edged Joints: For joints where new concrete abuts granite

curbs or other irregular edges use closed cell polyurethane joint filler.

C. Priming Joint Surfaces:

1. Prime joints which are to receive Type 1A and 1B Sealants.

2. Prime joints other than those above if so recommended by the

manufacturer's printed instructions.3. Do not allow the primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.

3.03 JOINT BACKING INSTALLATION

A. Install bond breaker tape in relaxed condition as it comes off the roll. Do notstretch the tape. Lap individual lengths.

B. Install backer rod of sufficient size to fill the joint width at all points in a

compressed state. Compress backer rod at the widest part of the joint by a

minimum of 25 percent. Do not cut or puncture the surface skin of the rod.

3.04 SEALANT INSTALLATION

A. Except as shown or specified otherwise, install sealants in accordance with the

manufacturer's printed instructions.

D263605 155


B. Install sealants with ratchet hand gun or other approved mechanical gun. Wheregun application is impractical, install sealant by knife or by pouring as

applicable.

C. Types 2 and 2A Sealants: If low temperature makes application difficult, preheat

sealants using manufacturer's recommended heating equipment.

D. Type 4 Sealant: Allow sealant to cure for a minimum of 3 days beforebackfilling.

E. Finishing: Tool all vertical, non-sag sealants so as to compress the sealant,

eliminating all air voids and providing a neat smoothly finished joint. Provideslightly concave joint surface, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the

manufacturer.

1. Use tool wetting agents as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test Samples:

1. Where directed, for each 1000 linear feet of joint installed, cut out and

carefully remove a 6 inch long sample of the undisturbed sealant and

joint backer material from the newly installed Work. Remove thesamples in the presence of the Director's Representative who will retain

them for evaluating and testing.

2. Reseal cut out areas with the same materials.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Immediately remove misapplied sealant and droppings from metal surfaces with

solvents and wiping cloths. On other materials, remove misapplied sealant and

droppings by methods and materials recommended in writing by themanufacturer of the sealant material.

B. After sealants are applied and before skin begins to form on sealant, remove all

masking and other protection and clean up remaining defacement caused by theWork.

END OF SECTION

D263605156


SECTION 099103

MECHANICAL PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. The word “paint” in this Section refers to substrate cleaners, fillers, sealers,primers, undercoats, enamels and other first, intermediate, last or finish coatings.

B. The word “primer” in this Section refers to substrate cleaners, fillers, sealers,

undercoats, and other first or intermediate coats beneath the last or finish coating.

C. The words “finish paint” in this Section refers to the last or final coat andprevious coats of the same material or product directly beneath the last or final

coat.

D. Finish Paint Systems: Finish paint and primers applied over the same substrateshall be considered a paint system of products manufactured or recommended by

the finish coat manufacturer.

1. Finish paint products shall meet or exceed specified minimum physical

properties.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Painting Schedule: Cross-referenced Painting Schedule listing all exterior and

interior substrates to be painted and specified finish paint type designation;product name and manufacturer, recommended primers and product numbers,

and finish paint color designation for each substrate to be painted.

1. Designate exterior substrates by building name and number, substrate to

be painted and surface location.2. Designate interior substrates by building name and number, floor, room

name and number, and surface to be painted.

B. Product Data Sheets: Manufacturer’s published product data sheets describingthe following for each finish paint product to be applied:

1. Percent solids by weight and volume, solvent, vehicle, weight per gallon,

ASTM D 523 gloss/reflectance angle, recommended wet and dry film

thickness, volatile organic compound (VOC) content in lbs/gallon,product use limitations and environmental restrictions, substrate surface

preparation methods, directions and precautions for mixing and thinning,

recommended application methods, square foot area coverage per gallon,

storage instructions, and shelf-life expiration date.2. Manufacturer’s recommended primer for each finish paint product and

substrate to be painted.

3. Manufacturer’s complete range of available colors for each finish paintproduct to be applied.

D263605 157


C. Finish Paint Type Samples: Two finish paint samples applied over recom-

mended primers for each substrate to be painted.

1. Samples shall be in the designated color and specified ASTM D 523reflectance.

2. Label each sample with the following information:

a. Project number and Painting Schedule designation describing

substrates and locations represented by the sample.b. Finish paint and primer manufacturer, product names and

numbers, finish paint color and reflectance.

3. Leave a 1 inch wide exposed strip of unpainted substrate and each coatof primer and finish paint.

4. Sample Sizes:

a. Sheet Metals: 4 inch by 8 inch flat sheets.b. Bar and Tubular Metals: 8 inch long bars or tubular stock.

D. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Test Reports: Furnish certified test results from an independent testing

laboratory, showing that products submitted comply with thespecifications, when requested by the Director’s Representative

2. Certificates: Furnish certificates of compliance required under

QUALITY ASSURANCE Article.


A. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) Regulatory Requirements: Chapter III of

Title 6 of the official compilation of Codes, Rules and Regulations of the State of

New York (Title 6 NYCRR), Part 205 Architectural Surface Coatings.

1. Certificate of Compliance: List of each paint product to be delivered andinstalled. List shall include written certification stating that each paint

product listed complies with the VOC regulatory requirements in effect

at the time of job site delivery and installation.

B. Container Labels: Label each product container with paint manufacturer’s name,

product name and number, color name and number, thinning and application

instructions, date of manufacture, shelf-life expiration date, required surfacepreparations, recommended coverage per gallon, wet and dry film thickness,

drying time, and clean up procedures.

C. Field Examples:

1. Prior to on-site painting, at locations designated by the Director’sRepresentative, apply field examples of each paint type to be applied.

2. Field examples to be applied on actual substrates to be painted and shall

duplicate earlier approved paint samples.

a. Field Example Minimum Wet and Dry Film Thickness: Asindicated on approved product data sheet.

b. Application: Apply each coat in a smooth uniform wet mil

thickness without brush marks, laps, holidays, runs, stains,cloudiness, discolorations and other surface imperfections.

1) Leave a specified exposed width of each previous coat

beneath each subsequent coat of finish paint and primer.

D263605158


c. Use of Field Examples: Field examples shall serve as a quality

control standard for acceptance or rejection of painting Work to

be done under this Section.3. Field Example Sizes:

a. Mechanical Equipment: 20 square feet with 1 foot wide strips.

b. Linear Substrate Examples: 20 lineal feet with 12 inch longstrips.

4. Do not begin applying paints represented by field examples until

examples have been reviewed and approved by the Director’sRepresentative.

a. Protect and maintain approved field examples until all painting

work represented by the example has been completed and

approved.

D. Compatibility of Paint Materials: Primers and intermediate paints shall be

products manufactured or recommended by the finish paint manufacturer.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the Site in original, unopened containers andcartons bearing manufacturer’s printed labels. Do not deliver products which

have exceeded their shelf life, are in open or damaged containers or cartons, orare not properly labeled as specified.

B. Storage and Handling: Store products in a dry, well ventilated area in accordance

with manufacturer’s published product data sheets. Storage location shall have

an ambient air temperature between 45 degrees F and 90 degrees F.



1. Ambient Air Temperature, Relative Humidity, Ventilation, and Surface

Temperature: Comply with paint manufacturer’s published product datasheet or other printed product instructions.

2. If paint manufacturer does not provide environmental requirements, use

the following:a. Ambient Air Temperature: Between 45 degrees F and .75

degrees F.

b. Relative Humidity: Below 75 percent.

c. Ventilation: Maintain the painting environment free from fumesand odors throughout the Work of this Section.

d. Surface Temperature: At least 5 degrees F above the surface

dewpoint temperature.3. Maintain environmental requirements throughout the drying period.

B. The following items are not to be field painted unless otherwise specified, noted

or directed:

1. Stainless steel, chrome plated or monel surfaces.2. Piping or ductwork to be insulated.

3. Insulation on concealed piping and concealed ductwork.

4. Insulated items covered with aluminum, stainless steel, or PVC jacketing.

D263605 159


5. Insulation on piping in walk-in and non walk-in tunnels.

6. Uninsulated mechanical equipment with factory applied baked on enamel

finish.7. Mechanical equipment with enameled steel insulated jacket.

8. Prefabricated multi-wall chimneys.

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide extra finish paint materials, from the same production run as paints to beapplied, in the following quantities for each color installed:

1. Paint Types EAL and IAL: Two gallons.

2. Color Coded Paints: One gallon, each type.3. Other Paint Types: One gallon, each type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PAINT MANUFACTURERS

A. Where noted, the following finish paint manufacturers produce the paint typesspecified.

1. Ameron Protective Coatings, 201 Berry St., Brea, CA 92621, (800) 926-

3766.

2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., P.O. Box 3001, Lancaster, PA 17604,(800) 866-5639.

3. Benjamin Moore and Co., 51 Chestnut Ridge Rd., Montvale, NJ 07645,

(201) 573-9600.

4. ICI Dulux Paints, 4000 Dupont Cr., Louisville, KY 40207, (800) 984-5444.

5. Inorganic Coatings, Inc., 500 Lapp Rd., Malvern, PA 19355, (800) 345-

0531.6. Insl-X, 50 Holt Drive, P.O. Box 694, Stony Point, NY 10980, (845) 786-

5000.

7. PPG Architectural Finishes, One PPG Plaza, Pittsburgh, PA 15272, (800)441-9695.

8. Rust-oleum Corporation, 11 Hawthorn Pky., Vernon Hills, IL 60061,

(800) 553-8444.

9. Sherwin-Williams Co., Cleveland, OH 44101; 1-800-321-8194.10. Valspar Corp., 1401 Severn St., Baltimore, MD 21230, (800) 638-7756.

11. Wm. Zinsser & Co., 39 Belmont Dr., Somerset, NJ 08875-1285, (908)

469-8100.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Cleaning Solvents: Low toxicity with flash point in excess of 100 degrees F.

B. Color Pigments: Pure, nonfading, finely ground pigments with at least 99

percent passing a 325 mesh sieve.

1. Use lime-proof color pigments on masonry, concrete and plaster.

2. Use exterior pigments in exterior paints.

D263605160


C. Galvanizing Compound, Cold: Single component compound with 93 percent

pure zinc in the dried film and meeting the requirements of DOD-P-21035A

(NAVY).

D. Masking Tape: Removable paper or fiber tape, self-adhesive and nonstaining.

E. Metal Filler: Polyester resin base autobody filler.

F. Mineral Spirits: Low odor type recommended by finish paint manufacturer.

G. Paint Stripper: As recommended by finish paint manufacturer.

H. Stain Blocker, Primer-Sealer: As recommended by finish paint manufacturer.

I. Turpentine: ASTM D 13.

2.03 FINISH PAINT TYPES

A. Physical Properties:

1. Specified percent solids by weight and volume, pigment by weight, wet

and dry film thickness per coat, and weight per gallon are minimumphysical properties of acceptable materials.

a. Opaque Pigmented Paints: Physical properties specified are for

white titanium dioxide base before color pigments are added.

b. Specified minimum wet and dry film thickness per coat are fordetermining acceptable finish paint products. Minimum wet and

dry film thickness per coat to be applied shall comply with

approved finish paint manufacturer’s product data sheets.2. Gloss or Reflectance: The following ASTM D 523 specified light levels

and angles of reflectance:

a. Flat: Below 15 at 85 degrees.b. Eggshell: Between 5 and 20 at 60 degrees.

c. Satin: Between 15 and 35 at 60 degrees.

d. Semigloss: Between 30 and 65 at 60 degrees.

e. Gloss: Over 65 at 60 degrees.

B. Exterior Finish Paint Types:

1. Paint Type EAL-3: Exterior Acrylic Latex, Gloss Enamel.

a. Solids by Weight: 40.0 percent.

b. Solids by Volume: 32.0 percent.c. Solvent: Water.

d. Vehicle: 100 percent acrylic resin.

e. Weight per Gallon: 10.0 lbs.f. Wet Film Thickness: 3.4 mils.

g. Dry Film Thickness: 1.2 mils.

h. Manufacturers: Benjamin Moore, PPG, Sherwin- Williams.

2. Paint Type ESP: Exterior Steel Zinc-Rich Primer, Flat.a. Solids by Weight: 79.0 percent.

b. Solids by Volume: 68.0 percent.

c. Pigment by Weight: 90.0 percent zinc.d. Solvent: Water.

D263605 161


e. Weight per Gallon: 24.6 lbs.

f. Dry Film Thickness: 3.0 mils if finish coated, 4.0 mils if not

finish coated.g. Manufacturers: Ameron Protective Coatings, Inorganic Coatings,

Valspar.

C. Interior Finish Paint Types:

1. Paint Type IAL-3: Interior Acrylic Latex, Semigloss Enamel.a. Solids by Weight: 49.0 percent.

b. Solids by Volume: 35.0 percent.

c. Solvent: Water.d. Vehicle: Vinyl acrylic resin.

e. Weight per Gallon: 10.0 lbs.

f. Wet Film Thickness: 3.8 mils.g. Dry Film Thickness: 1.2 mils.

h. Manufacturers: Benjamin Moore, ICI Dulux, Sherwin-Williams.

2. Paint Type IAL-4: Interior Acrylic Latex, Gloss Enamel.

a. Solids by Weight: 40.0 percent.b. Solids by Volume: 32.0 percent.

c. Solvent: Water.

d. Vehicle: Vinyl acrylic resin.e. Weight per Gallon: 10.0 lbs.

f. Wet Film Thickness: 3.4 mils.

g. Dry Film Thickness: 1.2 mils.h. Manufacturers: Benjamin Moore, PPG, Sherwin-Williams.

3. Paint Type ISP: Interior Steel Primer, Flat.

a. Solids by Weight: 72.0 percent.

b. Solids by Volume: 52.0 percent.c. Vehicle: Alkyd resin.

d. Weight per Gallon: 11.4 lbs.

e. Wet Film Thickness: 3.0 mils.f. Dry Film Thickness: 1.5 mils.

g. Manufacturers: PPG, Sherwin-Williams, Valspar.

D. Other Finish Paint Types:

1. Paint Type EIC: Elastomeric Insulation Coating, Acrylic Latex.a. As manufactured or recommended by insulation manufacturer.

1) Armstrong Armaflex Insulation: Use WB Armaflex

Finish.

2. Paint Type CTE: Coal Tar Epoxy.a. Solids by Volume: 77.0 percent.

b. Vehicle: Polyamide epoxy.

c. Weight per Gallon: 10.8 lbs.d. Wet Film Thickness: 10.4 mils.

e. Dry Film Thickness: 8.0 mils.

f. Manufacturers: Benjamin Moore, Insl-X, Sherwin-Williams.

E. Colors: Provide paint colors to be selected by the Director from finish paint

manufacturers available color selections.

1. Approved finish paint manufacturers to match designated colors of other

manufacturers where colors are shown on contract documents.

D263605162


2. Color Coding: Apply exposed insulated and uninsulated piping finish

paints in the following colors when piping is located in the following

applicable rooms or spaces:a. Applicable Rooms and Spaces: Mechanical Equipment Rooms

and Boiler Rooms.

b. New Facility Buildings: Color code as follows:1) Air, Compressed: Safety Green.

2) Air, Control: Safety Green.

3) Air, Medical: Safety yellow.4) Ammonia, Gas and Liquid: Safety Yellow.

5) Brine: Safety Green.

6) Carbon Dioxide: Safety Red.

7) Dangerous Materials: Safety Yellow.8) Engine Exhausts: Safety Yellow.

9) Fire Protection Systems; Fire Standpipe, Sprinkler, and

Wet Chemical Systems: Safety Red.10) Flue Gases: Safety Yellow.

11) Gas, Natural and Manufactured: Safety Yellow.

12) Gasoline: Safety Yellow.13) Glycol and Glycol/Water Mixtures: Safety Yellow.

14) Nitrous Oxide: Safety Blue.

15) Oils, Fuel and Lubrications: Safety Yellow.

16) Oxygen: Safety Green.a) Pneumatic Tube System s: Safety Green.

17) Refrigerants: Safety Yellow.

18) Sewers, Storm and Sanitary: Safety Yellow.19) Steam; Supply, Condensate Return and Exhaust: Safety

Yellow.

20) Vacuum: Safety Green.

21) Vent, Atmospheric: Safety Green.22) Water, Up to 140 Degrees Fahrenheit: Safety Green.

23) Water, 141 Degrees and Above: Safety Yellow.

c. Other Colors:1) Exposed Ductwork: Gray.

2) Insulated and Uninsulated Equipment: Gray.

a) Do not paint equipment with factory finish paint.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be prepared, primed, or painted for compliance with contract

documents, required environmental conditions, manufacturer’s product data

sheets, product label instructions and other written requirements.

1. Do not begin any phase of the work without first checking and verifying

that surfaces and environmental conditions are acceptable for such work

and that any earlier phase deficiencies and discrepancies have been

properly corrected.a. The commencement of new work shall be interpreted to mean

acceptance of surfaces to be affected.

D263605 163


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Cover and protect surfaces to be painted, adjacent surfaces not to be

painted, and removed furnishings and equipment from existing paint removals,airborne sanding particles, cleaning fluids and paint spills using suitable drop

cloths, barriers and other protective devices.

1. Adjacent exterior surface protections include roofs, walls, landscaping,

driveways and walkways. Interior protections include floors, walls,furniture, furnishings and electronic equipment.

2. Remove and replace removable hardware, lighting fixtures, telephone

equipment, other devices and cover plates over concealed openings insubstrates to be painted.

a. Cover and neatly mask permanently installed hardware, lighting

fixtures, cover plates and other devices which cannot be removedand are not scheduled for painting.

3. Schedule and coordinate surface preparations so as not to interfere with

work of other trades or allow airborne sanding dust particle to fall on

freshly painted surfaces.4. Provide adequate natural or mechanical ventilation to allow surfaces to

be prepared and painted in accordance with product manufacturer’s

instructions and applicable regulations.5. Provide and maintain “Wet Paint” signs, temporary barriers and other

protective devices necessary to protect prepared and freshly painted

surfaces from damages until Work has been accepted.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with specifications, paint

manufacturer’s approved product data sheets and printed label instructions. In

the event of conflicting instructions or directions, the more stringent require-

ments shall apply.

1. Cleaners: Use only approved products manufactured or recommended

by finish paint manufacturer. Unless otherwise recommended by cleaner

manufacturer, thoroughly rinse with clean water to remove surface

contaminants and cleaner residue.

C. Surfaces:

1. Existing Painted Substrates: Thoroughly clean to remove dirt, soot,

grease, mildew, chalkiness and stains using finish paint manufacturer’s

recommended cleaners.a. Remove loose, peeling, cracked and blistered paint by chipping,

scraping, and sanding smooth with medium and fine sandpaper.

b. Completely strip and remove existing paint films where shownon the drawings using approved methods. When approved,

chemical strippers to be applied and rinsed or removed in

accordance with product manufacturer’s printed instructions.c. Fill surface holes and depressions with finish paint manu-

facturer’s recommended filler and sand smooth to adjacent

undisturbed edges.

d. Touch-up bare spots on previously painted surfaces with finishpaint manufacturer’s recommended primer.

e. Sand existing semigloss and gloss paint surfaces to a uniform

smooth dull finish before painting.

D263605164


f. Fill and sand smooth existing paint surface damages,

depressions, ridges and other imperfections that will remain

visible after new paints have been applied.2. Steel Substrates:

a. Prepare steel in accordance with Structural Steel Painting

Council (SSPC) standards:1) SSPC-SP1: Remove oil, grease, dirt, soil, salts, and

other surface contaminants using appropriate cleaning

solvents and clean rags, vapor, alkali, emulsion, or steamand adequate ventilation.

2) SSPC-SP2: Remove loose rust, mill scale, and paint to

the degree specified by hand chipping, scraping,

sanding, and wire-brushing.3) SSPC-SP3: Remove loose rust, mill scale, and paint to

the degree specified by power-tool chipping, descaling,

sanding, wire-brushing, and grinding.4) SSPC-SP5: Remove all visible rust, mill scale, paint,

and foreign matter by white-metal blast cleaning with

wheel or nozzle (dry or wet) using sand, grit, or shot.5) SSPC-SP6: Remove all visible rust, mill scale, paint,

and foreign matter by commercial blast cleaning until at

least two-thirds of each element of the surface is free of

all visible residues.6) SSPC-SP10: Near white blast cleaning for heat resistant

paints.

3. Galvanized Metal:a. Allow new galvanized surfaces to weather as long as possible

before cleaning. Remove surface contaminants using clean rags

and petroleum spirits.

b. Remove “white rust” using appropriate solvent and, if necessary,wire brushing or sanding.

c. Use appropriate Structural Steel Painting Council Standard

SSPC-SP1 to SSPC-SP6 to prepare steel substrates wheregalvanized protection has been removed.

4. Aluminum:

a. Non-corroded Surfaces: Rub with fine steel wool and wipe cleanwith mineral spirits.

b. Corroded Surfaces: Sand smooth, rub with fine steel wool and

wipe clean with mineral spirits.

D. Painting Material Preparations:

1. Prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer’s approved

product data sheets and printed label instructions.

a. Stir materials before and during application for a consistent

mixture of density. Remove container surface paint films beforestirring and mixing.

b. Slightly tint first opaque finish coat where primer and finish

coats are the same color.c. Do not thin paints unless allowed and directed to do so in writing

within limits stated on approved product data sheets.

D263605 165

099103 - 10 Project No. SA979-H

3.03 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Exposed Items: Unless otherwise specified, apply the following paint types

with manufacturer’s recommended primers on the following exterior substrates:

1. Paint Type EAL-3:

a. All uninsulated piping and ductwork.

b. All pipe, ductwork, and equipment hangers, supports, and

accessories.2. Paint Type EIC:

a. All flexible elastomeric foam insulation on all piping, ductwork,

and equipment.

B. Interior Exposed Items: Unless otherwise specified, apply the following paint types

with manufacturer’s recommended primers on the following interior substrates.

1. Paint Type IAL-3:

a. All insulated and uninsulated piping and ductwork.b. All pipe, ductwork, equipment hangers, supports and

accessories.

c. All hot and cold service equipment insulation.d. All direct cast iron radiators.

2. Paint Type IAL-4, on shop or factory primed substrates:

a. All uninsulated mechanical equipment.

b. All cast iron fixture brackets.c. Metal fabrication in finished spaces.

3. Paint Type EIC:

a. All flexible elastomeric foam insulation on piping, ductwork,and equipment.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. Environmental Conditions:

1. Water-based Paints: Apply when surface temperatures will be 50 degreesFahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit throughout the drying period.

2. Other Paints: Apply when surface temperatures will be 45 degrees

Fahrenheit to 95 degrees Fahrenheit throughout the drying period.3. Apply exterior paints during daylight hours free from rain, snow, fog and

mist when ambient air conditions are more than 5 degrees above the

surface dewpoint temperature and relative humidity less than 85 percent.

a. When exterior painting is allowed or required during nondaylighthours, provide portable outdoor weather recording station with

constant printout showing hourly to diurnal air temperature,

humidity, and dewpoint temperature.4. Exterior Cold Weather Protection: Provide heated enclosures necessary

to maintain specified temperature and relative humidity conditions

during paint application and drying periods.

B. Application: Apply approved paints where specified, or shown on the drawings,

and to match approved field examples.

1. Applicators: Brushes, rollers or spray equipment recommended by the

paint manufacturer and appropriate for the location and surface area to bepainted.

D263605166

099103 - 11 Project No. SA979-H

a. Approved minimum wet and dry film thicknesses for each coat

shall be as recommended on approved product data sheets and

the same for each application method and substrate.

C. Paint Type Coats To Be Applied: Unless otherwise specified, or recommended

by finish paint manufacturer’s product data sheet and approved by submittal, the

number of coats to be applied for each paint type are as follows:

1. Acrylic Latex Paint Types EAL and IAL:a. New Unpainted Surfaces: Apply 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of

finish paint.

b. Existing Painted Surfaces:1) Apply 2 coats of finish paint when existing paint has a

lower gloss.

2) Apply one coat of primer and 2 finish coats whenexisting paint has a higher gloss.

c. Paint Type IAL: Provide mildewcide additive for bathrooms,

kitchens, janitor closets, laundry rooms, restrooms and other wet

or damp areas.2. Paint Types ESP and ISP: Apply 1 coat.

a. Allow paint to dry one week and test adhesion. Remove and

replace defective primer where adhesion failures occur.3. Other Paint Types: Apply in accordance with paint manufacturer’s

product data sheets.


A. Paint Samples: Assist the Director’s Representative in obtaining random onequart paint samples for testing at any time during the Work.

1. Notify the Director’s Representative upon delivery of paints to the Site.

2. Furnish new one quart metal paint containers with tight fitting lids andsuitable labels for marking.

a. Furnish labor to thoroughly mix paint before sampling and

provide assistance with sampling when required.

3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Reinstall removed items after painting has been completed.

1. Restore damaged items to a condition equal to or better than when

removed. Replace damaged items that cannot be restored.

B. Touch up and restore damaged finish paints. Touch up and restoration paintcoats are in addition to the number of specified finish paint coats.

C. Remove spilled, splashed, or spattered paint without marring, staining or

damaging the surface. Restore damaged surfaces to the satisfaction of theDirector’s representative.

D. Remove temporary barriers, masking tape, and other protective coverings upon

completion of painting, cleaning and restoration work.

END OF SECTION

D263605 167


SECTION 230000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for allHVAC work. The administrative and procedural requirements included in this

Section are to expand the requirements specified elsewhere.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and services necessary for and incidentalto completion of all work as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified

herein. This includes all incidentals, equipment, appliances, services, hoisting,

scaffolding, supports, sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, tools, supervision, labor,consumable items, fees, licenses, etc., necessary to provide complete and

workable systems.

1.03 DRAWING USE AND INTERPRETATION

A. Unless indicated by specific dimensions, drawings are meant to be diagrammatic.Exact equipment locations and routing of utilities shall be governed by field

conditions and/or Director’s Representative’s instructions.

B. All dimensions which relate to the building shall be taken as constructionprogresses. All errors incurred as result of the failure to check or verify

dimensions, measurements, etc., shall be corrected.

C. The drawings show the general arrangement of utilities, equipment, andaccessories. Drawings do not indicate all offsets, fittings, accessories, and

changes in elevation, which may be necessary. Make all changes in equipment,

locations, etc., to accommodate the work and to avoid obstacles at no increase incontract price. Provide offsets, fittings, and accessories as may be required to

meet such conditions.

1.04 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

A. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding thestyle of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases

when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are

explained as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other

Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be

interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be

interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted asplural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the

context of the Contract Documents indicates.

D263605168


2. Streamlined Language: The Specifications generally use the imperative

mood and streamlined language. Requirements expressed in the

imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certainlocations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe

responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by

others when so noted.a. The words “shall be” are implied where a colon (:) is used within

a sentence or phrase.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the conditions of theContract.

B. Indicated: The term “indicated” refers to graphic representations, notes or

schedules on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in theSpecifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Where

terms such as “shown,” “noted,” “scheduled,” and “specified” are used, it is to

help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended.

C. Directed: Terms such as “directed,” “requested,” “authorized,” “selected,”“approved,” “required,” and “permitted” mean “directed by the Engineer,”

“requested by the Engineer,” and similar phrases.

D. Approved: The term “approved,” where used in conjunction with the Engineer’saction on the Contractor’s submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the

Engineer’s duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

E. Regulations: The term “Regulations” includes laws, ordinances, statutes, andlawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules,

conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control

performance of the Work.

F. Furnish: The term “furnish” is used to mean “supply and deliver to the Projectsite, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar

operations.”

G. Install: The term “install” is used to describe operations at project site includingthe actual “unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring,

applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and

similar operations.”

H. Provide: The term “provide” means “to furnish and install, complete and readyfor the intended use.”

I. Installer: An “installer” is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor,either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier for performance

of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application,

and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations

they are engaged to perform.

D263605 169


1. The term “experienced,” when used with the term “installer,” means

having a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to

this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, andhaving complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Trades: Use of titles such as “carpentry” is not intended to imply that

certain construction activities must be performed by accredited orunionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as

“carpenter.” It also does not imply that requirements specified apply

exclusively to trades persons of the corresponding generic name.3. Assignment of Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require

that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who

are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialists

must be engaged for those activities, and assignments are requirementsover which the Contractor has no choice or option. Nevertheless, the

ultimate responsibility of fulfilling Contract requirement remains with

the Contractor.a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with

enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing

the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local tradeunion jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.

J. The term “concealed”: embedded in masonry or other construction, installed

behind wall furring, within partitions or hung ceilings (permanent or removable),

in trenches, or in crawl spaces.

K. The term “exposed”: not installed underground or concealed. Equipment in

rooms with exposed construction (i.e. mechanical rooms, electrical rooms,

janitor’s closets, etc.) are classified as exposed.

L. The term “piping”: piping fittings, flanges, valves, controls, hangers, traps,drains, insulation and items necessary or required in connection with or relating

thereto.

M. The “Project Site” is the space available to the contractor for performance ofconstruction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with other performing

other work as part of the Project.

N. Testing Laboratories: A “testing laboratory” is an independent entity engaged toperform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and

to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

1.06 COMPLETE SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide all materials as required for complete systems, including allparts obviously or reasonably incidental to a complete installation, whether

specifically indicated or not. All systems shall be completely assembled, tested,

adjusted and demonstrated to be ready for operation prior to Director’sRepresentative’s acceptance.

D263605170


B. Systems: The systems specified and/or shown on the Drawings are for completeand workable systems. Any deviation from these systems due to a particular

manufacturer’s requirements shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.07 CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. General: Comply with all governing federal, state, and local laws, ordinances,

codes, rules, and regulations. Where the Contract Documents exceed theserequirements, the Contract Documents shall govern. In no case shall work be

installed contrary to or below minimum legal standards.

B. Utilities: Comply with all applicable rules, restrictions, and requirements of theutility companies serving the project site/facilities. Contractor shall be required

to contact state regulated “call before you dig” service prior to any excavation

work.

C. Non-Compliance: Should any work be performed which is found not to complywith any of the above codes and regulations, provide all work and pay all costs

necessary to correct the deficiencies.

1.08 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. All published standards of the following associations/organizations, as mandatedby specific state standards, shall be followed and applied as a minimum.

1. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council

2. ACI, American Concrete Institute3. AIA, The American Institute of Architects

4. AISC, American Institute of Steel Construction

5. AMCA, Air Movement and Control Assoc.6. ANSI, American National Standards Institute

7. ARI, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

8. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Condi-

tioning Engineers9. ASME, American Society of Mechanical Engineers

10. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials

11. AWS, American Welding Society12. DIPRA, Ductile Iron Pipe Research Assoc.

13. HEI, Heat Exchange Institute

14. HI, Hydronics Institute

15. ISA, Instrument Society of America16. MCAA, Mechanical Contractors Association of America

17. MSS, Manufacturers Standardization Society

18. NACE, National Association of Corrosion Engineers International19. NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association

20. NEC, National Electrical Code (from NFPA)

21. NECA, National Electrical Contractors Assoc.22. NEMA, National Electrical Manufacturers Assoc.

23. NFPA, National Fire Protection Assoc.

24. NSF, National Sanitation Foundation

25. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors26. STI, Steel Tank Institute

D263605 171


27. UL, Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

B. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government

standard- or Specification-producing agencies are often abbreviated. Thefollowing acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents

indicate names of standard- or Specification-producing agencies of the federal

government. Names are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured,to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. EPA, Environmental Protection Agency

2. NIST, National Institute of Standards and Technology (U.S. Department

of Commerce)3. OSHA, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Depart-

ment of Labor)

C. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include morestringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same

force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents.

Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the project isrequired to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity’s

construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the

Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of arequired construction activity, the contractor shall obtain copies directly from the

publication source.


A. Manufacturers’ Qualifications: Not less than five years’ experience in the actualproduction of the specified products.

B. Installers’ Qualifications:

1. Firm with not less than five years’ experience in the installation ofmechanical systems and equipment similar in scope and complexity to

those required for this Project, and having successfully completed at least

ten comparable scale projects.

2. Painting, patching, carpentry and the like related to or required forDivision 23 work shall be performed by craftsman skilled in the

appropriate trade.

3. All welding shall be performed by ASME certified welders.

1.10 INSPECTIONS

A. General: During and upon completion of the work, arrange and pay all

associated costs for inspections of all work installed under this Contract, in

accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Inspections Required: As per the laws and regulations of the local and/or state

agencies having jurisdiction at the project site.

D263605172


C. Inspection Agency: Approved by the local and/or state agencies havingjurisdiction at the project site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Where Specified: Materials and equipment shall be as specified in subsequent

sections of the Project Manual and/or as indicated on the Drawings.

B. General: All materials and equipment to be new, clean, undamaged, and free ofdefects and corrosion.

C. Acceptable Products: The product will be acceptable only when that product

complies with all requirements of the Contract Documents as determined by theDirector’s Representative.

D. Common Items: Where more than one of any specific item is required, all shall

be of the same type and manufacturer.

E. Listing: All materials and equipment shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL)or ETL SEMKO (ETL) listed and labeled, where UL or ETL standards and

listings exist for the specified materials or equipment.

F. Special Tools: Provide all special tools needed for proper operation, adjustmentand maintenance of equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The installation of all mechanical work shall be in accordance with the letter and

intent of the Contract Documents, as determined by the Director’s Repre-sentative.

B. Installation Requirements: All materials and equipment shall be installed as

recommended by the respective manufacturers, by mechanics experienced andskilled in their particular trade, in a neat and workmanlike manner, in accordance

with the standards of the trade, and so as not to void any warranty, UL or ETL

listing.

3.02 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original, unopened packaging,

properly identified with manufacturer’s identification, and compliance labels.

B. Storage and Protection: Comply with all manufacturer’s written recommend-dations. Protect all equipment, materials and work from the weather elements,

paint, mortar, construction debris and damage throughout duration of project.

D263605 173


C. Damaged Products: Do not install damaged products. Arrange for promptreplacement.

3.03 EXAMINATION

A. Conditions Verification: Examine the areas and conditions under which the work

is to be performed. Identify and report any conditions detrimental to the proper

and timely completion of the work to the Director’s Representative.

3.04 DIMENSIONS

A. Building Dimensions: Exact locations of building elements shall be based on

contractor’s field measurements.

B. Limiting Dimensions: Where equipment dimension and clearances are indicatedon the Drawings, do not provide equipment larger than equipment dimensions or

clearances specified.

C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3.05 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the

requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

3.06 UTTING AND PATCHING

A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect

adjacent installations.

B. Perform cutting and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of non-coordinated and/or

improperly installed work.

2. Remove and replace defective Work.3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the

Contract Documents.

4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.

5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.6. Uncover and restore Work to provide for Director’s Representative’s

observation of concealed Work.

C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of equipment, components, and materials asindicated. Removal shall include all ancillary items associated with items

removed. Remove all items made obsolete by the new work.

D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated to

be removed.

E. Provide and maintain temporary dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of

dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

D263605174


F. Patch surfaces and building components using new materials matching existingadjacent materials.

3.07 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION

A. The Contractor shall supervise the work and shall have at all times some

competent person, approved by the Director’s Representative, following the work

to receive instructions and to act with authority.

3.08 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

A. General: Provide testing equipment, materials, instruments, and personnel to

perform all test procedures and adjustments required by the Contract Documentsand/or deemed necessary by the Engineer to establish proper performance and

installation of systems and equipment. All test instruments to be accurately

calibrated and in good working order.

B. Scheduling: Schedule tests at least three days in advance, and so as to allowDirector’s Representative to witness the test, unless directed otherwise. Do not

schedule tests until the system installation is complete and fully operational,

unless indicated or directed otherwise.

C. Correction/Replacement: After testing, correct any deficiencies, and replacematerials and equipment shown to be defective or unable to perform at design or

rated capacity. Retest without additional cost to the Owner or Contract. Submitfinalization report indicating corrective measures taken, and satisfactory results

of retest.

3.09 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct the Director’s representative(s) in the start-up, operation andmaintenance of all systems and equipment in accordance with the Contract

Documents.

3.10 CLEANING

A. General: Remove from the project site, all waste, rubbish, and constructiondebris weekly unless indicated otherwise. The premises shall be left clean and

free of any debris and unused construction materials, prior to final acceptance.

B. Equipment: Remove all dust, dirt, debris, mortar, rust, and other foreignmaterials from the interior and exterior of all equipment and enclosures, and wipe

down.

C. Utilities: Thoroughly clean all utilities, just prior to final inspection.

3.11 TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. Touch-Up Painting: Restore and refinish to original condition, all surfaces of

equipment scratched, marred and/or dented during shipping, handling, or

D263605 175


installation. Remove all rust, and prime and paint as recommended by the

manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

D263605176


SECTION 230004

COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section describes the coordination and procedural requirements forContractors.

B. Definitions:

1. Owners Representative - Architect, Engineer, Construction Manager,

General Contractor, Clerk of the works or any stipulated Agent orRepresentative of the Owner.

2. GC - General Contractor

3. MC - Mechanical Contractor/Subcontractor4. PC - Plumbing Contractor/Subcontractor

5. EC - Electrical Contractor/Subcontractor

6. SM - Sheet Metal Subcontractor

7. SC - Sprinkler Contractor/Subcontractor

1.02 COMPLIANCE

A. Cost incurred including those of other contractors and/or Owner, due to non-

compliance with this Section shall be the responsibility of the non-compliantcontractor.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Complete coordinated shop drawing shall be submitted in PDF and ACADformat to the Director’s Representative for their record by the MC. Submitted

coordinated shop drawing shall include all signatures required by sign off

procedure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. General: Sequence, coordinate and integrate the installation of all materials and

equipment for efficient flow of work, in conjunction with the other trades.

Review and become familiar with all of the Drawings and work of all the othertrades. Report and resolve any discovered discrepancies and/or interferences

prior to commencing work.

B. Cooperation: Cooperate with the other Contractors and individual disciplines for

placement, anchorage and accomplishment of the work.

D263605 177


C. Chases, Slots, and Openings: Arrange for chases, slots, and openings during theprogress of construction, as required to allow for installation of the work.

D. Supports and Sleeves: Coordinate the location installation of required supportingdevices and sleeves to be set in concrete and other structural components, as they

are constructed.

E. Right-Of-Way:

1. Adjust location of utilities, equipment, etc., to accommodate the work toprevent interferences, both anticipated and encountered.

2. Determine the exact route and location prior to fabrication.

3. Pitched piping has the right-of-way over utilities which do not pitch.4. Furnish and install ancillary materials & equipment including but not

limited to traps, air vents, drains, etc., as required to accommodate

offsets, transitions and changes in direction.

F. Headroom: Install systems, materials, and equipment to maximize headroom

unless noted otherwise.

G. Utility Connections: Coordinate connection with underground and overhead

utility services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, utilityproviders, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each

service.

3.02 COORDINATED SHOP DRAWINGS

A. The coordination shop drawing process shall occur in the following manner:

1. The MC shall create 3/8" scale AutoCAD (2002 or newer) base plans

which shall incorporate and coordinate with structural steel and ceiling

system framing supports and show framing members on the shopdrawings. This shall include existing building components not shown on

Contract Documents.

2. The MC shall require the Sheet Metal Subcontractor to submit AutoCADshop drawings, as expeditiously as possible, to the Engineer (through

normal channels) for review and approval. The shop drawings shall

incorporate all ductwork (including top and bottom of duct elevations at

a maximum interval of 25 linear feet and at each elevation change),structural steel (building and misc. support steel), equipment and

accessories as shown and/or specified in the contract documents.

3. All roof penetrations, wall and floor openings shall be coordinated withthe structural steel Subcontractor, Supplier and/or Erector, through the

Director’s Representative. All conflicts with structural steel members

shall be resolved through the Director’s Representative.

4. After review and final approval of the sheet metal shop drawing by theEngineer, the sheet metal Subcontractor shall incorporate all required

corrections, additions and modifications on the AutoCAD ductwork shop

drawings.5. The approved AutoCAD ductwork shop drawings shall be utilized for

coordination with all other Contractors or Subcontractors whose

involvement is mandated. The SM shall submit the AutoCAD ductworkshop drawings (hard copy and electronic files) to the MC to initiate the

D263605178


“coordination” process. The MC shall review the drawings for accuracy

and completeness prior to distribution.

6. The MC shall forward, with transmittal, the ductwork shop drawings(hard copy and electronic files) to the PC for coordination of the

plumbing work. The MC shall forward a copy of the transmittal to the

Director’s Representative.7. The PC shall (upon receipt of drawings from the MC) superimpose his

scope of work on the AutoCAD ductwork shop drawings illustrating all

plumbing equipment, piping and hangers.8. The PC shall include invert of pipes; elevations (top and bottom) and

pipe sizes including insulation at a maximum of 25 foot intervals and at

each elevation change.

9. Any conflicts between the plumbing and ductwork shall be clouded bythe PC on the AutoCAD ductwork shop drawing file.

10. PC shall request coordination meeting to resolve the conflicts as clouded

on the coordinated shop drawings. PC shall provide clouded shopdrawing at the coordination meeting. All conflicts that arise between the

plumbing and ductwork shall be resolved through and by the Director’s

Representative.11. The PC and/or the SM shall correct and shall complete the AutoCAD

drawings depicting all resolutions.

12. When it is ascertained that no conflicts exist between the ductwork and

plumbing work, the PC shall forward the final ductwork/plumbingcoordinated drawings (hard copy and electronic files) to the MC with

transmittal, and provide the Director’s Representative with a copy of the

transmittal.13. The MC shall (upon receipt of drawings from the PC) superimpose all

heating and air conditioning piping, equipment, hangers, and insulation,

including elevations (top and bottom) and pipe sizes (including

insulation), on the AutoCAD drawings.14. Any conflicts between the ductwork/plumbing/mechanical work shall be

clouded by the MC on the AutoCAD shop drawing file.

15. MC shall request coordination meeting to resolve the conflicts as cloudedon the coordinated shop drawings. MC shall provide clouded shop

drawing at the coordination meeting. All conflicts that arise between the

MC, SM and PC shall be resolved through and by the Director’sRepresentative.

16. The MC, PC and SM shall correct and complete the AutoCAD drawings

depicting all resolutions.

17. When it is ascertained that no conflicts exist between the MC, SM andPC, the MC shall forward the final ductwork/plumbing/mechanical

coordinated drawings (hard copy and electronic files) to the EC with

transmittal, and provide the Director’s Representative with a copy of thetransmittal.

18. The EC shall (upon receipt of drawings from the MC) superimpose all

electrical equipment including but not limited to light fixtures, conduit

and hangers on the AutoCAD drawings.19. The EC shall include elevations of light fixtures, electrical conduit and

conduit sizes.

20. Any conflicts with the ductwork/plumbing/mechanical/electrical workshall be clouded by the EC on the AutoCAD shop drawing file.

D263605 179


21. EC shall request coordination meeting to resolve any conflicts as clouded

on the coordinated shop drawings. EC shall provide clouded coordinated

shop drawing at the coordination meeting. All conflicts that arisebetween the EC, MC, PC and SM shall be resolved through and by the

Director’s Representative.

22. The EC and/or the SM, PC, MC shall correct and complete the AutoCADdrawings depicting all resolutions.

23. When it is ascertained that no conflicts exist between the EC, MC, PC

and SM, the EC shall forward the finalductwork/plumbing/mechanical/electrical coordinated drawings (hard

copy and electronic file) to the SC with transmittal, and provide the

Director’s Representative with a copy of the transmittal.

24. The SC shall (upon receipt of drawings from the EC) superimpose allsprinkler equipment, piping, hangers and sprinkler heads as required by

the contract documents and the appropriate codes.

25. The SC shall include elevations of piping and piping sizes.26. Any conflicts with the ductwork, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and

sprinkler work shall be clouded by the SC on the AutoCAD shop

drawings.27. The SC shall request coordination meeting to resolve any conflicts as

clouded on the coordinated shop drawings. SC shall provide clouded

coordinated shop drawing at the coordination meeting. All conflicts that

arise between the SC, EC, MC, PC, and/or SM shall be resolved throughand by the Director’s Representative.

28. The SC and/or EC, MC, PC, SM shall complete the AutoCAD drawings

depicting all resolutions.29. When it is ascertained that no conflicts exist between the SC, EC, MC,

PC, and SM, the SC shall forward the final ductwork, plumbing,

mechanical, electrical, and sprinkler coordination drawing to the MC

with transmittal, and provide the Director’s Representative with a copyof the transmittal.

30. Sign Off:

a. The MC shall provide the final coordinated shop drawing to theEngineer and the Director’s Representative. The final

coordinated shop drawing shall contain signatures from SM, PC,

MC, EC, and SC on each sheet.b. Upon completion of the coordination process by all Contractors

and Subcontractors as described above, they shall sign off on all

drawings in ink indicating company, name, date of sign-off and

signature of company representative.c. Each contractor signature shall certify that each Contractor has

shown their respective work on the drawings and have resolved

all points of conflict and interference with other Contractors andSubcontractors.

D263605180


3.03 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. During the coordination process, separate meetings apart from project meetings

concerning the progress and schedules may be called by the Director’sRepresentative when required or at the request of one or more of the coordinating

Contractors.

1. The Director’s Representative shall contact the Contractors and make all

required arrangements, e.g. time, place, etc.2. All Contractors shall place emphasis and importance on equipment

purchases, so as to not delay approvals, shop drawings and the

coordinated drawings.

3.04 SCHEDULE OF COORDINATED SHOP DRAWINGS

A. The MC and SM shall complete the ductwork shop drawings within two (2)

weeks after award of contract (or authorization to proceed).

B. Turn-around time for each Contractor shall be two (2) weeks maximum.

3.05 "AS BUILT" DRAWINGS

A. At the completion of the project, “As Built” corrections shall be made to each

AutoCAD drawing by each of the aforementioned Contractors and returned tothe Director’s Representative for the Director’s Representative’s permanent files

and records. These “As Builts” do not remove the obligation of “As Builts” and

record drawings as outlined under other sections of the specifications unless theDirector’s Representative elects to do so.

END OF SECTION

D263605 181


SECTION 230510

BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following basic materials and methods to complementother Division 23 Sections.

1. Piping installation instructions common to most piping systems

2. Dielectric fittings

3. Flexible connectors4. Mechanical sleeve seals

5. Sleeves

6. Escutcheons7. Fire Stopping

8. Identifying devices and labels

9. Grout

10. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections11. Touch-up painting

12. Repairs

B. Pipe, pipe fittings and joining materials and methods are specified in Division 23piping system sections.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof,

spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include

finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor

ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop

locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected fromphysical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in

duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected fromweather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to

outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated

shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

D263605182


G. Existing: Condition present prior to award of this contract.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For all materials specified within this section

B. Fire Rated Penetration Listing Details: Submit Underwriters Laboratory

penetration listing details specific to the penetrations required by the project

along with fire stopping material data.

C. Quality Control Submittals: Fire stopping certificates specified in QualityAssurance below.


A. Fire Stopping: Fire stopping installer shall be certified by the fire stoppingmanufacturer.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Protect piping, flanges,fittings, and piping specialties to prevent pipe end damage. Maintain end caps

through shipping, storage, and handling.

B. Store plastic pipes in locations not subject to direct sunlight.

C. Protect all stored materials from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade andsupport to prevent sagging and bending. Do not exceed structural capacity of

floor, if stored inside.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and

painting of surfaces where identifying devices are to be applied.

B. Install identifying devices before concealment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manu-

facturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, butare not limited to, the following:

1. Dielectric Components:

a. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

b. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.c. Victaulic Co. of America.

2. Metal, Flexible Connectors:

a. Engineered Flexible Products

b. Flexicraft Industries.

D263605 183


c. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.

d. Mercer Rubber Co.

e. Metraflex Co.3. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:

a. Calpico, Inc.

b. Metraflex Co.c. Proco Products, Inc.

d. Thunderline/Link-Seal.

4. Fire-Stopping Sealant:a. Dow Corning Corp.

b. 3M Corp.

c. Hilti Corp.

5. Pipe Escutcheons:a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.

b. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.

c. Grinnell6. Identifying Devices:

a. Craftsmark Identification Systems

b. Seton Identification Productsc. W.H. Brady Company

2.02 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar

metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain,

and weld-neck end types and matching piping system materials.

C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-faceor ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or

polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

Dielectric flange kit materials shall be compatible with system fluid, temperatureand pressure.

E. Dielectric Couplings: NOT ALLOWED.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,thermoplastic lining; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at

225 F (107 C). Coordinate end selection with piping system specifications.

2.03 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will

provide flexible pipe connections. Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum

working-pressure rating at 220 F, unless higher working pressure or temperatureis indicated. Coordinate end selection with piping system specifications.

D263605184


B. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors (non-potable applicationsonly): Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire

braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.

2.04 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking

synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe andsleeve, connected with stainless steel bolts and pressure plates which cause

rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and

electrical isolation.

2.05 SLEEVES

A. General: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab and roof penetrations.

B. Pipe:

1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum thickness,galvanized, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, and

plain ends. Provide integral waterstop where indicated.

3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressurepipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop.

4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral

clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membraneflashing.

a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

C. Ductwork:

1. All sleeves shall be per SMACNA.

2.06 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if

required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.

1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.2. OD: Completely cover opening.

3. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish.

4. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-plated finish.

2.07 FIRE STOPPING

A. UL listed material specific to the UL penetration listing detail.

2.08 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or die-

stamped; permanently fastened to equipment.

D263605 185


1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capa-

city, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances,

and similar essential data.

B. Stick-on Pipe Markers: Manufacturer’s standard preprinted, permanent adhesive,

color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1.

C. Stick-on Duct Markers: Manufacturer’s standard preprinted, permanent adhesive,color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1.

D. Stick-on Flow Marker: Manufacturer’s standard preprinted, permanent adhesive,

color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl, 2 inch wide band, color coded complyingwith ASME A13.1.

E. Rigid Pipe Markers: Manufacturer’s standard preprinted, color coded, rigid

plastic with flow arrows and fluid medium designed to be applied to piping

systems without the need of adhesives. For markers up to 6 inch, markers shallwrap completely around the pipe, and their own tension shall secure them in

place. For markers over 6 inch, markers shall be provided with nylon ties to

secure marker to piping system Markers comply with ANSI/ASME A13.1.

F. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved 0.032-inch-(0.8-mm-) thick, polished brass,1-1/2-inches (40-mm) diameter, with 1/4-inch (6-mm) piping system abbre-

viation letters and 1/2-inch (13-mm) sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole and brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hook fastener.

G. Framed Valve Schedule: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on

masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include appropriate mounting

hardware. Valve schedule shall be 8-1/2” x 11” with a minimum font height of12 pt. Frame shall be extruded aluminum with ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,

Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness glass. Schedule shall include valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on valve tag, location ofvalve (room or space), normal operating position (open, closed or modulating).

Indicate valves utilized for emergency shut off or other special purposes.

H. Access Panel Markers: 1/16-inch- (2-mm-) thick, engraved plastic-laminate

markers, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve.Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) center hole for attachment

I. Plastic Equipment Markers: ASME A13.1, color-coded, laminated plastic.

Include lettering identifying name, equipment service, design capacity, pressuredrop, entering and leaving conditions and RPM indicated on the contract

documents. Size shall be 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices,

dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.Identifying names and/or abbreviations shall match those indicated on the

contract documents.

2.09 GROUT

A. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening,volume-adjusting, dry, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous, hydraulic-

D263605186


cement grout recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design mix

shall be 5000-psig (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping sections specify

otherwise.

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagramsindicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as

indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install components with pressure and temperature ratings equal to or greater thansystem operating pressure and temperature.

D. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and

branch connections. Install fittings, couplings, and accessories according to


E. Install piping at parallel and perpendicular to building walls. Diagonal runs are

prohibited, unless otherwise indicated. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each

other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

F. In areas of exposed piping, install piping to maximize headroom. In areas withceilings, install piping to maximize clearance between ceiling and pipe. Allow

sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch (25-mm) clearancearound insulation.

H. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of walls, partitions, floors and

ceilings.

I. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a teefitting, ¾” ball valve, threaded nipple and chained cap.

J. Install line size manual shutoff valve at each connection to each piece ofequipment.

K. Install piping so that accessories are accessible for operation, maintenance, repair

and replacement.

L. Install piping with sufficient clearance to allow for expansion and contraction.

M. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes through interior solid concrete

walls and floors, above grade exterior solid concrete walls and existing

underground solid concrete walls. Floors in mechanical equipment areas or otherwet areas shall be provided with a sleeve with waterstop.

D263605 187


N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through walls, partitions, and slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanicalequipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above

finished floor level. In floors with water stop extend cast-iron

sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping

ring.2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as walls and slabs are being

constructed.

3. Install sleeves in non-fired rated assemblies large enough to provide 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe

insulation.

4. Install sleeves in fire rated assemblies per ASTM E 814 by UnderwritersLaboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

O. Interior Wall and Floor Pipe Penetrations: Sleeves shall be steel pipe except steel

sheet metal shall be used for gypsum wall penetrations.

P. Water Proof Floor and Roof Pipe Penetrations: For pipes penetrating floors and

roofs with membrane waterproofing install stack sleeve fitting. Secure flashing

between clamping flanges. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with non-shrink,non-metallic grout. Provide Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing

silicone sealant between sleeve and pipe.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations:

1. Masonry Wall: Provide steel pipe wall sleeve. Seal space outside ofsleeve with non-shrink, non-metallic grout. Provide Type S, Grade NS,

Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant between sleeve and pipe.

2. Non-Masonry or Non-Concrete Walls: Provide wall plate matchingsurrounding construction. Fill gap between wall opening and pipe with

mineral wool. Provide Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-

curing silicone sealant between wall plate and wall.

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Provide cast-iron or galvanizedsteel sleeves with integral waterstop, except for existing walls. Seal pipe

penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. Annular clearspace shall be per mechanical sleeve seal manufacturer’s written

recommendation. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to


S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically

required in individual piping specification Sections:

1. Threaded Steel Pipe Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads inaccordance with ANSI B2.1 and ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and

clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore

full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant suitable for the

service for which the pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint

D263605188


and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. Do not use

pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not

use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds2. Welded Steel Pipe Joints: Weld pipe joints in accordance with applicable

ASME Codes and AWS D10.12, “Recommended Practices and

Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe”.3. Flanged Steel Pipe Joints: Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Align

flange surfaces parallel. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten

bolts to torque specified by manufacturer of flange and flange bolts, toprovide uniform compression of gaskets.

4. Grooved Steel Pipe Joints: Install per grooved piping manufacturer’s

written installation instructions.

5. Copper Pipe Joints: Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface ofthe cup of the fittings, using very fine emery cloth, prior to making

soldered or brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply flux.

Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fittingsurfaces.

6. Gasket Materials: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and

thickness for service application. Install gasket concentricallypositioned.

7. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of

steel pipe.

8. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe andfittings before assembly.

9. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by

wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings accordingto the following:

a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of

cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

b. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 267210. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by

wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D

2657 procedures and manufacturer’s written instructions.a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

U. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unlessotherwise indicated:

1. Remake leaking joints using new materials.

2. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to

each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.3. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to

flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

4. Piping Systems: Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.

3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights

are not indicated.

D263605 189


B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other buildingsystems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair orreplacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting and

without interference(s) to other installations.

D. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

3.03 FIRE STOPPING

A. Fire Stopping: At penetrations through fire rated walls, partitions, barriers,

ceilings, roofs or floors, the fire rated integrity shall be maintained. Providemanufacturer’s standard fire-stopping sealant, with accessory materials, having

fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per

ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3.04 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on all piping of each system (insulated and

un-insulated), including pipe sizes, fluid medium and direction of flow arrows.

1. Interior, non-metal jacketed piping systems: Provide stick-on markers.Install flow marker 360 degrees at each end of each pipe marker.

2. Interior metal jacketed and exterior piping systems: Provide rigid

markers (for markers on piping over 6 inches provide nylon ties).Provide stick-on size marker attached to rigid marker.

3. Markers shall be spaced at a maximum of 25-foot (7.5-m) intervals along

each run. In addition to the 25 foot intervals, provide markers at thefollowing locations:

a. Near each valve and control device.

b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and

terminal units.c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings,

or enter non-accessible enclosures.

d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permitview of concealed piping.

e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and

termination.

B. Valve Tags:

1. Install on all valves and control devices (factory and field installed),

except check valves. List tagged valves in valve schedule.

2. Provide framed valve schedule(s) where directed by owners

representative.

C. Install plastic equipment marker on all equipment provided under this contract.

D. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with

duct markers. Duct markers shall identify service and direction of flow. Locate

D263605190

230510 - 10 Project No. SA979-H

markers at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15m), near points where ducts enter

and exit the space, and on ducts located behind all access doors.

E. Provide additional mechanical identification materials and devices to supplementfield or factory supplied nameplates that have become visually blocked by work

of this or other Divisions.

F. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

3.05 TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and

procedures to match original factory finish.

3.06 GROUTING

A. Install nonmetallic, non-shrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing

surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix and cure

grout according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.

E. Place grout to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment base.

F. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

G. Place grout around anchors.

3.07 REPAIRS

A. If work is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged sections and install new

products of equal capacity and quality.

END OF SECTION

D263605 191


SECTION 230513

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which arefurnished with mechanical equipment (factory or field installed).

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The latest edition of the following standards, as referenced herein, shall beapplicable.

1. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators

2. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and

Assemblies.3. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

4. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches

5. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Factory furnished electrical component product data submittal requirements are

specified within the individual equipment specification sections.


A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL or ETL labeled.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MOTORS

A. Electrical Characteristics shall meet the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Frequency Rating: 60 HZ2. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is

connected for the following motor voltage ratings (utilization voltages):

a. 120V circuit: 115V motor rating.b. 208V circuit: 200V motor rating.

B. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven

loads.

1. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not requirethe motor to operate in the service factor range.

C. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors,


D263605192


D. Temperature rating: Rated for 40°C (104°F) environment.

E. Temperature rise: Rated for maximum of 90°C (194°F) rise for continuous duty

at full load, Class B insulation, except for inverter duty rated motors which shalluse Class F insulation.

F. Starting capability: Frequency of starts as required to meet automatic control

system sequence of operation, and not less than 5 evenly timed starts per hour.

G. Capacity: Sufficient to start and operate connected loads without exceedingname plate ratings.

H. Motor construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty,Design “B,” except “C” where required for high starting torque.

1. Bearings:

a. re-greasable, except permanently sealed motor;

b. designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drivesproduce lateral or axial thrust in motor;

2. Mounting:

a. horizontal: foot mounted

b. vertical: base mounted3. Enclosure Type: See individual equipment specifications for enclosure

type.

4. Lifting Lug: lifting eye or lug for all motors exceeding 50 pounds.5. Stamped Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer,

ratings, characteristics, construction, efficiency, special features and

similar information.6. All motors 1hp and larger shall be premium efficiency, constant speed,

rpm as specified, squirrel cage, unless otherwise required to meet driven

equipment’s maximum starting duty. Minimum full-load nominal

efficiencies per IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B shall be equal to orgreater than those listed in the following tables.

I. Polyphase Motors:

1. General: Squirrel-cage induction-type conforming to the following

requirements except as otherwise indicated.2. Variable Speed Motors for Use with Solid-State Drives: Energy

efficient, invertor ready, design B units with ratings, characteristics, and

features coordinated with drive manufacturer.3. Bearings: Suitable for radial and thrust loading of the application.

4. Severe Duty Motors: Minimum 1.25 service factor. Provide motors

with regreasable bearings and equipped with capped relief vents.

Insulate windings with nonhygroscopic material.5. Motors for Reduced Inrush Starting: Coordinate with reduced inrush

controller type and with characteristics of driven equipment load.

Provide required wiring leads in motor terminal box to suit controlmethod.

D263605 193


J. Single-Phase Motors:

1. Energy Efficient Motors: One of the following types as selected to suit

the starting torque and other requirements of the specific motorapplication.

a. Permanent Split Capacitor.

b. Split-Phase Start, Capacitor-Run

c. Capacitor-Start, Capacitor-Rund. Shaded-Pole.

e. Capacitor Start, Induction Run.

2. Internal Thermal Overload Protection for Motors: Protection shallautomatically open the power supply circuit to the motor, or a control

circuit. Protection shall operate when winding temperature exceeds a

safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation.Motor shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to

normal range.

3. Bearings: Belt connected motors or other motors with high radial forces

on motor shaft shall be ball bearing type. Sealed, prelubricated sleevebearings may be used for other single phase motors.

2.02 STARTERS, DISCONNECTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Motor Starter Characteristics:

1. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturerand the driven equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and

start-up condition. Minimum size starter shall be NEMA Size 1.

B. Manual Disconnect Switches:

1. Fusible switches: fused, each phase; general duty; horsepower rated;non-teasible quick-make, quick-break mechanism; dead front line side

shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors;

spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts;hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the “OPEN”

position; arc quenchers; capacity and characteristics as required by

equipment manufacturer.2. Non-fusible switches: horsepower rated toggle switch type; quantity of

poles and voltage rating as required by equipment manufacturer.

C. Magnetic Starters:

1. Hand-off-auto, selector switches and pilot lights.2. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase.

3. Interlocks, switches, contacts and similar devices as required for

coordination with control requirements.

4. Built-in control circuit transformer, sized by manufacturer. Provide withminimum two normally-open and two normally closed spare auxiliary

contacts.

5. Externally operated manual reset.6. High voltage and low voltage protection in all three phases.

7. Internal Thermal Overload Protection for Motors: Protection shall

automatically open control circuit. Protection shall operate when

D263605194


winding temperature exceeds safe value calibrated to the temperature

rating of the motor insulation.

D. Starter Enclosures:

1. NEMA rated as required for environment in which equipment is to be

installed.

2. Interlock covers of combination starters with operating handle providing

access to inside of enclosure only when disconnect is in “OFF” position.Provide means to attach multiple padlocks for locking external operating

handle in either the “ON” or “OFF” position.

3. Provide red colored RESET Button in cover of starter.4. Provide and secure wiring diagram corresponding to motor and control

wiring of associated equipment on inside of each magnetic and

combination starter.5. Manual starter shall have means for externally locking operating

mechanism in “OFF” position.

E. Factory Installed Motor Connections:

1. Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specificallyindicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Motors: Install field-installed motors in accordance with manufacturer’s

published instructions and the following:

1. Direct Connected Motors: Mount securely in accurate laser alignment.

2. Belt Drive Motors: Use adjustable motor mounting bases. Align pulleys

and install belts. Use belts identified by the manufacturer and tension

belts in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.3. Bearings: Provide extended lube lines for regreasable motors.

B. Motor Controllers (starters, Disconnects and Drives): Install field-installed

starters, disconnects and drives in accordance with manufacturer’s publishedinstructions and the following:

1. Locate controllers within sight of motors controller.

2. Mounting: For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on

light-weight structural steel channels bolted to the wall. For controllersnot at walls, provide freestanding racks fabricated of structural steel

members and light-weight slotted structural steel channels. Use feet

consisting of 3/8-inch thick steel plates, 6 inch square, bolted to the floor.Use feet for welded attachment of 1-1/2-inch thick steel plates, 6 inch

square, bolted to the floor. Use feet for welded attachment of 1-1/2-inch

by 1-1/2-inch by 1/4 –inch vertical angle pots not over three feet on

centers. Connect the posts with horizontal lightweight slotted steelchannels and bolt the control equipment to the channels.

3. Clearances: All motor controllers shall be installed per NEC require-

ments.

D263605 195


3.02 ACCEPTANCE

A. The right is reserved by the Director’s Representative to reject any motor which,

in his opinion, either under test or in actual service is found to be overloaded,develops excessive mechanical noise, magnetic hum, or otherwise operates

unsatisfactorily, within the speed range and load specified. The contractor shall

adjust, or if necessary replace any such deflected motor with one satisfactory tothe Owner or Director’s Representative without any extra cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

D263605196


SECTION 230523

VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 ABBREVIATIONS

A. IBBM: Iron body, bronze mounted.

B. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

C. WOG: Water, oil, gas.

D. WSP: Working steam pressure.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalog sheets and specifications for each valve

type.

B. Valve Schedule: List type of valve, manufacturer’s model number, and size foreach service application.

1.03 MAINTENANCE

A. Special Tools:

1. One wrench for each type and size wrench operated plug valve.2. Two insert changing tools, and one spare insert for each self contained

thermostatic radiator control valve.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VALVES - GENERAL

A. Valve Standardization: Valves from one or more manufacturers may be used,however valves supplied for each specific valve type shall be the product of one

manufacturer.

B. Valves shall be first quality, free from all imperfections and defects, with bodymarkings indicating manufacturer and rating.

C. Valve parts of same manufacturer, size and type shall be interchangeable.

D. Manually operated gate, globe and angle valves shall be of rising stem type,unless otherwise specified.

E. Valves which use packing, shall be capable of being packed when wide open and

under full working pressure.

D263605 197


F. Size valves the same size as the piping in which they are installed, unlessspecified otherwise.

2.02 CHECK VALVES

A. Type S: 125 psig WSP, 200 psig WOG, bronze body, brass or bronze trim,

horizontal swing, renewable and regrindable disc, and threaded ends. Face discs

for cold water service with teflon. Acceptable Valves: Crane 37, HammondIB940, Jenkins 4092, Milwaukee 509, Nibco T413Y, and Stockham B319Y.

B. Type V: 125 psig WSP, 200 psig WOG, IBBM, horizontal swing, bolted bonnet,

regrindable and renewable seat ring and disc, and threaded or flanged endsdepending on size. Discs on valves 4 inch size and larger may be cast iron with

bronze face. Acceptable Valves: Crane 372, & 373, Hammond IR1124, Jenkins

623CJ & 624CJ, Milwaukee F2974, Nibco F918, and Stockham G927 & G931.

2.03 COMBINATION BALANCING AND SHUT-OFF VALVES

A. Heavy duty brass construction of angle or straightway pattern with 200 psig

working water pressure at 250 degrees F, one union connection and one threaded

or solder end, visible graduated dial indicator, memory stop, and wheel handlewith full turn opening. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dunham-Bush, and Spirax

Sarco.

2.04 GAGE COCKS

A. Gage Cocks: All brass construction, “T” or lever handles, threaded ends, builtfor 300 psig hydraulic pressure. Acceptable Manufacturers: Marsh Instrument

Company, Mueller Instruments Co., H.O. Trerice Co. and Weksler Instruments

Corp.

2.05 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES

A. For Use with Water: Watts Regulator Co. No. N36.

2.06 BALL VALVES

A. Type BV: 150 psig WSP, 600 psig WOG, 2 piece bronze body, solid blow-outproof stem, teflon seats, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seals, corrosion resistant

steel lever handles with vinyl grips, balancing stop, and threaded or solder ends.

Acceptable Manufacturers: Conbraco, Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, and Watts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install valves at locations noted on the drawings or specified.

3.02 VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Schedule of valve applications for the different services is as follows:

D263605198


1. Cold Water In Buildings (CW) 125 psig and Less:

a. 3 inch and Less: BV balls, and S or V checks; with solder joint

companion flanges.2. Hot Water (HWS & HWR) 125 psig and Less:

a. 3 inch and Less: BV balls, and S or U checks.

END OF SECTION

D263605 199


SECTION 230529

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Companion high density filler pieces for installation over the top 180 degreesurface of pipe or tubing, at points of support where a combination clevis hanger,

insulation shield and high density insulating saddle are installed.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Insulation: Section 230719.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Details of trapeze hangers and upper hanger attachments for piping 4inches in diameter and over. Include the number and size of pipe lines to

be supported on each type of trapeze hanger.

2. Details of pipe anchors.

3. Details and method of installing restraints, anchors, and supports forgrooved end piping systems

4. Drawings identifying seismic locations with corresponding details of pre-

approved seismic restraints, with seismic loads and seismic force level(Fp) calculations; pre-engineered and stamped by a NYS Licensed

Professional Engineer experienced in seismic restraint systems.

B. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for eachitem specified except fasteners.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with the applicable requirements of the ASME B31 PipingCodes.

2. Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with the requirements of

the Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry (MSS) Standards SP-58, and SP-69.3. The contractor shall provide pre-engineered or stamped and signed

details (by a NYS Licensed Professional Engineer) of seismic restraint

systems to meet total design lateral force requirements for support andrestraint of mechanical and electrical systems.

D263605200


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Combination clevis hanger, pipe insulation shield and vapor barrier jacketed highdensity insulating saddle with companion high density filler piece.

1. Insulating saddles and filler pieces shall be of the same thickness and

materials as the adjoining pipe insulation. Saddles shall cover the lower

180 degrees of the pipe or tubing, and companion filler pieces shall coverthe upper 180 degrees of the pipe or tubing. Physical sizes, gages, etc. of

the components of insulated hangers shall be in accordance with the

following schedule:

PIPE OR

TUBING SIZE

(INCHES)

SHIELD

LENGTH

(INCHES)

SHIELD

GAGE

SADDLE

LENGTH

(INCHES)

VAPOR BARRIER

JACKET LENGTH

(INCHES)

Up to 2-1/2 4 16 6 10

3 to 6 4 14 6 10

B. Pipe Insulation Shields: Fabricated of steel, with a minimum arc of 180 degrees,

unless otherwise indicated. Shields for use with hangers and supports, with the

exception of combination clevis type hangers, shall be in accordance with thefollowing schedule:

PIPE OR TUBING SIZE

(INCHES)

SHIELD LENGTH

(INCHES)

SHIELD GAGE

Up to 2-1/2 8 18

3 to 8 10 16

C. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: 3/16 inch thick steel, of sufficient depth for

the insulation thickness specified, notched so that saddle contact with the pipe is

approximately 50 percent of the total axial cross section. Saddles for pipe 12inches in size and larger shall have a center support.

D. Pipe Hangers: Height adjustable standard duty clevis type, with cross bolt and

nut.

1. Pipe spreaders or spacers shall be used on cross bolts of clevis hangers,when supporting piping 10 inches in size and larger.

E. Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges: Steel.

F. Hanger Rods: Mild, low carbon steel, fully threaded or threaded at each end,

with two nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger, and locking each inplace.

G. Riser Clamps: Malleable iron or steel.

H. Rollers: Cast Iron.

D263605 201


I. Restraints, Anchors, and Supports for Grooved End Piping Systems: Asrecommended by the grooved end fitting manufacturer, and as required for

seismic restraints.

2.02 ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Sleeve Anchors (Group II, Type 3, Class 3): Molly’s Div./USM Corp.

Parasleeve Series, Ramset’s Dynabolt Series, or Red Head/Phillips AN, HN, orFS Series.

B. Wedge Anchors (Zinc Plated, Group II, Type 4, Class 1): Hilti’s Kwik Bolt

Series, Molly’s Div./USM Corp. Parabolt PB Series, Ramset’s Trubolt T Series,or Red Head/Phillips WS Series.

C. Self-Drilling Anchors (Group III, Type 1): Ramset’s RD Series, or Red

Head/Phillips S Series.

D. Non-Drilling Anchors (Group VIII, Type 1): Ramset’s Dynaset DS Series,Hilti’s HDI Series, or Red Head/Phillips J Series.

E. Stud Anchors (Group VIII, Type 2): Red Head/Phillips JS Series.

F. Beam Clamps: Forged steel beam clamp, with weldless eye nut (right handthread), steel tie rod, nuts, and washers, Grinnell’s Fig No. 292 (size for load,

beam flange width, and rod size required).

G. Metal Deck Ceiling Bolts: B-Line Systems’ Fig. B3019.

H. Continuous Slotted Type Concrete Insert, Galvanized:

1. Load Rating 800 lbs/ft: Kindorf’s D-986.

2. Load Rating 1500 lbs/ft: Kindorf’s D-980.

3. Load Rating 3000 lbs/ft: Hohmann & Barnard’s Inc. Type CS-H.4. Load Rating 4500 lbs/ft: Hohmann & Barnard’s Inc. Type CS-HD.

I. Threaded Type Concrete Insert: Galvanized ferrous castings, internally threaded

to receive 3/4 inch diameter machine bolts.

J. Wedge Type Concrete Insert: Galvanized box-type ferrous castings, designed toaccept 3/4 inch diameter bolts having special wedge shaped heads.

2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PIPING

A. Type: Combination rubber and spring type designed for insertion in a splithanger rod for isolating piping from the overhead construction.

1. Approved isolators: Amber Booth Type BSSR, Korfund Type VX,

Mason Industries, Type DNHS, Vibration Eliminator Co. Type SNRC

and Vibration Mountings and Controls Type RSH.

D263605202


B. To ensure that piping weight is properly distributed and not being supported by

equipment flanges, the first three rubber and spring isolators on the inlet shall be

of the "position indicating" type.

1. Approved Isolators: Amber Booth Type PBSS, Korfund Type VXLS,

Mason Industries Type PDNHS, Vibration Eliminator Co. Type PR2H

and Vibration Mountings and Controls Type RSHP.

2.04 FASTENERS

A. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Medium carbon steel; size and type to

suit application; galvanized for high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain

finish for other interior locations. Except where shown otherwise on the Drawings,furnish type, size, and grade required for proper installation of the Work.

2.05 SHOP PAINTING AND PLATING

A. Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for pipe supports, unlesschromium plated, cadmium plated or galvanized shall be shop coated with metal

primer paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories may be

used with copper pipe or copper tubing.

B. Hanger supports for chromium plated pipe shall be chromium plated brass.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATORY WORK

A. Place inserts into construction form work expeditiously, so as not to delay the

Work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Do not hang or support one pipe from another or from ductwork.

1. Do not bend threaded rod.

B. Support all insulated horizontal piping conveying refrigerants or other fluidsbelow ambient temperature, by means of hangers or supports with insulation

shields installed outside of the insulation.

C. Space hangers or supports for horizontal piping on maximum center distances aslisted in the following hanger schedules, except as otherwise specified, or noted

on the Drawings.

1. For Steel, Alloy Steel, Threaded Brass Pipe and Fibrous Glass

Reinforced Plastic Pipe (FRP):

PIPE SIZE (INCHES) MAXIMUM SPACING (FEET)

1 and under 8

1-1/4 and 1-1/2 9

2 10

2-1/2 and up 12

D263605 203


2. For Copper Pipe and Copper Tubing:

PIPE OR TUBING SIZE

(INCHES)

MAXIMUM SPACING

(FEET)

1-1/2 and under 6

2 and over 10

3. For Directional Changes: Install a hanger or support close to the point of

change of direction of all pipe runs in either a horizontal or verticalplane.

4. For Concentrated Loads: Install additional hangers or supports, spaced

as required and directed, at locations where concentrated loads such asin-line pumps, valves, fittings or accessories occur, to support the

concentrated loads.

5. For Branch Piping Runs and Runouts over 5 feet In Length: Install a

minimum of one hanger, and additional hangers if required by the hangerspacing schedules.

6. Parallel Piping Runs: Where several pipe lines run parallel in the same

plane and in close proximity to each other, trapeze hangers may besubmitted for approval. Base hanger spacing for trapeze type hangers on

the smallest size of pipe being supported. Design the entire hanger

assembly based on a safety factor of five, for the ultimate strength of thematerial being used.

D. Size hanger rods in accordance with the following:

PIPE OR TUBING SIZE

(INCHES)

SINGLE ROD

HANGER SIZE

(INCHES)

DOUBLE ROD

HANGER SIZE

(INCHES)

PIPE TUBING PIPE TUBING

1/2 to 2 3/8 1/4 3/8 1/4

2-1/2 and 3 1/2 3/8 3/8 1/4

4 and 5 5/8 1/2 1/2 3/8

1. Size hanger rods, for piping over 12 inches in size and multiple line

supports, based on a safety factor of five for the ultimate strength of thematerials being used.

2. Secure hanger rods as follows: Install one nut under clevis, angle or steel

member; one nut on top of clevis, angle or steel member; one nut insideinsert or on top of upper hanger attachment and one nut and washer

against insert or on lower side of upper hanger attachment. A total of

four nuts are required for each rod, two at upper hanger attachment and

two at hanger.

E. Vertical Piping:

1. Support vertical risers of piping systems, by means of heavy duty

hangers installed close to base of pipe risers, and by riser clamps with

extension arms at intermediate floors, with the distance between clamps

D263605204


not to exceed 25 feet, unless otherwise specified. Support pipe risers in

vertical shafts equivalent to the aforementioned. Install riser clamps

above floor slabs, with the extension arms resting on floor slabs. Provideadequate clearances for risers that are subject to appreciable expansion

and contraction, caused by operating temperature ranges.

2. Support extension arms of riser clamps, secured to risers to be insulatedfor cold service, 4 inches above floor slabs, to allow room for insulating

and vapor sealing around riser clamps.

3. Install intermediate supports between riser clamps on maximum 6 footcenters, for copper tubing risers 1-1/4” in size and smaller, installed in

finished rooms or spaces other than mechanical equipment machine or

steam service rooms, or penthouse mechanical equipment rooms.

F. Floor Supports: Install adjustable yoke rests with base flanges, for the support ofpiping, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Install supports in a manner,

which will not be detrimental to the building structure.

3.03 UPPER HANGER ATTACHMENTS

A. General:

1. Secure upper hanger attachments to overhead structural steel, steel bar

joists, or other suitable structural members.

2. Do not attach hangers to steel decks that are not to receive concrete fill.3. Do not attach hangers to precast concrete plank decks less than 2-3/4

inches thick.

4. Do not use flat bars or bent rods as upper hanger attachments.

B. Attachment to Steel Frame Construction: Provide intermediate structural steel

members where required by pipe support spacing. Select steel members for use

as intermediate supports based on a minimum safety factor of five.

1. Do not use drive-on beam clamps.2. Do not support piping over 4 inches in size from steel bar joists. Secure

upper hanger attachments to steel bar joists at panel points of joists.

3. Do not drill holes in main structural steel members.

4. Beam clamps, with tie rods as specified, may be used as upper hangerattachments for the support of piping, subject to clamp manufacturer’s

recommended limits.

C. Attachment to Concrete Filled Steel Decks:

1. New Construction: Install metal deck ceiling bolts.2. Existing Construction: Install welding studs (except at roof decks). Do

not support a load in excess of 250 lbs from any single welded stud.

3. Do not attach hangers to decks less than 2-1/2 inches thick.

D. Attachment to Cast-In-Place Concrete: Secure to overhead construction by

means of cast-in-place concrete inserts.

E. Attachment to Waffle Type Concrete Decks:

1. New Construction: Install cast-in-place inserts.2. Existing Construction: Install machine bolt expansion anchors at highest

practical point on side of web.

D263605 205


3.04 ANCHORS, RESTRAINTS, RIGID SUPPORTS, STAYS AND SWAY BRACES

A. Install pipe anchors, restraints and sway braces, at locations noted on the

Drawings. Design anchors so as to permit piping to expand and contract freely inopposite directions, away from anchor points. Install anchors independent of all

hangers and supports, and in a manner that will not affect the structural integrity

of the building.

B. In grooved end piping systems, install restraints, and rigid supports asrecommended by the manufacturer of the grooved end fittings to ensure proper

support and alignment of the piping under operating and testing pressures(maximum hanger or support spacing shall be as previously specified).

1. Horizontal piping shall maintain a constant pitch without sags, humps, or

lateral deflections.

2. Branch piping shall remain perpendicular to main piping and/or risers.3. Vertical piping shall remain plumb without deflections.

4. Vertical piping shall be rigidly supported, or anchored at both top and

bottom, and wherever necessary to prevent movement and/or shearing

forces at branch connections.

3.05 COMBINATION CLEVIS HANGER, PIPE INSULATION SHIELD AND VAPOR

BARRIER JACKETED HIGH DENSITY INSULATING SADDLES

A. Install a combination clevis hanger, pipe insulation shield and vapor barrierjacketed high density insulating saddles, at all points of support for piping or

tubing to be insulated for cold service. Furnish companion high density vapor

barrier jacketed saddle pieces, of the same material, thickness and length, forinstallation over the top 180 degree surface of pipe or tubing, at each point of

support where an insulated clevis hanger is utilized.

3.06 PIPE INSULATION SHIELDS

A. Unless otherwise specified, install a pipe insulation shield, at all points ofsupport. Center shields on all hangers and supports outside of high density

insulation insert, and install in such a manner so as not to cut, or puncture jacket.

3.07 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION SADDLES

A. Install pipe covering protection saddles at all points of support, for steel piping 6inches in size and larger, insulated with hot service insulation. Weld saddles to

piping to insure movement with pipe.

3.08 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PIPING

A. Install vibration isolation in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed

installation instructions, unless otherwise specified.

D263605206


B. Piping: The isolator deflections shall be equal to or greater than the staticdeflection of the vibration isolators provided for the connected machinery as

follows:

1. Piping Connected to Vibration Isolated HVAC Equipment: For a

distance of 50 feet or 50 pipe diameters, whichever is greater.

2. Hot Temperature Piping: For risers from pumps and for the first 20 feet

of the branch connection of the main supply and return piping at eachfloor.

3. Water Distribution Piping Application: Resiliently support piping with

combination rubber and spring isolation hangers.a. Provide spring elements with 5/8-inch static deflection; install

the hanger with spacing so that the first harmonic natural

frequency is not less than 360 Hz. Provide double-deflectionneoprene elements.

b. For the first two isolation hangers from the rotating equipment of

3-1/2 inch and smaller piping systems, ensure a deflection equal

to the equipment-isolation static deflection.c. For the first four piping isolation hanger supports from rotating

equipment of 4-inch and larger piping systems, use resilient

hanger-rod isolators at a fixed elevation regardless of loadchanges.

d. Incorporate an adjustable preloading device to transfer the load

to the spring element within the hanger mounting after the pipingsystem has been filled with water.

C. Horizontal Piping Runs within Mechanical Equipment, Steam Service, Machine

and Penthouse Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Provide combination rubber and

spring type isolators, designed for insertion of a split hanger rod, for thefollowing:

1. Heating hot water supply and return;

2. Primary and secondary supply and return water;

END OF SECTION

D263605 207


SECTION 230550

VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Vibration Isolation for Piping: Section 230529.

B. Vibration Isolation for Ductwork: Section 233113.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Ground Floor: Floor or floor slab of building resting directly on earth.


A. Project seismic design category C for Police Station Building.

B. Building Importance Factor: 1.5 for refrigerant system in Police Station

Building.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Waiver of Submittals: The “Waiver of Certain Submittal Requirements” in

Section 013300 does not apply to this Section.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Details of intermediate structural steel members and method of

attachment required for installation of vibration isolating devices.

2. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators,design of vibration isolation bases, and selection of seismic restraints.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including

anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.

4. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints

and snubbers.

C. Product Data:

1. Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions.

2. Vibration isolator schedule showing usage.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic-restraint

devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components,

and partition assemblies.

D263605208


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS/COMPANIES

A. Manufacturers/Companies include:

1. Amber-Booth Co.

2. Korfund Dynamics Corp.

3. Mason Industries Inc.

4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.5. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

2.02 STEEL SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Types:

1. Housed Springs: Provide units with telescoping cast iron or steel

housings, containing one or more springs, complete with resilient

alignment inserts and a minimum 1/4 inch thick rubber or neoprene

sound deadening pad bonded to the base of housing.

B. Construction Features Required:

1. Provide limit stops for spring isolators with deflections of 2 inch or more

so as to prevent undue motion during start and stop, but unrestrained

movement during normal operation.2. Hot dip galvanize all steel parts of isolators for outdoor use, with the

exception of springs. Cadmium plate or neoprene coat springs.

3. Do not use isolator leveling bolts for jacking screws.

2.03 RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATORS: VERTICALLY RESTRAINED,

FREESTANDING, LATERALLY STABLE, STEEL OPEN-SPRING-TYPE

ISOLATORS.

A. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent springextension due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled

baseplate for bolting to structure and bonded to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) thick, rubber

isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Provide adjustable equipmentmounting and leveling bolt.

B. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of

the spring at rated load.

C. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

D. Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.

E. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

F. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. Hot-

dip galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.

D263605 209


2.04 SPRING HANGERS: COMBINATION SPRING AND ELASTOMERIC

HANGER WITH COIL SPRING AND ELASTOMERIC INSERT IN

COMPRESSION.

A. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for

30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.

B. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height ofthe spring at rated load.

C. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

D. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

E. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity

range.

2.05 SEISMIC CONTROLS

A. Thrust Restraints: Combination spring and elastomeric restraints with coil spring

and elastomeric insert in compression. Factory set for thrust.

1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to

allow for 30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without bindingor reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed

height of the spring at rated load.3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at

rated load.

4. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.5. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate

capacity range.

2.06 MANUFACTURED SEISMIC SNUBBERS: ALL-DIRECTIONAL, DOUBLE-

ACTING SNUBBERS.

A. Construction: Interlocking steel members restrained by a 3/4-inch (19-mm)

thick, replaceable, shock-absorbing neoprene insert. Maintain 1/8-inch (3-mm)

clearance in all directions between rigid and resilient surfaces.

2.07 FABRICATED SEISMIC SNUBBERS: WELDED STRUCTURAL-STEEL

SHAPES DESIGNED AND FABRICATED TO RESTRAIN EQUIPMENT OR

VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES FROM EXCESSIVE MOVEMENT DURING A

SEISMIC EVENT. DESIGN TO RESIST GRAVITY FORCES IDENTIFIED BY

AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION.

A. Construction: Welded steel shapes conforming to ASTM A36 (ASTM A36M).

D263605210


2.08 RESILIENT COMPONENTS: 3/4-INCH (19-MM) THICK, REPLACEABLE,

SHOCK-ABSORBING NEOPRENE INSERT.

2.09 INTEGRAL STRUCTURAL STEEL OR RAIL TYPE BASES

A. Provide bases, factory fabricated from structural steel members of sufficient

rigidity to maintain drive alignment and resist starting torque, without the use of

restraining snubber devices. Provide bases complete with rubber-in-shear orspring type isolators, as specified for the particular equipment.

2.10 CONCRETE INERTIA BLOCKS

A. Type: Factory fabricated welded structural steel pouring frames with thefollowing:

1. Sheet metal casing a minimum of 6 inches deep.

2. Integral steel reinforcing rods on 9 inch centers in both directions,

welded to steel frame;3. Height saving mounting lugs and spring isolators designed to provide the

required deflection and efficiency.

B. Configure bases to accommodate supported equipment.

1. Provide bases for isolating pumps of physical size and shape as requiredto accommodate base elbow supports. Provide mounting templates.

2.11 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

A. Type: Factory fabricated welded structural steel (ASTM A36) bases and rails

with the following:

1. Support brackets to anchor base to vibration isolation.

2. Pre-located equipment anchor bolts.

3. Auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

4. Steel angles welded to frame for outrigger isolation mountings.5. Factory Finish: Corrosive resistant finish.

B. Design bases to result in lowest possible mounting height with not less than one

inch clearance above housekeeping pad or floor.

C. Configure bases to accommodate supported equipment.

1. Provide bases for isolating pumps of physical size and shape as required

to accommodate base elbow supports. Provide mounting templates.

2.12 PAD TYPE ISOLATORS

A. Provide neoprene or rubber mountings, corrugated or waffle faced both sides,

single or double layered or laminated, or size and thickness as specified for the

particular equipment.

D263605 211


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Jack equipment bases or inertia bases into position and block or wedge beforesprings are loaded. After equipment is bolted in place and springs are loaded, by

means of the leveling bolts, remove the temporary blocking or wedging.

B. Vibration Isolation Bases:

1. Coordinate size and location of bases with the Work of related contracts.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Provide vibration isolators or vibration isolation bases for mechanical equipment,

piping and high velocity ductwork of type as specified.

B. Select isolation devices for uniform static deflection, in accordance with the

distribution of weight and forces.

1. Whenever rotational speed is the cause of disturbing frequency, utilize

the lowest operating speed of the equipment in determining the type ofisolation required.

2. Selection shall result in uniform loading and deflection, even when

equipment weight is not evenly distributed.3. Select springs for a total deflection greater than the selected static

deflection, to provide an adequate safety factor.

C. Isolate floor mounted fan units, air handling units and self-contained air

conditioning units, (with the exception of utility sets, fan units with wheels lessthan 27 inches and all equipment mounted on the ground floor), to obtain the

following efficiencies:

RPM MINIMUM DEFLECTION EFFICIENCY

Up to 325 3.5 80

326 to 525 2.0 80-90*

526 to 575 1.5 90

576 to 1000 1.25 90-95*

1001 to 1200 .75 95

1201 and over .50 95

*Lower efficiency at lowest RPM - higher efficiency at highest RPM.

3.03 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE

A. Fans and Air Handling Units:

1. Equip fans and air handling units, located above the ground floor and notindicated to be provided with a concrete inertia block or be ceiling

mounted or suspended with vibration elimination equipment as follows:a. Provide an integral structural steel base with a common steel

member running the full length of the fan and motor, with built-

D263605212


in motor slide rails, so as to form a common support for fan unit

and motor, with spring type isolators, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Provide spring unit isolators, or steel rail type isolator bases withspring type isolators, for floor mounted units with motors

mounted on the casings or frames.

2. Equip fans and handling units located on the ground floor, with theexception of medium or high pressure units not specified to be provided

with a concrete inertia block, or be ceiling mounted or suspended, with

unit isolators or steel rail type isolator bases.3. Concrete Inertia Blocks for Fans and Air-Handling Units:

a. Provide inertia blocks, 1-1/2 times the weight of supported

equipment, motor and drive for the following:

1) Fans and air handling units, operating at a static pressureup to 5 inches w.g., driven by electric motor 30 to 100

HP inclusive, or having wheel diameters 45 to 100

inches inclusive.4. Ceiling Suspended Fans and Air Handling Units: Provide combination

rubber and spring type isolators, designed for insertion in a split hanger

rod. Provide isolators with an efficiency as specified under theparagraph entitled “APPLICATION” of this Section, with no deflection

greater than 1-1/2 inches required.

B. Pumps - Base Mounted and Unitary Types:

1. Located Above the Ground Floor:a. Driven by Electric Motors 5 to 15 HP: Provide structural steel

rails, running full length of bed plate, with housed type spring

isolators, and in the case of close coupled pumps, rails shall

extend full length under and overhang so as to compensate forthe cantilever effect. Provide isolators designed for a minimum

1/2 inch static deflection.

b. Driven by Electric Motors 20 to 40 HP: Provide inertia blocks,minimum of 1-1/2 times the weight of equipment.

C. Remote Installed Refrigerant Compressor Units, Self Contained Belt Driven or

Direct Driven Condensing Units and Floor Mounted Product Coolers: Provide

steel rail type bases with built-in, metal housed, rubber-in-shear unit isolators,permanently fixed in place and provided with adjustable snubber devices.

Provide rail bases on Ground Floor designed for 1/4 inch static deflection and

above Ground Floor 1/2 inch static deflection.


A. Provide equipment and apparatus required for performing inspections and tests.

1. Notify Director’s Representative a minimum of 14 days prior to

equipment sound, vibration, and seismic testing.2. Rebalance, adjust, or replace equipment with noise or vibration levels in

excess of those given in the equipment specifications, or equipment

manufacturer's data.

D263605 213


B. Field Inspections:

1. Prior to initial operation, inspect the vibration isolators and seismic

snubbers for conformance to drawings, specifications, andmanufacturer's data and instructions.

a. Check for vibration and noise transmission through connections,

piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls.

b. Check connector alignment before and after filling of system andduring operation.

c. Correct misalignment without damage to connector and in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Spring Isolator Inspection

1. After installation of spring isolators or protected spring isolators the

equipment shall rock freely on its spring isolators within limits of stops

or seismic restraint devices. Eliminate or correct any interferences.

D. Tests

1. Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibration and

noise transmissions to specified levels.

2. Equipment Vibration Testsa. Perform vibration tests to determine conformance with vibration

isolation schedule specified.

END OF SECTION

D263605214


SECTION 230552

FLEXIBLE VIBRATION ELIMINATORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pumps: Section 232123.

1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Eliminators for use in refrigerant piping shall be bronze type, U.L. listed.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions foreach type flexible vibration eliminator.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL FLEXIBLE VIBRATION ELIMINATORS

A. Design for a working pressure of 125 psig, when used in systems operating atpressures up to 125 psig, and for higher working pressures to correspond with the

pressure in the piping for pressures over 125 psig.

1. Furnish end fittings to correspond to the end connections of the piping in

which installed.

B. Bronze Units: Fabricate of seamless flexible tin bronze tubing, with a bronze

wire braided outer jacketing of the same material as the tubing, silver brazed or

welded to end fittings.

C. Stainless Steel Units: Fabricate of seamless flexible Type 321 steel tubing, witha stainless steel wire braided outer jacketing of the same material as the tubing,

welded to steel end fittings.

2.02 “TEFLON” FLEXIBLE VIBRATION ELIMINATORS

A. Design: Eliminators, including flexible couplings and expansion joints for use as

vibration eliminators, shall consist of a contour molded expansion bellows

fabricated of extruded fluorocarbon resin, with round metal reinforcing bellowscontrol rings, ductile iron flanged end fittings and steel limit bolts.

B. Materials:

1. Teflon: Extruded TFE fluorocarbon resin, ASTM D 1457, Type III.

2. Control rings: Monel metal.

D263605 215


3. Flanges: Ductile iron (60-40-18 Grade), ASTM A 395 and MIL-I-

17166A. Bellows ends shall be formed over the full gasket face of the

flanges. Drill flanges to ANSI Standards.4. Limit Bolts and Nuts: Cadmium plated steel. Nuts shall be of the elastic

stop type.

C. Pressure Ratings:

1. Flexible Couplings: 150 psig at 100 degrees F. (Non-shock).2. Expansion Joints: 100 psig at 120 degrees F. (Non-shock).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install eliminators plumb in vertical piping and horizontally true in horizontalruns.

B. Do not use eliminators to compensate for misalignment between equipment and

piping.

C. Teflon Flexible Vibration Eliminators: When approved by the Director, tefloneliminators may be installed as flexible water piping connections to equipment in

accordance with the following:

1. Flexible Couplings: Connections to water chillers, packaged airconditioning units and connections to heating and cooling coils in

heating and ventilating units and air handling units, having a maximum

inlet water temperature of 130 degrees F, and a maximum system

working pressure of 125 psig.2. Flexible Couplings: Connections to equipment in chilled water systems

having a maximum inlet water temperature of 105 degrees F, and a

maximum system working pressure of 100 psig.

END OF SECTION

D263605216


SECTION 230553

PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A13.1 - Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for each

item specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers include:

1. W.H. Brady Co., Milwaukee, WI.

2. Emed Co., Buffalo, NY.3. Panduit Corp., Tinley Park, IL.

4. Seton Nameplate Corp., New Haven, CT.

2.02 PIPE MARKERS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Snap-on Marker: One piece wrap around type constructed of precoiled acrylicplastic with clear polyester coating, integral flow arrows, legend printed in

alternating directions, 3/4 inch adhesive strip on inside edge, and 360 degree

visibility.

B. Strap-On Marker: Strip type constructed of precoiled acrylic plastic with clearpolyester coating, integral flow arrows, legend printed in alternating directions,

factory applied grommets, and pair of stainless steel spring fasteners.

C. Stick-On Marker: Pressure sensitive adhesive backed type constructed of vinylwith clear polyester coating, and integral flow arrows for applications where flow

arrow banding tape is not being used.

D. Pipe Marker Legend and Color Field Sizes:

OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF

PIPE OR INSULATION

(INCHES)

LETTER SIZE

(INCHES)

LENGTH OF

COLOR FIELD

(INCHES)

3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 8

1-1/2 to 2 3/4 8

2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 12

D263605 217


E. Banding Tapes: Pressure sensitive adhesive backed type constructed of vinyl

with clear polyester coating.

1. Plain Tape: Unprinted type; color to match pipe marker background.

2. Flow Arrow Tape: Printed type with integral flow arrows; color to

match pipe marker background.

F. Pipe Size Labels: Pressure sensitive adhesive backed type constructed of vinylwith clear polyester coating, vertical reading pipe size in inches, and legend size

matching adjacent pipe marker.

2.03 PIPE SERVICE IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Type: No. 19 B & S gage brass, with 1/4 inch high pipe service abbreviatedlegend on one line, over 1/2 inch high pipe size legend in inches, both deep

stamped and black filled; and 3/16 inch top hole for fastener.

B. Size: 2 inch square tag.

C. Fasteners: Brass “S” hook or brass jack chain of size as required for pipe to

which tag is attached.

2.04 VALVE SERVICE IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Type: No. 19 B & S gage brass, with 1/4 inch high valve service abbreviated

lettering on one line over 1/2 inch high valve service chart number, both deep

stamped and black filled; and with 3/16 inch top hole for fastener.

B. Sizes:

1. HVAC Use: 1-1/2 inch diameter round.

C. Fasteners: Brass “S” hook or brass jack chain of size as required for valve stem

or handle to which tag is attached.

2.05 VALVE SERVICE IDENTIFICATION CHART FRAMES

A. Type: Satin finished extruded aluminum frame with rigid clear plastic glazing,

size to fit 8-1/2 x 11 inches valve chart.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Complete testing, insulation and finish painting work prior to completing the

Work of this Section.

B. Clean pipe surfaces with cleaning solvents prior to installing pipingidentification.

D263605218


C. Remove dust from insulation surfaces with clean cloths prior to installing pipingidentification.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install the Work of this Section in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed

installation instructions, unless otherwise specified.

B. Stick-On Pipe Markers:

1. Install minimum of 2 markers at each specified location, 90 degrees aparton visible side of pipe.

2. Encircle ends of pipe markers around pipe or insulation with banding

tape with one inch lap. Use plain banding tape on markers with integralflow arrows, and flow arrow banding tape on markers without integral

flow arrows.

C. Pipe Size Labels: Install labels adjacent to each pipe marker and upstream fromflow arrow. Install a minimum of 2 pipe size labels at each specified location, 90

degrees apart on visible side of pipe.

D. Pipe Service Identification Tags: Attach tags to piping being identified with “S”

hooks or jack chains.

3.03 PIPING IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Piping Identification Types:

1. Piping or Insulation under 3/4 inch od: Pipe identification tags.

2. Piping or Insulation 3/4 inch to 5-7/8 inch od: Snap-on marker or stick-on marker.

3. Piping or Insulation 6 inch od and Larger: Strap-on marker or stick-on

marker.

B. Identify exposed piping, bare or insulated, as to content, size of pipe and

direction of flow, with the following exceptions:

1. Piping in non-walk-in tunnels or underground conduits between

manholes.2. Piping in furred spaces or suspended ceilings, except at valve access

panels where valves and piping shall be identified as specified for

exposed piping systems.3. Piping in finished spaces such as offices, class rooms, wards, toilet

rooms, shower rooms and spaces as specified.

C. Locate piping identification to be visible from exposed points of observation.

1. Locate piping identification at valve locations; at points where pipingenters and leaves a partition, wall, floor or ceiling, and at intervals of 20

feet on straight runs.

2. Where 2 or more pipes run in parallel, place printed legend and other

markers in same relative location.

D263605 219


3.04 VALVE IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Valve Service Identification Tags:

1. Tag control valves, except valves at equipment, with a brass tag fastened

to the valve handle or stem, marked to indicate service and numbered insequence for the following applications:

a. Valves in heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration

systems.

B. Valve Service Identification Charts:

1. Provide 2 framed valve charts for each piping system specified to be

provided with valve identification tags. Type charts on 8-1/2 x 11 inchesheavy white bond paper, indicating valve number, service and location.

2. Hang framed charts at locations as directed.

END OF SECTION

D263605220


SECTION 230554

DUCT AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Mechanical Painting: Section 099103.

1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver paint to the Site in original, new unopened containers, bearing

manufacturers' printed labels.

B. Store materials at the site where directed. Keep storage space clean andaccessible to the Director's Representative at all times.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Paint: Type IAL-3 specified in Section 099103.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Cover and protect surfaces to be painted, adjacent surfaces not to be

painted, and removed furnishings and equipment from existing paint removals,airborne sanding particles, cleaning fluids and paint spills using suitable drop

cloths, barriers and other protective devices.

1. Schedule and coordinate surface preparations so as not to interfere with

work of other trades or allow airborne sanding dust particle to fall onfreshly painted surfaces. Do not perform the Work of this Section until

testing, insulation and finish painting Work have been completed.

2. Provide adequate natural or mechanical ventilation to allow surfaces to

be prepared and painted in accordance with product manufacturer’sinstructions and applicable regulations.

3. Provide and maintain “Wet Paint” signs, temporary barriers and other

protective devices necessary to protect prepared and freshly paintedsurfaces from damages until Work has been accepted.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with specifications, paint

manufacturer’s approved product data sheets and printed label instructions. Inthe event of conflicting instructions or directions, the more stringent

requirements shall apply.

1. Cleaners: Use only approved products manufactured or recommended

by finish paint manufacturer. Unless otherwise recommended by cleaner

D263605 221


manufacturer, thoroughly rinse with clean water to remove surface

contaminants and cleaner residue.

3.02 DUCT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed ductwork, bare or insulated, directly connected to air handling

apparatus, in the following spaces or rooms, by means of painted stenciled

legends:

1. Mechanical Equipment.2. Boiler.

B. Locate stenciled legends to be readily visible from any point of observation.

Stencil identification along center line of duct, close to equipment. Where viewis unobstructed from two directions, apply two sets of stenciling (both sides),

visible from each direction.

C. Letter Size: 1-1/2 inches in height.

D. Samples of Ductwork Identification:

1. Fresh Air Supply.

2. Air Cond. Supply Air.

3. Air Cond. Return Air.4. Recirc. Cond. Air.

5. Exhaust Air.

E. Colors: Paint stenciled letters black. Where the background color is dark, paint

background white before stenciling.

3.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify mechanical equipment, bare or insulated, installed in the following

spaces or rooms, by means of painted stenciled legends:

1. Mechanical Equipment.2. Boiler.

B. Paint stenciled legends black, a minimum of 1-1/2 inches in height, located to be

readily visible from a reasonable point of view. Place identification along centerline of equipment, if possible.

C. Samples of Equipment Identification:

1. Air Cond. Unit AC 1.

2. Supply Fan S 1.3. Exhaust Fan E 1.

4. Return Fan R 1.

3.04 APPLICATION OF PAINT

A. Stencil Painting: Apply with a brush or aerosol type spray can.

D263605222


3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of paint spatters resulting from the Work of this Section.

END OF SECTION

D263605 223


SECTION 230593

CLEANING AND TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Balancing of Systems: Section 230594.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Test Reports (Field Tests):

a. Refrigeration Systems: Submit test results on RefrigerationSystems Pressure - Dehydration Tests, Form BDC-228, a sample

of which can be obtained from the Director’s Representative, or

a similar test report form, which includes the data shown onForm BDC-228.

b. Hot Water Heating Boilers: Submit test results on Boiler Test

Record, Form BDC-360, a sample of which can be obtained

from the Director’s Representative, or a similar test report form,which includes the data shown on Form BDC-360.

c. Propylene Glycol System Test: Submit test results in a format

acceptable to the Director’s Representative.d. Submit data for each system tested, and/or disinfected; include

date performed, description, and test results for each system.



1. Perform factory testing of factory fabricated equipment in complete

accordance with the agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Perform field testing of piping systems in complete accordance with thelocal utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified.


A. Protection: During test Work, protect controls, gages and accessories which are

not designed to withstand test pressures. Do not utilize permanently installedgages for field testing of systems.


A. Transmit written notification of proposed date and time of operational tests to theDirector’s Representative at least 5 days in advance of such tests.

B. Perform cleaning and testing Work in the presence of the Director’s Repre-

sentative.

D263605224


C. Pressure test piping systems inside buildings, at the roughing-in stage ofinstallation, before piping is enclosed by construction Work, and at other times as

directed. Perform test operations in sections as required and directed, to progressthe Work in a satisfactory manner and not delay the general construction of the

building. Valve or cap-off sections of piping to be tested, utilizing valves

required to be installed in the permanent piping systems, or temporary valves orcaps as required to perform the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Test Equipment and Instruments: Type and kind as required for the particularsystem under test.

B. Test Media (air, gas, refrigerant, dry nitrogen, vacuum, water): As specified for

the particular piping or system under test.

C. Cleaning Agent (chemical solution, steam, water): As specified for the particularpiping, apparatus or system being cleaned.

D. Propylene Glycol: Permanent type anti-freeze solution as manufactured by Dow

Chemical Co. or Union Carbide.

1. Percentage of Propylene Glycol: 50 percent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRELIMINARY WORK

A. Thoroughly clean pipe and tubing prior to installation. During installation,

prevent foreign matter from entering systems. Prevent if possible and removestoppages or obstructions from piping and systems.

B. Thoroughly clean compressed air, control air, refrigerant pipe and similar

systems prior to pressure or vacuum testing.

1. Refrigerant Piping:a. Only use factory sealed refrigerant piping.

b. Crimp and braze caps on ends of previously cleaned piping at

end of the day if piping was cut.

c. When brazing, purge lines with dry nitrogen.

3.02 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING

A. Piping shall be tight under test and shall not show loss in pressure or visible

leaks, during test operations or after the minimum duration of time as specified.Remove piping which is not tight under test; remake joints and repeat test until

no leaks occur.

D263605 225


B. General:

1. Pressure test piping systems inside buildings, at the roughing-in stage of

installation, before piping is enclosed by construction Work, and at othertimes as directed.

2. Perform test operations in sections as required and directed, to progress

the Work in a satisfactory manner and not delay the general construction

of the building.3. Valve or cap-off sections of piping to be tested, utilizing valves required

to be installed in the permanent piping systems, or temporary valves or

caps as required to perform the Work.4. Isolate existing piping from pressure testing.

5. Pressure test only new piping unless otherwise specified or directed by

Director’s Representative.

C. Water Systems:

1. Circulating water systems, including propylene glycol solution systems

and cold water make-up piping connections to heating, ventilating, air

conditioning and refrigeration systems, unless otherwise specified:a. Before final connections are made perform hydrostatic test at 1-

1/2 times the maximum working pressure, but not less than 125

psig, for 4 hours.

b. After final connections are made perform hydrostatic retest at apressure equal to maximum operating system design pressure,

but not less than 30 psig, for 4 hours.

3.03 TESTING OF EQUIPMENT, APPARATUS AND APPURTENANCES

A. Hot Water Boilers: Perform hydrostatic test at 30 psig, after installation, withpiping connections shut-off.

B. Relief Valves: Increase pressure in equipment or apparatus to relief valvesetting, to test opening of valves at required relief pressures.

3.04 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS -

CLEANING AND OPERATIONAL TESTING

A. Circulating Heating Hot Water System in Buildings:

1. Cleaning:

a. Flush systems and apparatus, upon completion of pressure

test(s).

b. Completely open valves and flush each system with clean water,prior to chemical cleaning.

c. Repeatedly flush at short intervals until twice the system water

capacity has been flushed through.d. Chemically clean systems immediately following flushing

operations.

e. Circulate a solution consisting of trisodium phosphate, in aproportion of one pound of chemical to every 50 gallons of water

in the system.

D263605226


f. Completely fill system with cleaning solution; vent as required,

and place in operation, with automatic controls operating and

valves fully open.g. Allow system to reach design operating temperature or an

operating temperature designated by the Director’s

Representative.h. Circulate the solution through the system for a minimum of 4

consecutive hours; immediately drain system and flush with

clean water until the pH at the farthest drain matches the cleanwater input.

i. Provide temporary pipe and /or hose required to drain system.

j. Keep strainers unplugged during cleaning operations. Remove

and clean strainer screens prior to operational test.k. Refill system with clean water and correct pH to 7.

l. Do not flush steam piping thru steam coils. Provide temporary

steam supply and condensate piping to bypass steam coils.m. Upon completion of flushing, remove temporary piping and

reconnect steam coil.

2. Operational Test:a. Run system in an automatic mode for a minimum of 120

consecutive hours.

b. During this time, make final adjustments, including the setting of

the balancing valves.

B. Propylene Glycol Systems:

1. Clean as specified for circulating water systems.

2. Perform operational test as specified for circulating water systems with

propylene glycol solution in system.

3.05 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS - TESTING, DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING

A. Leak Test Procedure:

1. Refrigerant Piping Systems:

a. Pressurize with dry nitrogen to 50 psig and test for leaks using abubble type solution.

b. Release this partial test pressure and correct deficiencies.

c. Charge system with a trace of refrigerant to 15 psig, then add drynitrogen until system test pressures are reached and retest for

leaks with an electronic leak detector.

d. Release pressure, repair leaks and retest as necessary until no

leaks occur.e. Recover refrigerant used for leak testing.

2. System Test Pressures:

a. Charge system with dry nitrogen and trace of refrigerant (HFC134A, HFC 245, HFC 404, HFC 407C, HFC 410A or HFC 507)

to 350 psig and retest for leaks with an electronic leak detector.

The system must stay at 350 psig pressure for 24 hours to passthe system test pressure test.

b. Release pressure, repair leaks and retest as necessary until no

leaks occur.

c. Recover refrigerant used for leak testing.

D263605 227


B. Dehydration:

1. Low and Ultra Low Temperature Refrigeration Systems (-30 degrees F

to 32 degrees F:a. Following pressure tests, dehydrate each system with a vacuum

pump.

b. Draw and hold an initial vacuum of 800 microns. Break this

vacuum by pressurizing with dry nitrogen to 10 psig, and changeoil in vacuum pump.

c. Draw and hold a second vacuum of 500 microns. Break this

vacuum by pressurizing with dry nitrogen to 10 psig, and changeoil in vacuum pump.

d. Draw and hold a third vacuum of 250 microns for 8 to 12 hours

with an allowable maximum rise of 50 microns. Break this thirdvacuum by adding liquid refrigerant specified for the equipment

to the high side of the system (liquid line).

e. Verify vacuum obtained with an electronic vacuum gage.

2. Medium Temperature Refrigeration Systems (33 degrees F to 55degreesF), and Air Conditioning Systems:

a. Following pressure tests, dehydrate each system with a vacuum

pump.b. Draw and hold an initial vacuum of 500 microns. Break this

vacuum by pressurizing with dry nitrogen to 10 psig, and change

oil in vacuum pump.c. Draw and hold a second vacuum of 500 microns. Break this

vacuum by pressurizing with dry nitrogen to 10 psig, and change

oil in vacuum pump.

d. Verify vacuum obtained with an electronic vacuum gage.

C. Refrigerant Charging: Follow equipment manufacturer’s printed charging

directions unless otherwise specified.

1. Introduce refrigerant of type and quantity required through a filter/drier

installed in the temporary charging line.a. Purge small amount of liquid out of the system side of the

charging hose.

b. Prevent moisture and other contaminants from entering thesystem.

2. Charge liquid refrigerant through a charging valve provided in the high

pressure side of the system.

a. Small amounts of gaseous refrigerant may be charged throughthe compressor suction service valve port.

3. No bubbles shall appear at the moisture-liquid indicator when the system

is fully charged and operational. Do not overcharge.4. Record the weight in pounds of refrigerant charged into each system and

submit this record to the Director’s Representative.

D. Compressor Oil Charge: Pump oil into the compressor after the last vacuum hasbeen performed. Follow all Manufactures Recommended for oil type and amount

to be installed.

D263605228


E. Adjustments and Operational Testing:

1. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with automatic controls

functioning. Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Testthermometers and gages for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and

replace items found defective.

a. Check belts, fan blades, fittings, TXV bulbs, and electrical

connections for tightness before start up.b. Check TXV bulb for proper location should be between 8 and 10

o’clock or 2 & 4 o’clock.

c. Seal off all holes in the condition space as specified.d. Provide a point to point control check of the system to ensure

that the specified inputs and outputs are receiving the signal from

the proper sensors or controlling the proper device.e. Set pressure controls and safety controls.

f. Close or de-energize all solenoids, and start up the system.

g. Check that all controls and safety switches are operating

properly.h. Adjust TXV for proper super heat back to the compressors.

i. Clean TXV strainers as many times as required.

j. After one week of run time, change the liquid cores if they arethe replaceable type.

k. After one month of run time, replace the liquid cores and

compressor suction socks. Replace the liquid cores as required.Clean the TXV’s as required.

2. Operational Test:

a. Place system in operation, with final connections to equipment

and with automatic controls operating, and operate for aminimum of 120 consecutive hours.

b. Operational test shall prove to the satisfaction of the Director’s

Representative that the system can produce the cooling effectrequired by the drawings and the specifications.

END OF SECTION

D263605 229


SECTION 230594

BALANCING OF SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Systems Cleaning, Pressure and Operational Testing: Section 230593.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Testing, Adjustment and Balancing Reports:

a. Hydronic Systems: Submit results on Form BDC-374, whichcan be obtained from the Director’s Representative or use a

similar test report form which includes all of the items and data

included on Form BDC-374.b. Air Systems: Submit results on Forms BDC-340 which can be

obtained from the Director’s Representative, or use similar test

report forms, which includes all the items and data included on

Forms BDC-340.c. Submit final testing and balancing results on applicable report

forms, as approved or furnished by the environmental systems

balancing council or bureau, which is certifying the independentmember agency performing the Work, required by this Section.

Each final systems report form shall bear the signature of the

person performing the Work and recording the data and thesignature of the certified supervisor for the performing agency.

Submit simultaneously with the final reports, a list of the

instruments used with the last date of calibration for each

instrument.


A. Qualifications:

1. Provide the services of a certified independent agency for the testing,

adjustment and balancing of all air distribution and hydronic distributionsystems complete with all connected apparatus and equipment. The

agency shall be certified by the Associated Air Balance Council Bureau -

AABC, Los Angeles, Cal. 90026 or by National EnvironmentalBalancing Bureau - NEBB, Arlington, Va. 22209.

2. The Work shall be performed by skilled mechanical technicians under

the direct supervision of certified personnel in the employ of theindependent agency. The supervisor shall be personally certified by the

national council or bureau, as approved by the Director.

D263605230



A. Scheduling:

1. Perform environmental systems testing and balancing after cleaning,

miscellaneous testing, adjustment and operational testing Work has beencompleted.

2. Test and balance system during a period of time when outside

temperature conditions will impose a significant load on the system; i.e.,summer months for air conditioning system, winter months for heating

system. Balance and adjust systems accordingly.

3. Send written notification to the Director a minimum of five days prior tothe performance of testing and balancing Work. Perform testing and

balancing Work in the presence of the Director’s Representative.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. General Information: Test instruments are included in this specification forinformation only. Balancing of air and hydronic systems shall be performed by

qualified personnel utilizing company owned test instruments, which will remain

the property of the company. Use test instruments which are in first classoperating condition, with individual calibration histories to guarantee their

accuracy. Test instruments shall be of type and kind as required by the type of

system installed. Trade names and manufacturer’s names are mentioned in thissection for descriptive purposes only; instruments of equivalent range and

capabilities may be utilized.

B. Air Balancing Instruments:

1. Manometers: Inclined with ranges of 0 to 1/4 inch and 0 to 1 inch;Combination inclined and vertical with a range of 0 to 5 inches and U

tube type, 18 inches.

2. Portable “Magnehelic” Draft Gages: Ranges 0 to 1/2 inch, 0 to 1 inchand 0 to 5 inches.

3. Anemometers: Deflecting vane type with a range of 100 to 3000 fpm,

similar to Alnor Velometer Model 6000 BP and 4 inches diameter

rotating vane type.4. Pitot Tubes: ASHRAE standard type, stainless steel, 5/16 inch diameter,

lengths as required.

5. Sling Psychrometer.6. Smoke Candles and Smoke Generator.

C. Hydronic Balancing Instruments:

1. Calibrated Test Gages: Ranges 0 to 30 lbs., 0 to 60 lbs., 0 to 200 lbs.

2. Calibrated Test Gages (Compound Type): Ranges from -30 inches to 30lbs. and -30 inches to 60 lbs.

3. U Tube Manometer: 36 inches.

D263605 231


D. Air and Hydronic Systems Balancing Instruments:

1. Thermometers: 12 inches mercury column type and dial type, with a

range of -40 to +120 degrees F. and 0 to 220 degrees F. Total of fourthermometers.

2. Universal Hand Tachometer: Herman H. Sticht Type UH.

3. Stop Watch.

4. Stroboscope.5. Contact Pyrometer: Thermocouple type.

6. Volt-Ohm-Ammeter Test Kit, High Current Type: Sperry “Ohmprobe”.

7. Volt-Ammeter: With leads for connecting to lugs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRELIMINARY WORK

A. Circulating Water Systems: Prior to balancing the system, bleed all air vents so

as to completely flood the system; check pumps for proper rotation; cleanstrainers and set balancing and system stop valves in the full-open position.

B. Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems: Prior to balancing the system, check

fans for proper rotation; check filters for cleanliness and proper installation and

set dampers in the normal operating position.

3.02 BALANCING OF CIRCULATING WATER SYSTEM AND PROPYLENE

GLYCOL SYSTEMS

A. Equipment Schedules and Report Sheets: Prepare itemized equipment schedules,listing all heating or cooling elements and equipment in the system to be

balanced. List in order on equipment schedules, by pump or zone according to

the design, all heating or cooling elements and all zone balancing valves or

balancing devices. Break down schedules into zones to circuits, starting from thezone or circuit pump and terminating with the last item of equipment or transfer

element in the respective zone or circuit. Include on schedule sheets, column

titles listing the location, type of element or apparatus, design conditions andwater balance readings. Prepare individual pump report sheets for each

individual system or zone pump.

B. Balancing:

1. Place system in full automatic operation, with automatic controls set inaccordance with design conditions, and allow water to reach design

temperature.

2. Test pumps and balance flow. Record the following on pump reportsheets:

a. Suction and discharge pressure.

b. Running amps and brake horsepower of pump motor under full

flow and no flow conditions.c. Pressure drop across pump in feet of water and total gpm pump

is handling under full flow conditions.

3. Set zone or circuit balancing valve at each pump, to handle the designGPM.

D263605232


4. When the design incorporates the use of air handling units containing

coils, check and adjust each unit to insure the proper volume of air is

passing through the coils, while the balancing procedure is in progress.5. Check pumps for flow, after the system has been balanced.

6. Record test readings, calculations and results.

3.03 BALANCING OF VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Equipment Schedules and Report Sheets:

1. Prepare itemized air balance schedules for each system listing all air

handling units and air outlets for each system. Schedule multi-zone

systems by individual zones. Start each schedule from the inlet or the airhandling unit and terminate with the last air inlet or outlet device in the

system or zone.

2. Prepare individual air handling unit report sheets, noting manufacturer’spublished performance data.

3. Record all test readings, calculations and results.

B. Balancing:

1. Inspect All Equipment: Establish a definite operational test condition fortest and air balance purposes. In accordance with test condition selected,

such as minimum fresh air dampers open, turn on all air handling

systems in the building, including all exhaust systems.

2. Balance a system starting with the air handling unit. Check fan speed,using a tachometer with a self-timing device and the power reading of

the fan motor using a volt-amp meter. Calculate the actual brake horse

power from the tachometer and volt-amp meter readings. Compare theactual fan speed reading and the motor power reading, with the air

handling unit manufacturer’s published performance data, and if they

check within reasonable limits, make duct velocity readings on the mainducts. Drill holes in the main ducts and using a velocity measuring

instrument take velocity readings. Take velocity readings in each zone

duct of a multi-zone system and in addition, in the main branch ducts of

a reheat type system. Close and seal test holes with metal snap holeplugs and duct tape. Calculate the cfms of the ducts. Establish the total

air for the fan or system under test. Compare the design data with the

test results, and if the total air is high or low, adjust the fan speedaccordingly. Repeat the described test procedure for all air handling

units, including all supply air, return air and exhaust air apparatus. With

the total air for the system established, use the same duct velocity check

system for adjusting the main splitter dampers or other volume controldevices for the various branches of the system. Test and adjust the

individual air inlet or outlet devices, after the main ducts, zone ducts and

branch ducts have been set at design conditions. Adjust individual airinlet and outlet devices, such as registers and diffusers, for air pattern and

volume, in the manner recommended by the manufacturer of the devices.

The total cfm of all inlets or outlets shall equal the total cfm of allbranches, which in turn shall equal the total air volume of the air

handling units. The system is balanced, when the results of the specified

test procedures check with the design data, that is, fan speed and

D263605 233


horsepower; total air by velocity readings and total air by inlet or outlet

volume.


A. Inspection: Prior to the environmental testing and balancing of hydronic and air

distribution systems, the certified supervisor in the employ of the testing and

balancing agency shall inspect the installations and notify the Director’sRepresentative of any Work which must be performed or modified prior to

initiating testing and balancing procedures.

B. Performance: Test and balance environmental hydronic and air distributionsystems, including all connected equipment and apparatus, so as to conform to

the design conditions. Perform the Work of this section in accordance with the

published standards of the balancing council or bureau, which is certifying the

member firm. Record all test readings, calculations and results.

END OF SECTION

D263605234


SECTION 230719

INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Through Penetration Firestops: Section 078400.

B. Painting: Section 099103.

C. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Section 230529.

1.02 ABBREVIATIONS

A. FS: Federal Specification.

B. K: Thermal Conductivity, i.e., maximum Btu per inch thickness per hour per

square foot.

C. pcf: Pounds per cubic foot.

D. PVC: Polyvinylchloride.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer’s catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructionsfor insulation materials and jacket materials.

2. Materials Schedule: Itemize insulation materials and thicknesses for

each specified application in Insulation Material Schedules in Part 3 ofthis Section. Where optional materials are specified, indicate option

selected.

B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Installers Qualification Data:a. Name of each person who will be performing the Work, and

their employer’s name, business address and telephone number.

b. Furnish names and addresses of the required number of similarprojects that each person has worked on which meet the

qualifications.


A. Qualifications: The persons installing the Work of this Section and theirSupervisor shall be personally experienced in mechanical insulation work and

shall have been regularly employed by a company installing mechanical

insulation for a minimum of 5 years.

D263605 235


B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Insulation installed inside buildings, including duct lining materials,

laminated jackets, mastics, sealants and adhesives shall have a FireSpread/Smoke Developed Rating of 25/50 or less based on ASTM E 84.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 INSULATION

A. Fibrous Glass (Mineral Fiber) Insulation: Composed principally of fibers

manufactured from rock, slag, or glass, with or without binders, and asbestosfree.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Minimum density 3 pcf; ASTM C 547:

a. Class 1 (Suitable for Temperatures Up to 450 degrees F): K of

0.26 at 75 degrees F.b. Class 2 (Suitable for Temperatures 451 to 650 degrees F): K of

0.46 at 300 degrees F.

c. Class 3 (Suitable for Temperatures 651 to 1200 degrees F): K of0.56 at 300 degrees F.

2. Premolded Fitting Insulation: Minimum density 4.0 pcf, K of 0.26 at 75

degrees F; ASTM C 547, Class 1.3. Insulation Inserts for PVC Fitting Jackets: Minimum density 1.5 pcf, K

of 0.28 at 75 degrees F; ASTM C 553, Type III.

a. Suitable for temperatures up to 450 degrees F.

4. Block or Board Insulation: Minimum density 3.0 pcf and 6.0 pcf asspecified; ASTM C 612:

a. Type IA or IB (Suitable for Temperatures Up to 450 degrees F):

K of 0.26 at 75 degrees F.b. Type II (Suitable for Temperatures 451 to 850 degrees F): K of

0.44 at 300 degrees F.

c. Type III (Suitable for Temperatures 851 to 1000 degrees F): Kof 0.44 at 300 degrees F.

d. Type IV (Suitable for Temperatures 1001 to 1200 degrees F): K

of 0.37 at 300 degrees F.

e. Type V (Suitable for Temperatures 1201 to 1800 degrees F): Kof 0.42 at 300 degrees F.

5. Thermal and Acoustic Board Insulation: Minimum density 3.0 pcf, K of

0.27 at 75 degrees F; ASTM C 1071, Type II.a. Air Stream Side: Erosion, temperature, and fire resistant type;

NFPA 90-A and 90-B.

6. Blanket Insulation:

a. For Ductwork (Suitable for Temperatures Up to 450 Degrees F):Minimum density 1.0 pcf, K of 0.31 at 75 degrees F; ASTM C

553, Type II.

b. For Breeching (Suitable for Temperatures up to 1200 degrees F):Minimum density 8 pcf, K of 0.55 at 400 degrees F, metal mesh

faced one side; ASTM C 553, Type VII.

D263605236


B. Flexible Elastomeric Foam Insulation:

1. FM tested and approved, meeting the following:

a. Maximum Water Vapor Transmission: 0.10 perm - inch basedon ASTM E 96, Procedure A.

b. K of 0.27 at 75 degrees F based on ASTM C 518 or C 177.

c. Fire Spread/Smoke Developed Rating: 25/50 or less based on

ASTM E 84.2. Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type I.

3. Sheet Insulation for Ductwork and Equipment: ASTM C 534, Type II,

smooth skin one side.4. Polyethylene and polyolefin insulation is not acceptable.

C. High Density Jacketed Insulation Inserts for Hangers and Supports:

1. For Use with Fibrous Glass Insulation:

a. Cold Service Piping:1) Polyurethane Foam: Minimum density 4 pcf, K of 0.13

at 75 degrees F, minimum compressive strength of 125

psi.b. Hot Service Piping:

1) Calcium Silicate: Minimum density 15 pcf, K of 0.50 at

300 degrees F; ASTM C 533.

2) Perlite: Minimum density 12 pcf, K of 0.60 at 300degrees F; ASTM C 610.

c. Ductwork: Fibrous glass board, minimum density 6 pcf, K of

0.26 at 75 degrees F, conforming to ASTM C 612, Type IA orIB.

2. For Use with Flexible Elastomeric Foam Insulation:

a. Ductwork and Piping: Hardwood dowels and blocks, length orthickness equal to insulation thickness, other dimensions as

specified or required.

D. Cements:

1. Fibrous Glass Thermal Insulating Cement: Asbestos free; ASTM C 195.2. Fibrous Glass Hydraulic Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing

Cement: ASTM C 449/C 449M.

2.02 JACKETS

A. Laminated Vapor Barrier Jackets for Piping and Ductwork: Factory applied byinsulation manufacturer, conforming to ASTM C 1136, Types I and II.

1. Type I: Reinforced white kraft and aluminum foil laminate with kraft

facing out.

a. Pipe Jackets: Furnished with integral 1-1/2 inch self-sealinglongitudinal lap, and separate 3 inch wide adhesive backed butt

strips.

2. Type II: Reinforced aluminum foil and kraft laminate with foil facingout.

3. Laminated vapor barrier jackets are not required for flexible elastomeric

foam insulation.

D263605 237


B. Premolded PVC Fitting Jackets:

1. Constructed of high impact, UV resistant PVC.

a. ASTM D 1784, Class 14253-C.b. Working Temperature: 0-150 degrees F.

C. Metal Jacketing:

1. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloys 1100, 30003, 3105 or 5005, Temper

H14, 0.016 inch thick.a. Factory Pre-formed Sectional Pipe Jacketing:

1) Smooth outer finish with integral bonded laminated

polyethylene film - kraft paper moisture barrierunderside.

2) Pittsburg or modified Pittsburg longitudinal lock seams.

3) 2 inch overlapping circumferential joints with integral

locking clips, or butt joints sealed with 2 inch widemastic backed aluminum snap bands.

b. Roll Jacketing: Smooth outer finish with integral bonded

laminated polyethylene film - kraft paper moisture barrierunderside.

c. Sheet Jacketing: Corrugated 1-1/4 inch x 1/4 inch deep with

integral bonded laminated polyethylene film - kraft paper

moisture barrier underside.d. Fastening Devices:

1) Strapping: Type 18-8 stainless steel, 0.020 inch thick,

1/2 and 3/4 inch wide as specified.2) Wing Seals: Type 18-8 stainless steel, 0.032 inch thick.

3) Sheet Metal Screws: Panhead, Type A, hardened

aluminum, and stainless steel.2. Circumferentially Corrugated Aluminum Jacketing: Childer’s Corrolon.

a. Construction: 3/16 inch circumferentially corrugated embossed

aluminum, ASTM B 209, Types 1100, 3003, 3105, or 505, H-14

temper, 0.016 inch thick.b. Moisture Barrier: Integrally bonded to jacket over entire surface

in contact with insulation.

c. Fastening Devices:1) Strapping: 0.020 inch thick by 1/2 inch wide, Type

3003, 3105, 5005, H-14 temper.

2) Wing Seals: 0.032 inch thick Type 5005, H-14 temper

aluminum.

2.03 ADHESIVES, MASTICS, AND SEALERS

A. Lagging Adhesive (Canvas Jackets): Childers’ CP-50AMV1, Epolux’s Cadalag

336, Foster’s 30-36.

B. Vapor Lap Seal Adhesive (Fibrous Glass Insulation): Childers’ CP-82, Epolux’s

Cadoprene 400, Foster’s 85-60 or 85-20.

C. Vapor Barrier Mastic (Fibrous Glass Insulation): Permeance shall be .03 permsor less at 45 mils dry per ASTM E 96. Childers’ CP-34, Epolux’s Cadalar 670,

Foster’s 30-65.

D263605238


D. Adhesive (Flexible Elastomeric Foam): Armstrong’s 520, Childers’ CP-82,Epolux’s Cadoprene 488, Foster’s 85-75. 5 gallon cans only.

E. Adhesive (Fiberglass duct liner): Childers’ Chil Quik CP-127, Foster Vapor Fas85-60. Must comply with ASTM C 916, Type II.

F. Weather Barrier Breather Mastic (Reinforcing Membrane): Childers’ VI-CRYL

CP-10/11, Foster’s Weatherite 46-50.

G. Sealant (Metal Pipe Jacket): Non hardening elastomeric sealants. FosterElastolar 95-44, Childers Chil Byl CP-76, Pittsburgh Corning 727.

H. Reinforcing Membrane: Childers’ Chil Glas #10, Foster Mast a Fab, PittsburghCorning PC 79.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Insulation Fasteners for Ductwork and Equipment:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Duro-Dyne Corp.; Erico Fastening Systems,Inc.

2. Type: Weld pins, complete with self-locking insulation retaining

washers.

B. Pressure Sensitive Tape for Sealing Laminated Jackets:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Alpha Associates, Ideal Tape, Morgan

Adhesive.

2. Type: Same construction as jacket.

C. Wire, Bands, and Wire Mesh:

1. Binding and Lacing Wire: Nickel copper alloy or copper clad steel, gage

as specified.

2. Bands: Galvanized steel, 1/2 inch wide x 0.015 inch thick, with 0.032

inch thick galvanized wing seals.3. Wire Mesh: Woven 20 gage steel wire with 1 inch hexagonal openings,

galvanized after weaving.

D. Metal Corner Angles: Galvanized steel, 2 x 2 inch 28 gage.

E. Reinforcing Membrane: Glass or Polyester, 10 x 10 mesh. Alpha Associates

Style 59, Childer’s Chil-Glas, Foster’s MAST-A-FAB.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Perform the following before starting insulation Work:

1. Install hangers, supports and appurtenances in their permanent locations.

2. Complete testing of piping, ductwork, and equipment.

3. Clean and dry surfaces to be insulated.

D263605 239


3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL


installation instructions unless otherwise specified.

B. Piping Insulation: Provide continuous insulation and jacketing when passing thru

interior wall, floor, and ceiling construction.

1. At through Penetration Firestops: Coordinate insulation densities with

the requirements of approved firestop system being installed. SeeSection 078400.

a. Insulation densities required by approved firestop system may

vary with the densities specified in this Section. When thisoccurs use the higher density insulation.

C. Do not intermix different insulation materials on individual runs of piping.

3.03 INSTALLATION AT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Reset and realign hangers and supports if they are displaced while installinginsulation.

B. Install high density jacketed insulation inserts at hangers and supports for

insulated ductwork, piping, and equipment.

C. Insulation Inserts for Use with Fibrous Glass Insulation:

1. Ductwork: Install 6 pcf density jacketed fibrous glass board, same

thickness as adjoining insulation, sized for full bearing on supporting

trapeze member, and as required to enable abutting to adjoininginsulation and overlapping of jacketing.

2. Piping: Where clevis hangers are used, install insulation shields and high

density jacketed insulation inserts between shield and pipe.a. Where insulation is subject to compression at points over 180

degrees apart, e.g. riser clamps, U-bolts, trapezes, etc.; fully

encircle pipe with 2 protection shields and 2 high densityjacketed fibrous glass insulation inserts within supporting

members.

1) Exception: Locations where pipe covering protection

saddles are specified for hot service piping, 6 inch andlarger.

D. Insulation Inserts for Use with Flexible Elastomeric Foam Insulation:

1. Ductwork: Install hardwood block, same thickness as adjoining

insulation, sized for full bearing on supporting trapeze member and asrequired to abutt and seal vapor tight with adjoining insulation.

2. Piping:

a. Where clevis hangers are used, install insulation shields withhardwood filler pieces, same thickness as adjoining insulation,

inserted in undersized die cut or slotted holes in insulation at

support points.b. Contour hardwood blocks to match the curvature of pipe, and

shield.

D263605240


c. Coat dowels and blocks with insulation adhesive, and insert

while still wet.

d. Vapor seal outer surfaces of dowels and blocks with adhesiveafter insertion.

e. Install filler pieces as follows:

PIPE/TUBING

SIZEFILLER PIECES POSITION

Thru 1-1/2” 2 dowel plugs 6 o’clock; in tandem

2” thru 4” 1 block 2 dowel plugs6 o’clock, and 4 & 8

o’clock respectively

6” 2 blocks 4 dowel plugs6 o’clock; in tandem and

4 & 8 o’clock; in tandem

3.04 INSTALLATION OF FIBROUS GLASS COLD SERVICE INSULATION

A. Install insulation materials with a field or factory applied ASTM C 1136 Type Ilaminated vapor barrier jacket, unless otherwise specified.

B. Piping:

1. Butt insulation joints together, continuously seal minimum 1-1/2 inchwide self-sealing longitudinal jacket laps and 3 inch wide butt adhesive

backed strips.

a. Substitution: 3 inch wide pressure sensitive sealing tape, ofsame material as jacket, may be used in lieu of butt strips.

2. Bed insulation in a 2 inch wide band of vapor barrier mastic, and vapor

seal exposed ends of insulation with vapor barrier mastic at each butt

joint between pipe insulation and equipment, fittings or flanges at thefollowing intervals:

a. Horizontal Pipe Runs: 21 ft.

b. Vertical Pipe Runs: 9 ft.

C. Fittings, Valves, Flanges and Irregular Surfaces:

1. Insulate with mitre cut or premolded fitting insulation of same material

and thickness as pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation in place with 16 gage wire, with ends twisted andturned down into insulation.

3. Butt insulation against pipe insulation and bond with joint sealer.

4. Insulate valves up to and including bonnets, without interfering withpacking nuts.

5. Apply leveling coat of insulating cement to smooth out insulation and

cover wiring.

6. When insulating cement has dried, seal fitting, valve and flangeinsulation, by imbedding a layer of reinforcing membrane or 4 oz. canvas

jacket between 2 flood coats of vapor barrier mastic, each 1/8 inch thick

wet.7. Lap reinforcing membrane or canvas on itself and adjoining pipe

insulation at least 2 inches.

8. Trowel, brush or rubber glove outside coat over entire insulated surface.

D263605 241


9. Exceptions:

a. In Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Machine Rooms, Boiler

Rooms, Finished Rooms and Finished Spaces: Cover fittings,valves and flanges insulated with fibrous glass with an additional

6 oz canvas jacket, lapped on adjoining insulation and pasted

with lagging adhesive.b. Type C and D Piping Systems: Valves, fittings and flanges may

be insulated with premolded PVC fitting jackets, with fibrous

glass insulation inserts.1) Additional insulation inserts are required for services

with operating temperatures under 45 degrees F or where

insulation thickness exceeds 1-1/2 inches. The surface

temperature of PVC fitting jacket must not go below 45degrees F.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF FIBROUS GLASS HOT SERVICE INSULATION

A. Install insulation materials with field or factory applied ASTM C 1136 Type Ilaminated vapor barrier jacket unless otherwise specified.

B. Piping:

1. Butt insulation joints together, continuously seal minimum 1-1/2 inch

wide self-sealing longitudinal jacket laps and 3 inch wide adhesivebacked butt strips.

a. Substitution: 3 inch wide pressure sensitive sealing tape, of

same material as the jacket, may be used in lieu of butt strips.2. Fill voids in insulation at hanger with insulating cement.

3. Exceptions:

a. Piping in Accessible Shafts, Attic Spaces, Crawl Spaces,

Unfinished Spaces and Concealed Piping: Butt insulation jointstogether and secure minimum 1-1/2 inch wide longitudinal jacket

laps and 3 inch wide butt strips of same material as jacket, with

outward clinching staples on maximum 4 inch centers. Fill voidsin insulation at hangers with insulating cement.

b. Piping in Tunnels: Butt insulation joints together and secure

minimum 1-1/2 inch wide longitudinal jacket laps and 3 inch

wide butt strips, of same material as jacket, with outwardclinching staples on maximum 4 inch centers and 16 gage wires

a minimum of 4 loops per section. Fill voids in insulation with

insulating cement.

C. Fittings, Valves, Flanges and Irregular Surfaces:

1. Insulate with mitre cut or premolded fitting insulation of same material

and thickness as insulation.

2. Secure in place with 16 gage wire, with ends twisted and turned downinto insulation.

3. Butt fitting, valve and flange insulation against pipe insulation, and fill

voids with insulating cement.4. Insulate valves up to and including bonnets, without interfering with

packing nuts.

D263605242


5. Apply leveling coat of insulating cement to smooth out insulation and

cover wiring.

6. After insulating cement has dried, coat insulated surface with laggingadhesive, and apply 4 oz or 6 oz canvas jacket as required by pipe size.

a. Lap canvas jacket on itself and adjoining pipe insulation at least

2 inches.b. Size entire canvas jacket with lagging adhesive.

7. Exceptions:

a. In Types E, F and G Service Piping Systems: Valves, fittingsand flanges may be insulated with premolded PVC fitting

jackets, with fibrous glass insulation inserts.

1) Additional insulation inserts are required for services

with operating temperatures over 250 degrees F or whereinsulation thickness exceeds 1-1/2 inches. The surface

temperature of PVC fitting jacket must not exceed 150

degrees F.b. In Types E, F, and G Service Piping Systems: Insulate fittings,

valves, and irregular surfaces 3 inch size and smaller with

insulating cement covered with 4 oz or 6 oz canvas jacket asrequired by pipe size.

1) Terminate pipe insulation adjacent to flanges and unions

with insulating cement trowelled down to pipe on a

bevel.c. In Type H Service Piping System: Insulate fittings, valves,

flanges, unions, and irregular surfaces 3 inch size and smaller

with insulating cement covered with 4 oz or 6 oz canvas jacketas required by pipe size.

d. Fittings, Valves, Flanges, and Irregular Surfaces In Concealed

Piping, Piping in Accessible Shafts, Attic Spaces, Crawl Spaces,

Unfinished Rooms, Unfinished Spaces, and Tunnels: Sizing ofcanvas surface is not required.

D. Equipment:

1. Secure fibrous glass block or board insulation in place with wire or

galvanized steel bands.a. Small Areas: Secure insulation with 16 gage wire on maximum

6 inch centers.

b. Large Areas: Secure insulation with 14 gage wire or .015 inchthick by 1/2 inch wide galvanized steel bands on maximum 10

inch centers. Stagger insulation joints.

c. Irregular Surfaces: Where application of block or boardinsulation is not practical, insulate with insulating cement built-

up to same thickness as adjoining insulation.

2. Fill joints, voids and irregular surfaces with insulating cement, to a

uniform thickness.3. Stretch wire mesh over entire insulated surface and secure to anchors,

with wire edges laced together.

4. Apply finishing cement, total of 1/2 inch thick, in 1/4 inch thick coats.a. Trowel second coat to a smooth hard finish.

5. Neatly bevel insulation around manholes, handholes, cleanouts, ASME

stamp, boiler manufacturer’s name and catalog number.

D263605 243

230719 - 10 Project No. SA979-H

3.06 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC FOAM INSULATION

A. Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe, and seal butt joints with adhesive.

1. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, slit the insulation and install.

2. Re-seal with adhesive, making sure the mating surfaces are completelyjoined.

B. Insulate fittings and valves with miter cut sections. Use templates provided by

the manufacturer, and assemble the cut sections in accordance with themanufacturer’s printed instructions.

1. Insulate threaded fittings and valves with sleeved fitting covers. Over

lap and seal the covers to the adjoining pipe insulation with adhesive.

C. Carefully mate and seal with adhesive all contact surfaces to maintain the

integrity of the vapor barrier of the system.

D. Insulated Covers for Pumps:

1. Do not extend pump insulation beyond or interfere with stuffing boxes,or interfere with adjustment and servicing of parts requiring regular

maintenance or operating attention.

E. Piping Exposed Exterior to a Building, Totally Exposed to the Elements:

1. Apply flexible elastomeric foam insulation to piping with adhesive.2. Apply reinforcing membrane around piping insulation with adhesive or

mastic.

3. Adhesive Applied System: Apply 2 coats of finish. See Section 099103.

4. Mastic Applied System: Apply another coat of mastic over reinforcingmembrane.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF SHEET METAL JACKETING ON PIPING

A. Secure jacketing to insulated piping with preformed aluminum snap straps andstainless steel strapping installed with special banding wrench.

B. Jacket exposed insulated fittings, valves and flanges with mitred sections of

aluminum jacketing.

1. Seal joints with sealant and secure with preformed aluminum bands.2. Substitution: Factory fabricated, preformed, sectional aluminum fitting

covers may be used in lieu of mitred sections of aluminum jacketing for

covering fittings, valves and flanges.3. Substitution: Factory fabricated, preformed, sectional aluminum fitting

covers or premolded polyvinylchloride fitting covers may be used in lieu

of mitred sections of aluminum jacketing for covering fittings, valves

and flanges.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF SMOKE BREECHING AND SMOKE FLUE PIPE INSULATION

A. Secure insulation in place with wire or galvanized steel bands unless otherwise

specified.

1. Small Areas: Secure insulation with 16 gage wire on maximum 6 inchcenters.

D263605244

230719 - 11 Project No. SA979-H

2. Large Areas: Secure insulation with 14 gage wire or 0.015 inch thick by

1/2 inch wide galvanized steel bands on maximum 10 inch centers.

B. Stagger insulation joints.

C. On irregular surfaces, where application of block or board insulation is not

practical, insulate with insulating cement built-up to same thickness as adjoining

insulation.

D. Fill joints, voids and irregular surfaces with insulating cement, to a uniformthickness.

E. Install aluminum roll jacketing on insulated surfaces of round smoke breeching,and smoke flue pipe.

F. Install aluminum sheet jacketing on insulated surfaces of rectangular breeching.

G. Lap longitudinal and circumferential joints a minimum of 2 inches.

H. Secure jacketing in place with 1/2 inch by 0.020 inch thick stainless steel bandsand stainless steel wing type seals, on maximum 12 inch centers.

I. Terminate exposed ends of insulation with insulating cement trowelled down to

metal surface on a bevel.

J. Insulate exterior surfaces of smoke breeching, induced draft fans and gas uptakeducts from medium and high pressure steam boilers and high temperature water

boilers to the breeching, and any portion of the gas outlet outside the boilerbrickwork, as shown on the drawings.

K. Insulate vertical steel smoke stacks as shown in detail on the drawings.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Fibrous Glass Board Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation to ductwork, with duct insulation fasteners spaced 3

inch in from all corners of ducts, with intermediate fasteners on

maximum 16 inch centers in all directions.

2. Butt edges of insulation and fill voids with similar insulation.3. Seal minimum 1-1/2 inch wide longitudinal jacket laps continuously with

vapor seal adhesive.

4. Lap circumferential joints with 4 inch wide jacket material and seal lapscontinuously with vapor barrier lap adhesive, or seal continuously with

minimum 3 inch wide pressure sensitive sealing tape, of same material as

jacket.

5. Install metal corner angles over the jacketed insulated corners. Sealexposed ends of insulation with vapor barrier mastic.

6. Vapor seal breaks in vapor barrier jacketing, exposed surfaces of duct

insulation fasteners and metal corner angles, with pressure sensitivesealing tape of same material as jacket or coat with vapor barrier mastic.

D263605 245

230719 - 12 Project No. SA979-H

7. Field apply 6 oz canvas jacket over the vapor barrier jacketed insulation

where indicated on Ductwork Service Insulation Material Schedule in

Part 3 of this Section.a. Apply canvas jacket with lagging adhesive, with a 2 inch lap on

circumferential and longitudinal seams.

b. Outward clinching staples may be utilized for additionalsecurement of canvas to bottom of ducts in excess of 48 inch in

width.

c. Apply heavy coat of lagging adhesive to entire canvas surface.8. Place trapeze hangers, fabricated of steel rods and structural steel

channels or angles, outside of jacketed insulated ducts.

a. Install high density insulation inserts, of thickness equal to

insulation, minimum of 4 inch in width by the bottom dimensionof the duct, at points of support.

b. Continuously jacket insulated ducts and filler pieces through

supports.

B. Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Application:

1. Cut insulation to stretch-out dimensions as recommended by insulation

manufacturer.

2. Remove 2 inch wide strip of insulation material from the jacketing on thelongitudinal and circumferential joint edges to form an overlapping

staple/tape flap.

3. Install insulation with jacketing outside so staple/tape flap overlapsinsulation and jacketing on other end.

4. Butt ends of insulation tightly together.

a. Rectangular and Square Ductwork: Do not compress insulation

at duct corners.5. Staple longitudinal and circumferential joints with outward clinching

staples minimum 6 inches on center, and seal with pressure sensitive

sealing tape.6. Cut off protruding ends of fasteners flush with insulation surface and seal

with pressure sensitive sealing tape.

7. Install duct insulation fasteners on bottom side of horizontal duct runs,

when bottom dimension of the duct is in excess of 24 inches in width.8. Install duct insulation fasteners on sides of duct risers having a

dimension over 24 inches in size.

9. Seal tears, punctures, and penetrations of insulation jacketing withsealing tape and coat with vapor barrier mastic.

10. Secure insulation to ductwork with fasteners spaced in accordance withthe following schedule:

DUCT DIMENSION SPACING OF FASTENERS (MINIMUM)

Up to 24 inches None required.

24 inches to 48 inchesHorizontal Runs: 2 rows - 16 inches on center.

Risers: 16 inches on center, all directions.

49 inches to 60 inchesHorizontal Runs: 3 rows - 16 inches on center.


D263605246

230719 - 13 Project No. SA979-H

DUCT DIMENSION SPACING OF FASTENERS (MINIMUM)

61 inches and over

Horizontal Runs: 16 inches on center, all

directions.


C. Bench Insulated Ductwork:

1. Insulate ducts prior to erection in place when ducts are required to be

installed proximate to walls, ceilings, equipment or other ductwork,which will not permit adequate space for installation of insulation after

ducts are installed.

2. Line interior surfaces of ducts with thermal and acoustic board

insulation, when the specified application of exterior insulation isimpractical.

a. Written permission from the Director’s Representative must be

received, prior to the substitution of lined ducts for exteriorinsulated ducts.

b. Maintain interior cross-sectional areas of ducts, as noted on

drawings.

D. Flexible Elastomeric Foam Insulation on Ductwork Exposed to the Elements,

Exterior to a Building:

1. Apply 2 inch thick flexible elastomeric foam sheet insulation to

ductwork with adhesive.a. Insulate sheet metal duct seams, angle bracing, and reinforcing

with same insulation thickness specified for ductwork.

2. Apply reinforcing membrane around ductwork insulation with adhesive

or mastic.3. Adhesive Applied System: Apply 2 coats of finish. See Section 099103.

4. Mastic Applied System: Apply another coat of mastic over reinforcing

membrane.


A. Field Samples: The Director’s Representative, may at his discretion, take field

samples of installed insulation for the purpose of checking materials and

application. Reinsulate sample cut areas.

3.11 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulate all cold service and hot service piping, equipment, and appurtenances

except where otherwise specified.

B. Schedule of Items Not to be Insulated:

1. Do not insulate the following cold service items:

a. Actual heat transfer surfaces.

b. Chromium plated piping, unless otherwise specified.c. Flexible vibration eliminators.

d. Refrigerant liquid piping, unless sub-cooled below 70 degrees F.

e. Boiler water treatment equipment and piping.f. Water meters.

D263605 247

230719 - 14 Project No. SA979-H

g. Chemical feed piping.

h. Boiler header drains.

2. Do not insulate the following hot service piping:a. Plated or white metal piping.

b. Condenser water piping, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Exposed risers (hot water) in finished rooms.d. Piping inside convector and finned tube radiation enclosures.

e. Short vertical and horizontal piping connections (less than 24

inches in length):1) Located exposed above floors in finished rooms or

finished spaces.

2) Serving one fixture, or one piece of equipment.

3) Connected to horizontal mains, branch mains or risermains.

4) Conveying liquids or vapors at temperatures from 75

degrees F to 215 degrees F, unless otherwise specified.f. Drains from heating equipment and appurtenances that flow to

waste.

g. Water and other fluids 81 degrees F to 104 degrees F.h. Branch blow-down piping connections, from continuous blow-

down piping to boiler sample water coolers.

i. Boiler blow-off and blow-down piping.

j. Discharge piping from steam safety and water relief valves.k. Vent piping to atmosphere from installed exposed in Mechanical

Equipment Rooms, Steam Service Rooms, Machine Rooms,

Boiler Rooms, Penthouses and Power Plants, and connected tothe following:

1) Blow-off tanks.

2) Flash tanks.

3) Condensate tanks.3. Do not insulate the following hot service fittings, valves, flanges and

irregular surfaces:

a. Flanges and unions in Type E, F and G service piping systems.b. Hydronic Specialties:

1) Flow indicators.

2) Zone control valves.3) Air vents.

4) Air control fittings.

c. Pressure reducing valves and pilot lines.

d. Safety and relief valves.e. Back pressure valves.

f. Float chambers and level controllers.

g. Boiler water columns.h. Soot blower heads.

i. Steam turbine drives.

j. Venturi tubes and orifice plates.

4. Do not insulate the following hot service equipment:a. Actual heat transfer surfaces.

b. Hot water pumps.

c. Boiler return pumps.d. Chemical feed pumps.

D263605248

230719 - 15 Project No. SA979-H

e. Equipment manholes, handholes, and cleanouts.

f. ASME stamps, nameplates with manufacturer’s name and model

number.5. Do not insulate items installed under other Contracts.

6. Do not insulate mechanical equipment with a factory applied insulated

steel jacket.

3.12 COLD SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL SCHEDULE

TYPESERVICE AND

TEMPERATURES

INSULATION

MATERIAL

PIPE SIZES

(INCHES)

MINIMUM

(NOMINAL)

INSULATION

THICKNESS

(INCHES)

A & BRefrigerants, Brine, and Fluids

below 40 F.

Flex. Elastomeric

Foam

1-1/2 & less

1-5/8 and Up

1-1/2

1-1/2

A. NOTES:

1. Double the insulation thickness above for piping, installed in tunnels and

conduits.

2. Equipment Insulation: Insulation thicknesses above also apply for flat,curved and irregular equipment surfaces.

a. Insulate equipment with fibrous glass board insulation with

minimum density 6 pcf.b. Insulate base mounted and unitary type pumps and other

equipment specified, installed in potable water, ice water, chilled

water and dual temperature water systems, with 3/4 inch thicksheet flexible elastomeric foam.

c. Exceptions: Minimum insulation thickness for Type A service

shall be a minimum of 1 inch thick for flat, curved and

equipment irregular surfaces.3. Type D Insulation Materials: In addition to the services shown on the

schedule above, use Type D materials and thicknesses for the following:

a. Condensate Drain Piping:1) Piping connected to drain pans under cooling coils

within unit enclosure, except where over drain pans.

2) Horizontal condensate drain piping outside unit

enclosures.3) Vertical condensate drain piping of less than one story

immediately following horizontal run.

3.13 HOT SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL SCHEDULE

SERVICE AND

TEMPERATURES

INSULATION

MATERIAL

PIPE SIZES

(INCHES)

MINIMUM

(NOMINAL)

INSULATION

THICKNESS

(INCHES)

D263605 249

230719 - 16 Project No. SA979-H

SERVICE AND

TEMPERATURES

INSULATION

MATERIAL

PIPE SIZES

(INCHES)

MINIMUM

(NOMINAL)

INSULATION

THICKNESS

(INCHES)

Water and other fluids

105 F to140 F. Type E

Flex. Elastomeric

Foam or

Fibrous Glass

1-1/2 & Less

Over 1-1/2

1-1/2

2

Water and other fluids

141 F to 250 F. Type F

Fibrous Glass 6 & Less

8 & Up

2

2-1/2

A. NOTES:

1. Equipment Insulation:

a. Insulate the following with fibrous glass block or board

insulation:

1) Heating Hot water Air-separator.2) Heating Hot Water Expansion tanks.

b. Insulate equipment with fibrous glass board insulation with

minimum density 6 pcf.c. Minimum thickness for flat, curved and irregular equipment

surfaces:

1) 1-1/2 inch for E and F service.2) 3 inch for G service.

3) 5 inch for H service.

3.14 SCHEDULE OF METAL JACKETING FOR INSULATED PIPE

A. Jacket exposed insulated risers with preformed sectional aluminum metaljacketing, in Types E to H service piping systems, installed in finished rooms or

finished spaces above Basement Floor Level.

1. Exception: Preformed sectional aluminum metal jacketing is not

required on piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, MechanicalEquipment Rooms and Machine Rooms.

B. Install jacketing from floor to ceiling or from floor to first change of direction in

riser, when such change in direction is a minimum of 9’-0” above finished floor,whichever is applicable.

1. The aforementioned also applies to down feed piping systems.

C. Piping Exterior to Building: Jacket insulated piping with circumferentially

corrugated aluminum jacketing.

1. Lap longitudinal and circumferential joints a minimum of 2 inches.2. Secure jacketing in place with 1/2 inch x 0.020 inch thick aluminum

bands secured with aluminum wing type seals, on maximum 12 inch

centers.3. Cover insulated fittings, valves, and offsets with mitered sections of

jacketing. Seal joints with metal pipe jacket sealant, and secure with

aluminum strapping and wing seals.4. Factory fabricated, preformed fitting covers of same material as jacketing

may be used instead of mitered jacketing.

D263605250

230719 - 17 Project No. SA979-H

5. Install jacketing so as to avoid trapping condensation and precipitation.

3.15 DUCTWORK SERVICE INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulate all ductwork service except where otherwise specified.

B. Do not insulate the following ductwork service items:

1. Exhaust ductwork, unless otherwise shown.

2. Return fans.

3. Exhaust fans.4. Interior lined ductwork.

5. Flexible ductwork connections.

6. Interior lined air terminal units.7. Sound absorbers.

8. Ductwork located within equipment.

9. Ductwork where design temperature difference between interior andexterior of duct or plenum does not exceed 15 degrees F.

3.16 DUCTWORK SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL SCHEDULE

LOCATION SERVICEINSUL.

MATERIAL

MINIMUM

INSUL.

THICKNESS

JACKET

TYPE

MINIMUM

REQUIRED

R VALUE

Concealed, inside

building insul.

envelope in

unconditioned

spaces (in shafts,

ceilings, walls, and

floors)

Air Conditioning Supply

and Returns Under 65°F,

100% Outside Air, Heating

Supply Over 85°F.

Returns with Temp. Diff.

With Ambient Greater than

15 degrees F

Fibrous Glass

Blanket

Fibrous Glass

Board

2

1-1/2

I or II

I or IIR-5

Exposed, inside

building insul.

envelope.

Air Conditioning Supply

Under 65°F, 100% Outside

Air, Heating Supply Over

85 F.

Fibrous Glass

Board1-1/2

I with

Canvas

Outer

Jacket

R-5

Inside building but

exposed to outside

air temp., e.g.,

ventilated attic.

Air Conditioning Supply,

Heating Supply, All

Returns including returns

mixed with outside air.

Fibrous Glass

Blanket

Fibrous Glass

Board

2-1/2

2

I or II

I or IIR-8

A. NOTES:

1. Equipment: Insulate air handling equipment, not furnished with factoryapplied insulated jacket or internal insulation, with minimum 1-1/2 inch

thick fibrous glass board with an ASTM C 1136 Type I jacket, installed

and finished as specified for exposed ductwork in finished spaces.

END OF SECTION

D263605 251


SECTION 230923

DIRECT DIGITAL BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components,utility meters, and other systems including control and monitoring components for

HVAC system and other items that are not supplied with factory-wired controls.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide a microprocessor based direct digital control (DDC) building automation

system (BAS) as a complete system suitable for the control of the heating,ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) and other building-level systems as

specified and shown. This building automation system shall be standalone with the

capability to completely, seamlessly and directly interfaced with the existing

campus-wide energy management and control system (EMCS) installed in the basewithout interpreters or third party devices. Communication with existing base-wide

UMCS workstations, servers and laptops shall utilize BACnet protocol and be

configured for operations, and connected by common fiber optic system or otherapproved network connection serving building. The system shall include software

with all necessary means for global data exchange, scheduling, local and remote

control and adjustment; load shedding for demand controls; even management;

monitoring; trending; logging; maintenance notification; and alarms.

B. Building automation system main panels for this project shall be located in Room

136 for Highway Safety Operations Facility and Room 116 for Commercialvehicle Inspection Facility. Coordinate the final location with each facility.

C. All utility meters including domestic water meter, natural gas meter, and electric

meter shall have remote meter readings through the BAS. Utility meters shall beprovided by the utility companies.

D. The control system shall be complete in all respects with system completeness

(turnkey system) for the building automation system (BAS). System shall be aBACnet direct digital control system. The control system shall consist of a

highspeed, peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers and a web-based operator

interface. Depict each mechanical system and building floor plan by a point-andclick graphic. A web server with a network interface card shall gather data from

this system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser

on each PC connected to the network. Operators shall be able to perform all normal

operator functions through the web browser interface. System shall use the BACnetprotocol for communication to the operator workstation or web server and for

communication between control modules. Control system consists of sensors,

indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus,wiring, and accessories connected to controllers to operate mechanical systems

according to sequences of operation indicated or specified. Provide all hardware,

software and ancillary components, and wiring not specifically indicated or

D263605252


specified, but necessary to make the system function according to the intent of the

specification. The control system contractor shall also be responsible for the proper

operation of the control system and shall provide all necessary debugging andcalibration. Size all control apparatus to properly supply and/or operate and control

the apparatus served. Note that the control specifications in the design documents

may be generic or have a limited amount interfacing information or job specifics(to varying degrees). Examine not only the plans and specifications for this

Specification Section, but plans and specifications of other related sections and

visit the site to become acquainted with all project conditions including existingconditions. Execution of Contract is evidence that control system contractor has

examined all drawings and specifications, and that all conditions of installing the

work in this Section are verified. Later claims for labor and materials required due

to difficulties encountered, which could have been foreseen had examination beenmade, will not be recognized. The control system shall fully integrate all

distributed digital controls, energy management controls and interfaces to

mechanical equipment specified elsewhere in Division 23. The DDC panels shallbe located in new electric room on the second floor as indicated on the drawing.

The new BACnet DDC system shall have been totally programmed and verified as

satisfying the requirements of the Sequence of Operation contained hereinafter.However, it shall be possible to reprogram the panels on site either by the BAS

Contractor or the Owner. The new DDC system shall be configured to perform all

control, alarming, scheduling and energy management routines either as a

distributed processing unit to a central remote monitoring and control system or asa standalone unit. The DDC system shall have capability to allow for remote

monitoring, controls and reprogramming by system operators through the existing

BAS systems. Additional capabilities shall include all physical points beautomatically trended and alarmed, gathering reports and logs, programming and

downloading databases.

E. Upon completion of project ALL host software, documentation, databases,application programming tools, graphical creation tools, passwords shall become

Director’s Representative’s property

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer’s technical

Product Data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities,

performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials,installation instructions, and startup instructions.

B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly,components, and location and size of each field connection. Submit damper

leakage and flow characteristics, plus size schedule for controlled dampers.

C. Shop Drawings containing the following information for each control system:

1. Schematic flow diagram showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves,

and control devices.

2. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.

3. Diagrams for all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate betweenfactory-installed and field-installed wiring.

D263605 253


4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and

labeling.

5. Written description of sequence of operation.6. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and

trunk data conductors.

7. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit andinput device.

8. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and

calculated) point addresses, and operator notations.9. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power

supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections.

10. Software description and sequence of operation.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems anddifferentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Maintenance data for control systems equipment to be included in the operationand maintenance manual. Include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control

device and compressed-air stations.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered systemcomponents and devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each

operator function.4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended,

and calibration tolerances.

5. Calibration records and list of set points.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components,including control units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect

actual installation and operating sequences.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer specializing in control

system installations.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing control

systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of

successful in-service performance.

C. Startup Personnel Qualifications: Engage specially trained personnel in direct

employ of manufacturer of primary temperature control system.

D. Comply with NFPA 90A.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Coordinate equipment selection with Division 26 Section to achieve compatibilitywith equipment that interfaces with that system.

D263605254



A. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

B. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are

indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping control devices

to unit manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limitedto, the following:

1. Direct Digital Control (DDC) Systems and Components:

a. Alerton Technologies, Inc.

b. Automated Logic Corporation.c. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Factory Branch only.

d. Trane Co. (The); Commercial Systems Group.

e. Siemens Building Technologies.f. ALC

g. Andover Controls

2.02 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) EQUIPMENT

A. Application Software: Include the following:

1. Input/output capability from operator station.

2. Operator system access levels via software password.

3. Database creation and support.4. Dynamic color graphic displays.

5. Alarm processing.

6. Event processing.7. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.

8. Data collection.

9. Graphic development on workstation.

10. Maintenance management.

B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable,

nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel;integral interface equipment; and back-up power source.

1. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information;

execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator

stations; and download from or upload to operator station.2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.

Functions include the following:

a. Global communications.

b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

d. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting

field hardware and controlled environment.

D263605 255


C. Local Area Networks (LANs): Not less than 60 stations or nodes at minimum 19.2kB.

1. System Support: Capacity for a minimum of 10 workstations connectedto multiuser, multitasking environment with concurrent capability to

access DDC network or control units.

D. Software: Update to latest version of software at project completion. Include andimplement the following capabilities from the control units:

1. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI metric.

2. Load Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time

scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, DDC withfine tuning, and trend logging.

3. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and

enthalpy switchover.4. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset,

chilled-water reset, and equipment sequencing.

5. Programming Application Features: Include trend point, alarm messages,

weekly scheduling, and interlocking.

2.03 COMMUNICATION

A. Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routersshall comprise a BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface

communication shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, BACnet.

LON is not an acceptable protocol.

B. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall consist of a two-tiered system of anupper level Ethernet TCP/IP Network, and a twisted-pair field bus of Standalone

Digital Control Units (SDCUs). All field bus communications must be routed

through Ethernet based network controllers or routers, and not directly through PCworkstations or servers.

C. The owner shall provide a minimum of one Ethernet network drop and internetaccess with static IP address to allow communication with the BAS System for

remote configuration, diagnostics and service by the BAS supplier.

D. Level 1 Controllers, the main backbone of the system, shall be an Ethernet10/100bT LAN/WAN. Network Router/Controllers, Operator Workstations, and

the Central File Server shall connect directly to this network without the need for

Gateway devices.

E. Where required, provide a BACnet gateway to interface to non-BACnet systems

that use the Modbus RTU protocol or other proprietary protocol. The gateway shall

communicate directly over Ethernet TCP/IP and shall use the BACnet/IP protocol

to communicate with the operator’s workstation.

F. Level 2 Controllers of the system shall consist of one MS/TP field buses managed

by the Network Router/Controllers. Minimum speed shall be 76.8kbps. TheLevel 2 field bus consists of an RS485, token passing bus that supports up to 127

Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs).

D263605256


2.04 CONTROL PANELS

A. Central (Master) Control Panels: Fully enclosed, steel-rack-type cabinet withlocking doors or locking removable backs. Match finish of panels and provide

multicolor graphic displays, schematically showing system being controlled.

B. Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floormounting, located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide

common keying for all panels.

1. Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, furniture-quality steel, or

extruded-aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyedlock, with manufacturer’s standard shop-painted finish and color.

2. Panel-Mounted Equipment: Temperature and humidity controllers,

relays, and automatic switches; except safety devices. Mount deviceswith adjustments accessible through front of panel.

3. Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual

switches, including damper-positioning switches, changeover switches,

thermometers, and gages.4. Graphics: Color-coded graphic, laminated-plastic displays on doors,

schematically showing system being controlled, with protective, clear

plastic sheet bonded to entire door.

2.05 STANDALONE DIGITAL CONTROL UNITS (SDCU)

A. Standalone Digital Control Units shall provide control of HVAC, including air

handling units, rooftop units, variable air volume boxes, and other mechanicalequipment. Each controller shall be fully programmable, contain its own control

programs and will continue to operate in the event of a failure or communication

loss to its associated network controller.

B. Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the

controller, shall be stored in non-volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall

contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging,plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory.

C. SDCUs shall have a RS-485 communication port to the MS/TP field bus, operating

at a speed of at least 76.8 kbps.

1. Input/Output:

a. Each SDCU shall have enough inputs and outputs to meet the

application’s required points. Each SDCU shall support universal

inputs, whereas any input may be software-defined as:1) Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts.

2) Counter Inputs for summing pulses from meters.

3) Thermistor Inputs for measuring temperatures in space,ducts and thermowells.

4) Analog inputs for pressure, humidity, flow and position

measurements.b. SDCUs must support both digital and analog output types:

1) Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control.

2) Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control,

and capacity control of primary equipment.

D263605 257


2. Expandability:

a. For larger controllers (16 base inputs and up), provide input and

output expansion through the use of plug-in modules. At leasttwo I/O modules must be capable of being added to the base

SDCU.

3. Hardware Override Switches:a. All digital outputs on air handling unit controllers shall include

three position manual override switches to allow selection of the

ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. These switches shall be builtinto the unit and shall provide feedback to the controller so that

the position of the override switch can be obtained through

software. In addition each analog output on air handling unit

controllers shall be equipped with an override potentiometer toallow manual adjustment of the analog output signal over its full

range, when the 3 position manual override switch is placed in

the ON position.4. Room Sensor Support: The SDCU shall support the following two types

of room sensors:

a. Type A: Room thermistor in a stainless steel cover plate withvandal proof screws

b. Type B: Room thermistor with plastic cover plate and LCD

display of space temperature.

2.06 ANALOG CONTROLLERS

A. Step Controllers: 6-stage or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to

handle loads, UL listed and operated by electric motor.

B. Electric Outdoor Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type,

proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale

range -10 to 70°F (-12 to 21°C), and single- or, double-pole contacts.

C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with

provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers,

including proportional band and authority.

1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided withaccessible control readjustment potentiometer.

2.07 TIME CLOCKS

A. Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and 7-daydial; continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, 8-hour, power-failure

carryover; multiple-switch trippers; minimum of 2 and maximum of 8 signals per

day with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed output contacts.

B. Solid-state, programmable time control with 4 separate programs; 24-hour battery

carryover; individual ON-OFF-AUTO switches for each program; 365-day

calendar with 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for eachprogram; and system fault alarm.

D263605258


2.08 SENSORS

A. Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant, for wall, immersion, or ductmounting as required.

1. Resistance Temperature Detectors: Platinum.

a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.

b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.c. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.

(1 sq. m).d. Averaging Elements in Ducts: Use where ducts are larger than

9 sq. ft. (1 sq. m) or where prone to stratification, length as

required.

e. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimuminsertion length of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

f. Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover.

g. Outside Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from directsunlight.

h. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with

insulated back and security screws.2. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.

a. Accuracy: 5 percent full range with linear output.

b. Duct and Outside Air Sensors: With element guard and

mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.3. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range

for expected input, temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5percent.

b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.

c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 0.25 inch wg (0 to 62 Pa).

d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg (0 to 1243 Pa).4. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service,

range suitable for system, proportional output 4 to 20 mA.

5. Carbon Monoxide Detector: UL listed carbon monoxide detector suitableover temperature range of 40 to 100ºF, powered with 120 VAC/1

PHASE/60 HZ, and calibrated to alarm at 35 ppm. The detector shall

have audible locale alarm horn and shall be remotely monitored by theBAS system.

6. Natural Gas Detector: UL listed natural detector suitable over tempera-

ture range of 40 to 100ºF, powered with 120 VAC/1 PHASE/60 HZ, and

calibrated to alarm at 25% of the LEL of methane (CH4). The detectorshall have audible locale alarm horn and shall be remotely monitored by

the BAS system.

7. NOx Sensor: Sensor shall continuously monitor and give local indicationof indoor air for NOx content. It shall have a range of from 0 to 50 ppm.

Sensor shall be accurate to +/- 5 ppm. Sensor shall output NOx levels

and binary output that changes state when the NOx level is above a

locally adjustable NOx setpoint. Sensor shall have normal, trouble andalarm lights. Sensor shall be complete with automatic zero and span

calibration using a timed calibration gas system, and shall not require

periodic maintenance or testing.

D263605 259


B. Equipment Operation Sensors: As follows:

1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range

of 0 to 5 inches wg (0 to 1243 Pa).2. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch piped across pump

with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psi (55 to 414 kPa).

3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current

transformers, adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.

C. Valve/Damper Position Indication: Potentiometer mounted in enclosure with

adjustable crank-arm assembly connected to damper to transmit 0 to 100 percentvalve/damper travel.

D. Water-Flow Switches: Pressure-flow switches of bellows-actuated mercury or

snap-acting type, with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, withstainless-steel or bronze paddle. For chilled-water applications, provide vaporproof

type.

2.09 THERMOSTATS

A. Low-Voltage, ON-OFF Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated,

mercury-switch type, with either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater.

B. Line-Voltage, ON-OFF Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows–actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat

anticipator, integral manual ON-OFF-AUTO selector switch; UL listed for

electrical rating.

1. Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, withOFF position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors.

2. Dead Band: Maximum 2ºF (1ºC).

C. Low-Voltage Modulating Thermostats: Potentiometer, operated by vapor-filledbellows.

D. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: ON-OFF or modulating type, liquid-filled tocompensate for changes in ambient temperature, with copper capillary and bulb,


1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.

2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit

elements, extended to cover full width of duct or unit, adequately

supported.

4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustablefrom front of instrument.

5. ON-OFF, remote-bulb thermostats with precision snap switches, with

electrical ratings required by application.6. Construct modulating, remote-bulb, potentiometer thermostats so

complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable for

inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

D263605260

230923 - 10 Project No. SA979-H

E. Fire-Protection Thermostats: UL listed with fixed or adjustable settings to operateat not less than 75ºF (24ºC) above normal maximum operating temperature, with

the following:

1. Reset: Manual.

2. Reset: Automatic with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at

central control panel, with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to

indicate operation.

F. Room Thermostat Construction: Manufacturer’s standard locking covers.

1. Thermometer: Red-reading glass or spiral bimetal.

2. Guards: Heavy-duty, clear plastic or metal-wire, tamperproof guards.3. Locking Covers: With only temperature indication visible.

4. Limits: Provide on heating/cooling dual-temperature thermostats, to

prevent setting cooling set point below 75ºF (24ºC), and heating set pointabove 75ºF (24ºC).

G. Room Thermostat Accessories: As follows:

1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.

2. Thermostat Guards: Locking transparent-plastic mounted on separatebase.

3. Adjusting Key: As required for device.

4. Aspirating Boxes: Where indicated for thermostats requiring flushinstallation.

H. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning

action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.

I. Airstream Thermostats: 2-pipe, fully proportional, single temperature, with

adjustable set point in middle of range and adjustable throttling range, plug-in test

fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averagingelement.

J. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportionalflow, molded-rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and

reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psi (172 kPa), cast housing with

position indicator and adjusting knob.

2.10 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth

modulating action or 2-position action.

1. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completelyoil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-

spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or

adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentio-

meter.2. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger than 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65):

Size for running torque of 150 inch-pounds (16.9 N x m) and breakaway

torque of 300 inch-pounds (33.9 N x m).3. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger than 2-1/2 Inches (64 mm):

Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 inch-pounds (16.9 N x m).

D263605 261

230923 - 11 Project No. SA979-H

4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq.m):

Size for running torque of 150 inch-pounds (16.9 N x m) and breakaway

torque of 300 inch-pounds (33.9 N x m).5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m):

Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 inch-pounds (16.9 N x m).

B. Electronic Operators: Select operator for full shutoff at maximum pumpdifferential pressure.

2.11 CONTROL VALVES

A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure classindicated. Where type or body material is not indicated, make selection as

determined by manufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based

on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system.

B. Globe Pattern: As follows:

1. Up to 2 inches (DN 50): Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem,

renewable composition disc, screwed ends with backseating capacityrepackable under pressure.

2. Over 2 inches (DN 50): Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type

disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc.3. Hydronic Systems: As follows:

a. Rating: Service at 125 psi WSP (862 kPa) and 250ºF (121ºC).

b. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless

steel or brass.1) Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and

guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom of guided

plugs.c. Sizing: 3-psi (21-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow

rate.

d. Flow Characteristics: 2-way valves have equal percentagecharacteristics; 3-way valves have linear characteristics. Select

operators to close valves against pump shutoff head.

C. Butterfly Pattern: Iron body; bronze, aluminum-bronze, or stainless-steel disc;resilient, replaceable seat for service to 180ºF (82ºC) wafer or lug ends; extended

neck.

1. Rating: Service at 125 psi WSP (862 kPa) and 250ºF (121 ºC).

2. Sizing: 1-psi (7-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.

D. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as

indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.

1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating

conditions.2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close

against pump shutoff head.

3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentagecharacteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics.

D263605262

230923 - 12 Project No. SA979-H

E. Self-Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports asindicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.

2.12 DAMPERS

A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed blade design; form frames from not

less than 0.1084-inch (2.8-mm) galvanized steel with mounting holes for ductmounting; damper blades not less than 0.0635-inch (1.6-mm) galvanized steel,

with maximum blade width of 8 inches (203 mm).

1. Blades secured to 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter, zinc-plated axles using

zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardwareof zinc-plated steel and brass. Ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel

blade bearings. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From -40 to 200ºF (-40 to 93ºC).

3. For standard applications as indicated, (as selected by manufacturer’ssizing techniques) with optional closed-cell neoprene edging.

4. For low-leakage applications as indicated, provide parallel or opposed

blade design (as selected by manufacturer’s sizing techniques) withinflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage

at less than 10 cfm/sq. ft. (51 L/s/sq. m) of damper area, at differential

pressure of 4 inches wg (995 Pa) when damper is being held by torque of50 inch-pounds (5.6 N x m); test in accordance with AMCA 500.

2.13 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic Cable for Control Wiring: Provide all control wiring for the completeDDC Control System. Refer to Division 26 Section “Wiring for Motors and Motor

Controllers” for control wiring materials.

2.14 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Operator Interface. Web server shall reside on high-speed network with building

controllers. Each standard browser connected to server shall be able to access all

system information. In addition to the primary operator interface, the system shallinclude a secondary interface compatible with a locally available commercial

wireless network and viewable on a commercially available wireless device such as

a Wireless Access Protocol (WAP) enabled cellular telephone or personal digital

assistant (PDA). This secondary interface may be text-based and shall provide asummary of the most important data. As a minimum, the following capabilities

shall be provided through this interface:

1. An operator authentication system that requires an operator to log in

before viewing or editing any data, and which can be configured to limitthe privileges of an individual operator.

2. The ability to view and acknowledge any alarm in the system. Alarms or

links to alarms shall be provided on a contiguous list so the operator canquickly view all alarms.

3. A summary page or pages for each piece of equipment in the system.

This page shall include the current values of all critical I/O points and

shall allow the operator to lock binary points on or off and to lock analogpoints to any value within their range.

D263605 263

230923 - 13 Project No. SA979-H

4. Navigation links that allow the operator to quickly navigate from the

home screen to any piece of equipment in the system, and then return to

the home screen. These links may be arranged in a hierarchical fashion,such as navigating from the home screen to a particular building, then to

a specific floor in the building, and then to a specific room or piece of

equipment.

B. Communication. Web server or workstation and controllers shall communicate

using BACnet protocol. Web server or workstation and control network backbone

shall communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocoland BACnet/IP addressing as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, BACnet

Annex J.

C. Workstation. Extend the existing workstations and servers to meet or exceed DDCsystem manufacturer's recommended specifications. The extended system shall

have sufficient memory to store system software, one year of data for trended

points as required at system acceptance. Configure workstations and networkconnections to meet specified memory and performance. Serial, parallel, and

network communication ports and cables required for proper system operation.

D. The operator’s workstation shall consist of the following:

1. Hardware Base. Industry-standard hardware shall meet or exceed DDC

system manufacturer's recommended specifications and shall meet

response times. Hard disk shall have sufficient memory to store system

software, one year of data for trended points, and a system database atleast twice the size of the existing database at system acceptance.

Configure computers and network connections if multiple computers are

required to meet specified memory and performance. Workstations shallbe IBM-compatible PCs with a minimum of: the following:

a. Intel Core 2 Duo 3 GHz processor

b. 4 GB RAMc. 200 GB hard disk providing data at 100 MB/sec

d. 24x CD-RW/DVD drive

e. Serial, parallel, and network communication ports and cables

required for proper system operation

E. Operator Functions. Operator interface shall allow each authorized operator to

execute the following functions as a minimum:

1. Log In and Log Out. System shall require user name and password to login to operator interface.

2. Point-and-click Navigation. Operator interface shall be graphically based

and shall allow operators to access graphics for equipment and

geographic areas using point-and-click navigation.3. View and Adjust Equipment Properties. Operators shall be able to view

controlled equipment status and to adjust operating parameters such as

setpoints, PID gains, on and off controls, and sensor calibration.4. View and Adjust Operating Schedules. Operators shall be able to view

scheduled operating hours of each schedulable piece of equipment on a

weekly or monthly calendar-based graphical schedule display, to selectand adjust each schedule and time period, and to simultaneously

D263605264

230923 - 14 Project No. SA979-H

schedule related equipment. System shall clearly show exception

schedules and holidays on the schedule display.

5. View and Respond to Alarms. Operators shall be able to view a list ofcurrently active system alarms, to acknowledge each alarm, and to clear

(delete) unneeded alarms.

6. View and Configure Trends. Operators shall be able to view a trendgraph of each trended point and to edit graph configuration to display a

specific time period or data range. Operator shall be able to create

custom trend graphs to display on the same page data from multipletrended points.

7. View and Configure Reports. Operators shall be able to run

preconfigured reports, to view report results, and to customize report

configuration to show data of interest.8. Manage Control System Hardware. Operators shall be able to view

controller status, to restart (reboot) each controller, and to download new

control software to each controller.9. Manage Operator Access. Typically, only a few operators are authorized

to manage operator access. Authorized operators shall be able to view a

list of operators with system access and of functions they can performwhile logged in. Operators shall be able to add operators, to delete

operators, and to edit operator function authorization. Operator shall be

able to authorize each operator function separately.

F. System Software:

1. Operating System. Web server shall have an industry-standard

professional-grade operating system. Acceptable systems include

Microsoft Vista, Microsoft Windows XP Pro, Red Hat Linux, or SunSolaris.

2. System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall

include at least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone,

graphics for each chilled water and hot water system, and graphics thatsummarize conditions on each floor of each building included in this

contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary graphics using

dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone setpoint.a. Functionality. Graphics shall allow operator to monitor system

status, to view a summary of the most important data for each

controlled zone or piece of equipment, to use point-and-clicknavigation between zones or equipment, and to edit setpoints and

other specified parameters.

b. Animation. Graphics shall be able to animate by displaying

different image files for changed object status.c. Alarm Indication. Indicate areas or equipment in an alarm

condition using color or other visual indicator.

d. Format. Graphics shall be saved in an industry-standard formatsuch as BMP, JPEG, PNG, or GIF. Web-based system graphics

shall be viewable on browsers compatible with World Wide Web

Consortium browser standards. Web graphic format shall require

no plug-in (such as HTML and JavaScript) or shall only requirewidely available no-cost plug-ins (such as Active-X and

Macromedia Flash).

D263605 265

230923 - 15 Project No. SA979-H

G. System Tools. System shall provide the following functionality to authorizedoperators as an integral part of the operator interface or as stand-alone software

programs. If furnished as part of the interface, the tool shall be available from eachworkstation or web browser interface. If furnished as a stand-alone program,

software shall be installable on standard IBM-compatible PCs with no limit on the

number of copies that can be installed under the system license.

1. Automatic System Database Configuration. Each workstation or webserver shall store on its hard disk a copy of the current system database,

including controller firmware and software. Stored database shall be

automatically updated with each system configuration or controllerfirmware or software change.

2. Controller Memory Download. Operators shall be able to download

memory from the system database to each controller.3. System Configuration. Operators shall be able to configure the system.

4. Online Help. Context-sensitive online help for each tool shall assist

operators in operating and editing the system.

5. Security. System shall require a user name and password to view, edit,add, or delete data.

a. Operator Access. Each user name and password combination

shall define accessible viewing, editing, adding, and deletingfunctions in each system application, editor, and object.

b. Automatic Log Out. Automatically log out each operator if no

keyboard or mouse activity is detected. Operators shall be able toadjust automatic log out delay.

c. Encrypted Security Data. Store system security data including

operator passwords in an encrypted format. System shall not

display operator passwords.6. System Diagnostics. System shall automatically monitor controller and

I/O point operation. System shall annunciate controller failure and I/O

point locking (manual overriding to a fixed value).7. Alarm Processing. System input and status objects shall be configurable

to alarm on departing from and on returning to normal state. Operator

shall be able to enable or disable each alarm and to configure alarm

limits, alarm limit differentials, alarm states, and alarm reactions for eachsystem object. Configure and enable alarm points as shown on ECMS

point’s list schedule and Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls as

shown on the drawings. Alarms shall be BACnet alarm objects and shalluse BACnet alarm services.

8. Alarm Messages. Alarm messages shall use an English language

descriptor without acronyms or mnemonics to describe alarm source,location, and nature.

9. Alarm Reactions. Operator shall be able to configure (by object) actions

workstation or web server shall initiate on receipt of each alarm. As a

minimum, workstation or web server shall be able to log, print, startprograms, display messages, send e-mail, send page, and audibly

annunciate.

10. Alarm Maintenance. Operators shall be able to view system alarms andchanges of state chronologically, to acknowledge and delete alarms, and

to archive closed alarms to the workstation or web server hard disk from

each workstation or web browser interface.

D263605266

230923 - 16 Project No. SA979-H

11. Trend Configuration. Operator shall be able to configure trend sample or

change of value (COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system

data object and shall be able to retrieve data for use in spreadsheets andstandard database programs. Controller shall sample and store trend data

and shall be able to archive data to the hard disk. Configure trends as

specified in Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls as shown ondrawings. Trends shall be BACnet trend objects.

12. Object and Property Status and Control. Operator shall be able to view,

and to edit if applicable, the status of each system object and property bymenu, on graphics, or through custom programs.

13. Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create,

and to print reports and logs. Operator shall be able to store report data in

a format accessible by standard spreadsheet and word processingprograms.

14. Standard Reports. Furnish the following standard system reports:

a. Objects. System objects and current values filtered by objecttype, by status (in alarm, locked, normal), by equipment, by

geographic location, or by combination of filter criteria.

b. Alarm Summary. Current alarms and closed alarms. System shallretain closed alarms for an adjustable period.

c. Logs. System shall log the following to a database or text file

and shall retain data for an adjustable period:

1) Alarm History.2) Trend Data. Operator shall be able to select trends to be

logged.

3) Operator Activity. At a minimum, system shall logoperator log in and log out, control parameter changes,

schedule changes, and alarm acknowledgment and

deletion. System shall date and time stamp logged

activity.15. Environmental Index. System shall monitor all occupied zones and

compile an index that provides a numerical indication of the

environmental comfort within the zone. As a minimum, this indicationshall be based upon the deviation of the zone temperature from the

heating or cooling setpoint. If humidity is being measured within the

zone then the environmental index shall be adjusted to reflect a lowercomfort level for high or low humidity levels. Similarly, if carbon

dioxide levels are being measured as an indication of ventilation

effectiveness then the environmental index shall be adjusted to indicate

degraded comfort at high carbon dioxide levels. Other adjustments maybe made to the environmental index based upon additional

measurements. The system shall maintain a trend of the environmental

index for each zone in the trend log. The system shall also compute anaverage comfort index for every building included in this contract and

maintain trend logs of these building environmental indices. Similarly,

the system shall compute the percentage of occupied time that

comfortable conditions were maintained within the zones. Through theUI the user shall be able to add a weighting factor to adjust the

contribution of each zone to the average index based upon the floor area

of the zone, importance of the zone, or other static criteria.

D263605 267

230923 - 17 Project No. SA979-H

16. Graphics Generation. Graphically based tools and documentation shall

allow Operator to edit system graphics, to create graphics, and to

integrate graphics into the system. Operator shall be able to add analogand binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files to a

background graphic using a mouse.

17. Graphics Library. Complete library of standard HVAC equipmentgraphics shall include equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers,

terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators. Library shall include standard

symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping,dampers, and ductwork. Library graphic file format shall be compatible

with graphics generation tools.

18. Custom Application Programming. Operator shall be able to create, edit,

debug, and download custom programs. System shall be fully operablewhile custom programs are edited, compiled, and downloaded.

Programming language shall have the following features:

a. Language. Language shall be graphically based and shall usefunction blocks arranged in a logic diagram that clearly shows

control logic flow. Function blocks shall directly provide

functions listed below, and operators shall be able to createcustom or compound function blocks.

b. Programming Environment. Tool shall provide a full-screen,

cursor-and-mouse-driven programming environment that

incorporates word processing features such as cut and paste.Operators shall be able to insert, add, modify, and delete custom

programming code, and to copy blocks of code to a file library

for reuse in other control programs.c. Independent Program Modules. Operator shall be able to develop

independently executing program modules that can disable,

enable and exchange data with other program modules.

d. Debugging and Simulation. Operator shall be able to stepthrough the program observing intermediate values and results.

Operator shall be able to adjust input variables to simulate actual

operating conditions. Operator shall be able to adjust each step'stime increment to observe operation of delays, integrators, and

other time-sensitive control logic. Debugger shall provide error

messages for syntax and for execution errors.e. Conditional Statements. Operator shall be able to program

conditional logic using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and

NOT) and relational (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATER

THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons.f. Mathematical Functions. Language shall support floating-point

addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and square root

operations, as well as absolute value calculation andprogrammatic selection of minimum and maximum values from

a list of values.

g. Variables: Operator shall be able to use variable values in

program conditional statements and mathematical functions.1) Time Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined

variables to represent time of day, day of the week,

month of the year, and date. Other predefined variablesor simple control logic shall provide elapsed time in

D263605268

230923 - 18 Project No. SA979-H

seconds, minutes, hours, and days. Operator shall be able

to start, stop, and reset elapsed time variables using the

program language.2) System Variables. Operator shall be able to use

predefined variables to represent status and results of

Controller Software and shall be able to enable, disable,and change setpoints of Controller Software as described

in Controller Software section.

H. Portable Operator's Terminal. Provide all necessary software to configure an IBM-compatible laptop computer for use as a Portable Operator's Terminal. Operator

shall be able to connect configured Terminal to the system network or directly to

each controller for programming, setting up, and troubleshooting.

I. BACnet. Web server or workstation shall have demonstrated interoperability

during at least one BMA Interoperability Workshop and shall substantially

conform to BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS) device profile as specified inASHRAE/ANSI 135-2004, BACnet Annex J.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operatorworkstation. Verify that field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing are

installed before proceeding with installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment as indicated to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of

programs to specified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation.

C. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve the sequence of

operation specified.

D. Verify location of thermostats, humidity sensors, and other exposed control sensors

with plans and room details before installation. Locate 48 inches (1524 mm) above

floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzagpattern.

E. Provide temperature sensors of type and location as indicated below:

1. Type A Sensor (Stainless Steel Cover Plate):a. Entrances.

b. Public areas.

c. Locker rooms/Shower rooms

d. Fitness Center/Strength Traininge. Storage Rooms

f. Garage Areas

D263605 269

230923 - 19 Project No. SA979-H

g. Mechanical Rooms

2. Type B Sensor (Plastic Cover Plate with LCD Temperature Display):

a. Officesb. Conference Rooms

F. Each temperature sensors shall be field calibrated to within 1°F of the controlsystem set-point after installation.

G. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not where exposed to

outdoor temperatures.

H. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division

23 Sections specifying mechanical identification.

I. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according toDivision 23 Section “Hydronic Piping.”

J. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifyingair ducts.

3.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTIONS

A. All power and wiring associated with BAS system for less than 110 v shall beprovided by H contract, and all power and wiring for 110v or greater shall be

provided by E contract.

B. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Sections.

C. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Sections.

D. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 26 Sections.

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where otherconduit and piping are exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway.

3. Install concealed cable in raceway.4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single

cables where a number of cables follow a common path.

5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, neatly alonghinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly.

6. Number-code or color-code conductors, except local individual room

controls, for future identification and servicing of control system.

E. Connect electrical components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated andinstructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws

and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer’s published torque-tightening

values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torqueing requirementsare not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening

requirements specified in UL 486A.

F. Connect manual reset limit controls independent of manual control switchpositions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of

power controllers.

D263605270

230923 - 20 Project No. SA979-H

G. Connect HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switches to override automatic interlock

controls when switch is in HAND position.

3.04 COMMISSIONING

A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service

representative to start control systems.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Start, test, and adjust control systems.

E. Demonstrate compliance with requirements.

F. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence ofoperation specified.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION

A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service

representative to demonstrate and train Director’s Representative’s maintenance

personnel as specified below.

1. Train Director’s Representative’s maintenance personnel on proceduresand schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting,

servicing, and preventive maintenance.

2. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days’ notice.3. Provide the following operator training at a minimum:

a. Four – 8 hour sessions totaling 32 hours in building automation

training. Training shall be broken up into the following sessions:

1) Two – 8 hour sessions at system start.2) One – 8 hour sessions during the warranty period – exact

time and date to be determined by the Owner.

3) One – 8 hour session at the end of the warranty period.b. Training shall include a complete review of:

1) Data displayed.

2) Alarm and status descriptors.

3) Requesting data.4) Execution of commands.

5) Request of logs and development of trends.

6) Trouble shooting technics.

END OF SECTION

D263605 271


SECTION 232000

HVAC PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Through Penetration Firestops: Section 078400.

B. Sealants: Section 079200.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Catalog sheets and specifications indicating manufacturer name, type,applicable reference standard, schedule, or class for specified pipe and

fittings.

2. Material Schedule: Itemize pipe and fitting materials for each specifiedapplication in Pipe and Fittings Schedule in Part 3 of this Section.

Where optional materials are specified indicate option selected.


1. Installers Qualification Data:a. Welding Procedures:

1) Copy of QW-482 “Suggested Format for Welding

Procedure Specification (WPS)” for all welders for allweld types.

2) Copy of QW-483 “Suggested Format for Procedure

Qualification Record (PQR)” as specified in Welding

Quality Assurance below for all weld types.b. Welders’ Certificates:

1) Copy of QW-484 “Suggested Format for Manufacturer’s

Record of Welder or Welding Operator QualificationTests (WPQ)” for all welders for all weld types.

c. Brazer Qualification Data for Refrigerant Piping: State

refrigerant piping brazing experience; include names, home

addresses and social security numbers of brazers.2. Quality Control Submittals (for Hydraulic Press Joints, if used): Copy of

hydraulic press fitting manufacturer’s printed field inspection procedures

for hydraulic press joints in copper tubing.3. Manufacturer’s Data: Copy of mill certificates, laboratory test and

manufacturing reports relating to chemical and physical properties of

pipe, fittings, and related materials.4. Welding Procedure Submittals: Submit the following:

a. Welding Procedure Specifications: Provide for each weld type.

1) Recommended to use ASME Form E00006, QW-482

“Suggested Format for Welding Procedure Specification(WPS)”.

b. Procedure Qualification Records: Provide for each weld type.

D263605272


1) Recommended to use ASME Form E00007, QW-483

“Suggested Format for Procedure Qualification Record

(PQR)”.5. Contract Closeout Submittals:

a. Copy of Final Hydrostatic Testing Record Log.


A. Qualifications of Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operators: Complywith the following:

1. Section IX ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Part QW Welding.

2. American Welding Society Standard AWS B 2.1.

B. Welding Procedures:

1. Record in detail, and qualify the Welding Procedure Specifications for

every welding procedure that is proposed to be used for the Project.

2. Develop procedures for all metals included in the work.3. Qualify the procedures for making transition welds between different

materials, or between plates or pipes of different wall thickness.

4. Qualification for each welding procedure shall conform to therequirements of ASME B31.1, and as specified herein.

5. Describe the method for each system including the number of beads, the

volts, the amperes, and the welding rod for various pipe thicknesses and

materials.6. The welding procedures shall specify end preparation for butt welds

including cleaning, alignment, and root openings.

7. Preheat, interpass temperature control, and postheat treatment of weldsshall be as required by approved welding procedures, unless otherwise

indicated or specified.

8. Approval of any procedure does not relieve the Contractor of the soleresponsibility for producing acceptable welds.

9. These procedures shall be the same as those used for all pipe welder

qualification tests, all shop welds, and all field welds.

10. Provide procedure qualification records for all proposed WeldingProcedure Specifications (WPS).

C. Welder Qualification:

1. WPQs:

a. Provide welder qualifications for each welder for each weld type.b. Recommended to use ASME Form E00008, QW-484

“Suggested Format for Manufacturer’s Record of Welder or

Welding Procedure Qualification Tests (WPQ).”2. Perform WPQs under the witness of an independent agency.

a. The witness shall be a representative of an independent testing

agency, Authorized Inspector, or consultant, any of which mustbe approved by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.

b. The qualifying test segment must be a 2 inch nominal pipe size

with wall thickness within range of the WPS.

c. Tests position shall be “6G” per ASME Section IX.3. Evidence of Continuity: Welder qualifications must be current.

D263605 273


a. If the qualification test is more than 6 months old, provide record

of welding continuity for each welder.

b. Record of welding continuity shall show that the welder inquestion has performed welding to the procedure in question

without a 6 month continuous span of inactivity since the date

that the welder qualification test was passed for the submittedwelding procedure.

c. Record of welding continuity shall include, at a minimum, the

welder’s employer name and address, the date the welderqualification test was passed, and the dates indicating welding

continuity including welding procedure for each date.

D. Weld Records:

1. For all welding within the scope of ASME B31.1, submit for approval anadministrative procedure for recording, locating, monitoring, and

maintaining the quality of all welds to be performed on the project.

a. The weld record shall include but not be limited to drawings and

schedules identifying location of each weld by individualnumber, identification of welder who performed each weld by

individual welder’s name, stamp number, date and WPS used.

2. After achieving qualification, but before being assigned work, eachqualified person shall be assigned an identifying number by the

Contractor to be used to identify all of his welds.

a. A list of qualified persons with their respective numbers shall besubmitted and maintained accurately with deletions and

additions reported promptly.

3. Upon completing a joint, the welder shall mark the pipe not more than 6

inches from the weld with the identifying number and the last two digitsof the year in which the work was performed.

a. Make identification marks with a rubber stamp or felt-tipped

marker with permanent, weatherproof ink or other methodsapproved by the Director’s Representative that do not deform the

metal.

b. Place identification marks for seam welds adjacent to the welds

at 3-foot intervals.c. Identification by die stamps or electric etchers is not acceptable.

d. Provide required markers. Substitution of a map of welds with

welders’ names is not acceptable.4. Maintain a constantly updated log available to the Director’s

Representative at all times.

E. Qualifications of Brazers: Comply with the following:

1. Section IX ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Part QB Brazing.2. Certification of brazing operators by recognized authorities which

require a qualification test.

3. Refrigerant Piping: The persons performing the brazing and theirSupervisors shall be personally experienced in refrigerant piping brazing

procedures.

D263605274



A. Pipe Storage:

1. Upon the receipt of each shipment of pipe on the job, maintain the pipe

marking, and store pipe in accordance with ASTM materialspecifications, and method of manufacture (seamless, etc.) of each length

of pipe.

2. Pipe markings shall be clearly readable at the time of pipe installation.3. If at the time of its installation, any length of pipe not readily identifiable

will be subject to rejection, or arbitrary downgrading by the Director’s

Representative to the lowest grade which has been received on the job tothat date.

4. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube,

except for concrete, corrugated metal, bell and-spigot, and clay pipe.a. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and handling to

prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris,

and moisture.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 COPPER AND BRASS PIPE, TUBING AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube, Types K, L and M: ASTM B 88.

B. ACR Tube: ASTM B 280.

C. Wrot Copper Tube Fittings, Solder Joint: ASME B16.22.

D. Cast Copper Alloy Tube Fittings, Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.

E. Chrome Plated Grade A Red Brass Threaded Pipe, Standard Weight: ASTM B

43.

1. Plating: 0.02 mil chromium over 0.2 mil nickel plating, high polishfinish.

F. Chrome Plated Cast Brass Threaded Pipe Fittings, 125 lb Class: ASME B16.15.

1. Plating: 0.02 mil chromium over 0.2 mil nickel plating, high polish

finish.

G. Flared Tube Fittings:

1. Water Tube Type: ASME B16.26.

2. Automotive Tube Type: SAE J512.

3. Refrigerant Tube Type: SAE J513.

H. Flanges: Conform to the Standards for fittings used in systems.

1. Brazing Flanges: ASME B16.24, hubs modified for brazing ends.

I. Unions: Cast bronze, 150 lb Class, bronze to bronze seats, threaded or solder

joint.

D263605 275


2.02 JOINING AND SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Thread Sealant:

1. LA-CO Industries’, Slic-Tite Paste with Teflon.

2. Loctite Corp.’s No. 565 Thread Sealant.3. Thread sealants for potable water shall be NSF approved.

B. Thread Sealant (Natural Gas Piping): Rectorseal Corp.’s T plus 2 non-hardening

pipe dope with teflon.

C. Fuel Resistant Thread Sealant:

1. Rectorseal Corp.’s Rectorseal No. 5.

2. EMCO Wheaton Inc.’s Joint Seal.

D. Solder: Solid wire type conforming to the following:

1. Type 2: Lead-free tin-silver solder (ASTM B 32 Alloy Grade Sn 96);

All-State Welding Products Inc.’s 430, Engelhard Corp.’s Silvabrite, or

J.W. Harris Co. Inc.’s Stay-Brite.2. Type 3: Lead-free tin-silver solder (ASTM B 32 Alloy Grade E, AC, or

HB); Engelhard Corp.’s Silvabrite 100, Federated Fry Metals’ Aqua

Clean, or J.W. Harris Co. Inc.’s Stay-Safe Bridgit.

E. Soldering Flux for Soldered Joints: All-State Welding Products Inc.’s Duzall,Engelhard Corp.’s General Purpose Liquid or Paste, Federated Fry Metals’ Water

Flow 2000, or J.W. Harris Co. Inc.’s Stay-Clean.

F. Brazing Alloys:

1. Type 1: AWS A5.8, Class BCup-5, for brazing copper to brass, bronze,or copper; Engelhard’s Silvaloy 15, J.W. Harris Co. Inc.’s Stay-Silv 15,

and Handy & Harman’s Sil-Fos.

2. Type 2: AWS A5.8, Class BAg-7, for brazing copper to steel or stainlesssteel; Engelhard’s Silvaloy-56T, J.W. Harris Co. Inc.’s Safety-Silv 56,

and Handy & Harman’s Braze 560.

G. Brazing Flux: AWS Type FB3A; Handy & Harman’s Handy Flux or J.W. HarrisCo. Inc.’s Stay-Silv.

H. Electrodes and Welding Rods:

1. Electrodes for Use in Arc Welding: Heavily coated, not larger than 3/16

inch diameter exclusive of coating, unless otherwise approved.2. Welding Rods: Free flowing when fused, so as to avoid excessive

puddling.

3. Electrodes for Welding Stainless Steels: Coated and used with reverse

polarity.4. Filler material shall conform to the appropriate AWS-ASTM

specification.

I. Flange Gasket Material:

1. For Use with Cold Water or Chilled Water: 1/16 inch thick rubber.2. For Use with Hot Water, or Air: Waterproofed non-asbestos mineral or

ceramic fiber, or a combination of metal and waterproofed non-asbestos

D263605276


mineral or ceramic fiber, designed for the temperature and pressures of

the piping systems in which installed.

3. For use with Steam, Feedwater, Blow-Off and Natural Gas: Spirallywound, Type 304 stainless steel with non-asbestos filler material, and

carbon steel outer ring.

a. Maximum Operating Pressure: 600 psi at 700 degrees F.b. Thickness: 1/16 thick, conforming to the flange face on which

they are used.

c. Acceptable Gaskets: Flexitallic Style CG with Flexite SuperFiller by Flexitallic Inc., Deer Park, TX; (281) 479-3491.

4. For use with Fuel Oil: Non-asbestos, compressed sheet, nitrile binder.

a. Maximum Operating Pressure: 600 psi at 700 degrees F.

b. Thickness: 1/16 thick, conforming to the flange face on whichthey are used.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers: Sepco, or Sur-Seal.

J. Flange Bolts, Washers and Nuts

1. Bolts: High strength, ASTM A 193 B7.2. Washers: ASTM F436 Structural Type 1 hardened steel flat hot dipped

galvanized.

3. Nuts: ASTM A194 2H.

K. Gaskets For Use With Grooved End Pipe and Fittings: Type and materials as

recommended and furnished by the fitting manufacturer, for the service of piping

system in which installed.

L. Anti-Seize Lubricant: Bostik Inc.’s Never Seez or Dow Corning Corp.’sMolykote 1000.

M. Corrosion Protective Tape System: 3M Co., St. Paul, MN.

1. Tape: Scotchrap 50 or 51.2. Primer: Scotchrap pipe primer.

3. Putty (if required): Strip Caulk insulation putty.

2.03 PACKING MATERIALS FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PENETRATIONS

A. Oiled Oakum: Manufactured by Nupak of New Orleans, Inc., 931 Daniel St.,Kenner, LA 70062, (504)466-1484.

B. Mechanical Modular Seals: Thunderline Corp.’s Link Seal wall and floor seals

designed for the service of piping system in which installed.

2.04 DIELECTRIC CONNECTORS

A. Dielectric Fitting: Bronze ball valve with end connections and pressure rating to

match associated piping.

1. Nipples with inert non-corrosive thermoplastic linings are not acceptable.

B. Flange Electrical Insulation Kit: Consisting of dielectric sleeves and washers,

and dielectric gasket.

1. Water Applications:

D263605 277


a. Heating Hot Water: Rated 150 psi at 250 degrees F: ANSI

Class 300, full faced durlon gasket with bolt holes, double durlon

washers, and durabla sleeves; Model 300 by APS, Lafayette, LA70596, (337) 233-6116.

b. Potable Water: Rated 150 psi at 250 degrees F: ANSI Class

150, full faced neoprene gasket with bolt holes, double phenolicwashers, and mylar sleeves; Model 150 by APS, Lafayette, LA

70596, (337) 233-6116.

2.05 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Type A: Schedule 40 steel pipe.

B. Type B: No. 16 gage galvanized sheet steel.

C. Type C: Schedule 40 steel pipe with 1/4 inch steel collar continuously welded to

pipe sleeve. Size steel collars as required to span a minimum of one cell orcorrugation, on all sides of the rough opening thru the metal deck.

D. Type D: No. 16 gage galvanized sheet steel with 16 gage sheet steel metal collar

rigidly secured to sleeve. Size metal collars as required to span a minimum ofone cell or corrugation, on all sides of the rough opening thru the metal deck.

2.06 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES

A. Cast Brass: Solid type with polished chrome plated finish, and set screw.

1. Series Z89 by Zurn, 929 Riverside Drive, Grosvenordale, CT 06255,(800) 243-1830.

2. Model 127XXXX by Maguire Mfg., Cheshire CT 06410, (203) 699-

1801.

B. Stamped Steel: Split type, polished chrome plated finish, with set screw.

a. Figures 2 and 13 by Anvil International, Portsmouth, NH 03802,

(603) 422-8000.

C. Cast Iron or Malleable Iron: Solid type, galvanized finish, with set screw:

1. Model 395 by Anvil International, Portsmouth, NH 03802, (603) 422-8000.

2. Model 900-016XX by Landsdale International, Westville, NJ 08093,

(800) 908-0523.

2.07 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Underground or Above Ground Application:

1. Acceptable Companies:

a. Titeflex Inc., Springfield, MA.b. Flex-ing, Sherman, TX.

2. Features:

a. Construction: Convoluted, Type 321 stainless steel inner core,

minimum .012 inch wall thickness covered with braided Type304 stainless steel outer jacket.

D263605278


b. UL listed for above ground and underground use.

c. Connections for unleaded gasoline systems shall be fire rated.

d. Factory installed male swivel on one end.

2.08 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION ISOLATION JACKET

A. Type: High density polyethylene flexible tube with Buna-N rubber compression

seals, air valve stem, and stainless steel clamps; Titeflex Inc.’s Model 111466-1,or Flexing Model Yellow Jacket.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install piping at approximate locations indicated, and at maximum height.

B. Install piping clear of door swings, and above sash heads.

C. Make allowances for expansion and contraction.

D. Allow for a minimum of one inch free air space around pipe or pipe covering,

unless otherwise specified.

E. Install vertical piping plumb.

F. Use fittings for offsets and direction changes, except for Type K soft annealed

copper tube.

G. Cut pipe and tubing ends square; ream before joining.

H. Threading: Use American Standard Taper Pipe Thread Dies.

1. Thread brass pipe with special threading dies.

I. Make final connections to equipment with unions, flanges, or mechanical typejoint couplings.

3.02 WATER AND PROPYLENE GLYCOL PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Pitch:

1. Pitch horizontal piping 1/8 inch per 10 feet in direction indicated ondrawings. When direction of flow is not indicated, pitch supply piping

up in direction of flow and return piping downward in direction of flow.

2. Pitch single pipe systems up in direction of flow 1/8 inch per 10 feet.

B. Air Vents: Install air vents at locations indicated on the drawings, and at each

high point in system. Use manually operated air vents, unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Drains:

D263605 279


1. Install piping to be completely drainable. Provide drains at low points,

consisting of a 1/2 inch valve with a hose bibb connection, and at the

following locations and equipment:a. In each section of piping separated by valves.

b. For each riser, where riser or runout to riser has a valve installed.

c. For each heating cooling unit, having valves in supply and returnconnections.

d. In low point of piping to each down fed convector or radiator.

D. Runouts: Connect runouts to upfeed risers to top of mains, and runouts todownfeed risers to bottom of mains.

3.03 PIPE JOINT MAKE-UP

A. Threaded Joint: Make up joint with a pipe thread compound applied in

accordance with the manufacturer’s printed application instructions for theintended service.

1. Chrome Plated Brass Piping: Tighten joint with strap or Parmalee

wrench; do not mar pipe finish. Install piping so that no threads are

visible.

B. Soldered Joint: Thoroughly clean tube end and inside of fitting with emery cloth,

sand cloth, or wire brush. Apply flux to the pre-cleaned surfaces. Install fitting,

heat to soldering temperature, and join the metals with type solder specified.Remove residue.

C. Flanged Pipe Joint:

1. Install threaded companion flanges on steel pipe; flanges on galvanized

pipe are not required to be galvanized.2. Provide a gasket for each joint.

a. Hot Water Pipe Gasket: Coat with a thin film of oil before

making up joint.3. Flange Bolt Installation:

a. Clean and coat nuts, bolt threads and washers with anti-seize

lubricant before making up joint.

b. With each bolt; one hardened steel washer is required under thenut.

c. With each stud; one hardened steel washer is required under the

nut at each end.d. Torque Requirements: Stress bolts to 30,000 psi.

e. Check torque with a calibrated breaking action torque wrench on

the final torque round.

f. Bolts shall be cold and hot torqued.g. Torque Pattern: Cross or star pattern with at least four passes.

Limit each pass to 30 percent of full torque increases.

h. Hot torque: Re-torque the flange bolts with the system at normaloperating pressure, and operating temperature for minimum of

12 to 15 hours.

4. Coat bolt threads and nuts with anti-seize lubricant before making upjoint.

D263605280

232000 - 10 Project No. SA979-H

D. Welded Pipe Joint:

1. General:

a. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0degree F where possible.

b. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degree angle where possible, smooth

rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles, and dirt.

c. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1 inch long welds; 4welds for pipe sizes to 10 inches, 8 welds for pipe sizes 12

inches to 20 inches.

d. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass,followed by cover or filler pass.

e. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld.

f. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound orunfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes, and non-metallic

inclusions.

g. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding

procedures. Refabricate as required to comply withrequirements.

h. If piping component ends are bored, such boring shall not result

in the finished wall thickness after welding less than theminimum design thickness.

i. Align the inside diameters of piping components to be butt-

welded as accurately as is practicable within existing commercialtolerances on diameters, wall thickness and out of roundness.

j. Preserve alignment during welding. The internal misalignment

of the ends to be joined shall not exceed 0.05 inch.

2. Welding Processes:a. All welding on metal piping systems shall be performed using

qualified welding procedures and qualified welders and welding

operators in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler andPressure Vessel Code.

b. All welding shall be performed by a process that is compatible

with the work being welded and the working conditions.

Shielded metal-arc welding (SMAW) shall not be used on workless than 3/16 inch thick.

c. Welding shall be performed by using only one of the following

processes:1) Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW), also known as

“Stick” Welding.

2) Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW), also known asTIG and Heliarc Welding.

3) Submerged Arc Welding (SAW).

d. Where a specific welding process is called for in the piping

group, it shall govern.e. All stainless steel work less than 3/16 inch thick shall be welded

by the gas tungsten-arc (GTAW) process with the back side

purged with argon. Work thicker than 3/16 inch shall have aroot pass by the GTAW Process with the back purged with argon

and the balance of the weld may be completed by SMAW

Process or any other suitable process.3. Welding Grooves:

D263605 281

232000 - 11 Project No. SA979-H

a. Bevel the ends of steel pipe and fittings to be erected with butt

welded joints to form welding grooves in accordance with ANSI

B16.25, except where otherwise noted herein, or on the ContractDrawings.

b. Bevel welding grooves for butt welded joints in pipe of unequal

wall thickness in accordance with ASME Code for PressurePiping B31.1 - latest edition, latest revision and section that is

applicable.

4. Backing Rings: Backing rings or consumable inserts are not acceptable.5. Cleaning of Welding: Completely remove all slag or flux remaining on

the bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead and at

the completion of the weld.

a. Wire brush all completed welds a minimum of 2 inches on bothsides and coated with one coat of high temperature (minimum

rated 500 deg. F) primer prior to being insulated.

6. Preheating of Welded Joints: Pipe adjacent to joints before and duringwelding shall be preheated by any suitable method in accordance with

the qualified welding procedure, and in all cases shall be in accordance

with ASME B31.1, Paragraph 131.7. Weld Quality:

a. All welds shall have full penetration and complete fusion with a

minimum of weld metal protruding on the inside of the pipe.

b. The finished weld contour shall be uniform, with the toe or edgeof the weld merging smoothly into the base material.

c. Butt welds shall have a slight reinforcement build-up gradually

from the toe or edge toward the center of the weld.d. The limitation on butt weld reinforcement shall be in accordance

with ASME B31.1, Table 127.4.2 and shall apply separately to

both inside and outside surfaces of the joint.

e. Fillet welds may be slightly concave on the furnished surface.8. Identification of Welders:

a. Upon completing a joint, the welder shall mark the pipe not more

than 6 inches from the weld with the identifying number and thelast two digits of the year in which the work was performed.

b. Make Identification marks with a rubber stamp or felt-tipped

marker with permanent, weatherproof ink or other methodsapproved by the Director’s Representative that do not deform the

metal.

c. Place identification marks for seam welds adjacent to the welds

at 3-foot intervals.d. Identification by die stamps or electric etchers is not acceptable.

e. Provide required markers. Substitution of a map of welds with

welders’ names is not acceptable.9. Postheat Treatment of Welded Joints In Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel

Pipe:

a. Postheat treatment of welded joints in carbon and ferritic alloy

steel piping shall be in accordance with ASME B31.1, asspecified in the piping group, or on the Contract Drawings,

except the cooling rate for stress relieving shall not exceed 200

degrees F per hour down to 600 degrees F.

D263605282

232000 - 12 Project No. SA979-H

1) In each case, the temperature given is a minimum and

where a higher temperature is called for in the welding

procedure, the welding procedure shall govern.b. Perform stress relieving by one of the following methods:

1) Electrical resistance or induction coil heating is the

preferred method for field use.a) Record the temperature by pyrometer from the

start of the heating operation until 600 degrees

F. is reached during cooling.2) The gas, natural or liquid petroleum, torch stress

relieving procedure may be used only where approved

by Director’s Representative.

a) Maintain temperature record from the start of theheating operation until 600 degrees F. is reached

during cooling.

b) Place two measuring thermocouples 180 degreesapart at the centerline of the weld and two

measuring thermocouples each placed 90

degrees away from the centerline thermocouplesat a distance from the centerline of the weld

equal to three times the wall thickness.

3) Furnace postheat treatment may be employed when

desirable to treat several welded or formed assembliessimultaneously.

a) Temperature range, heating conditions, holding

time, and cooling conditions shall be as outlinedabove but shall satisfy the requirements for the

thickest section, etc. of the load.

b) When this method is used, adequately support

pipe and pipe assemblies to minimize distortion.10. Socket Welding Joints:

a. Where socket welding valves or fittings are used, space pipe

with a minimum of 1/16 inch clearance between the end of thepipe and the socket so that no stresses will be imparted to the

weld due to “bottoming” of the pipe in the socket.

b. The fit between the socket and the pipe shall conform toapplicable standards for socket weld fittings and in no case shall

the inside diameter of the socket exceed the outside diameter of

the pipe by more than 0.075 inches.

E. Brazed Joint: Thoroughly clean tube end and inside of fitting with emery cloth,sand cloth, or wire brush. Apply flux to the pre-cleaned surfaces. Install fitting,

heat to brazing temperature, and join the metals with brazing alloy. Remove

residue.

F. Refrigerant Pipe Joint:

1. Hard Drawn Tubing, Brazed Joint: Make up joint with appropriate type

of brazing alloy. Sweep piping interior with dry nitrogen at a rate of 1 to

3 cfm during brazing operation.

D263605 283

232000 - 13 Project No. SA979-H

2. Hard Drawn Tubing, Soldered Joint: Solder joints with Type 2 solder at

valves, controls, and other locations where brazing temperatures could

cause damage.3. Soft Annealed Tubing Joint: Make up joints with refrigerant tube type

flared fittings. Do not bend tubing at a radius less than 5 times the tube

diameter.

G. Dissimilar Pipe Joint:

1. Joining Bell and Spigot and Threaded Pipe: Install a half coupling on the

pipe or tube end to form a spigot, and caulk into the cast iron bell.

2. Joining Dissimilar Threaded Piping: Make up connection with athreaded coupling or with companion flanges.

3. Joining Dissimilar Non-Threaded Piping: Make up connection with

adapters recommended by the manufacturers of the piping to be joined.4. Joining Galvanized Steel Pipe and Brass Pipe or Copper Tubing: Make

up joint with a dielectric connector.

5. Joining FRP and Threaded Pipe: Make up connection with adapters as

recommended by manufacturers of piping being joined.

3.04 PIPING PENETRATIONS

A. Sleeve Schedule: Unless otherwise shown, comply with the following schedule

for the type of sleeve to be used where piping penetrates wall, floor, or roofconstruction:

D263605284

232000 - 14 Project No. SA979-H

CONSTRUCTION SLEEVE TYPE

1. Frame construction. None Required

2. Foundation walls. A*

3. Non-waterproof interior walls. B*

4. D*

5. Non-waterproof interior floors not on metal decks. B*

6. Floors not on grade having a floor drain. A

7. Floors over mechanical equipment, steam service, machine,

and boiler rooms.A

8. D*

9. Floors finished or to be finished with latex composition or

terrazzo, and not on metal decks.A

10. Earth supported concrete floors. None Required

11. Exterior concrete slabs on grade. A

12. Fixtures with floor outlet waste piping. None Required

13. Metal roof decks. C

14. Non-metal roof decks. A

15. D

16. Waterproof floors not on metal decks. A

17. Waterproof walls. A

*Core drilling is permissible in lieu of sleeves where marked with asterisks.

B. Diameter of Sleeves and Core Drilled Holes:

1. Unless otherwise specified, size holes thru floors and walls in accordance

with the through penetration fire stopping system being used.2. Size holes thru exterior walls or waterproofed walls above inside earth or

finished floors, and exterior concrete slabs in accordance with the

following:a. Uninsulated (Bare) Pipe: Inside diameter of sleeve or core

drilled hole 1/2 inch greater than outside diameter of pipe, unless

otherwise specified.

b. Insulated Pipe: Inside diameter of sleeve or core drilled hole 1/2inch greater than outside diameter of insulation, unless otherwise

specified.

c. Mechanical Modular Seals: Size holes in accordance with themanufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Length of Sleeves (except as shown otherwise on Drawings):

1. Walls and Partitions: Equal in length to total finished thickness of wall

or partition.2. Floors, Finished: Equal in length to total finished thickness of floor and

extending 1/2 inch above the finished floor level, except as follows:

a. In furred spaces at exterior walls, extend sleeve one inch abovethe finished floor level.

D263605 285

232000 - 15 Project No. SA979-H

3. Exterior Concrete Slabs: Equal in length to total thickness of slab and

extending 1/2 inch above the concrete slab.

4. Roofs: Equal in length to the total thickness of roof construction,including insulation and roofing materials, and extending one inch above

the finished roof level.

D. Packing of Sleeves and Core Drilled Holes:

1. Unless otherwise specified, pack sleeves or cored drilled holes inaccordance with Section 078400 - FIRESTOPPING.

2. Pack sleeves in exterior walls or waterproofed walls above inside earth

or finished floors with oakum to within 1/2 inch of each wall face, andfinish both sides with sealant. See Section 079200.

a. Sealant Types:

1) Piping Conveying Materials up to 140 degrees F otherthan Fuel Oil System Piping: Type 1C (one part).

2) Piping Conveying Materials over 140 degrees F: Type

4.

3) Fuel Oil System Piping: Type 1C (2 part).b. Mechanical modular seals may be used in lieu of packing and

sealant for sleeves and core drilled holes.

3. Pack sleeves in exterior concrete slabs with oakum to full depth, andwithin 1/2 inch of top of sleeve and finish the remainder with sealant.

See Section 079200.

a. Sealant Types:1) Piping Conveying Materials up to 140 degrees F other

than Fuel Oil System Piping: Type 1C (one part).

2) Piping Conveying Materials over 140 degrees F: Type

4.3) Fuel Oil System Piping: Type 1C (2 part).

b. Mechanical modular seals may be used in lieu of packing and

sealant for sleeves and core drilled holes.

E. Weld metal collars of Type C and D sleeves to the upper surface of the metal

deck. Seal voids under the metal collar as recommended by the manufacturer of

the metal deck.

3.05 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES

A. Install plates for exposed uninsulated piping passing thru floors, walls, ceilings,

and exterior concrete slabs as follows:

1. In Finished Spaces:

a. Piping 4 Inch Size and Smaller: Solid or split, chrome platedcast brass.

b. Piping over 4 Inch Size: Split, chrome plated cast brass.

2. Unfinished Spaces (Including Exterior Concrete Slabs): Solid, unplatedcast iron.

3. Fasten plates with set screws.

4. Plates are not required in pipe shafts or furred spaces.

D263605286

232000 - 16 Project No. SA979-H

3.06 PIPE AND FITTING SCHEDULE

A. Abbreviations: The following abbreviations are applicable to the Pipe and

Fitting Schedule:

1. BS - Black steel.

2. GMI - Galvanized malleable iron.

3. GS - Galvanized steel.

4. HDPE - High density polyethylene pipe.5. MI - Malleable iron.

6. PE - Polyethylene pipe.

7. SE - Screwed end.8. ST - Steel.

9. SW - Standard weight.

10. WE - Weld end.11. XH - Extra heavy weight.

B. Where options are given, choose only one option for each piping service. No

deviations from selected option will be allowed.

C. Schedule of Pipe and Fittings for the different piping services is as follows:

1. Boiler Trim 250 psig and less:

a. 1-1/2 inch and less: XH BS pipe, with SE XH CI fittings, or WE

XH ST fittings.

b. 2 inch and up: XH BS pipe with WE XH ST fittings.2. Chemical Feed (CMF) 125 psig & less:

a. 1-1/2 inch and less: SW BS pipe, with SE SW CI fittings, or WE

SW ST fittings.b. 2 inch and Up: SW BS pipe with WE SW ST fittings.

3. Hot Water Supply and Return (HWS & HWR) 125 psig and less:

a. 3 inch and less: Type L hard drawn copper tubing with wrotcopper or cast copper alloy solder fittings and Type 3 solder,.

4. Refrigerants (RS, RL, HG & RD) 350 psig and less:

a. All Sizes: Type ACR hard drawn copper tubing with wrot

copper fittings, and brazing alloy, unless otherwise specified.b. 3/4 inch o.d. size and Less (for final connection within 24 inches

of refrigerant equipment): Soft annealed Type ACR copper

tubing with refrigerant tube type flared fittings.5. Drain Piping:

a. Condensate Drain Piping: Type M hard drawn copper tubing

with wrot copper or cast copper alloy solder fittings, and Type 3

solder.

END OF SECTION

D263605 287


SECTION 232001

STRAINERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Valves: Section 230523.

B. Cleaning and Testing: Section 230593.

C. HVAC Piping: Section 232000.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalog sheets, specifications, and installationinstructions for each type strainer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STRAINERS

A. Body:

1. Type:

a. Y.

2. Materials: Any of the following:

a. ASTM A 126 Grade B cast iron.b. ASTM A 216 WCB cast steel.

c. ASTM B 62 cast bronze may be used in systems operating at a

maximum of 125 psig steam or 175 psig water.

B. Pressure Ratings:

1. 125 psig WSP, 175 psig WOG.

C. End Connections:

1. Threaded ends for use in threaded piping 3 inch size and smaller.

2. Flanged ends in piping 4 inch size and larger.3. Solder ends or threaded ends with solder adapters in copper tubing.

D. Screens/Baskets: Fabricate from 18-8 stainless steel or monel metal.

1. Perforation Sizes:1) .

b. Water and Condensate Return Piping:

1) 3 inch and Smaller: 1/16 inch perforations.

2. Minimum Free Screen/Basket Area: Double the internal cross sectionalarea of the inlet pipe.

3. Rigidly reinforce strainer screens in sizes 14 inches and larger with

stainless steel channels and cross braces.

D263605288


E. Caps and Covers:

1. Strainers 3 inch size and Smaller: Any of the following:

a. Faced and gasketed screen retaining cap.b. Straight thread bushing with a blow-out proof gasket.

c. Internally milled tapered gasketed bushing.

2. Strainers 4 inch size and Larger: Bolted gasketed screen cover.

3. Gasket Material: Graphited non-asbestos mineral or ceramic fiber.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Strainers in Water Piping (1-1/2 inch size and larger): Provide with a full size

drain valve with integral hose bibb connection, and chained cap, rated for 450degrees F.

B. Install a short nipple and pipe cap in the blow-off outlets of strainers not

specified or shown to have a blow-off valve or drain.

C. Install strainers, indicated or specified to be installed in the suction or dischargepiping connections to pumps as shown on the drawings.

END OF SECTION

D263605 289


SECTION 232003

THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Valves: Section 230523.

B. Pumps: Section 232123.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalog sheets, specifications and installationinstructions for each item specified.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Where Federal, NSF, ASME or other standards are

indicated or required, products shall meet or exceed the standards established formaterial, quality, manufacture and performance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers/Companies include:

1. Dresser Instruments.2. Marsh Bellofram.

3. Moeller Instrument Co.

4. Taylor Precision Products.5. H.O. Trerice Co.

6. Weksler Instruments Corp.

2.02 THERMOMETERS

A. General Design Features:

1. Scale Ranges: 1-1/2 times actual working temperature required for the

particular application, as approved.

a. Maximum of two degrees between graduations and ten degreesbetween numerals.

b. When scale ranges are in excess of 100 degrees, maximum range

between numerals may be 20 degrees, or as otherwise approved

for the particular application.2. Direct Reading Thermometers: Bimetallic actuated, dial type, straight

pattern, angle pattern, or adjustable angle pattern as required.

3. Thermometers for Sensing Liquid Temperature: Furnish with separablesockets.

D263605290


a. Sockets for Use in Insulated Piping, Insulated Tanks or Similar

Equipment: Extension lagging neck type, of length as required to

compensate for insulation thickness, and proper immersion.

2.03 THERMOMETERS FOR MEASURING LIQUID TEMPERATURE

A. Vapor Tension or Gas Actuated Capillary Thermometers: Adjustable type, with

micrometer type pointer or external calibration device, of design and materials asfollows:

1. Case and Ring: Stainless steel or non-ferrous material as approved, with

clear acrylic or shatterproof glass lens. Provide case of type as required

for the particular mounting application. Case adjustable, allowingrotation of 360 degrees and stem adjustment of at least 180 degrees.

Provide set screw for locking case in desired position.

2. Movement: Brass with bronze bearings.3. Dial: White enamel background, with bold black graduations, numerals

and pointer; 3-1/2 inch diameter.

4. Capillary: Stainless steel.

5. Bulb: Copper with union well connection.6. Separable Socket:

a. Water Service: Brass or bronze.

b. Steam Service: Stainless steel.

2.04 THERMOMETERS FOR MEASURING AIR TEMPERATURE

A. Vapor Tension or Gas Actuated Capillary Thermometers: Adjustable 3-1/2inch

dial type, with micrometer type pointer or external calibration device, of designand materials as follows:

1. Case and Ring: Stainless steel or non-ferrous material as approved, with

clear acrylic or shatterproof glass lens. Case adjustable allowing rotation

of 360 degrees and stem adjustment of at least 180 degrees. Provide setscrew for locking case in desired position.

2. Movement: Brass with bronze bearings.

3. Dial: White enamel background, with bold black graduations, numerals

and pointer; 3-1/2 inch diameter.4. Capillary: Stainless steel.

5. Bulb: Copper air sensing bulb with split flange mounting device.

2.05 PRESSURE AND COMPOUND GAUGES

A. Type: Adjustable dial type with micrometer type pointer, or external calibrationdevice, bronze bourdon tube, and bronze bushed rotary movement.

B. Dial: White enameled background, and bold black graduations, numerals and

pointer; 3-1/2 inch diameter.

1. Scale Range:

a. Standard Gauges: Double normal operating pressure.

b. Compound Gauges: From 30" Hg vacuum to double normaloperating pressure.

C. Case: Cast aluminum, brass, or black finished phenolic.

D263605 291


D. Accuracy: Guaranteed of within 1 percent in middle third of dial range.

2.06 PRESSURE SNUBBERS AND IMPULSE DAMPERS

A. Pressure Snubbers: H.O. Trerice Co. Model 872.

B. Impulse Dampers: H.O. Trerice Co. Model 870.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Thermometers:

1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installationinstructions.

2. Install direct reading thermometers, when the application requires

installation 6 feet or less above the floor or bottom of space in whichinstalled, and remote reading type when the installation is over 6 feet.

3. Install air temperature reading thermometers for measuring duct, plenum

and other air temperature applications of type as specified under sectionsentitled "Direct Digital Building Control Systems", "Temperature

Control Systems", or "Combustion Controls and Instrumentation" in this

Project Manual.

B. Pressure and Vacuum Gauges:

1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation

instructions.

2. For Measuring Steam Pressure: Install gauges complete with needle

valves, drain cocks and syphons.3. For Measuring Liquid Pressure: Install gauges complete with stop cocks

and drain cocks.

C. Pressure Snubbers and Impulse Dampers:

1. Install pressure snubbers in the piping connections to gauges installed insuction and discharge piping connections to close coupled and base

mounted circulating pumps driven by motors under 10 HP.

2. Install impulse dampers in the piping connections to gauges installed insuction and discharge piping connections to close coupled and base

mounted circulating pumps driven by motors 10 HP and over.

END OF SECTION

D263605292


SECTION 232006

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. HVAC Piping: Section 232000.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design expansion tanks, centrifugal separators, and supports to withstand all

seismic loads. Refer to seismic loading criteria on the Contract Drawings.

B. The design of the expansion tanks, centrifugal separators and supports shall beperformed by a professional engineer experienced in the seismic design of

HVAC equipment.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for each

item specified.

B. Contract Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Deliver 2 copies, covering the installedproducts, to the Director’s Representative.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXPANSION TANKS

A. Type B Expansion Tank: Pre-pressurized, welded steel (ASME Boiler andPressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division I) with heavy duty butyl rubber

bladder, air charging valve, and plugged drain.

1. Maximum Working Pressure: 125 psig.

2. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 degrees F.

2.02 COMBINATION AIR SEPARATOR AND SYSTEM STRAINER

A. Type: Welded steel (ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII,

Division I) with the following features:

1. Internal stainless steel strainer with 3/16 inch perforations and free areagreater than 5 times the cross sectional area of the connecting pipe.

2. Bolted and gasketed removable cover plate.

3. Blowdown connection.

B. Maximum Working Pressure: 125 psig.

C. Maximum Operating Temperature: 350 degrees F.

D263605 293


2.03 AIR CONTROL FITTINGS

A. Top Outlet Boiler Fittings: Cast iron body and copper dip tube.



B. Side Outlet Boiler Fittings: Cast iron body and internal dip tube.


2. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 degrees F

C. In-Line Fittings: Cast iron body.



D. Insertion Type Tank Fitting (Expansion Tanks Less Than 100 Gallons): Cast ironbody with copper dip tube and water relief tube.



E. In-Line Type Tank Fitting (Expansion Tanks 100 Gallons and Larger): Cast ironbody with bolted and gasketed cast iron cover, internal copper U tube, stainless

steel ball check, and separate dip type air vent fitting.



2.04 BALANCING VALVES

A. Calibrated-orifice, balancing valve: bronze body, 125 psig cwp, 250 degf

maximum operating temperature, with brass or stainless steel ball, ptfe seat, andcalibrated orifice. Provide threaded or socket ends, integral pressure gage seals

for differential pressure reading, and lever handle with memory stop. Valves

shall be equal size to the supply and return piping line size.

2.05 AIR VENTS

A. Type A: Manual Coin Operated Vent; ITT Bell and Gossett Model 4V.

1. Construction: Brass.



B. Type B: Automatic Float Operated Vent; ITT Hoffman Model 78.

1. Construction: Brass body with stainless steel ball check, and 1/8 inch

safety drain connection.

2. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig.3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.

C. Type D: Automatic High Capacity Float Operated Vent; Sarco Model 13W, or

ITT Bell and Gossett Model 107.

1. Construction: Cast iron body with bolted and gasketed cover, andstainless steel float mechanism, and 3/8 inch drain connection.


D263605294



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the Work of this Section in accordance with the manufacturer’s printedinstallation instructions.

END OF SECTION

D263605 295


SECTION 232119

GLYCOL INJECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes glycol injection system and glycol fluid.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data.

B. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data.

C. Submit sample report indicating the chemical composition including but not limited to the following:

1. Percent of glycol to water solution.

2. Freeze protection temperature.

3. pH level.

4. Specific conductance.

5. Chloride and Sulfide content.

6. Suspended matter.

D. Submit building water sample report (if applicable).


A. After the system has been filled with the glycol solution, and circulated for a minimum of 7 days, the

Contractor shall obtain a glycol sampling kit from the supplier. The appropriate sample or samples

shall be taken and forwarded to the supplier’s laboratory where the samples shall be tested and

analyzed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER OF GLYCOL INJECTION SYSTEM

A. Wessels or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All equipment furnished under this section of the specification shall be UL listed and labeled.

1. Glycol injecting pump shall be positive displacement with adjustable output volume of 0 to 24

gallons per day at 80 psig without hydraulically backed diaphragm – 110 watts @ 115V.

Pump shall be as manufactured by Liquid Metronics Inc. MOD #A-11-24 GPD or approved

equal.

2. Tank shall be a 50-gallon rigid polyethylene self-supporting solution tank with fiberglass cover

assembly as manufactured by LMI INC MOD #26350/50 or approved equal.

D263605296


3. Include with pump package 16 feet of type “L” copper tubing with compression connections, a

foot valve with integral one piece strainer for the suction line and an injection/anti-syphon

check valve with .5-inch NPT male connection for the injection point.

4. Provide site glass to provide visible indication of flow/no flow conditions – LMI INC MODEL

#LMI24614 or approved equal

5. Provide pump pressure switch(es) shall be as manufactured by Honeywell model #L404A1396

or approved equal.

6. Provide liquid low level switch on the solution tank. Switch to be SPDT with contact ratings

for 1 HP at 115 volts. Switch shall be as manufactured by Penn Controls model #F63ACI.

2.3 FLUIDS

A. Glycol shall be of the propylene type with inhibitors manufactured especially for heating and cooling

systems. Glycol shall be colored type “DowFrost” as manufactured by the Dow Chemical Co.,

“Norkool” as manufactured by Union Carbide Co. or approved equal.

B. Glycol shall be of the ethylene type with inhibitors manufactured especially for heating and cooling

systems. Glycol shall be colored type “DowTherm SR-1” as manufactured by Dow Chemical Co.,

“Norkool” as manufactured by Union Carbide Co. or approved equal.

C. Water shall consist of the following options:

1. Distilled water.

2. De-ionized water.

3. Glycol manufacturer’s premixed solution.

4. Building raw water is acceptable contingent upon submittal and acceptance of water analysis

report indicating the chemical composition is in conformance with the requirements of the

glycol manufacturer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.

B. Glycol shall not be injected until the piping system(s) have been tested, cleaned, and flushed.

C. The contractor shall calculate and supply the volume of fluid required by the system(s) for the

percentage of glycol to water specified.

END OF SECTION

D263605 297


SECTION 232123

PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Vibration Isolation: Section 230550.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog sheets and installation instructions for each type or size

pump.

B. Schedule: Pump schedule showing pump specifications and application.


1. Performance curves for each pump, showing gpm, brake HP and

efficiency from free delivery to shut-off. Chart curves on manufacturer’sfactory tests shall be conducted in accordance with the recommended

procedures of the Hydraulic Institute, and certified thereto by the

manufacturer.

2. Subject boiler feed pumps and boiler return pumps to a cold water test atthe manufacturer’s factory. Submit certified test curves on the test

results, conducted in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards,

Centrifugal Pump, Section VIII Test Code, at a minimum of 4 points, inaddition to the design point. Certified test curves shall indicate the

following:

a. Head versus Capacity.b. Efficiency versus Capacity.

c. BHP versus Capacity.

d. NPSHR versus Capacity.

3. Include parallel pump curve and system curve for parallel operatingpumps. Design flow does not include standby pump (if any).

4. Certificates: Affidavit required under QUALITY ASSURANCE Article.

5. Company Field Advisor Data:a. Name, business address and telephone number of Company

Field Advisor secured for the required services.

b. Certified statement from the Company listing the qualificationsof the Company Field Advisor.

c. Services and each product for which authorization is given by

the Company, listed specifically for this project.

D. Contract Close Out Submittals:

1. Operation, Maintenance Data, and Parts Lists: Deliver 2 copies, for each

type of pump or pumping apparatus, to the Director’s Representative.

D263605298



A. Company Field Advisor: Secure the services of a Company Field Advisor from

pump manufacturer for a minimum of 8 working hours for the following:

1. Render advice regarding installation and final adjustment of the system.

2. Render advice on the suitability of each item for this particular

application.

3. Witness final system acceptance test, then certify with an affidavit thatthe system is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and is

operating properly.

4. Train facility personnel on the operation and or maintenance of thesystem (Minimum of two 4-hour sessions).

5. Explain available service programs to facility supervisory personnel for

their consideration.

1.04 MAINTENANCE

A. Spare Parts: Deliver one spare set of mechanical seals for each size and type of

pump equipped with mechanical seals, to the Director’s Representative, who will

sign receipt for same. Furnish seals of type as required for the particular pumpapplication and the chemical water treatment being utilized. Suitably box and

label spare seals as to their usage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PUMPS - GENERAL

A. Design pumps to operate continuously without overheating bearings or motors atevery condition of operation on the pump curve, or produce noise audible outside

the room or space in which installed.

B. Equip pumps complete with electric motor and drive assembly, unless otherwiseindicated. Design pump casings for the indicated working pressure and factory

test at 1-1/2 times the designed pressure.

C. Provide condensate pumping, boiler return pumping and vacuum pumpingapparatus as complete factory assembled and prewired packaged units, each

complete with integral pump controls and electric control panel.

D. Manufacture domestic hot water pumps of all-bronze construction.

E. Design pumps for propylene glycol usage as specified for water, of type asindicated.

F. Pumps of the same type, shall be the product of a single manufacturer, with pump

parts of the same size and type interchangeable.

G. Provide oil lubricated pumps with constant level oilers, with the exception of

inline circulating and close coupled pumps.

D263605 299


H. Equip base mounted pumps with OSHA compliant metal guards over the movingdrive assembly. Fabricate from expanded galvanized metal or galvanized sheet

metal. Secure guards as required and approved.

2.02 CIRCULATING WATER PUMPS

A. In-Line Pump: Single stage volute type pump, with cast or forged bronze

impeller, replaceable mechanical seals, oil lubricated shaft sleeve bearings, andcast iron casing with flanged inlet and outlet connections. Direct connect pump to

electric motor with flexible coupling.

1. Motor Requirements (Supplementary to Section 260221):

a. Equip motor with built-in thermal overload protection.

2.03 CHARTS AND DIAGRAMS

A. Lubrication Charts: Card holder with aluminum or stainless steel frame, clear

acrylic front, and sheet aluminum card backing plate. Minimum size card 8 x 10inches. Illustrate or type the manufacturer’s recommendations for lubrication of

each type pump.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in-line circulating pumps between pipe flanges in piping systems. Installoverhead pipe supports, both sides of in-line pumps, installed in horizontal piping

runs.


A. Preliminary System Tests:

1. Preparation: Have the Company Field Advisor adjust the completed

system and then operate it long enough to assure that it is performing

properly.2. Run a preliminary test for the purpose of:

a. Determining whether the system is in a suitable condition to

conduct the acceptance test.b. Checking control equipment.

c. Training Facility personnel.

B. System Acceptance Test:

1. Preparation: Notify the Director’s Representative at least 3 working daysprior to the test so arrangements can be made to have a Facility

Representative witness the test.

2. Make the following tests:

a. Individually test control devices.b. Test alarm indicating devices.

c. Test each system function step by step.

3. Supply equipment necessary for system adjustment and testing.

D263605300


4. Submit a typewritten report of the test results, signed by the Company

Field Advisor and the Director’s Representative. Enclose a copy of the

report in a metal frame covered with clear acrylic glazing and mount itadjacent to the pump control panel.

END OF SECTION

D263605 301


SECTION 232923

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE FOR HVAC MOTOR CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and incidental to, the

installation of Variable Frequency Drive for Motor Control as shown on the drawings,

and/or as specified herein.

B. This specification shall cover a complete variable frequency motor drive consisting of a

pulse width modulated inverter for use on standard NEMA Design B induction or

synchronous motors.

C. The adjustable frequency system shall be rated for continuous duty.


A. The Variable Frequency Drive shall meet the following requirements:

1. Underwriters Laboratories.

2. NEMA.

B. Manufacturer’s warranty including all parts, labor and travel to replace defective

materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years after acceptance.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature for each type of device or equipment

to be used on the project, indicating compliance with specified requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicating drive designation, manufacturer, type, ratings, accessories

and features for each variable speed drive. Also provide complete schematic wiring and

field wiring diagrams.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the design and production of AC variable

frequency drives (VFD’s) for a minimum of 10 years. Private labeled products are not

acceptable to ensure parts availability and future support.

2.2 GENERAL TECHNOLOGY

A. The VFD shall utilize a full wave diode bridge rectifier to convert 3Ø, 60 Hz utility

power to a fixed DC voltage. SCR’s and half wave rectifiers are not acceptable.

B. The DC bus shall be filtered by a series of capacitors to provide smooth DC voltage.

D263605302


C. Intelligent Power Modules shall be utilized to invert the fixed DC voltage to a variable

voltage and frequency for stepless motor speed control from 0% to 100% of the motor’s

nameplate base speed. Other types of semiconductors that do not improve reliability by

integrating drive protection circulatory into a modular design are not acceptable.

2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

A. Environmental Ratings include:

1. Storage temperature: -20 DegC to 70 DegC.

2. Ambient operating temperature : 0 DegC to 40 DegC.

3. Non-condensing Humidity: 95 percent.

4. Altitude without derating: 3,300 feet (1000 m).

2.4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Electrical specifications include:

1. 200/240, 400/480, 480/590V Tolerance: +10 percent/-15.

2. AC line frequency tolerance: 48 Hz to 62 Hz.

3. Frequency stability: +/- 0.00006 percent/DegC.

4. Service Factor : 1.0.

5. Waveform: Sine coded PWM.

6. Carrier Frequency: 2.5, 8, 10, 12, 14 kHz.

B. Drives shall operate at a minimum carrier frequency of 8 kHz. Drives through 150Hp

that cannot continuously produce full nameplate ratings at 8 kHz are not acceptable.

2.5 STANDARD DESING FEATURES

A. The VFD shall provide full protection under the following conditions:

1. Over temperature

2. Over and under voltage

3. Phase to Phase short circuit

4. Ground Fault

5. Motor Overload

B. The door mounted interface shall display a minimum of 32 characters in English.

Simultaneous display of status, set speed, load, rotational direction and speed reference

source is required.

C. The drive shall have the following digital metering capabilities:

1. Speed: Hz, RPM, %, /S, /M, /H, #/S. #/M or #/H.

2. Ammeter: Amps or % Load.

3. kWh meter.

4. Elapsed time meter.

5. Manufacturers deviating from this standard shall provide analog metering devices.

D. The VFD shall be capable of automatically restarting after a power loss or fault

condition. Prior to starting, the drive display shall indicate “Start Pending.” Drives

without this safety feature shall provide a pilot device to indicate the drive is about to

auto-restart.

D263605 303


E. Two (2) selectable critical frequency rejection points with a minimum bandwidth of 10

Hz.

F. Programmable input signal followers:

1. Analog 0 – 10 V DC.

2. Analog 4 – 20 mA DC.

3. Analog 20 – 4 mA DC.

4. Three (3) preset speeds.

5. Keypad.

G. An analog output proportional to speed or load shall be user definable for 0 – 10 V DC

or 4 – 20 mA DC.

H. RS-232 terminals to allow for remote control from the building automation system

(BAS). Software shall be provided to allow for remote monitoring and programming

(including start/stop and speed control) of the VFD from the BAS computer.

I. User programmable password security to restrict parameter access by unauthorized

personnel.

J. Two (2) form “C”{ relays related for 2 amps at 28V DC and 120V AC shall be provided.

Each relay shall be configurable to change state under any one of the following

conditions; Run, Fault, Fault Lockout, At Speed, Current Limit, Follower Present or

Auto Speed Mode. In addition, an open collector output (24V DC) shall be provided to

power a relay or pilot light under any one of the listed conditions.

K. Comprehensive diagnostic circuitry shall log 8 protective shutdowns into nonvolatile

memory. Each event is logged with the elapsed urn time, condition and system

operating status.

L. The VFD shall ride through a 0.4 second power dip.

M. The drive shall provide PID setpoint control to maintain a system variable such as

pressure or temperature.

N. Three phase line reactors shall be provided on 200/240V and 400/480V units 25HP and

above. Line reactors shall be provided on 480/590V units 5HP and above. DC bus

chokes are not acceptable.

2.6 BYPASS SPECIFICATION

A. A padlockable door interlocked disconnect shall be provide to positively interrupt

incoming AC power.

B. Separate fusing shall be provided for the drive and bypass operation.

C. Two electrically and mechanically interlocked contactors shall be provided to connect

the motor to either the VFD output or the AC line. A third contactor shall isolate the

VFD input.

D. A Hand-Off-Auto switch will set the control scheme of the drive. In Hand, the drive

will start and follow a remote speed reference or a keypad speed command. In Auto, the

D263605304


drive will start via a remote contact closure and follow either a keypad speed command

or a remote speed reference. In Off, the drive will not start.

E. A Drive Mode-Off/Reset-Bypass Mode switch shall switch the motor between VFD

control and Bypass control.

F. A Drive Test-Off-Drive Normal switch shall provide control of the VFD input contactor.

The VFD input contactor will be energized while in bypass mode with the switch in the

Drive Test position. In Off, the input contactor is de-energized. In Drive Normal, the

input contactor is energized while in drive mode.

G. Four pilot lights shall indicate “Power”, “Bypass Mode”, “Drive Mode” and “Safety

Circuit Fault.”

H. A control transformer shall provide 120V AC for the control logic.

I. Upon a fault condition the drive shall automatically attempt to restart up to 5 times. If

the fault condition remains after the fifth attempt control will automatically transfer to

bypass mode.

J. The drive shall be removable from the bypass module without losing the ability to

control the motor in bypass mode.


A. The VFD/Bypass package shall be UL listed and CSA approved.

B. Printed circuit boards shall be burned in for a minimum of 100 hours on computer

automated test equipment.

C. Competed VFD’s shall be burned in under a heat load stress test for a minimum of 8

hours.

D. The manufacturer’s warranty shall cover the VFD and all components for two years

from shipment or eighteen months from start-up whichever occurs first.


3.1 GENERAL

A. Install drives in strict accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

Make all connections to motors and drives complete and leave all equipment in

operating order. Verify nameplate ratings of motors installed and report any

discrepancies.

3.2 OVERCURRENT AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION

A. Proper fusing and overload ratings to be determined by the drive manufacturer.

D263605 305


3.3 START-UP AND TESTING

A. Provide the services of manufacturer’s trained technician to start-up drives and test for

proper installation and operation. Technician to also provide at least (8) hours of

instruction for the Owner’s staff in the operation, testing and maintenance of equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Adjust acceleration, deceleration, minimum current limit, and any other adjustments as

recommended by the drive manufacturer to compliment load characteristics and achieve

optimum performance.

3.5 WARNING LABELS

A. Install in prominent location at each drive, labels describing any and all precautions or

procedures which are necessary during operation or maintenance to protect the drive

from any possible damage.

3.6 POWER AND CONTROL WIRING - UNIT MANUFACTURER

A. Shall be furnished and installed in accordance with all applicable codes and specification

sections attached.\

END OF SECTION

D263605306


SECTION 233113

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rectangular and round metal ducts and plenums for heating,ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to

plus 10-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa).

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): Asdefined in ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the

formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences

specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and

-distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layoutor configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by

Engineer. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations

showing that proposed layout will provide original design results withoutincreasing system total pressure.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations,

sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans.

3. Fittings.4. Reinforcement and spacing.

5. Seam and joint construction.

6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.

8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment,

vibration isolation, seismic restraints, and duct attachment.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide

access to dampers and other operating devices.

D263605 307


4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures,

diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special

moldings.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and

personnel comply with requirements in “Quality Assurance” Article.

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance withperformance requirements.

F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support,

and installed accessories and devices.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems,” unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with NFPA 90B, “Installation of Warm Air Heating and AirConditioning Systems,” unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with NFPA 96, “Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial

Cooking Operations,” Chapter 3, “Duct System,” for range hood ducts, unlessotherwise indicated.


A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containersor bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation,

color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for

multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer’swritten recommendations.

C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective

paper maintained through fabrication and installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90

(Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts

exposed to view.

B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where

installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum

and stainless-steel ducts.

D263605308


C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch(900-mm) length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer

than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.02 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term “sealant” is limited to materials of

adhesive or mastic nature.

1. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 66 percent

solids.

2. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric jointsealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,

Use O.

2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for building materials.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate

concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for

lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm)

thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-

thread rod or galvanized rods with threads painted after installation.

2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct

Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible” for sheet steel width andthickness and for steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal

screws; compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and

plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless

materials are electrolytically separated from ductwork.

2.04 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, andother construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA’s

“HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible.” Comply with

requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rodapplications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to

reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification.

D263605 309


2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks,

roller marks, stains, and discolorations.

B. Fabricate vehicle exhaust and welding ducts with 0.0500-inch- (1.3-mm-) thickstainless steel for exposed ducts. Weld and flange seams and joints.

C. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the

following:

1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch wg (750 Pa).2. Return Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa), negative pressure.

3. General Exhaust and welding Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa), negative

pressure.4. Vehicle Exhaust Ducts: 8-inch wg (2000 Pa), negative pressure.

D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches

(480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined.

2.05 ROUND DUCT FABRICATION

A. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to

SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible.”

B. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with an

outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts

are inside dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 F (0.037 at 24 C) mean

temperature.2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell

dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell lengths 2 inches (50 mm) longer than

inner shell and insulation, and in metal thickness specified for single-

wall duct.3. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless

otherwise indicated. Terminate insulation where internally insulated

duct connects to single-wall duct or uninsulated components. Terminateinsulation and reduce outer duct diameter to inner liner diameter.

4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round inner liners with solid sheet metal of

thickness listed below:5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round inner liners with sheet metal

having 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) diameter perforations, with an overall open

area of 23 percent. Use the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam

construction:a. Ducts 3 to 8 Inches (75 to 200 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch (0.5

mm) with standard spiral seam construction.

b. Ducts 9 to 42 Inches (225 to 1070 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch(0.5 mm) with single-rib spiral seam construction.

c. Ducts 44 to 60 Inches (1120 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.022

inch (0.55 mm) with single-rib spiral seam construction.d. Ducts 62 to 88 Inches (1575 to 2235 mm) in Diameter: 0.034

inch (0.85 mm) with standard spiral seam construction.

D263605310


6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means.

Retain insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.

2.06 ROUND SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION

A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with

SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible,” with

metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.

B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps withno excess material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.

C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction.Fabricate bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half

times elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate

elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded constructioncomplying with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible,” unless otherwise indicated.

2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal

thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus500 to plus 500 Pa):

a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches (75 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch

(0.7 mm).b. Ducts 27 to 36 Inches (685 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch

(0.85 mm).

c. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches (940 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040inch (1.0 mm).

d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.052

inch (1.3 mm).

e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (1575 to 2130 mm) in Diameter: 0.064inch (1.6 mm).

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal

thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg (500 to 2490 Pa):a. Ducts 3 to 14 Inches (75 to 355 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch

(0.7 mm).

b. Ducts 15 to 26 Inches (380 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch

(0.85 mm).c. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches (685 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040

inch (1.0 mm).

d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.052inch (1.3 mm).

e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (1575 to 2130 mm) in Diameter: 0.064

inch (1.6 mm).4. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or

exhaust systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where

space restrictions do not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate

with single-thickness turning vanes.5. Round Elbows, 8 Inches (200 mm) and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed

elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60,

D263605 311


and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or

nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.

6. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches (225 through 355 mm): Fabricategored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, unless space

restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle

configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.7. Round Elbows, Larger than 14 Inches (355 mm): Fabricate gored

elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.

8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches (200 mm) and AllPressures: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick with two-piece welded

construction.

9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings

specified above.10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches (355 mm) and Pressures

through 10-Inch wg (2490 Pa): 0.022 inch (0.55 mm).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.Provide all required fittings, accessories and ancillaries as required for a

complete system as determined by the Director’s Representative.

B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classificationindicated.

C. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet (3.7 m), unless interrupted by

fittings.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and

connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections intoduct.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and

perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural

and permanent enclosure elements of building.

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulationthickness.

J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in

solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.

P.I.N. 7720.9M

D263605312


K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers,lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing throughtransformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior

partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space betweenconstruction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same

metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches

(38 mm).

N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitionsand exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and

firestopping sealant. Refer to other sections for fire and smoke damper

specifications as well as fire stopping specifications.

3.02 VEHICLE EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS

A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion of ductwork through 1000 F

(550 C) temperature range.

3.03 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class

indicated and as described in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible.”

B. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.

3.04 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round and rectangular metal duct with support systems indicated inSMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible.”

B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48

inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet (5 m) and at each floor.

D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-

fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and

completely cured.

3.05 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to other Sections.

D263605 313


B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply withSMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible.”


A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to

accommodate leakage testing and as required for compliance with test

requirements.

B. Conduct tests, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal to maximumdesign pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are

not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do notpressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days’

advance notice for testing.

C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to

surface area of test section.

D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage

Classification 3 for round ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts

in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2-inch wg (500 Pa) (bothpositive and negative pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure

classifications from 2- to 10-inch wg (500 to 2490 Pa).

E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.

F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Air DuctLeakage Test Manual.”

3.07 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve designairflow.

B. Detailed procedures for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing are specified in other

Sections.

3.08 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices,

inspect the system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and

debris.

END OF SECTION

D263605314


SECTION 233300

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Metal Ductwork: Section 233113.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The latest edition of the following standards, as referenced herein, shall be

applicable:

1. ACGIH: American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.2. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

3. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.

4. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors NationalAssociation, Inc.

5. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, diagrams, standard schematic drawings, andinstallation instructions for each manufactured product. Submit SMACNA

Figure Numbers for each shop fabricated item.

B. Samples: When directed, submit one complete unit for each type of proposed airinlet and outlet device. Approved samples will be delivered to the job site for

installation.



1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with the applicable

requirements of the following:

a. SMACNA: Gages of materials, fabrication, sealing, andinstallation shall be in accordance with the SMACNA Manuals.

1) HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

2) Round Industrial Duct Construction Standard.

3) Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standard.b. ACGIH: Follow the Hood Design Data, and Construction

Guidelines for Local Exhaust Systems from the Industrial

Ventilation Manual.c. AMCA: Certify damper and/or louver ratings in accordance

with AMCA 511.

d. NFPA: Standards Nos. 90A, 90B, 91, 96, and 101.e. UL: Standards No. UL181, UL555, and UL555S.

D263605 315


1.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Special Tools:

1. One bar deflection key for every five supply grilles and/or every five

return grilles.2. One operator key for every five supply registers and/or every 5 return or

exhaust registers.

3. Two keys or socket wrenches for each type of damper adjustment screwor device on manual damper regulators.

4. One tool for each type and size security fastener.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. Unless otherwise specified, fabricate grille and register faces, and frames of steelwith factory applied white baked-on enamel.

B. Fabricate grille, register faces, and frames of aluminum with an etched andacrylic coated finish when installed in shower, can washing, dishwashing, food

serving and dining rooms, kitchens and swimming pool areas.

C. Fabricate grille and register faces, and frames of Type 302 or 304 stainless steel,

with a No. 4 finish when installed in surgical operating, surgical scrub-up,surgical recovery and surgical work rooms.

D. Supply Grilles: Adjustable, double deflection type.

1. Grille Face: 20 gage construction of same material as bars/vanes.

2. Face and Rear Bars/Vanes: Installed in grille face.a. Bars/vanes individually adjustable and front pivoting to any

desired setting by means of bar deflection key.

b. Nominal Bar/Vane Spacing: 0.66 inch or 0.75 inch on center.

E. Exhaust or Return Grilles: Fixed, single deflection type.

1. Grille Face: 20 gage construction of same material as bars/vanes.

2. Face Bars/Vanes: Installed in grille face.

a. Deflection Angle: 20 to 55 degrees.b. Nominal Bar/Vane Spacing: 0.66 inch or 0.75 inch on center.

c. Sidewall grilles shall have horizontal face bars/vanes.

F. Supply Registers: Adjustable, double deflection type.

1. Register Face: 20 gage construction of same material as bars/vanes.2. Face and Rear Bars/Vanes: Installed in register face.

a. Bars/vanes individually adjustable and front pivoting to any

desired setting by means of bar deflection key.b. Nominal Bar/Vane Spacing: 0.66 inch or 0.75 inch on center.

D263605316


3. Damper Assembly: Opposed multi-blade type consisting of frame,

blades, and key operated movement of the locking type.

a. Operators: Key operated type projecting through frame orscrewdriver slot. Operator keys are removable or may be

permanently driven in place, as directed.

b. Construction:1) For use with Aluminum or Stainless Steel Register

Faces: Aluminum with etched or acrylic finish.

2) For use with Factory Painted Register Faces:Galvanized steel factory finished with baked on black

enamel, unless otherwise approved by the Director’s

Representative.

G. Exhaust or Return Registers: Fixed single deflection type.

1. Register Face: 20 gage construction of same material as bars.

2. Face Bars/Vanes: Installed in register face.

a. Deflection Angle: 20 to 55 degrees.

b. Nominal Bar/Vane Spacing: 0.66 inch or 0.75 inch on center.c. Sidewall registers shall have horizontal face bars/vanes.

3. Damper Assembly: Opposed multi-blade type consisting of frame or

screwdriver slot blades, and key operated movement of the locking type.a. Operators: Key operated type projecting through frame or

screwdriver slot. Operator keys are removable or may be

permanently driven in place, as directed.b. Construction:

1) For use with Aluminum or Stainless Steel Register

Faces: Aluminum with etched or acrylic finish.

2) For use with Factory Painted Register Faces:Galvanized steel factory finished with baked on black

enamel, unless otherwise approved by the Director’s

Representative.

H. Mounting Frames for Registers and Grilles:

1. Fabricated from a minimum of No. 20 USS gage stamped or rolled steel,

or extruded aluminum, to match material and finish of mating grille or

register face.a. Weld exposed joints and ground flush.

b. Completely close corner joints with neatly welded backtrim.

c. Furnish frames complete with felt or sponge rubber gaskets on

all four sides, except when frames are used as plaster stops.

2.02 AIR DIFFUSERS

A. Unless otherwise specified, fabricate diffusers of steel with factory-applied finish

as follows:

1. Prime coat for installation in walls and gypsum board, hard plaster or

acoustic plaster ceilings specified to be painted.

2. Baked-on white enamel for installation in splined acoustic ceilings, metal

pan ceilings and suspended lay-in tile ceilings.

D263605 317


B. Fabricate diffusers of aluminum with an etched and clear acrylic coated finish

where installed in shower, can washing, dishwasher, food serving and dining

rooms, kitchens, swimming pool areas, surgical operating, surgical scrub-up,surgical recovery and surgical work rooms.

C. General:

1. Roll or round and reinforce all exposed edges of diffusers.

2. Internal diffuser parts shall be readily removable to permit cleaning andaccess to ducts.

3. Design removable parts and assemblies so that they cannot be

reassembled in a manner that would produce an incorrect air distributionpattern.

4. Secure internal assemblies with fasteners that allow removal without use

of special tools.5. Do not use neck or duct connection sizes indicated to size diffusers.

D. Circular, Square and Rectangular Diffusers:

1. Complete with volume control damper and adjustable equalizing grid,

fabricated of same material and with same finish as diffuser.2. Damper shall be adjustable by means of operator handle and rod device,

which is designed to be locked in any position, and is operable from

diffuser face.

3. Diffusers installed in plaster ceilings shall have plaster grounds of samematerial and finish as diffuser.

4. Institutional Air Diffusers: Fixed stationary type with 18 gage perforated

face plate welded to frame, and 3/16 inch holes on 1/4 inch staggeredcenters.

a. Supply Diffusers: 4-way deflection.

b. Return diffusers: No deflection.

2.03 DAMPERS

A. Control Dampers (Galvanized Steel):

1. Types:

a. Low Leakage Damper: 3.7 cfm/sq ft maximum leakage rate at1500 fpm and 1 inch wg for 48 inch wide damper (based on

AMCA 500).

2. Frame: 16 gage galvanized steel hat channel with corner braces, and

welded joints.a. Frame Size:

1) Dampers 13 inches high and under: 3-1/2 inch x 3/8

inch top and bottom frames.2) Dampers over 13 inches high: 5 inch x 1 inch.

3. Blades:

a. Low Leakage Damper: Single skin, 16 gage galvanized steelwith longitudinal reinforcing grooves, and PVC coated polyester

blade edge seals mechanically locked into blade edge.

b. Blade Action:

1) Modulating Dampers: Opposed blade.2) Fully Open/Fully Closed Dampers: Parallel blade.Single

blade dampers are acceptable for ducts up to 14 inches high.

D263605318


4. Axles: 1/2 inch plated steel hex positively locked to blade, and

connected to frame through extruded hole with molded synthetic sleeve

bearings.5. Extended Shaft Assembly: Consisting of outboard support bracket,

extended shaft rod, extended shaft.

a. Suitable for 2 inches of insulation.6. Jamb Seals: Flexible metal compression type.

7. Damper Operation:

a. Standard Damper: Manually operated by lockable handquadrant.

b. Low Leakage Dampers: Electric motor operated. Weld actuator

mounting bracket to frame.

8. Linkage:a. Single Section Dampers: In-frame fixed type with removable

1/2 inch dia control shaft extending 6 inches from damper frame,

and outboard support bearing.b. Multiple Section Dampers: On-blade fixed type with factory

installed jackshaft.

9. Finish: Mill galvanized.

B. Control Dampers (Aluminum):

1. Types:

a. Low Leakage: 2.7 cfm/sq ft maximum leakage rate at 4000 fpm

and 1 inch wg for 48 inch wide damper (based on AMCA 500).2. Frame: Extruded aluminum hat channel, 1/8 inch thick, and mounting

flanges, and welded joints.

a. Frame Size:

1) Dampers 12 inches high and under: 5 inches x 1/2 inchtop and bottom frames.

2) Dampers over 12 inches high: 5 inches x 1 inch

3. Blades:a. Low Leakage Damper: Airfoil type constructed of 0.71 thick

extruded aluminum, with integral reinforcing tube running full

length of blade, and replaceable extruded vinyl double edge

blade seals mechanically locked into extruded blade slots.b. Blade Action:

1) Modulating Dampers: Opposed blade.

2) Fully Open/Fully Closed Dampers: Parallel blade.c. Single blade dampers are acceptable for ducts up to 14 inches

high.

4. Axles: 1/2 inch plated steel hex positively locked to blade and connectedto frame through extruded hole with molded synthetic sleeve bearings.

5. Extended shaft Assembly: Consisting of outboard support bracket,

extended shaft rod, and extended shaft.

a. Suitable for 2 inches of insulation.6. Jamb Seals: Flexible metal compression type.

7. Damper Operation:

a. Low Leakage Dampers: Electric motor operated. Weld actuatormounting bracket to frame.

8. Linkage:

D263605 319


a. Single Section Dampers: In-frame fixed type with removable

1/2 inch dia control shaft extending 6 inches from damper frame.

b. Multiple Section Dampers: On-blade fixed type with factoryinstalled jackshaft.

9. Finish: Mill.

C. Insulated Control Dampers:

1. Frame: 16 gage galvanized steel hat channel, minimum 4 inches wide,with corner braces, and welded joints.

2. Blades: Double skin, 16 gage galvanized steel insulated with one inch

thick fiberglass, with vinyl edge seals, and longitudinal reinforcinggrooves.

3. Blade Action:

a. Volume Control Dampers: Opposed blade.b. Fresh Air and Make-up Air Control Dampers Interlocked with

Exhaust Fans: Parallel blade.

4. Axles: Minimum 7/16 inch plated steel hex positively locked to blade,

and connected to frame through extruded hole with molded syntheticsleeve bearings.

5. Extended Shaft Assembly: Consisting of outboard support bracket,

extended shaft rod, extended shaft.a. Suitable for 2 inches of insulation.

6. Jamb Seals: Flexible metal compression type.

7. Damper Operation: Electric motor operated. Weld actuator mountingbracket to frame.

8. Linkage:

a. Single Section Dampers: In-frame fixed type with removable

1/2 inch dia control shaft extending 6 inches from damper andoutboard support bearing.

b. Multiple Section Dampers: On-blade fixed type with factory

installed jackshaft.9. Finish: Mill galvanized.

D. Fire Dampers, Dynamic Systems:

1. UL Classified and Labeled:

a. Mark dampers in accordance with UL555, including but notlimited to the following:

1) Fire Damper, 1-1/2 hr fire resistance rating.

2) For use in dynamic systems.

3) Maximum rated air flow and pressure difference acrossdamper.

4) Directional arrow indicating air flow.

5) Mounting position (horizontal or vertical, or both).2. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Air Balance, Inc., or Ruskin Manufacturing Div., Phillips

Industries.1) Furnish Style, or Type B (blades out of air stream when

damper in open position).

E. Manual Damper Regulators:

D263605320


1. For Dampers Installed in Exposed, or Accessible Concealed Ductwork:

Indicating quadrant with heavy metal handle, end bearing, and means for

locking damper in all positions.2. For Dampers Installed in Inaccessible Concealed Ductwork: Concealed

type with indicating regulator in cast metal box with cover plate. Furnish

assembly complete with duct end bearing, adjustment coupling, anddamper extension rods.

2.04 DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Honeywell Inc., Johnson Controls, Inc., Belimo, andSeimens.

B. Electric/Electronic Type:

1. Positive positioning, spring return, and sized in accordance with actuator

manufacturer’s printed recommendations for each damper size.2. Actuators for outdoor dampers shall fail closed upon loss of electric

power.

3. Actuator Response: Linear in response to sensed load.

4. Voltage: 120 VAC or 24 VAC.5. Actuator Timing:

a. Open Damper: 90 seconds.

b. Spring Return: 30 seconds.c. Spring Close: 30 seconds.

C. Hydraulic, thermodynamic and battery type actuators are not acceptable.

D. Auxiliary End Switches: Required on electric/electronic actuators for thefollowing applications:

1. 100 percent Outside Air Systems: Outside air damper switch delays start

of unit until damper is open. Set switch to start unit when damper is 50

percent open.2. In-line Exhaust Fan Systems (Over 500 cfm): Exhaust damper switch

delays start of fan until damper is open.

E. Dampers associated with diesel alternators shall be spring open, power closed.

2.05 TURNING VANE ASSEMBLIES

A. Fabricate vane assemblies of same material as ductwork in which installed.

1. Vanes: Individual hollow airfoil type, rigidly connected to vane rails.

2. Weld, screw, or rivet rails to ductwork.

2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS – FABRIC

A. Static Pressures under 6 inches WG: Woven Fiberglass fabric with Hypalon

coating; similar to Duro Dyne Corp.’s Durolon.

B. Static Pressures 6 inches and Above: Single ply neoprene reinforced with 14 ozduck fabric; Style 3210 by Uni Rubber Inc., 11 Park Place, New York, NY

10007, (212) 962-0980.

D263605 321


1. Attach fabric to minimum one inch wide 11 gage stiffener, and seal with

duct sealant.

C. Direct Fired Heating Equipment with Temperatures up to 500 Degrees F: Wovenfiberglass fabric with silicone rubber coating; similar to Duro Dyne Corp.’s

Thermofab.

D. Factory prefabricated and pre-assembled connectors of fabric materials specifiedabove are acceptable with minimum 24 gage galvanized steel edges similar to

Duro Dyne Corp.’s Metal-Fab or Super Metal-Fab as required by free fabric

length.

2.07 GASKET MATERIAL

A. Registers, Grilles, and Diffusers Installed in Exposed, Uninsulated Ductwork:

1/4 inch thick felt or sponge rubber material, of width as required by flange.

B. Flanged Joints in Ducts: 1/8 inch thick reinforced inert plastic of the self-conforming type, of same width as flange.

1. Exception: Where flanged connections in cooking equipment exhaust

ductwork is allowed by NFPA 96, make up joints with Fibrefrax Grade

110 Paper by Carborundum Co.

2.08 SEALANTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Duro Dyne Corp.; Foster Products Div., H.B. Fuller

Co.; Hardcast Inc.; United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp.

B. U.L. Listed adhesives (liquid or mastic), scrim, tapes, or combinations thereof, asrequired for pressure class; suitable for system operating temperatures;

compatible with media conveyed within, insulation (if any), and ambientconditions.

2.09 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. Conform to NFPA 90A, and UL181 Class I:

1. Uninsulated Type: Factory assembled duct consisting of continuous,seamless, metalized polyester tear resistant duct with encapsulated steel

helix.

2. Pre-insulated Type: Factory assembled.

a. Internal Core: Continuous material suitable for service, withencapsulated steel helix that completely shields fiberglass

insulation from air stream.

b. Outer Vapor Barrier Jacket: Seamless, tear resistant metalizedpolyester.

3. Operating Conditions:

a. Maximum Operating Temperature: 140 degrees F.

b. Maximum Operating Static Pressure (Positive): 10 inch wg.c. Maximum Operating Static Pressure (Negative): 1 inch wg.

d. Maximum Air Velocity: 6,000 fpm.

4. Metal Clamps: Stainless steel with cadmium plated hex bolt.

D263605322


2.10 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Prefabricated or Fabricated at Site: Minimum 12 x 12 inch size, of same material

and finish as duct unless otherwise shown or specified.

1. For uninsulated duct designed for under two inches wg: Fabricate single

panel door of same gage as duct, with all edges folded, size door to

overlap opening perimeter by one inch.

2. For insulated duct and duct designed for two inches wg and over:Fabricate hollow metal doors in accordance with the SMACNA Manual.

Fill void in doors for insulated duct with thermally equivalent insulation.

3. Gasketing: A 3/4 inch wide, 1/8 inch thick urethane gasket, around allfour sides of duct opening.

a. Exception: Where access doors are required by NFPA 96 in

cooking equipment exhaust ductwork, gasket with FibrefraxGrade 110 paper by Carborundum Co.

B. Access Door Hardware:

1. Piano Hinges: Galvanized steel with brass pins, continuous type, full

height of door.2. Butt Hinges: Galvanized steel with brass pins, approximately 2 inches x

1-9/16 inches wide for doors under 24 inches high and 3 inches x 2

inches wide for doors over 24 inches and higher.

3. Sash Locks: Galvanized, cadmium plated, or aluminized steel or castaluminum.

4. Door Latches: Ventfabrics, Inc. Ventlock No. 260 or Duro Dyne Corp.

Code No. SP-20 Series.

2.11 FASTENERS

A. Security Fasteners: Torx head with center pin.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, install the Work of this Section inaccordance with the manufacturer’s printed installation instructions and the

SMACNA Manual.

3.02 FLEXIBLE FABRIC CONNECTORS (INSTALLATION)

A. Make ductwork connections to air handling equipment with flexible fabric

connectors. Install connectors with sufficient slack to prevent vibration

transmission.

B. Free Fabric Length: Install fabric connectors a minimum of three inches inlength for ducts having a maximum diameter of 18 inches, or maximum side

dimension of 30 inches, and a minimum of five inches in length for duct

diameters over 18 inches or side dimensions over 30 inches.

C. Secure fabric connectors to fans, casings and ducts as follows:

D263605 323

233300 - 10 Project No. SA979-H

1. Round Connectors: Secure with No. 12 USS gage x 1 inch wide

galvanized steel draw bands. Secure bands with bolts and nuts.

2. Rectangular Connectors: Secure with 1 inch x 1/8 inch thick flatgalvanized steel bars, with screws or bolts on maximum 8 inch centers,

or with approved sheet metal slip joints. Tightly crimp fabric into sheet

metal joint and secure complete joint with sheet metal screws onmaximum 6 inch centers.

D. Fabric connectors may be factory pre-fabricated pre-assembled units, with

minimum No. 24 USS gage metal edges, secured to fabric with double lockseams.

E. Do not paint fabric connectors.

3.03 ACCESS DOORS

A. Install gasketed access doors in ductwork at each of the following:

1. Major changes of direction in horizontal ducts connected to cooking

equipment hoods.

2. Motor operated dampers.

3. Manually operated volume control devices.4. Fire dampers.

5. All locations where operating parts of any kind are installed and

elsewhere as indicated.6. In-line damper actuators installed in air stream.

B. Access doors are not required, where a manually operated damper has an

exposed damper regulator, with an indicating quadrant.

3.04 CONCEALED DAMPER REGULATORS

A. Imbed box in, and secure to back-up construction in ceiling or wall, so cover

plate is flush with final surface.

END OF SECTION

D263605324


SECTION 233415

CENTRIFUGAL IN-LINE FANS

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Metal Ductwork: Section 233113.

C. Ductwork Accessories: Section 233300.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, including rated capacities of each unit,dimensional data, operating weights, accessories, material finishes, and

installation instructions.


1. Certified fan performance curves.

C. Contract Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Deliver 2 copies covering the installed

products, to the Director’s Representative.



1. Each fan shall bear AMCA Seal indicating that fans comply with AMCA

211, Certified Ratings Program - Air Performance, and AMCA 311,Certified Sound Ratings Program for Air Moving Devices.

2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99-2408.

3. Sound power level ratings shall comply with AMCA Standard 301,Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

4. Electrical components shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ABMA: American Bearing Manufacturer’s Association (formerly AFBMA).

B. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

C. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning

Engineers, Inc.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and coverings.

D263605 325


B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final locationsin accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

C. Lift and support units at the manufacturer’s designated lifting or supportingpoints.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE FANS

A. Greenheck Fan Co., PO Box 410, Schofield, WI 54476, (715) 359-6171,www.greenheck.com

1. Belt Drive Fans: Model BSQ.

B. Penn Barry Ventilation, 1401 North Plane Road, Richardson, TX 75081, (972)

234-3202, www.pennbarry.com.

1. Belt Drive Fans: Model Centrex Inliner SX.

C. Loren Cook Co., P.O. Box 4047, Springfield, MO 65808, (417) 869-6474,

www.lorencook.com.

1. Belt Drive Fans: Model SQI-B.

2.02 CENTRIFUGAL IN-LINE FANS

A. Housing: Rigid galvanized steel structural members and galvanized steel panels.

1. Inlet Cones: Deep spun or die formed type.

2. Inlet and Discharge Duct Collars: Angle flanges, with drilled or punchedholes at uniform intervals, extending beyond the housing to provide

continuous duct connections

3. Support Angles: Heavy gage steel, shipped loose, for installing vibration

isolation or bolting unit to solid foundation.4. Housing Insulation: One inch thick fiberglass duct liner.

5. Vibration Isolation: Isolates motor assembly from fan housing.

6. Removable Access Panels: Galvanized steel with neoprene gaskets,minimum of 2 required.

B. Centrifugal Fan Wheel: Statically and dynamically balanced backward inclined

type constructed of aluminum, spark resistant, non-overloading, and matched

with deeply spun venturis.

C. Belt Drive Motor: Open drip proof, continuous duty, ball bearing design,

permanently lubricated, and mounted out of the main air stream.

1. Shafts: Steel, turned, ground, polished, and rust protected.

2. Ball Bearings: Heavy duty, cast iron pillow block type rated forminimum L50 life exceeding 200,000 hours, 100 percent factory tested.

3. Pulleys: Adjustable, cast iron, machined and keyed, and sized for 150

percent of horsepower at its rated maximum speed.4. Motor Cover and Belt Guard: Galvanized steel construction with one

inch thick fiberglass duct liner.

5. Wired to external junction box.

D263605326


D. Disconnect Switch: Unit mounted, UL approved for the use, non-fused safety

type, NEMA 1 enclosure, factory wired from motor to external junction box.

E. Speed Controller: Unit mounted, solid state, variable speed type, capable ofaltering high speed of direct drive motor by 50 percent.

F. Dampers:

1. Types:

a. Automatic self-opening back draft type, with spring actuatedreturn.

b. Low Leakage motorized type.

2. Frame: Steel.3. Blades: Aluminum.

4. Bearings: Bronze or nylon.

5. Blade Edge Seals: Vinyl.6. Jamb Seals: Flexible metal compression type.

G. Fan Guards for EF-4 & 5 only: Galvanized steel welded wire or expanded metal,

with galvanized steel frame.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fans. Do not proceed

with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

B. Ceiling Suspended Fans: Suspend fans from building construction with vibration

isolation devices. See Section 230550.

C. Support fans independent from ductwork. See Section 233300.

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

1. Provide clearance for complete wheel, motor and shaft removal.


A. Inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair

damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Pre-start Up:

1. Remove shipping blocking, and bracing.

2. Verify lubrication for grease bearings and other moving parts.

3. Set dampers in connected ductwork in proper position.

D263605 327


C. Start Up:

1. Energize motor, verify proper operation of drive system, and fan wheel.

END OF SECTION

D263605328


SECTION 233516

CARBON MONOXIDE EXHAUST SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Metal Ductwork: Section 233113.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show details of fan platform and method of securing to

construction.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalog sheets, standard schematic drawings,specifications and installation instructions for system.

1. All components and accessories of system shall be the product of a single

manufacturer.



1. Systems shall be designed, manufactured and installed in complete

accordance with the New York State Department of Labor, Board ofStandards and Appeals.

2. Blower units shall be tested and rated in accordance with the test codes

of the AMCA and ASHRAE.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Car-Mon

2. Monoxivent.

3. The Engwald Corporation.4. Harvey Industries, Inc.

5. National Garage Ventilation, Inc.

2.02 DUCT SYSTEMS

A. Fabricate main ducts from a minimum of No. 24 gage galvanized sheet steel. All

ducts shall be properly seamed, braced, stiffened, supported and renderedmechanically air tight.

B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653, Class LFQ (lock forming quality), coating

designation G90.

D263605 329


C. Flexible Fabric Connections: High strength fiberglass fabric, coated on one sidewith an inorganic elastomeric compound. Material shall be “Thermofab”, by

Duro Dyne Corporation, or equivalent as approved by the Director.

D. Miscellaneous Fasteners and Hanger Attachments:

1. Sheet Metal Screws: Same material as duct.

2. Bolts and Nuts: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel.

3. Welding Studs: KSM Products, capacitor discharge, low carbon steel,copper flashed.

4. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36.

5. Self Drilling Expanding Fasteners: Phillips Type.6. Expansion Shields: “Star Slugin” single unit type unless otherwise

specified.

2.03 BLOWERS

A. Blowers shall be of non-overloading centrifugal type, constructed of Silumin(Silicon Aluminum Alloy) (both housing and wheel). The wheel is of a radial

type. The motor is a TEFC Baldor UL and CSA rated. Motor - 3450 RPM.

Entire unit shall be factory finished with baked enamel. Blower shall havecapacity as scheduled. Provide accessories as scheduled.

B. Vibration Isolation: Blower unit shall be isolated from the supporting platform

by means of rubber-in-shear isolators, furnished by the system manufacturer.

2.04 FLEXIBLE HOSE ASSEMBLY

A. Flexible Hose: double ply hose with an inner liner ply of woven fiberglass

coated silicone rubber. A helically wound spring steel wire is imbedded betweenthe inner liner ply and an exterior ply of woven Nomex coated with silicone

rubber. The wire insures maximum flexibility and minimum diameter restrictions

in sharp bend areas. The assembly is double wound with a treated Nomex cord

and heat vulcanized to provide a greater strength and serviceability

B. Maximum Heat Resistant: 72 Hours at 1000-degree F Interior Temperature, per

MIL PFR 62028; 600-degree F Continuous Duty, Baking Test.

C. Provide vehicle hose reels and accessories as scheduled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install system in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions, except

as specified otherwise herein.

B. Isolate blowers from supporting platforms with vibration isolators. Make ductconnections to blowers with flexible fabric connectors.

END OF SECTION

D263605330


SECTION 233600

AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Single-duct air terminals.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating

weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. Includea schedule showing drawing designation, room location, number furnished,

model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and

location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems

and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installedwiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

air outlets with other items installed in ceilings.

D. Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of air terminal and troubleshootingmaintenance guide to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate requirements of air terminalsand are based on specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers’ systems with

equal performance characteristics may be considered.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated air terminals specified in thisSection that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in NFPA 70, Article

100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally RecognizedTesting Laboratory” as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminals according to NFPA 90A, “Standard for

the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”

D. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation.

D263605 331


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering air terminals that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminalsby one of the following:

1. Acutherm.

2. Air System Components; Krueger Div.

3. Anemostat Products Div.4. Carnes Co., Inc.

5. Carrier Corp.

6. Environmental Technologies.7. Nailor Industries Inc.

8. Phoenix Controls Corp.

9. Titus.

10. Trane Co. (The).11. Trox USA, Inc.

12. Tuttle & Bailey, Hart & Cooley, Inc.

13. Warren Technologies.14. York International Corp.

2.02 SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINALS

A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate controlcomponents inside protective metal shroud.

B. Casings: Steel or aluminum sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses:

1. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum.

2. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.025-inch (0.63-mm) aluminum.

C. Casing Lining: Minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, neoprene- or vinyl-

coated, fibrous-glass insulation; 1.5-lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. m) density, complying

with NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Secure lining

to prevent delamination, sagging, or settling.

1. Coat liner surfaces and edges with erosion-resistant coating or cover with

perforated metal.

2. Cover liner with perforated metal.

3. Cover liner with Mylar film.4. Cover liner with Tedlar film.

D. Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct

attachment.

E. Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.

F. Access: Removable panels to permit access to dampers and other parts requiring

service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.

D263605332


G. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of nominal airflow at 1-inch wg(250-Pa) inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally closed.

H. Round Outlet: Discharge collar matching inlet size.

I. Hot-Water Heating Coil: 1/2-inch (13-mm) copper tube, mechanically expandedinto aluminum-plate fins; leak tested underwater to 200 psig (1380 kPa); and

factory installed.

J. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-basedcontroller with integral airflow transducer and room sensor provide control with

the following features:

1. Proportional plus integral control of room temperature.

2. Time-proportional reheat-coil control.3. Occupied/unoccupied operating mode.

4. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.

5. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.6. Communication with temperature-control system specified in other

Sections.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: Test and rate air terminals according to ARI 880,“Industry Standard for Air Terminals.”

B. Identification: Label each air terminal with plan number, nominal airflow,

maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certificationseal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminals level and plumb, according to manufacturer’s writteninstructions, rough-in drawings, original design, and referenced standards; and

maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.

B. Connect ductwork to air terminals according to other Sections.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to air terminals to allow service and maintenance.

B. Hot-Water Piping: Connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer,

control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and unionor flange.

D263605 333


C. Electrical: All power and wiring for less than 110 v shall be provided by Hcontract, and all power and wiring for 110v or greater shall be provided by E

contract. Comply with applicable requirements in other Sections.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s

published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values

are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

3.04 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices,

inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repairdamaged finishes.

3.05 COMMISSIONING

A. Verify that installation of each air terminal is according to the Contract

Documents.

B. Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal

manufacturer to achieve proper performance.

C. Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

D. Verify that control connections are complete.

E. Check that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

F. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Director’s Repre-

sentative’s maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. Train Director’s Representative’s maintenance personnel on proceduresand schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting,

servicing, and preventive maintenance.

2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section

“Contract Closeout.”3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section

“Operation and Maintenance Data.”

4. Schedule training with Owner, through Director’s Representative, with atleast 7 days’ advance notice.

END OF SECTION

D263605334


SECTION 234100

AIR FILTERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Air Handling Units: Section 237313.

B. Gas Fired Makeup Air Units 237423.

C. Split System Air Conditioners: Section 238126.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The latest edition of the following standards, as referenced herein, shall beapplicable:

1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems.2. UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.

3. ASHRAE 52.2 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices used in

General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.

4. IEST: Institute of Environmental Science & Technology, RecommendedPractice, IEST-RP-CC001.4, Testing HEPA/ULPA Filters.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. MERV: Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog sheets and specifications for each type filter.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Supply air filters that are UL listed, Class 2.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Supply air filters that are UL listed, Class 1.

1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: One spare set of air filters for each air handling unit utilizing airfilters. Deliver spare filters to the Director’s Representative in the

manufacturer’s original boxes, labeled as to filter usage.

D263605 335


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 AIR FILTER TYPES

A. Panel Air Filters: Viscous impingement type with an efficiency of MERV 5when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2, UL Class 2.

1. Maximum Initial Pressure Drop: 0.12 inch wg at 300 fpm.

2. Construction: One inch thick fibrous glass media placed between

perforated metal retainers, and internally bonded to both sides of onepiece heavy duty kraft fiberboard or chip board enclosing frame.

3. Acceptable Filters:

a. Airguard Facet Type F312.b. American 5700.

c. Camfil Farr Cam-Glass.

d. Flanders/Precisionaire HD Industrial Grade.

e. Glasfloss Disposable Panel Filter.f. Purolator Facet-Aire 3.

B. Pleated Air Filters: Extended surface medium efficiency air filter having a

MERV of 8 when tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2.

1. Maximum Initial Pressure Drop:a. 1 inch thick filters: 0.45 inch wg at 500 fpm.

b. 2 inch thick filters: 0.28 inch wg at 500 fpm.

c. 4 inch thick filters: 0.27 wg at 500 fpm.2. Construction (UL Class 2 Filters):

a. Filter Media: Non-woven blend of cotton and synthetic fibers

bonded on the air exiting side to welded wire support grid

formed to maintain pleat configuration.b. The wire grid support treated for corrosion resistance.

c. Enclosing Frame: Constructed of high wet-strength moisture

resistant beverage board or chipboard, with diagonal supportmembers bonded the apex of each pleat on the air entering and

air exiting sides of filter pack.

d. Filter pack bonded to enclosing frame around the entireperiphery of the frame.

3. Acceptable Filters (UL Class 2 Filters):

a. Airguard: Type DP-2-40.

b. American 300X.c. Camfil Farr 30/30.

d. Flanders/Precisionaire Pre-Pleat HV.

e. Glasfloss Z-Line HV.f. Purolator Mark 80.

4. Construction (UL Class 1 Filters):

a. Filter Pack: Constructed of microfiber glass laminated to an all-glass mesh backing material.

b. Media: Formed into tapered radial pleats and bonded to a

welded wire support grid formed to maintain pleat configuration.

c. Enclosing Frame: Constructed of non-flammable board withdiagonal support members bonded to each pleat apex on both

D263605336


sides of filter pack; or a galvanized expanded metal media

support retainer on the downstream side.

d. Filter pack bonded to enclosing frame around entire insideperiphery of frame.

5. Acceptable Filters (UL Class 1 Filters):

a. Airguard: Type DP Class 1.b. American AmAir HT.

c. Camfil Farr 30/30 UL Class 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the Work of this section in accordance with the manufacturer’s printedinstallation instructions, unless otherwise specified.

B. Filter Application Schedule for locations requiring UL Class 2 filters (most

applications): Install set of filters in each air-handling unit listed below:

APPLICATIONFILTER

TYPE

FILTER

THICKNESS/

DEPTH

(INCHES)

UL

CLASS

Single-Stage Filtration:

Fan coil units, cabinet unit heaters, and

unit ventilators.

Panel 1 2

Single-Stage Filtration:

Factory packaged air conditioners, and

heating and ventilating units.

Pleated 2 2

END OF SECTION

D263605 337


SECTION 235123

GAS VENTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. This Section specifies positive pressure venting systems for condensingappliances. Roof flashing is specified in other sections

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog cut sheets, specifications and installation instructions foreach item specified.

B. Provide 1/4" scale dimensioned fabrication drawings from the product

manufacturer including all components for a complete system allowing for

expansion and drainage and coordinated with other trades.

C. Provide manufacturer’s sizing calculations according to ASHRAE methods and

parts list specific to this project.

D. Provide surface temperatures and clearances resulting from UL1738.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Factory built chimneys shall be designed and installed

in accordance with the requirements of the NFPA 54, NFPA - 85A,B and D,comply and be listed to UL 1738, Category IV. All components shall be UL

listed and labeled for use with building heating equipment.

B. The inner diameter for breeching and stack shall be verified by the

manufacturer’s computations. The computation shall be technically sound, shallfollow ASHRAE calculation methods, and incorporate the specific flow

characteristics of the inner pipe. The contractor shall furnish the exact boiler

model and operating characteristics to the factory representative. Operatingcharacteristics shall include flue gas flow rate, BTU input, outlet temperature,

local altitude, stack layout, and available external pressure at appliance outlet,

etc., necessary to determine system operation at maximum and minimum levelsof burner turndown range.

C. Technical Services Support: The factory-built modular stack system shall be

furnished by a vendor organization which assures design, installation and

services coordination; and provides in-warranty and post-warranty unifiedresponsibility.

D263605338


1.04 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide warranty against functional failure due to defects in

material and manufacturer’s workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from thedate of delivery.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturer’s that may beincorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Selkirk Metalbestos, Division of Selkirk, Inc.

2. Van Packer

3. Metal-Fab Inc4. Heat Fab Inc.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Factory-built modular connector, manifold and stack system laboratory testedand Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for use with building heating

equipment and appliances which produce exhausted flue gases at a temperature

not exceeding 550°F (see UL1738) when burning gas as described in NFPA54.

The stack system shall be designed and installed to be gas tight and tested to15"w.g. The system shall be designed to compensate for all flue gas induced

thermal expansions

B. The double wall stack shall have an inner gas carrying pipe of AL29-4Csuperferritic stainless steel. There shall be a nominal 1 inch air space between

the walls. The outer jacket shall be 304 stainless steel.018" thickness up to 12".

The materials and construction of the modular sections and accessories shall be

as specified by the terms of the product’s UL Listing.

C. Factory supplied Vee Bands and sealant for inner pipe joints as specified in the

manufacturer’s installation instructions. P077 Silicone Sealant for flue gas

temperatures up to 600 degrees. P078 Ceramic Sealant for flue gas temperaturesover 600 degrees.

D. Roof penetration pieces or wall penetration shall be U.L. listed products of the

chimney manufacturer and shall be suitable for a combustible roof or wall. Allsupports, roof or wall penetrations, terminations, roof curbs, adapters, thimbles,

appliance connectors and drain fittings required to install the vent system shall be

included. The vents shall be mounted on the roof or exterior wall with proper

separations.

E. The piping and its supporting system shall resist side loads (horizontal and

vertical) at least 1.5 times the weight per foot of the piping. Wall supports shall

support (as verified by manufacturer testing) 40 feet of pipe with a factor ofsafety of at least 4. Plate supports shall support (as verified by manufacturer

testing) 200 feet of pipe in 6 inch through 20 inch ID sizes and 100 feet of pipe in

24 inch ID and larger sizes with a factor of safety of at least 4.

D263605 339


F. The entire stack system from each boiler or appliance to the termination;including accessories, shall be from one manufacturer.

2.03 PAINT

A. Aluminized steel surfaces exposed to the elements shall be protected by a

minimum of one base coat of primer and one finished coat of corrosion resistant

paint suitable for outer jacket skin temperatures of the particular installation(such as series 4100 or 9400 as manufactured by Rust-Oleum).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The stack system shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s installationinstructions and UL listing. Maintain minimum clearances from combustibles

specified in UL listing.

B. Inner pipe joints shall be sealed as specified in the manufacturer’s installation

instructions.

C. Install roof curbs for roof penetrations. Flashing of roof curbs are specified in

other Sections.

D. Install manufacturer’s UL listed roof penetration or wall penetration piece andseal to penetration per manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. The system shall be installed as designed by the manufacturer and in accordance

with the terms of the manufacturer’s 10-year warranty and in conjunction with

sound engineering practice.

F. Aluminized steel surfaces exposed to the elements shall be protected by a

minimum of one base coat of primer and one finished coat of corrosion resistant

paint suitable for outer jacket skin temperatures of the particular installation(such as series 4100 or 9400 as manufactured by Rust-Oleum).

G. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain

connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain. Provide condensate trap anddilution tank before discharging the condensate to the drain as required.

H. Maintain 6" clearance between interior flue pipe and combustible materials

including pipe and duct insulation.

I. Maintain 12" clearance between exterior flue pipe and combustible materials.

J. Provide stainless steel tubing at base clean out. Connect to condensing boiler and

spill to nearest floor drain.

END OF SECTION

D263605340


SECTION 235216

CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes high-efficiency boilers for heating hot water.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating

weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, requiredclearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each

field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systemsand differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

C. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test

results for compliance with performance requirements before shipping.

D. AGA design certificates, for information.

E. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

Include parts list, maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this

Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in NFPA 70, Article100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized

Testing Laboratory” as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

B. AGA Compliance: Design certified by AGA; tests and ratings according to AGA

requirements.

C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with the ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, “Pressure Vessels,” Division 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation.

D263605 341


1.04 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall notdeprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of

the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,

other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the ContractDocuments.

B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor for heat

exchanger.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than 5 yearsfrom date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering boilers that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide boilers by one

of the following:

1. Sealed-Combustion Boilers:a. AERCO International, Inc.

b. Amana Refrigeration, Inc.

c. GlowCore Corp.

2.02 PACKAGED UNITS

A. Description: Boiler shall be propane fired, fully condensing, fire tube design.

Power burner shall have full modulation (the minimum firing rate shall not

exceed 200,000 BTU/HR input. Boilers that have an input greater than 200,000BTU/Hr at minimum fire will not be considered) and discharge into a positive

pressure vent. Boiler efficiency shall increase with decreasing load (output),

while maintaining setpoint. Boiler shall be factory-fabricated, factory-assembledand factory-tested, fire-tube condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed

pressure-tight, built on a steel base, including insulated jacket, flue-gas vent,

combustion-air intake connections, water supply, return and condensate drainconnections, and controls.

B. Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger shall be constructed of 439 stainless steel

fire tubes and tubesheets, with a one-pass combustion gas flow design. The fire

tubes shall be 5/8” OD, with no less than 0.049” wall thickness. The upper andlower stainless steel tubesheet shall be no less than 0.25” thick. The pressure

vessel/heat exchanger shall be welded construction. The heat exchanger shall be

ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than 160 psig. Access to thetubesheets and heat exchanger shall be available by burner and exhaust manifold

removal. Minimum access opening shall be no less than 14-inch diameter.

D263605342


C. Pressure Vessel: The pressure vessel shall have a maximum water volume of 55gallons. The boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed 3 psig at 258 gpm. The

boiler water connections shall be 4 inch flanged connection. The pressure vesselshall be constructed of SA53 carbon steel, with a 0.25 inch thick wall and 0.50-

inch thick upper head. Inspection openings in the pressure vessel shall be in

accordance with ASME Section IV pressure vessel code. The boiler shall bedesigned so that the thermal efficiency increases as the boiler firing rate

decreases.

D. Modulating Air/Fuel Valve and Burner: The boiler burner shall be capable of a15 to 1 turndown ratio of the firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency or

staging of gas valves. The burner shall be metal fiber mesh covering a stainless

steel body with pilot ignition system and flame rectification. All burner material

exposed to the combustion zone shall be of stainless steel construction. Thereshall be no moving parts within the burner itself. A modulating air/fuel valve

shall meter the air and fuel input. The modulating motor must be linked to both

the gas valve body and air valve body with a single linkage. The linkage shall notrequire any field adjustment. A variable frequency drive (VFD), controlled cast

aluminum pre-mix blower shall be used to ensure the optimum mixing of air and

fuel between the air/fuel valve and the burner. Provide gas regulator (propanegas) suitable for each boiler.

E. Minimum boiler efficiencies shall be as follows at a 20 degree delta-T:

EWT 100% FIRE 50% FIRE 5% FIRE

160 DegF 87% 87% 87%

140 DegF 88% 88% 88%

120 DegF 89% 90% 90.5%

100 DegF 93.7% 95% 95%

80 DegF 96% 98% 98.%

F. Exhaust Manifold: The exhaust manifold shall be of corrosion resistant cast

aluminum or 316 stainless steel with an 8 inch diameter flue connection. The

exhaust manifold shall have a collecting reservoir and a gravity drain for theelimination of condensation.

G. Blower: The boiler shall include a VFD controlled fan to operate during the

burner firing sequence and pre-purge the combustion chamber.

H. Motors: Blower motors shall comply with requirements specified in Division 23Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

I. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require a motor to operate in the service factor range above 1.0.

J. Ignition: Ignition shall be via spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoffand electronic flame supervision.

D263605 343


K. The boiler shall be designed such that the combustion air is drawn from theinside of the boiler enclosure, decoupling it from the combustion air supply and

preheating the air to increase efficiency.

L. Enclosure: The sheet metal enclosure shall be fully removable, allowing for easy

access during servicing.

M. Type: Sealed-combustion, gas-fired, condensing-type hot-water boiler withcapacities and accessories as scheduled.

N. Fuel: Natural gas.

2.03 CONTROLS

A. Controller: Solid state, with pressure-sensing flame safeguard system, ignitiontransformer, spark plug, manual gas shutoff valve, system-pressure-controlled

regulator, automatic redundant control valves, high-limit water temperature

controller, ASME-approved safety-relief valve, and temperature and pressuregage.

B. Operating Temperature Control: Electronic-operating temperature controller

maintains boiler water temperature, with electronic primary and outdoor sensors.Provide BACnet interface for the boiler control. Reset ratio of outside-air

temperature change to discharge control point change adjustable from 1:2 to

100:1, with adjustable initial set point from 80 to 230 deg F (27 to 110 deg C).Mounted in NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted enclosure with full cover.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Include the following list of manufacturer’s standard accessories:

1. Exhaust mufflers.2. Air-supply mufflers.

3. Low-water cutoff and manual-reset high-limit control.

4. Vent terminal plates.


A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code, Section IV for low-pressure boilers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installationtolerances and other conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed

with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D263605344


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer’s written instructions

and referenced standards.

B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

C. Support boilers on 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick concrete base, 4 inches (100 mm)

larger on each side than base of unit.

D. Assemble units and parts shipped loose or disassembled.

E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory

mounted.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.

B. Connect air-intake and exhaust piping to boiler, size as recommended by

manufacturer. Use Schedule 40 CPVC pipe and fittings for exhaust, PVC forsupply, with solvent-cemented joints. Pitch toward boiler minimum of 2 percent

or as indicated. Provide termination as indicated.

C. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valveand union or flange at each connection.

D. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.

E. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’spublished torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are

not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized servicerepresentative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of

boilers, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged andmalfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections

of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

D263605 345


3.05 CLEANING

A. Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according tomanufacturer’s written instructions.

B. After completing boiler installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect

exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damagedfinishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer’s touchup

paint.

3.06 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.

B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer’s

submittal and installation requirements specified in other Sections. Do

not proceed with boiler startup until wiring installation is acceptable toequipment Installer.

C. Complete manufacturer’s installation and startup checklist and verify the

following:

1. Boiler is level on concrete base.2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage.

3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber.

4. Pressure-reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specifiedrelief pressure. Adjust as required.

5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal

and servicing.6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports.

7. Labels are clearly visible.

8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris.

9. Pressure and temperature gages are installed.10. Control installations are completed.

D. Ensure pumps operate properly.

E. Check operation of pressure-reducing valve on gas train, including venting.

F. Check that fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature interlocks are in place.

G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners to maximum operating efficiency.

1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.

2. Check and record performance of factory-provided boiler protectiondevices and firing sequences.

3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid-level, flow-switch, and

high-temperature interlocks.

4. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer.5. Measure and record gas pressure on manifold.

D263605346


6. Measure and record combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner.

7. Measure and record flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge.

H. Measure and record water flow rate, pressure drops, and temperature rise througheach boiler.

I. Inspect expansion tank, makeup water meter, tank pressure, pressure-reducing

valve, water level, and backflow preventer.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Director’s

Representative’s maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. Operate boiler, including accessories and controls, to demonstratecompliance with requirements.

2. Train Director’s Representative’s maintenance personnel on procedures

and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting,servicing, and preventive maintenance.

3. Review data in the maintenance manuals.


5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days’ advance notice.

END OF SECTION

D263605 347


SECTION 236200

CONDENSING UNITS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Air-cooled condensing units.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; dimensions;

required clearances; methods for assembling components; furnished specialties; accessories; and

installation and startup instructions for each model indicated.

B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: For each condensing unit to include in the maintenance manuals.

1. Include a parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory; troubleshooting

maintenance guide; and servicing and preventive maintenance procedures and schedule.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that is listed

and labeled.

1. The Terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory”

as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for Mechanical

Refrigeration.”

C. Fabricate and label water-cooled condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

Section VIII, “Pressure Vessels,” Division 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 303, “Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing and Compressor Units.”

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

D263605348


1.5 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other

rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition

to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the

Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by Contractor and signed by manufacturer, agreeing

to replace components that fail in materials and workmanship within the specified warranty period,

provided manufacturer’s written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been

followed.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial

Completion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

condensing units that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

1. Condensing Units, Air Cooled, 6 to 120 Tons:

a. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div.

b. Engineered Air.

c. Lennox International, Inc.; Lennox Industries, Inc. Div.

d. Daikin-McQuay International.

e. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.

f. York International Corp.

2.2 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 6 TO 120 TONS

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing, compressors, condenser

coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.

B. Compressor: Hermetic or semihermetic compressor designed for service with crankcase sight glass,

crankcase heater, and backseating service access valves on suction and discharge ports.

1. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloading.

C. Condenser: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, with separate and independent refrigeration

circuit for each compressor. Include liquid accumulator and subcooling circuit and backseating

liquid-line service access valve. Factory test coils at 450 psig (3105 kPa), then dehydrate by drawing

a vacuum and fill with a holding charge of nitrogen.

D. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type vertical discharge; either directly or belt driven. Include the

following:

1. Permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors.

2. Separate motor for each fan.

3. Motors with thermal-overload cutouts.

4. Dynamically and statically balanced fan assemblies.

D263605 349


5. Low Ambient Control: Factory-installed damper assembly, fan-speed control, or fan-cycling

control.

E. Operating and safety controls include the following:

1. Manual reset, high-pressure cutout switches.

2. Automatic reset, low-pressure cutout switches.

3. Low oil pressure cutout switch.

4. Compressor-winding thermostat cutout switch.

5. 3-leg, compressor-overload protection.

6. Control transformer.

7. Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.

8. Automatic, non-recycling pump down and a timing device to prevent excessive compressor

cycling.

F. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components and controls

and with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and

drives. Additional features include the following:

1. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished with

manufacturer’s standard paint coating.

2. Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units.

3. Gasketed control panel door.

4. Unfused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external electrical power

connection.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Motors” for general requirements for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240.

B. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 340/360.

1. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 applicable,

“Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”

C. Test and inspect shell and tube condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

Section VIII, “Pressure Vessels,” Division 1.

D. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install condensing units according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer’s

recommended clearances.

D263605350


C. Install ground-mounted units on 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, reinforced concrete base, 4 inches (100

mm) larger than condensing unit on each side. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.

D. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports. Anchor unit to supports with removable fasteners.

E. Install units on spring isolators.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit’s quick-connect fittings. Install tubing so it does not

interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories.

B. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access to unit. Install

furnished field-mounted accessories.

C. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-

tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks

and replace lost refrigerant and oil.

B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.

Clean units to remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions and do the

following:

1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.

2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.

3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.

4. Check that all bolts and screws are tight.

5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.

6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

C. Lubricate bearings on fans.

D263605 351


D. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.

E. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

F. Start unit according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

G. Complete manufacturer’s starting checklist.

H. Measure and record airflow over coils.

I. Check operation of condenser capacity control device.

J. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to

structure.

K. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance

personnel as specified below:

1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and

shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.


3. Schedule training with Owner, notify Engineer at least 7 days in advance of training.

END OF SECTION

D263605352

237313- 1 Project No. SA979-H

SECTION 237313

AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL



B. Air Filters: Section 234100.

C. Motors and Motor Controllers: Section 260221.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Waiver of Submittals: The “Waiver of Certain Submittal Requirements” in

Section 013300 does not apply to this Section.

B. Product Data:

1. Catalog sheets, brochures, performance charts, standard schematic

drawings, specifications and installation instructions for each air

handling unit.


1. Copy of Seismic Qualifications Certificate.

D. Contract Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Deliver 2 copies, covering the

installed products, to the Director’s Representative.


A. Source Quality Control: Factory test units in accordance with ARI Standard 430

- Central-Station Air-Handling Units.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificate: Certificate from air handling unit

manufacturer covering air handling units, accessories, supports, and components;

and consisting of the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether Withstand Certification is based

on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of

gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions, and

loads transmitted to structure at each attachment point.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the

certification is based including installation requirements.

4. Comprehensive seismic engineering analysis of air handling units and

supports.

D263605 353


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. General Design: Sectional constructed unit which is structurally self supporting,

gasketing between adjoining sections, sections consisting of:

1. Fan section.

2. Coil section(s).

3. Filter section.

4. Mixing box section.

5. Face and bypass section.

6. Base Rail.

7. Accessory sections as indicated on drawings.

B. Casing:

1. Gage:

a. Double Wall Exterior: Minimum No. 18 USS sheet steel.

b. Double Wall Interior:

1) Solid: Minimum No. 22 USS sheet steel.

2) Perforated: Minimum No. 18 USS sheet steel.

a) Perforation located in fan section for acoustics.

2. Accessibility:

a. Removable panels and insulated double wall inspection doors to

all internal parts.

b. Inspection Doors:

1) Exterior: Minimum No. 18 USS sheet steel.

2) Interior: Minimum No. 20 USS sheet steel.

3) Minimum 1 inch thick unexposed insulation.

4) Continuously gasketed perimeter.

5) Stainless or chrome plated steel hinges.

6) Two latching handles.

c. Sections shall maintain structural integrity upon removal of

panels.

3. Unit Insulation:

a. Double Wall: Minimum 2 inch thick insulation material.

b. Insulation minimum 1-1/2 pound density.

c. No insulation edges exposed.

d. Materials: Comply with requirements of NFPA Bulletin 90A.

C. Fan Section:

1. Fan: Double width, double inlet, multi-blade centrifugal type, designed

for low operating speeds.

2. Fan Shaft: Factory coated with corrosion preventive compound.

3. Shaft Bearings: Grease packed ball or sleeve type, sealed in self-

aligning pillow blocks.

4. Motor: Mounted internally or externally.

a. Adjustable motor base.

b. Adjustable sheave V-belt drive.

c. Belt Guard (For external only).

D263605354


d. See Section 260221 - MOTOR AND MOTOR

CONTROLLERS.

5. Vibration Isolation:

a. Internally Mounted Motor: Spring isolators by manufacturer.

b. Externally Mounted Motor: See Section 230550 - VIBRATION

ISOLATION.

c. Flexible connection between fan and casing.

D. Coil Section:

1. Seamless copper or red brass tubing, leak tested at minimum 200 psig air

pressure under water.

2. Aluminum flat plate fins with formed collar permanently bonded to

tubing by means of mechanical expansion.

3. Coil header(s) of cast iron, copper or steel.

4. Built in pitch between headers, or pitch coils to permit drainage. Extend

drainage connections to exterior of unit casing.

5. Gasketing or safing to prevent air by-pass or infiltration between coil

channels, finned surfaces, and casing.

6. Easy top of side removal of coil(s) without disassembly of adjacent

coil(s) or coil section.

7. Staggered coils are not acceptable.

E. Condensate Drain Pan:

1. Insulated double wall galvanized steel construction.

2. Sloped to drain connection.

3. Inspection door to allow for cleaning.

4. Separate drain pans for each tier of cooling coils.

F. Filter Section:

1. Easy filter removal and replacement.

2. Flat, V or Z pattern arrangement.

3. Filter Type:

a. 2 inch pleated.

b. 6 inch (12 inch) cartridge filter with 2 inch prefilter.

4. See Section 234100 - AIR FILTERS.

G. Mixing Box:

1. Mixing box or combination filter and mixing box.

2. Damper opposed or parallel multi-airfoil blades for:

a. Control of outdoor and recirculated air.

b. Prevention of air stratification.

3. Maximum damper leakage rate 10 cfm/sq ft @ 4.0 in wg.

4. Damper bearings or bushings; stainless or nylon.

5. Jamb and blade edge seals.

I. Factory Finish:

1. All Exposed Surfaces: Factory applied baked enamel, or galvanized

finish in accordance with ASTM A 653, coating designation G90.

J. Base Rail: Factory installed by manufacturer.

D263605 355


1. Minimum 6 inch height (to elevate condensate drain).

2. Galvanized steel.

3. Structurally capable of supporting unit on floor or by ceiling suspension.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


instructions.

END OF SECTION

D263605356

238223 - 1 Project No. 45404-01-H

SECTION 237423

GAS-FIRED MAKEUP AIR UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes packaged gas-fired makeup air units with integral directgas-fired heating for indoor installation. Airflow arrangement shall be outdoor air

with recirculation. Each unit shall be constructed in a horizontal configuration and

shall incorporate additional product requirements as listed in Section 2 of thisspecification.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type or model, include the following:

1. Complete fan performance curves for Supply Air, with system operatingconditions indicated, as tested in an AMCA Certified Chamber.

2. Sound performance data for Supply Air, as tested in an AMCA Certifiedchamber.

3. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics and motor and fan accessories.

4. Dimensioned drawings for each type of installation, showing isometric and

plan views, to include location of attached ductwork and service clearancerequirements.

5. Estimated gross weight of each installed unit.

6. Installation, Operating and Maintenance manual (IOM) for each model.

7. Network Interface Controller specifications to include available options andoperating protocols. Include complete data on all factory-supplied input

devices.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain Packaged Make-Up Air Unit with Integral Heating withall appurtenant components or accessories from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings must indicate size, profiles and dimensional

requirements of Make-Up Air Units and are to be based on the specific systemindicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements".

C. Certifications:

1. Entire unit shall be ETL Certified per ANSI Z83.4 or ANSI Z83.18 and bear an

ETL mark.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of all building penetrations required for installation of

each unit and associated ducting, plumbing and electrical systems.

B. Coordinate sequencing of construction of associated plumbing, HVAC, andelectrical supply.

D263605 357


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specifications contained

within this document, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporatedinto the work include, but are not limited to:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Units with Integral Heating shall be fully assembled at the the factory and consist of

an insulated metal cabinet, a motorized intake damper, supply air blower assembly,

electrical control center. All specified components and internal accessories factoryinstalled and tested and prepared for single-point high voltage connection.

2.3 CABINET

A. Materials: Formed, double wall insulated metal cabinet, fabricated to permit accessto internal components for maintenance.

1. Outside casing: 18 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel meeting ASTM A653 for

components that do not receive a painted finish. Pre-painted components as

supplied by the factory shall have polyester urethane paint on 18 gauge G60galvanized steel. Base rail is 12 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel.

2. Internal Assemblies: 24 gauge galvanized (G90) steel except for motorsupports which shall be minimum 14 gauge galvanized (G90) steel.

B. Cabinet Insulation: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and erosion

requirements of UL 181.

1. Materials: Fiberglass insulation. If insulation other than fiberglass is used, it

must also meet the Fire Hazard Classification shown below.

a) Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm)

b) Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke

developed of 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411.

c) Location and application: Floor of each unit shall be insulated withfiberglass insulation. Full interior coverage from "Heating on".

d) Access panels: Unit shall be equipped with insulated removable accesspanels to provide easy access to all major components. Access panels shall

be fabricated of 18 gauge steel. Removable access panels shall incorporate

a formed drip edge.

e) Supply Air blower assembly options:

1) Forward curve blower: Blower assembly consists of an electric motor

and a belt driven, double width, and double inlet forward curve blower.

Assembly shall be mounted on heavy gauge galvanized rails and

further mounted on minimum 1.125 inch thick neoprene vibrationisolators.

C. Control center / connections:

1. Unit shall have an electrical control center where all high and low voltage

connections are made. Control center shall be constructed to permitsingle-point high voltage power supply connections.

D263605358


D. Direct Gas-Fired Furnace:

1. Unit shall be assembled, piped, and wired. Direct gas-fired system will be 92%efficient while supplying a burner that is capable of providing 25:1 turndown.

Unit will utilize a draw through design and incorporate adjustable burner

baffles plates for field adjustments. Unit will have a Pilot ignition system.

2. Burner construction shall consist of a cast aluminum burner manifold and 400

series stainless steel mixing plates. No air from inside the space shall beallowed to pass across the burner at any time. Flame sensing shall be provided

by a flame rod. A flame safeguard display shall be included. Burner control

shall have a digital coded fault indicator capable of storing the last five faults.

3. Shall be equipped for operation on LP gas with a maximum rated inlet gas

pressure of 1/2 PSI.

4. Burner control option to include the following: External signal for burnermodulation with integral discharge temperature limits using an external BMS

controller.

5. Shall include the following safety controls:

a) Manual Reset, High Limit Switch: Main gas valve closes if high-limittemperature is exceeded.

b) Dual safety shutoff valves shall be provided that do not exceed 120 VACcontrol signals.

c) Low Gas Pressure Switch(es): Main gas valve closes if low pressureswitch defaults.

E. Motorized Inlet Air Dampers: to be of low leakage type and shall be factoryinstalled.

F. Sensors are considered to be part of various optional operational modes or devicecontrollers and are to be factory supplied and installed as specified by the A/E.

2.4 BLOWER-FC

A. Blower section construction, Supply Air: Belt drive motor and blower shall be

assembled onto a minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel platform and must have

neoprene vibration isolation devices, minimum of 1-1/8 inches thick.

B. Blower assemblies: Shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for

continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and horsepower.

C. Centrifugal blower housing: Formed and reinforced steel panels to make curved

scroll housing with shaped cutoff.

D. Forward curved blower (fan) wheels: Galvanized or aluminum construction with

inlet flange and shallow blades curved forward in direction of airflow. Mechanicallyattached to shaft with set screws.

E. Blower section motor source quality control: Blower performance shall be factory

tested for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed and efficiency.Ratings are to be established in accordance with AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods

of Testing Fans for Rating".

2.5 MOTORS

A. General: Blower motors greater than 3/4 horsepower shall be "NEMA Premium"unless otherwise indicated. Compliance with EPAct minimum energy-efficiency

D263605 359


standards for single speed ODP and TE enclosures is not acceptable. Motors shall

be heavy-duty, permanently lubricated type to match the fan load and furnished at

the specified voltage, phase, and enclosure.

B. Motors shall be 60 cycle, 3 phase, 208 volt.

2.6 UNIT CONTROLS

A. The unit shall be constructed so that it can function as a stand-alone heating systemcontrolled by a factory-supplied remote panel, thermostats and sensors or it can be

operated as a heating system controlled by a Building Management System (BMS).

This unit shall be controlled by a factory-installed Network interface controller thatis connected to various optional sensors.

B. Unit shall incorporate a Network interface controller with integral LCD screen that

provides text readouts of status, operating settings, and alarm conditions. Networkinterface controller shall have a built in keypad to permit operator to access read-out

screens and change settings without the use of ancillary equipment, devices, or

software. DDC controllers that require the use of equipment or software that is notfactory-installed in the unit are not acceptable. Alarm readouts consisting of

flashing light codes are not acceptable.

1. Operating protocol: The Network interface controller shall be supplied with aprotocol card for BACnet IP for monitoring of the unit's status and control of

the unit's functions through the BMS.

C. Sensors to be provided with the unit:

1. Heating Inlet Air Sensor

2. Dirty Filter Sensor

2.7 FILTERS

A. Unit shall have 2" thick MERV 8 disposable pleated filters following the outdoorair intake in a V-bank arrangement and shall be accessible from the exterior of the

unit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to start of installation, examine area and conditions to verify correct location

for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting unitperformance. See unit IOM.

B. Proceed with installation only after all unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be accomplished in accordance with these written specifications,

project drawings, manufacturer's installation instructions as documented in

manufacturer's IOM, Best Practices and all applicable building codes.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. In all cases, industry Best Practices shall be incorporated. Connections are to be

made subject to the installation requirements shown above.

D263605360


1. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 (Plumbing).

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings and specialties.

2. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in Division 23 of

this document.

3. Electrical installation requirements are specified in Division 26 of this

document.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative toinspect field assembled components and equipment installation, to include electrical

and piping connections. Report results to A/E in writing. Inspection must include a

complete startup checklist to include (as a minimum) the following: Completed

Start-Up Checklists as found in manufacturer's IOM.

3.5 START-UP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup service. Clean

entire unit, comb coil fins as necessary, and install clean filters. Verify water source

for compliance with manufacturer's requirements for flow and temperature.Measure and record electrical values for voltage and amperage. Refer to Division

23 "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" and comply with provisions therein.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate and maintain the entire Make-Up Air unit. Refer toDivision 01 Section Closeout Procedures and Demonstration and Training.

END OF SECTION

D263605 361


SECTION 238126

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split-system heat pump units and cooling only airconditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-

condenser components. Units are designed for recessed ceiling or surface wall

mounting.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for

each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities,

outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motorrequirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring, dimensional

drawings, weights, and accessories.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010,

Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Applicable requirements inASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-

Conditioning."

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof supports, equipment

supports, and roof penetrations.

D263605362


1.05 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail inmaterials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manu-facturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but

are not limited to, the following:

1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation.

2. Comfort Air.3. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division.

4. Sanyo Fisher (U.S.A.) Corp.

2.02 WALL SURFACE EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Chassis: High-strength molded plastic, removable panels for servicing.

1. Drain Pans: Polycarbonate plastic, with connection for drain; insulated.

2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply

with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins,

complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

C. Fan: Direct drive centrifugal; double inlet, forward curve.

1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermalprotection and permanent lubrication.

D. Permanent, Cleanable Filters: 1/2 inch (25 mm) thick plastic screen.

E. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

F. Condensate Pump: Integral with unit.

2.03 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A. Casing: Galvanized steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for

access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on

vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitiveoverload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

1. Compressor Type: Scroll.

D263605 363


2. Inverter controlled compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure

switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch.

3. Refrigerant: R-410A.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins,

complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

D. Reversing Valve: Manufacturer’s standard control valve designed to be fail-safein heating position. Provide manufacturer’s standard electromechanical, factory-

mounted and -wired controls, including fan, reversing-valve, and heat- and cool-

function controls.

E. Fan: Polycarbonate plastic-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Low ambient operation control kit: Permits operation down to 0°F.

B. Sensor: Hard wired, 12 volt DC functioning to remotely control compressor and

evaporator fan, with the following features:

1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time

setting, operating mode, and fan speed.

4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.

C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory

cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction and liquid linewith flared fittings at both ends.

1. Minimum Insulation Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

E. Control adapter to allow unit to enable/disable through the Building Automation

System.

F. Other accessories as indicated in the schedule.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mountingdevices securely fastened to building structure.

C. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports.

Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

D263605364


D. Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connectfittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.

E. Connect condensate drain tubing from integral condensate pump discharge totermination point indicated.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representativeto inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair

leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units

to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.04 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Director’s

Representative’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.

END OF SECTION

D263605 365


SECTION 238200

ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of terminal unit work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this

section.

B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:

1. Electric Unit Heaters.

C. Refer to other Sections for piping; ductwork; and testing, adjusting and balancing of terminal units;

not work of this section.

D. Refer to other Sections for the following work; not work of this section.

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on terminal unit. Include starters,

disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished or factory-

installed by manufacturer.

2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated terminal units; and between terminal units and

field-installed control devices.

a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.

E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section. Complying with requirements of other

Sections:

1. Control wiring, specified in other Sections, between field-installed controls, indicating devices,

and terminal unit control panels.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal units, of types

and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than

3 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33 “Methods of

Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils.”

2. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components for terminal units which have been listed and

labeled by UL.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications for terminal units showing dimensions,

capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gauges and finishes of materials, and installation

instruction.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details,

and field connection details.

D263605366


C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements for power supply wiring to terminal

units. Submit manufacturer’s ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly

differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

D. Samples: Submit 3 samples of each type of cabinet finish furnished.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions, filter

replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and

shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of equipment that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Electric Unit Heaters, Entire Unit Labor and Part Warranty Period: One (1) years from date of

Substantial Completion.


A. Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring.

Do not install damaged terminal units or components; replace with new.

B. Store terminal units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,

construction debris, and physical damage.

C. Comply with Manufacturer’s rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal units, and

moving them to final location.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT HEATERS

A. General: Provide unit heaters in locations as indicated and of capacities, style, and having accessories

as scheduled.

1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with epoxy coating

suitable for a corrosive environment. Design casing to enclose fan, motor, and coil, design fan

orifice formed into discharge panel. Provide casing access door with tool free access.

2. Fans: Construct of aluminum and factory-balance. Design so motor and fan assembly is

removable through fan outlet panel.

B. Heating Elements: Elements shall be high mass, all steel tubular finned type, copper brazed. Centrally

located and installed in fixed element banks.

C. Heater Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit

controls for over temperature protection of heaters, factory mounted.

D. Fan and Motor: Direct-drive propeller fan and manufacturer’s totally enclosed - industrial rated

motor. Motors shall be totally enclosed with overload protection.

E. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated by manufacturer.

D263605 367


F. Discharge Configuration: Vertical discharge with horizontal louver diffuser.

G. Optional Accessories: Include the following, suitable for a corrosive environment:

1. Timer switch.

2. Wall thermostat.

3. Safety-switch disconnect on cover of terminal box.

4. Factory mounted control transformer.

5. Fan-delay relay.

H. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering unit

heaters which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ruffneck.

2. Markel Products Co.

3. TPI Industries.

4. Trane Co.


3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not proceed with

work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF UNIT HEATERS

A. General: Install unit heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation

instructions.

B. Uncrate units and inspect for damage. Verify that nameplate data corresponds with unit designation.

C. Hang units from building substrate, not from piping. Mount as high as possible to maintain greatest

headroom possible unless otherwise indicated.

D. Support units with rod-type hangers anchored to building substrate.

E. Install piping as indicated.

F. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING

A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted.

Furnish copy of manufacturer’s wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer’s submittal and

installation requirements of other Sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until

wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces, vacuum

clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.

D263605368


B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials

furnished by manufacturer.

C. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same.

END OF SECTION

D263605 369


SECTION 238239

UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Catalog cuts, specifications, installation and maintenance

instructions for each type of heater specified.

B. Schedule: List manufacturer, unit type, model number, and performance data foreach unit heater.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Unit heaters shall be UL listed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PROPELLER TYPE UNIT HEATERS

A. Unit Casing: Constructed of steel sheet formed, reinforced, and braced for

rigidity, with steel louvers or deflectors with sufficient rigidity to preventvibration at all fan speeds.

1. Materials:

a. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, coating designation G90.

b. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, cleaned, degreased andphosphatized.

2. Factory Finish: Minimum 2 coat baked enamel finish on exposed

surfaces, color as directed.3. Horizontal Delivery Units: Adjustable horizontal and vertical louvers.

4. Vertical Delivery Units: Deflector mounted outside fan orifice.

a. Louvered deflector.

b. Radial louver deflector.c. Anemostat deflector.

B. Heating Coils: Mechanically bonded aluminum fins with seamless copper tubing

for hot water under 200 psig and steam under 75 psig; and red or admiralty brasstubing for hot water over 200 psig and steam over 75 psig; and factory tested at

300 psig air pressure under water.

C. Fan Assembly:

1. Fan: Multiple blade propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced,and directly connected to electric motor.

D263605370


2. Motor: Single phase, totally enclosed electric motor of the permanent

split capacitor or shaded pole type, with resilient mounting, terminal box

for wiring connections, built-in overload protection, and ball or sleevebearings with oilers, or permanently lubricated bearings.

D. Control: low voltagethermostat with DDC controls.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the Work of this section in accordance with the manufacturer’s printedinstallation instructions, unless otherwise specified.

END OF SECTION

D263605 371


SECTION 238316

HYDRONIC RADIANT FLOOR HEATING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Section 230923: Direct Digital Building Control System

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes radiant heating; including pipes, fittings, and piping

specialties.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene.

C. PEX/AL/PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene/aluminum/crosslinked polyethylene.

D. PERT: Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of radiant heating pipe, fitting, manifold, specialty,and control.

1. For radiant heating piping and manifolds, include pressure and

temperature rating, oxygen-barrier performance, fire-performance

characteristics, and water flow and pressure drop characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves,

manifolds, controls, and support assemblies, and their attachments to building

structure.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn toscale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other,

based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.2. Structural members to which radiant heating piping will be attached.

3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Air outlets and inlets.c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.4. Perimeter moldings.

D263605372


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For radiant heating piping valves and

equipment to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manu-

facturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but

are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:

1. FlorHeat Company (The).

2. HeatLink USA Inc.3. Infloor Radiant Heating Inc.

4. IPEX Inc.

5. Roth Radiant.6. Slant/Fin Corp.

7. Heatflex.

8. Uponor Wirsbo Co.

9. Vanguard Piping Systems, Inc.10. Warmboard, Inc.

11. Watts Radiant, Inc.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

12. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

C. Pipe Material: An oxygen barrier, polyethylene raised temperature (PE-RT)

tubing manufactured and tested according to the guidelines set forth in ASTM

F2623 and appropriate fittings. PE-RT may be joined using insert fittings and

clamps certified to ASTM F-877, F-1807, or F-2159. It may also be joined usingthermal fusion methods eliminating the need for mid-loop mechanical fittings.

PERT Polyethylene Copolymer Resin is an ethylene/octane-1 copolymer. It has a

unique molecular structure with a controlled side chain distribution, whichprovides a combination of excellent stress crack resistance and Long Term

Hydrostatic Strength properties. Oxygen Diffusion Standard shall conform with

DIN 4726. Chemical Tubing Resistance Chart shall conform with DIN 8075Standard.

D. Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig (690 kPa) and 180 deg F (82

deg C).

2.02 DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLDS

A. Manifold: Minimum NPS 1 (DN 25), stainless steel.

B. Main Shutoff Valves:

1. Factory installed on supply and return connections.

2. Two or Three-piece body.3. Body: Brass or bronze.

4. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.

D263605 373


5. Seals: PTFE.

6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).

C. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Key furnished with valve, or screwdriver bit.4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).

6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).

D. Balancing Valves:

1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type.

2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel.3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer.

4. Seat: PTFE.

5. Visual Flow Indicator: Flowmeter with visible indication in a clearplastic cap at top of valve.

6. Differential Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable

meter to measure loss across calibrated orifice.

7. Handle Style: Lever or knob, with memory stop to retain set position ifused for shutoff.

8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa).

9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

E. Zone Control Valves:

1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type.

2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel.

3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer.4. Seat: PTFE.

5. Actuator: Replaceable electric motor.

6. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa).7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

F. Thermometers:

1. Mount on supply and return connections.

2. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, [2-inch (50-mm)] <Insert value>diameter.

3. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.

4. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer.

5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etchedscale markings.

6. Pointer: Black metal.

7. Window: Plastic.8. Connector: Rigid, back type.

9. Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel,

aluminum, or brass stem.10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale

division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range.

D263605374


G. Mounting Brackets: Copper, or plastic or copper-clad steel, where in contact

with manifold.

2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Cable Ties:

1. Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon

cable ties.

2. Minimum Width: 1/8 inch (3 mm).3. Tensile Strength: 20 lb (9 kg), minimum.

4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85

deg C).

B. Floor-Mounting Staples:

1. Steel, with corrosion-resistant coating and smooth finish without sharp

edges.

2. Minimum Thickness: 3/32 inch (2.4 mm).3. Width: Minimum, wider than tubing.

C. Floor-Mounting Clamps:

1. Two bolt, steel, with corrosion-resistant coating and smooth finish

without sharp edges.2. Minimum Thickness: 3/32 inch (2.4 mm).

3. Width: Minimum, wider than tubing.

D. Floor Mounting Tracks:

1. Aluminum or plastic channel track with smooth finish, no sharp edges.2. Minimum Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

3. Slot Width: Snap fit to hold tubing.

4. Slot Spacing: [2-inch (50-mm)] [3-inch (75-mm)] intervals.

E. Channeled Subfloor:

1. Plywood, APA-rated subfloor panel, composed of premium, tongue-and-

groove, 7-layer, Douglas fir structural subfloor panels.

2. Particleboard manufactured to meet Federal Housing Authority standardsof less than 0.3-ppm formaldehyde.

3. Clad panel with minimum 0.025-inch- (0.635-mm-) thick aluminum

recessed in the grooves sized to maintain contact with radiant piping.

F. Modular Interlocking Blocks:

1. Polypropylene snap-together blocks with grooves to support piping.

2. Galvanized sheet metal or aluminum emission plates.

3. Natural mineralboard cover panel.

G. Heat-Emission Plates:

1. Formed aluminum suitable for radiant heating piping.

2. Minimum Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

3. Slot Width: Snap fit to maintain pressure fit on tubing.

D263605 375


2.04 CONTROLS

A. Temperature-control devices and sequence of operations are specified in

Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence ofOperations for HVAC Controls."

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:

1. Danfoss Inc.2. HeatLink USA Inc.

3. Honeywell.

4. Infloor Radiant Heating Inc.5. IPEX Inc.

6. Roth Radiant.

7. Slant/Fin Corp.

8. Heatflex.9. tekmar Control Systems, Ltd.

10. Uponor Wirsbo Co.

11. Vanguard Piping Systems, Inc.12. Watts Radiant, Inc.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

13. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

D. Wall-mount Temperature Sensor:

1. Automatic control with manual on, automatic, and standby/reset switch.2. Zone temperature sensors shall sense the space temperature and shall be

programmed to operate pump and zone control valves as follows:

a. Minimum temperature range from: 30 to 90 deg F.b. Start Pump or Open Zone Control Valves if room temperature

falls below the thermostat setting, and stop pumps or close zone

control valves when room temperature rises above the thermostat

setting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive radiant heating piping for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affectingperformance.

1. Ensure that surfaces and pipes in contact with radiant heating piping are

free of burrs and sharp protrusions.

2. Ensure that surfaces and substrates are level and plumb.3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

D263605376


3.02 APPLICATIONS

A. Install the following types of radiant heating piping for the applications

described:

1. Piping in Subfloors: PERT.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements ifsuch were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing,

and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on Shop or Coordination Drawings.

B. Install radiant heating piping continuous from the manifold through the heated

panel and back to the manifold without piping joints in heated panels.

C. Connect radiant piping to manifold in a reverse-return arrangement.

D. Do not bend pipes in radii smaller than manufacturer's minimum bend radiusdimensions.

E. Install manifolds in accessible locations, or install access panels to provide

maintenance access.

F. Refer to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for pipes and connections to

hydronic systems and for glycol-solution fill requirements.

G. Piping in Interior concrete floor:

1. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to reinforcementusing cable ties.

2. Space cable ties a maximum of 12 inches o.c., and at center of turns or

bends.3. Maintain 2-inch minimum cover.

4. Install a sleeve of 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick, foam-type insulation or PE

pipe around tubing and extending for a minimum of 10 inches on eachside of slab joints to protect the tubing passing through expansion or

control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints to provide

maximum clearance for saw cut.

5. Maintain minimum 40-psig (275-kPa) pressure in piping during concreteplacement and continue for 24 hours after placement.

H. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field

conditions and ensure integrity of piping and as approved by Architect.

I. After system balancing has been completed, mark balancing valves topermanently indicate final position.

J. Perform the following adjustments before operating the system:

1. Open valves to fully open position.2. Check operation of automatic valves.

D263605 377


3. Set temperature controls so all zones call for full flow.

4. Purge air from piping.

K. After the concrete or plaster heating panel has cured as recommended byconcrete or plaster supplier, operate radiant heating system as follows:

1. Start system heating at a maximum of 10 deg F (6 deg C) above the

ambient radiant panel temperature, and increase 10 deg F (6 deg C) each

following day until design temperature is achieved.2. For freeze protection, operate at a maximum of 60 deg F (16 deg C)

supply-water temperature.


A. Prepare radiant heating piping for testing as follows:

1. Open all isolation valves and close bypass valves.

2. Open and verify operation of zone control valves.

3. Flush with clean water, and clean strainers.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Subject

piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

design pressure but not more than 100 psig. Repair leaks and retest untilno leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning radiant heating piping components that do

not pass tests, and retest as specified above.

D. Prepare a written report of testing.

END OF SECTION

D263605378

3750 Per DQAB L05/07/09

Page 1 of 1

SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: This form was developed for repetitive use throughout all contract proposals and may identify items not applicable to this specific project.

D263605 379

ITEM 690.0100NN05 - SPECIALTY WORK (GENERAL) ITEM 690.0200NN05 - SPECIALTY WORK (PLUMBING AND GAS) ITEM 690.0300NN05 - SPECIALTY WORK (HVAC) ITEM 690.0400NN05 - SPECIALTY WORK (ELECTRICAL)

8/6/98 M 3/12/99

Page 1 of 2

DESCRIPTION: Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for the construction, reconstruction, repair, or demolition of the facilities described in the contract documents, complete in accordance with the specifications and in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. This item is intended to separate each area of specialty work into its own payment unit. All specialty work required is to be included under this item, unless the general work has been included in a larger prime contract, in which case the payment for the general work will be made in accordance with the provisions stated in the prime contract documents. MATERIALS: All materials shall meet the requirements specified in the contract documents. When materials substitutions are permitted, they shall be subject to review and approval by the Engineer and representatives of the owning and/or maintaining agency or agencies. BASIS OF ACCEPTANCE: Materials required to conform to established Department specifications shall be accepted in accordance with those specifications. Materials which do not fall into the above category shall be accepted based on the manufacturer’s certification that the material supplied meets the requirements stated in the contract documents. The contractor shall supply the Engineer with catalog cuts for products which require his approval a minimum of two weeks prior to the proposed installation date. All materials supplied shall bear the manufacturer’s identifying markings in order to positively identify products approved for use. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS: Construction details shall conform to the requirements specified in the contract documents, the manufacturer’s recommendations, and as ordered by the Engineer. Any Contractor performing work on the project will be required to coordinate his/her operations with those of other Contractors to ensure orderly and timely progression of the work.

D263605380

ITEM 690.0100NN05 - SPECIALTY WORK (GENERAL) ITEM 690.0200NN05 - SPECIALTY WORK (PLUMBING AND GAS) ITEM 690.0300NN05 - SPECIALTY WORK (HVAC) ITEM 690.0400NN05 - SPECIALTY WORK (ELECTRICAL)

8/6/98 M 3/12/99

Page 2 of 2

METHOD OF MEASUREMENT: Payment will be made on a lump sum basis. BASIS OF PAYMENT: The lump sum price bid shall include the cost of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to furnish, deliver, install, and prepare for placement into service, the facilities described in the contract documents. Progress payments will be made, in proportion to the total amount bid, for work completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall have the right to revise this amount at any time to reflect his judgment of the value of the work performed in relation to the total work required. Serialization shall be as described in the contract documents.

D263605 381

4000 Page 1 of 1 Per DQAB L05/07/09

PREVAILING WAGE RATES NOTE: This form was developed for repetitive use throughout all contract proposals and may identify items not applicable to this specific project.

D263605382

General Decision Number: NY170006 10/27/2017 NY6

Superseded General Decision Number: NY20160006

State: New York

Construction Types: Heavy and Highway

Counties: Clinton and Essex Counties in New York.

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes and apartments up to and including 4 stories), HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS

Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.20 for calendar year 2017 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.20 (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2017. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts.

Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2017 1 01/13/2017 2 02/03/2017 3 02/10/2017 4 03/03/2017 5 03/10/2017 6 03/17/2017 7 04/28/2017 8 06/09/2017 9 06/16/2017 10 07/07/2017 11 07/28/2017 12 08/18/2017 13 09/08/2017 14 09/22/2017 15 09/29/2017 16 10/20/2017 17 10/27/2017

* BRNY0002-013 06/01/2017

Rates Fringes

CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 36.06 18.96+a

FOOTNOTE:

a. PAID HOLIDAYS: Memorial Day, July the 4th, Labor Day, and Thanksgiving Day (provided the employee is employed (1) day before and (1) day after the holiday.

Page 1 of 11

11/30/2017https://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/ny6.dvb

D263605 383

---------------------------------------------------------------- CARP0291-006 07/01/2017

Rates Fringes

CARPENTER HEAVY & HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION Carpenter..................$ 30.78 20.35 Pile Driver................$ 30.78 20.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0910-001 04/01/2017

Rates Fringes

ELECTRICIAN......................$ 33.50 3%+19.98 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC1249-003 05/01/2017

Rates Fringes

ELECTRICIAN (LINE CONSTRUCTION: LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNAL Including any and all Fiber Optic Cable necessary for Traffic Signal Systems, Traffic Monitoring systems and Road Weather information systems) Flagman.....................$ 25.59 6.75%+22.65+a Groundman (Truck Driver)....$ 34.12 6.75%+22.65+a Groundman Truck Driver (tractor trailer unit)......$ 36.25 6.75%+22.65+a Lineman & Technician........$ 42.65 6.75%+22.65+a Mechanic....................$ 34.12 6.75%+22.65+a

FOOTNOTE:

a. New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, plus President's Day, Good Friday, Decoration Day, Election Day for the President of the United States and Election Day for the Governor of the State of New York, provided the employee works the day before or the day after the holiday.

---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC1249-004 05/01/2017

Rates Fringes

ELECTRICIAN (Line Construction) Overhead and underground distribution and maintenance work and all overhead and underground transmission line work including any and all fiber optic ground wire,

Page 2 of 11


D263605384

fiber optic shield wire or any other like product by any other name manufactured for the dual purpose of ground fault protection and fiber optic capabilities : Flagman....................$ 29.52 6.75%+22.65+a Groundman digging machine operator...................$ 44.28 6.75%+22.65+a Groundman truck driver (tractor trailer unit).....$ 41.82 6.75%+22.65+a Groundman Truck driver.....$ 39.36 6.75%+22.65+a Lineman and Technician.....$ 49.20 6.75%+22.65+a Mechanic...................$ 39.36 6.75%+22.65+a Substation: Cable Splicer..............$ 52.75 7.25%+21.75+a Flagman....................$ 28.77 7.25%+21.75+a Ground man truck driver....$ 38.36 7.25%+21.75+a Groundman digging machine operator...................$ 43.16 7.25%+21.75+a Groundman truck driver (tractor trailer unit).....$ 40.76 7.25%+21.75+a Lineman & Technician.......$ 47.95 7.25%+21.75+a Mechanic...................$ 38.36 7.25%+21.75+a Switching structures; railroad catenary installation and maintenance, third rail type underground fluid or gas filled transmission conduit and cable installations (including any and all fiber optic ground product by any other name manufactured for the dual purpose of ground fault protection and fiber optic capabilities), pipetype cable installation and maintenance jobs or projects, and maintenance bonding of rails; Pipetype cable installation Cable Splicer..............$ 54.20 7.25%+21.75+a Flagman....................$ 29.56 7.25%+21.75+a Groundman Digging Machine Operator...................$ 44.34 7.25%+21.75+a Groundman Truck Driver (tractor-trailer unit).....$ 41.88 7.25%+21.75+a Groundman Truck Driver.....$ 39.42 7.25%+21.75+a Lineman & Technician.......$ 49.27 7.25%+21.75+a Mechanic...................$ 39.42 7.25%+21.75+a

FOOTNOTE:

a. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, Presidents' Day, Memorial Day, Good Friday, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, and Election Day for the President of

Page 3 of 11


D263605 385

the United States and Election Day for the Governor of New York State, provided the employee works two days before or two days after the holiday.

---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC1249-008 01/01/2017

Rates Fringes

ELECTRICIAN (Line Construction) TELEPHONE, CATV FIBEROPTICS CABLE AND EQUIPMENT Cable splicer..............$ 30.90 3%+4.43 Groundman..................$ 15.56 3%+4.43 Installer Repairman- Teledata Lineman/Technician- Equipment Operator.........$ 29.33 3%+4.43 Tree Trimmer................$ 23.95 3%+9.98+a

a. New Year's Day, President's Day, Good Friday, Decoration Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, Day after Thanksgiving, Christmas Day.

---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0106-001 07/01/2017

HEAVY & HIGHWAY

Rates Fringes

Power equipment operators: GROUP 1.....................$ 42.18 25.15+a GROUP 2.....................$ 41.27 25.15+a GROUP 3.....................$ 38.70 25.15+a GROUP 4.....................$ 46.18 25.15+a GROUP 5.....................$ 45.18 25.15+a GROUP 6.....................$ 44.18 25.15+a GROUP 7.....................$ 43.79 25.15+a

POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR CLASSIFICATIONS (HEAVY & HIGHWAY):

GROUP 1: Asphalt Curb Machine, Self Propelled, Slipform, Automated Concrete Spreader (CMI Type), Automatic Fine Grader, Backhoe (Except Tractor Mounted, Rubber Tired), Backhoe Excavator Full Swing (CAT 212 or similar type), Back Filling Machine, Belt Placer (CMI Type), Blacktop Plant (Automated), Boom truck , Cableway, Caisson Auger, Central Mix Concrete Plant (Automated), Concrete Curb Machine, Self Propelled, Slipform, Concrete Pump, Crane, Cherry Picker, Derricks (steel erection), Dragline, Overhead Crane (Gantry or Straddle type), Pile Driver, Truck Crane, Directional Drilling Machine, Dredge, Dual Drum Paver, Excavator (All Purpose Hydraulically Operated) (Gradall or Similar), Front End Loader ( 4 cu. yd. and Over), Head Tower (Sauerman or Equal), Hoist (Two or Three Drum), Holland Loader, Maintenance Engineer, Mine Hoist, Mucking Machine or Mole Pavement Breaker(SP) Wertgen; PB-4

Page 4 of 11


D263605386

and similar type, Power Grader, Profiler (over 105 H.P.) Quad 9, Quarry Master (or equivalent), Scraper, Fireman, Form Tamper, Grout Pump, Gunite Machine, Hammers (Hydraulic self-propelled), Hydra-Spiker, ride-on, Hydraulic Pump (jacking system), Hydro-Blaster (Water), Mulching Machine, Oiler, Parapet Concrete or Pavement, Shovel, Side Boom, Slip Form Paver, Tractor Drawn, BeltType Loader, Truck or Trailer Mounted Log , Chipper (Self Feeder), Tug Operator (Manned Rented Equipment Excluded), Tunnel Shovel

GROUP 2: Asphalt Paver, Backhoe (Tractor Mounted, Rubber Tired), Bituminous Recycler Machine, Bituminous Spreader and Mixer, Blacktop Plant (NonAutomated), Blast or Rotary Drill (Truck or Tractor Mounted), Boring Machine, Cage Hoist, Central Mix Plant (NonAutomated) and All Concrete Batching Plants, Cherry Picker (5 tons capacity and under), Concrete Paver (Over 16S), Crawler Drill, Self-contained, Crusher, Diesel Power Unit, Drill Rigs, Tractor Mounted, Front End Loader (Under 4 cu. yd.), Greaseman/Lubrication Engineer, HiPressure Boiler (15 lbs. and over), Hoist (One Drum), Hydro-Axe, Kolman Plant Loader and Similar Type Loaders, L.C.M. Work Boat Operator, Locomotive Mixer (for stabilized base selfpropelled), Monorail Machine, Plant Engineer, Profiler (105 H.P. and under), Grinder, Post Hole Digger and Post Driver, Power Broom (towed), Power Heaterman, Power Sweeper, Revinius Widener, Roller (Grade and Fill), Scarifier, ride-on, Shell Winder, Skid steer loader (Bobcat or similar), Span-Saw, ride-on, Steam Cleaner, Pug Mill, Pump Crete Ready Mix Concrete Plant Refrigeration Equipment (for soil stabilization)Road Widener, Roller (all above subgrade), Sea Mule, Self-contained Ride-on Rock Drill, Excluding Air-Track Type Drill, Skidder, Tractor with Dozer and/or Pusher, Trencher. Tugger Hoist, Vermeer saw (ride on, any size or type), Winch, Winch Cat

GROUP 3: A Frame Winch Hoist on Truck , Articulated Heavy Hauler, Aggregate Plant, Asphalt or Concrete Grooving, Machine (ride on), Ballast Regulator, Ride-on Boiler (used in conjunction with production), Bituminous Heater, self-propelled, Boat (powered), Cement and Bin Operator, Compressors, Dust Collectors, Fork Lift, Generators, Pumps, Welding Machines, Light Plants, Heaters (hands-off equipment), Concrete Pavement Spreader and Finisher, Concrete Paver or Mixer (16S and under), Concrete Saw (self-propelled), Conveyor, Deck Hand, Directional Drill Machine Locator, Drill, (Core), Drill, (Well,) Farm Tractor with accessories, Fine Grade Machine, Tamper, ride-on, Tie Extractor, ride-on, Tie Handler, ride-on, Tie Inserter, ride-on, Tie Spacer, ride-on, Tire Repair, Track Liner, ride-on, Tractor, Tractor (with towed accessories), Vibratory Compactor, Vibro Tamp, Well Point

GROUP 4: Tower Cranes

GROUP 5: Cranes 50 tons and over

GROUP 6: Cranes 49 tons and below

GROUP 7: Master Mechanic

Page 5 of 11


D263605 387

FOOTNOTE:

a. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day

---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0012-002 05/01/2017

Rates Fringes

Ironworkers: SHEETER.....................$ 30.75 23.84 STRUCTURAL, ORNAMENTAL, MACHINERY MOVER & RIGGERS, FENCE ERECTOR, REINFORCING, STONE DERRICKMAN, WELDER..........$ 30.50 23.84 ---------------------------------------------------------------- LABO1822-001 07/01/2017

HEAVY & HIGHWAY

Rates Fringes

Laborers: GROUP 1.....................$ 25.17 22.65+a GROUP 2.....................$ 24.97 22.65+a GROUP 3.....................$ 25.37 22.65+a GROUP 4.....................$ 25.57 22.65+a GROUP 5.....................$ 27.17 22.65+a

LABORERS CLASSIFICATIONS (HEAVY & HIGHWAY)

GROUP 1. Basic Rate, Flagman Outboard and Hand Boats.

GROUP 2. Bull Float, Chain Saw, Concrete Aggregate Bin, Concrete Bootman, Gin Buggy, Hand or Machine Vibrator, Jack Hammer, Mason Tender, Mortar Mixer Paverment Breaker, Handlers of all Steel Mesh, Small Generators of Laborers' tools, installation of bridge drainage pipe, Pipe Layers, Vibrator type rollers, tamper, Drill doctor, tail or screw operator on asphalt paver, water pump operator (1 1/2" and single diaphragm) nozzle (asphalt, gunite, seeding and sand blasting), Laborers on chain link fence erection, Rock splitter and power unit, pusher type concrete saw and all other gas, electric, oil and air tool operators, Wrecking Labor.

GROUP 3. All rock or drilling machine operators (except quarry master and similar type) Acetylene Torch operator, asphalt raker, powderman.

GROUP 4. Blaster, form setters, stone or granite curb setters.

GROUP 5. Hazardous Waste, Asbestos Abatement and Removal.

FOOTNOTE: a. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence

Page 6 of 11


D263605388

Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day.

---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0201-002 05/01/2017

Rates Fringes

Painters: Zone #2 All of ESSEX COUNTY Lead Abatement Workers, Structural Steel...........$ 30.00 13.89 Painters, Drywall Finishers, Spray...........$ 29.00 13.89 Zone #3 All of CLINTON COUNTY Lead Abtatement Workers, Structural Steel...........$ 28.14 14.55 Painters, Drywall Finishers, Spray...........$ 27.14 14.55 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0806-003 10/01/2017

CLINTON AND ESSEX COUNTIES

Rates Fringes

Painters: Structural Steel and Bridge.$ 49.50 38.93 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0773-001 05/01/2017

Rates Fringes

Plumber and Steamfitter CLINTON COUNTY..............$ 36.35 28.83 ESSEX COUNTY................$ 37.35 28.83 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0083-001 06/01/2017

Rates Fringes

Sheet metal worker...............$ 32.32 30.98+a

FOOTNOTE: a. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day. If any of these holidays fall on a Saturday or Sunday, either the preceding Friday or following Monday will be observed as the holiday.

---------------------------------------------------------------- TEAM0687-003 06/01/2016

Rates Fringes

Truck drivers: HEAVY & HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION GROUP 1:...................$ 23.58 21.51+a GROUP 2:...................$ 23.84 21.51+a

Page 7 of 11


D263605 389

FOOTNOTE:

a. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, provided the employee has worked the day before and the day after the holiday.

TRUCK DRIVER CLASSIFICATIONS

GROUP 1: Pick-ups, panel trucks, flatboy materials trucks (straight jobs), single axle dump trucks, dumpsters and receivers, greasers, truck tireman, parts chaser, tandems and batch trucks, mechanics, semi trailer, lowboy trucks, asphalt distributor trucks and agitator, mixer trucks and dumpcrete type vehicles, truck mechanic, fuel truck and bus

GROUP 2: Specialized earth moving equipment - euclid type or similar off-highway equipment, where not self-loaded, straddle (ross) carrier, self-contained concrete unit, off highway tandem back dump, twin engine equipment and double hitched equipment where not self loaded

----------------------------------------------------------------

WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental.

================================================================

Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts.

Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).

----------------------------------------------------------------

The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage

Page 8 of 11


D263605390

determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate).

Union Rate Identifiers

A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014.

Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate.

Survey Rate Identifiers

Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier.

Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted.

Union Average Rate Identifiers

Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier.

A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current

Page 9 of 11


D263605 391

negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based.

----------------------------------------------------------------

WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS

1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be:

* an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling

On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed.

With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:

Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:

Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.

3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:

Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

Page 10 of 11


D263605392

STATE PREVAILING WAGE RATES

4025 Page 1 of 1 EB 06-035 L 01/06/11 9/15/11

The New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) has issued a project-specific prevailing wage rate schedule for this Contract. The New York State Labor Law requires the Contractor and all subcontractors to ensure that all workers employed in the performance of a public work contract are paid not less than the prevailing wage rate and supplemental (fringe) benefits in the locality where the work is performed. The project-specific prevailing wage rate schedule, together with all updates and amendments, is incorporated by reference in this Contract, and made a part hereof, as though fully set forth herein. The schedule may be accessed by visiting the NYSDOL website, navigating to the appropriate web page for prevailing wages, and entering the Prevailing Rate Case Number (PRC#). The PRC# is found on NYSDOL Form PW-200, the following page in this Contract Proposal. The project-specific prevailing wage rate schedule and all wage rate amendments are annexed electronically through the following link:

www.labor.ny.gov It is the obligation of the Contractor and all subcontractors to obtain all updated prevailing wage rate schedules and to pay all workers in accordance with the periodic wage rate schedule updates issued by the NYSDOL. Any changes or clarifications of labor classifications, and information on the applicability of particular prevailing wage rates, must be obtained from the Office of the Director of the Bureau of Public Work at the New York State Department of Labor.

D263605 393

�� !""�#�� !$�% &�'(��)"�*��$�#+�,�+��"�� #��)"�*��$�#+��'!"$- !))$�.�#� �('"��)"'/��"�(�"�#��0'*�1��!#�2!��3"�*��$�#+�4�+��5� ��6!.0�"%3758&�� 0��#�� +#��'�� !$�% &�('"�-'!"�)"'/��1�9�� !$�� ((��*��("'.�:!$-�;<=>��"'!+��:!#��;<=?1��$$�!)�� @��'""��'# @�)' ��'#��= ��0! �#� ��-�'(��.'#��@��#��(!�!"��')�� '(��##!�$��".�#��'#��"��*��$�0$��'#��A�)�"�.�#�B �,�0 ��,,,1$�0'"1 ��1#-1! 1��C)��3AD��')�� '(-'!"� ��!$��#�0�� 0-��#��"�#+�-'!"�� +#��3758��)"')�"�$'��'#�'#��,�0 ��1�E�� "� )'# �0�$��-�'(��'#�"��#+��+�#�-�'"�� +�#��'��##�F��#��.�G��)�"�@�� !$�@��'�� )��(��'# �('"�� )"'/��@�,��#�� *�"�� ('"�0�� #��H'"�'�('",�"�� !$� ��'�� !�� (!$�0��"% &@��..��$-�!)'#�"��)�@��#�'"��"��'�# !"��)"')�"�)�-.�#��'(�,�+� 1�3$�� "�(�"��'��IJ�#�"�$�3"'*� �'# �'(�K�, �5'*�"�#+�4'"G�" �'#�3!0$��4'"G5'#�"�� I�)"'*��,�� !$�@�('"�� )��(��$ �"�$��#+��'�'��""� )'# �0�$�� '(��A�)�"�.�#��'(�:!"� ��'#1�C)'#��'.)$��'#�'"��#��$$��'#�'(�� )"'/��@��#��"��"�2!�"��#('".��'#��#��.��$��(�F�� ('".��'��'((�� ',#��0'��'.�'(�� #'��@��(�$$�'!��$��"'#��*�" �'#�*��6LMANK�,�0 ��1� �� O��P� � �� A��5'.)$��Q A��5�#��$$��Q�6�.��R�9��$��'(�7�)"� �#��*�Q�� 3�'#�Q�%S=?&�TS>USS?V��D�FQ��%S=?&�T?SU=?><��41��*�"�$$�W�""�.�#�M��N((��5�.)! @�X$�+1�=;@�7''.�=Y<@��$0�#-@�6L�=;;T<��,,,1$�0'"1 ��1#-1! 1�� 34�;<< ��34� GZ$�0'"1 ��1#-1!

[\]_ �ab�cdefeg�hei_\e jek_lm�j_m]e\g�ceffnoone\_pqrstu�[jvwps��r[xh[ag�sy[z�{r|}�~pwupqrstu{ts��tx��jt[s[xz[pq��pq�� r��_]d�_�q_m ��l�ed��sml_�j_�d_ol_] ��{jc� ��xe�mlne\ cxwputp{e�_�l�ws� s��{e�_�l�u��_ �v[c�ctpuj[cu�{jt�}cu�uwux}��pqrstu�w�pqr�{txwc}�ctaa}jcw[x�v}�wcx}�wpr{}cuwtp�|�wh��[q�r[�}uq�t{}j[uwtpr��[cwxwuq�wpu}jru[u}��bwbrb�b��g�wpu}jru[u}�jt~u}��g�r}cuwtp��s��pqr�jt~u}r��[

D263605394

�� !"#�� $�#�%&'#�(�)&!*'+�$"#,�+"-.# +."#(� -/�(&!+"-.# +."#(�."�) 0�* !"#�#(1�$"#,�#(1�"#�2�+� -'+(��2)*"0�/�'-.��)�#3"#2 -+��"3� �)&!*'+�$"#,�+"-.# +.�-".�*�((�.� -�.��)#�4 '*'-5�# .��"3�$ 5�� -/�(&))*�2�-.(�63#'-5��!�-�3'.(7�'-�.��*"+ *'.0�$��#��.��$"#,�'(�)�#3"#2�/8�9��:�� ;��<�:��=�� >��?�@�) #.2�-.�"3�A&#'(/'+.'"-�6B"-.# +.'-5�?5�-+07�'-+*&/�(� �(. .��/�) #.2�-.1� 5�-+01�!" #/�"#�+"22'(('"-C� �+"&-.01+'.01�."$-�"#�4'** 5�D� �(+�""*�/'(.#'+.1�!" #/�"3��/&+ .'"-�"#�!" #/�"3�+"")�# .'4��/&+ .'"- *�(�#4'+�(D� �(�$�#1�$ .�#1�3'#�1'2)#"4�2�-.� -/�".��#�/'(.#'+.�+"#)"# .'"-D� �)&!*'+�!�-�3'.�+"#)"# .'"-D� -/� �)&!*'+� &.�"#'.0� $ #/'-5� �)&!*'+�$"#,+"-.# +.8��@�) #.2�-.�"3�A&#'(/'+.'"-�6B"-.# +.'-5�?5�-+07� $ #/'-5� �)&!*'+�$"#,�+"-.# +.�EFG��"!. '-� �H#�4 '*'-5�I .�G+��/&*��*'(.'-5�.��"&#*0�# .�(�"3�$ 5�(� -/�(&))*�2�-.(�/&��.��$"#,�#(�."�!��2)*"0�/�"-� �)&!*'+�$"#,�)#"J�+.8��'(�(+��/&*��2 0�!��"!. '-�/�!0�+"2)*�.'-5� -/�3"#$ #/'-5� �KI�%&�(.�3"#�$ 5�� -/�G&))*�2�-.�L-3"#2 .'"-K�3"#2�6HMNO7�."�.��P&#� &�"3�H&!*'+�M"#,8��H#�4 '*'-5�I .��G+��/&*��EFG��!��'-+*&/�/�'-�.��()�+'3'+ .'"-(�3"#�.��+"-.# +.�."!�� $ #/�/� -/�'(�/��2�/�) #.�"3�.��)&!*'+�$"#,�+"-.# +.8�F)"-�.�� $ #/'-5�"3�.��+"-.# +.1�.��* $�#�%&'#�(�.� .�.��@�) #.2�-.�"3�A&#'(/'+.'"-�6B"-.# +.'-5�?5�-+07�3&#-'(��.��3"**"$'-5�'-3"#2 .'"-�."�.��P&#� &C��.��- 2�� -/� //#�((�"3�.��+"-.# +."#1�.��/ .��.��+"-.# +.�$ (�*�.� -/�.�� ))#"Q'2 .��/"** #�4 *&��"3�.��+"-.# +.8��"�3 +'*'. .��+"2)*' -+��$'.��.�'(�)#"4'('"-�"3�.�� !"#�� $1� �+")0�"3�.��@�) #.2�-.R(�KS".'+��"3�B"-.# +.�?$ #/K�3"#2�6HM�TU7�'(�)#"4'/�/�$'.��.��"#'5'- *�H#�4 '*'-5�I .��G+��/&*�8��@�) #.2�-.�"3�A&#'(/'+.'"-�6B"-.# +.'-5�?5�-+07�'(�#�%&'#�/�."�-".'30�.��P&#� &�"3�.��+"2)*�.'"-�"#�+ -+�** .'"-�"3 -0�)&!*'+�$"#,�)#"J�+.8��@�) #.2�-.R(�HM�VWW�3"#2�'(�)#"4'/�/�3"#�.� .�)&#)"(�8�P".��.��HM�TU� -/��HM�VWW�3"#2(� #�� 4 '* !*��3"#�+"2)*�.'"-�"-*'-�8��X��S"�* !"#�#1�$"#,�#1�"#�2�+� -'+�'-�.��2)*"0�"3� �+"-.# +."#�"#�(&!+"-.# +."#��-5 5�/�'-�.��)�#3"#2 -+��"3� -0�)&!*'+$"#,�)#"J�+.�(� **�!��)�#2'..�/�."�$"#,�2"#��.� -��'5�.��"&#(�'-� -0�/ 0�"#�2"#��.� -�3'4��/ 0(�'-� -0�$��,1��Q+�).�'-+ (�(�"3��Q.# "#/'- #0��2�#5�-+08��+"-.# +."#� -/�.��@�) #.2�-.�"3�A&#'(/'+.'"-�6B"-.# +.'-5�?5�-+07�2 0� ))*0�.".��P&#� &�"3�H&!*'+�M"#,�3"#� �/'()�-( .'"-�)�#2'..'-5�$"#,�#(�."�$"#,� //'.'"- *��"&#(�"#�/ 0(�)�#�$��,�"-� �) #.'+&* #)&!*'+�$"#,�)#"J�+.8��#�� #��4�#0�3�$��Q+�).'"-(�."�.�'(�#&*�8��B"2)*�.��'-3"#2 .'"-�#�5 #/'-5�.��(��Q+�).'"-(�'( 4 '* !*��"-�.��KY�@ 0�Z�TW�["&#�M"#,�G+��/&*�K�3"#2�6HM�NW8T78��\�::��=��$ 5�(� -/�(&))*�2�-.(�."�!��) '/� -/Z"#�)#"4'/�/�."�* !"#�#(1�$"#,�#(1� -/�2�+� -'+(��2)*"0�/�"-� �)&!*'+�$"#,)#"J�+.�(� **�!��-".�*�((�.� -�.�"(��*'(.�/�'-�.��+&##�-.�H#�4 '*'-5�I .��G+��/&*��3"#�.��*"+ *'.0�$��#��.��$"#,�'()�#3"#2�/8��L3� �)#'2��+"-.# +."#�"-� �)&!*'+�$"#,�)#"J�+.�� (�-".�!��-�)#"4'/�/�$'.�� H#�4 '*'-5�I .��G+��/&*�1�.��+"-.# +."#�2&(.�-".'30�.��@�) #.2�-.�"3�A&#'(/'+.'"-�6B"-.# +.'-5�?5�-+07�$�"�'-�.&#-�2&(.�#�%&�(.� -�"#'5'- *�H#�4 '*'-5I .��G+��/&*��3"#2�.��P&#� &�"3�H&!*'+�M"#,8��I�%&�(.(�2 0�!��(&!2'..�/�!0C�2 '*�."�S]G@ �1�P&#� &�"3�H&!*'+�M"#,1G. .��33'+��P*/58�B 2)&(1�P*/58�TV1�I28�TNW1�?*! -01�S]�TVVYWD�_ Q�."�P&#� &�"3�H&!*'+�M"#,�6Ta7�YabTacWD�"#�*�+.#"-'+ **0� .�.��S]G@ ��$�!('.��$$$8* !"#8(. .�8-08&(8�F)"-�#�+�'4'-5�.��"#'5'- *�(+��/&*�1�.��@�) #.2�-.�"3�A&#'(/'+.'"-�6B"-.# +.'-5�?5�-+07�'(�IdeFLId@�."�)#"4'/�+"2)*�.��+")'�(�."� **�)#'2��+"-.# +."#(�$�"�'-�.&#-�EFG�1�!0�* $1�)#"4'/��+")'�(�"3� **� ))*'+ !*��+"&-.0�(+��/&*�(�."� +��(&!+"-.# +."#� -/�"!. '-�3#"2�� +��(&!+"-.# +."#1� -� 33'/ 4'.�+�#.'30'-5�(&+��(+��/&*�(�$�#��#�+�'4�/8�L3�.��"#'5'- *(+��/&*��Q)'#�/1�.��+"-.# +."#�2 0�"!. '-� �+")0�"3�.��-�$� --& *�/�.�#2'- .'"-�3#"2�.��S]G@ ��$�!('.�$$$8* !"#8(. .�8-08&(8��B"22'(('"-�#�"3�� !"#�2 ,�(� -� --& *�/�.�#2'- .'"-�"3�.��)#�4 '*'-5�# .�(8��'(�/�.�#2'- .'"-�'(�'-��33�+.�3#"2A&*0�T(.�.�#"&5��A&-��NW.��"3�.��3"**"$'-5�0� #8�� --& *�/�.�#2'- .'"-�'(� 4 '* !*��"-�.��S]G@ ��$�!('.�$$$8* !"#8(. .�8-08&(8��f��f��9��d4�#0�+"-.# +."#� -/�(&!+"-.# +."#�EFG��,��)�"#'5'- *�) 0#"**(�"#�.# -(+#').(�(&!(+#'!�/� -/� 33'#2�/� (�.#&��&-/�#)�- *.0�"3�)�#J&#08��H 0#"**(�2&(.�!��2 '-. '-�/�3"#� .�*� (.�_'4��67�0� #(�3#"2�.��)#"J�+.R(�/ .��"3�+"2)*�.'"-8�G��G)". P'**�S".'+�8��?.� �2'-'2&21�) 0#"**(�2&(.�(�"$�.��3"**"$'-5�'-3"#2 .'"-�3"#�� +��)�#("-��2)*"0�/�"-� �)&!*'+�$"#,)#"J�+.C�S 2�1�?//#�((1�� (.�Y�@'5'.(�"3�G"+' *�G�+&#'.0�S&2!�#1�B* (('3'+ .'"-6(7�'-�$�'+��.��$"#,�#�$ (��2)*"0�/1["&#*0�$ 5��# .�6(7�) '/1�G&))*�2�-.(�) '/�"#�)#"4'/�/1� -/�@ '*0� -/�$��,*0�-&2!�#�"3��"&#(�$"#,�/�'-�� +�+* (('3'+ .'"-8�

D263605 395

�� !"�� !"�� #�� $��%�� &�� '"�� &�� (�� (��)� �� (�� (�� *��&�� '"�� +,-��.��/'""�"""�""��$��0� �1�(2��.��/+,�"""�""�� (��#�� (�� )��3��2�� (�� &�� 4��2��++"5��%��%� �� (��#�� &�� )��3��2�� 2��012�%��%� ��4��2��++"5��67879:;<=8;><�>?�@97A=;B;<C�D=C7�=<E�FGHHB7:7<8�I=87�JHE=87K�LHHB;M=NB7�8>�LBB�O>G<8;7K�� '�� (�� P�� $�� (��$��&��#�� 012�Q% �� '��R�� .�� '��!"�� 3��.�� Q0%1�� '��!"��D;8SS>BE;<C�>?�@=T:7<8K�R�� %�� %�� (�� R��U��)��R�(�� (��#�� &�� U��V�� 2��++"5��+!,�+��%��%� �� (��2��WX2�� U�� %�� %�� %�� %�� FG::=9T�>?�Y>8;M7�@>K8;<C�I7ZG;97:7<8K��)��3��2�� (��#�� [)3�\�$%$0]�3��Q*�R�]�2[�� +�� +��[)��R�(�)�#��[�� (��#��

D263605396

�� !�� "��#�� $�� $�� $� �� %�� !�� "�� & �� ' �� #�� %�� #��())*+,-./+0�� #��1�� %�� #�� 2�� "�� 3 �� $�� 4�� %5#�#��#��$�3��6$� �� 7789:$��;�� %�� #�� <�� 3�� 2�� $�� %5#�5��%�� =�3�� 1�� $� ��5��$��>7$�3�� $��>77?8��<�@�� %5#�3�� 1�� AB>6C�?BD9D>B?��3��;�� ;��1�� %5#�3�� 1�� 3�� <�� 3�� 1�� 3�� '�� @�� <��$��@�� $�� $�� E,-+*+0-�F,G�H+,FI-.+0�' �� =�� J�9' �� >?9�� #��$�� 93��2� ��$� ��@��7BK��$�� $�� L+MF*N+,-�3 �� =�� $�� ABC�� J�91��A7C�� =�� @�AOC��91�� P*.N.,FI�QF,/-.R,0�� 2�� #��A3��6��#��#��C�� >B��$��L.0/*.N.,F-.R,�� $��$��$��$� �� $��@$�� $�� $�� $��$��$��$��@�� S� �� ;�� A�� #��#��$�3��6$� �� 7789�A�CC�� $�� $� �� $�� $�� $��$��$��$��@$�� A�� #��#��$�3��6$� �� 7789�A�C�C�

D263605 397

�� !"#��$� ��%��#�� &&�'� �(�(�� # � �� $�� )�� '�� !"#��$� ��%��#�� &&�'� �(�(��*��+�� !��"��,�# � �� # � ��-�� ./012034�5/672839:;/8�<�� #�� =>&�� # � ��?�� )�� !��"��,�# � ��@��,��A�B�� $�� ,�� ,��A�� ,�� C�� ,��A�� !��"��,# � ��D�� B'=��&� B�� @��,��A�B�� <��(�� <��!��"��,�# � �� E�� '��'� � �� C�� ,��A�� F$�� ,�� ,��A�� ,��!��"��,�# � ��*��,��A�� @��,��A�B�� G�� +�� H8267I/J628:�K83L098M2�*�� N�� <�� +�� !��"��,�# � ��-��

D263605398

�� !"��#��$%��!&'(!)�#!*+,-,./01234,0.,-5106,787403--,-490:,.4+8,.481518434,0.0/5314,;:<3118=:,1828.4-/0183;+;<3--,/,;34,0.0/>01?81;0.43,.87,.4+83443;+87@;+87:<80/A1863,<,.BC348-DE#�FF��'��G4,-4+87:490/4+8H022,--,0.810/I3J014023?84+8510581;<3--,/,;34,0.0/>01?81-43?,.B,.403;;0:.4>+84+814+8>01?,-+83693.7+,B+>39KJ:,<7,.BK-8>813.7>3481K4:..8<>01?K0118-,78.4,3<K3.74023?83784812,.34,0.0/>3B8-3.7-:55<828.4-40J853,7015106,787DG4,-4+818-50.-,J,<,490/4+85:J<,;>01?;0.413;40140:-84+85105811348DG/4+818,-3=:8-4,0.0.4+8510581;<3--,/,;34,0.40J8:-87K5<83-8;3<<4+87,-41,;40//,;8<0;3487.8318-44+8510L8;4DM,-41,;40//,;8<0;34,0.-3.75+0.8.:2J81-318<,-487J8<0>DA1863,<,.BN3B8@;+87:<8-318,--:87-8531348<9/01OP8.813<H0.-41:;4,0.A10L8;4-O3.7OC8-,78.4,3<H0.-41:;4,0.A10L8;4-O0.3;0:.49QJ9Q;0:.49J3-,-DP8.813<H0.-41:;4,0.C348-355<940510L8;4--:;+3-RS:,<7,.B-KT8369UT,B+>39K3.7*:..8<3.7N3481U@8>811348-DC8-,78.4,3<H0.-41:;4,0.C348-B8.813<<9355<940;0.-41:;4,0.K18;0.-41:;4,0.K1853,1K3<48134,0.K017820<,4,0.0/0.8/32,<9K4>0/32,<9K10>+0:-,.BK0118.43<4958:.,4-,.48.787/0118-,78.4,3<:-8D@0281348-<,-487,.4+8C8-,78.4,3<H0.-41:;4,0.C348@;+87:<8+36836819<,2,487355<,;3J,<,49<,-4873<0.B>,4+4+81348DC348-/010;;:534,0.-01<0;34,0.-.04-+0>.0.4+818-,78.4,3<-;+87:<82:-4J80J43,.87/1024+8P8.813<H0.-41:;4,0.C348@;+87:<8DA<83-8;0.43;44+8<0;3<S:183:0/A:J<,;N01?0//,;8J8/018:-,.BC8-,78.4,3<C348@;+87:<8-K408.-:184+344+8510L8;42884-4+818=:,187;1,481,3D ��)V�#�)�WFA3,7T0<,739-318739-/01>+,;+3.8<,B,J<8825<098818;8,68-318B:<31739X-539KJ:4,-.0418=:,18740581/012>01?DG/3.825<0988>01?-0.3739<,-4873-353,7+0<,739K4+,-182:.8134,0.,-,.377,4,0.4053928.40/4+818=:,18751863,<,.B1348/014+8>01?3;4:3<<9581/01287DY"!��!Z432,.,2:2K3<<>01?581/012870.35:J<,;>01?510L8;4,.8[;8--0/8,B+4+0:1-,.3.90.87390120184+3./,68739-,.3.9>01?>88?,-06814,28DT0>8681K4+8-58;,/,;06814,2818=:,1828.4-/0183;+41378010;;:534,0.0.35:J<,;>01?510L8;42397,//81D@58;,/,;06814,2818=:,1828.4-/0183;+41378010;;:534,0.318;0.43,.87,.4+851863,<,.B1348-;+87:<8-D\6814,28+0<,739539,-4+85182,:25394+34,-18=:,187/01>01?581/012870.-58;,/,87+0<,739-DG4,-0.<918=:,187>+8184+8825<09883;4:3<<9581/012->01?0.-:;++0<,739-D*+8355<,;3J<8+0<,739-318<,-487:.781T\IGMZ]@R\ _C*G_D*+818=:,18713480/539/014+8-8;068187+0<,739-;3.J8/0:.7,.4+8\ _C*G_AZ]-8;4,0.<,-4,.B-/0183;+;<3--,/,;34,0.D&�aa#!�!��#b!�!��FA314,;:<313448.4,0.-+0:<7J8B,68.404+8-:55<828.43<J8.8/,418=:,1828.4-DG.20-4;3-8-4+853928.4015106,-,0.0/-:55<828.4-,-/0183;++0:1>01?87c.0487,.4+8-;+87:<83-XA81+0:1>01?87XdD@028;<3--,/,;34,0.-18=:,184+853928.4015106,-,0.0/-:55<828.4-/0183;++0:153,7c.0487,.4+8-;+87:<83-XA81+0:153,7XdK>+,;+18=:,18-:55<828.4-40J853,7015106,7873435182,:21348/015182,:2+0:1->01?87D@028;<3--,/,;34,0.-2393<-018=:,184+853928.4015106,-,0.0/-:55<828.4-/0153,7+0<,739-0.>+,;+.0>01?,-581/01287De��!'��"!f��!FN+8.90:186,8>4+8-;+87:<8/0135314,;:<310;;:534,0.K90:13448.4,0.-+0:<7J87,18;487404+87348-3J0684+8;0<:2.0/1348-D*+8-83184+87348-/01>+,;+3B,68.-840/1348-,-8//8;4,68D*+81348<,-487,-63<,7:.4,<4+8.8[48//8;4,681348;+3.B801:.4,<4+8.8>3..:3<784812,.34,0.>+,;+43?8-8//8;40.g:<9h0/83;+9831DZ<<;0.413;401-3.7-:J;0.413;401-31818=:,187405394+8;:118.451863,<,.B1348-0/>3B8-3.7-:55<828.4-DG/90:+3683.9=:8-4,0.-5<83-8;0.43;44+8S:183:0/A:J<,;N01?016,-,44+8i8>][email protected]/I3J01>8J-,48c>>>D<3J01D-4348D.9D:-d/01;:118.4>3B81348,./01234,0.D�aa�!��'!j��$%��F*+8/0<<0>,.B3184+83<<0>3J<8134,0-0/18B,-48187Z5518.4,;8-40g0:1.89Q>01?81-Dk018[325<8K4+8134,0hRhKhRl,.7,;348-4+83<<0>3J<8,.,4,3<134,0,-0.8Z5518.4,;8400.8g0:1.89>01?81D*+8g0:1.89>01?812:-4J8,.5<3;80.4+8510L8;4J8/0183.Z5518.4,;8,-3<<0>87D*+8.4+188377,4,0.3<g0:1.89>01?81-318.88787J8/0183-8;0.7Z5518.4,;8,-3<<0>87D*+8<3-4134,0185834-,.78/,.,48<9D*+818/018K4+1882018g0:1.89>01?81-2:-4J8518-8.4J8/01834+,17Z5518.4,;8;3.J8+,187K3.7-00.DA<83-8;3<<Z5518.4,;8*13,.,.BH8.413<\//,;834cmhndompQqnrs,/90:+3683.9=:8-4,0.-D *,4<8c*1378d C34,0S0,<8123?81cH0.-41:;4,0.d hRhKhRoS0,<8123?81c@+05d hRhKhRlH3158.481cS<7BDKTUTKA,<8M1,681tM0;?J:,<781d hRhKhRoH3158.481cC8-,78.4,3<d hRhKhRlA3B8ls

A1863,<,.BN3B8C348-/01sptshtrshpQsqtlstrshn A:J<,-+87J94+8i8>][email protected]/I3J01I3-4A:J<,-+870.i06shrshp ACHi:2J81rshpshrrlrD263605 399

�� ! "� �� #��$�� #��$�� %��"�� %��&��'(� ��%�)��'�� *+�� +��"��,��-�� .��-�� ,(��#��$�� ,)��$��/�� -0��(��01�� '�(��(�� (��&��$��-��)�� (�� 23.�!3�-+32��#�.45� ��--��&��6�&7��$,��5�)��-��"��2��-+�"��#��$,��--��)� �2��'8��!�"��0�67��%95� ��--�� :��)(��; /!<;2��-+�"��#��$=!�"��0 *�>=%*?=�?%% *�>=%>*=9�%92��-+�"��#��$=2��'(�� @9?=?��=>99* @9?=?��=>99%2��-+�"��#��$=2�--�� ?�@=>%?=?�*A ?�@=>%?=?@*92��-+�"��#��$= ��0 *�@=��>=�A�* *�@=?A%=�*�>2��-+�"��#��$=6�&"��'( >%*=*@>=*�>? >%*=*@>=*��2��-+�"��#��$=6�&7��$��0 ��=A��=�%�A ��=??*=�*?A2��-+�"��#��$=+��(�'�� @��=@>?=%>>� @��=@>?=%A9�2��-+�"��#��$=.��(� �� *>*=�*>=%*9* *>*=�*>=%?9>2��-+�"��#��$=,0�� *=%�>=%9*@ ��*=%�>=%@?�2��-+�"��#��$=3�� *=?A�=��% ��*=?A�=�*�%2��-+�"��#��$=#(��+�� A�%=AA?=A*9? A�%=AA?=A*��2��-+�"��#��$=��--�� *�>=%*?=**>A *�>=%>*=�>?9+�'��

+��'#�'�.�� -��9?�9��9�?=9@��9��9�> +�"�� (��"0�(�6�&7��$,��5�)��-��"�� +�"�� (��6��9��9�? +.�6��"��9�?9��D263605400

4200 Per DQAB L05/07/09 Page 1 of 1

ESTIMATE OF QUANTITIES NOTE: This form was developed for repetitive use throughout all contract proposals and may identify items not applicable to this specific project.

D263605 401

PAGE: 1 DATE: 12/01/2017 QUANTITY SHEET SUMMARY FOR PROPOSAL

CONTRACT ID: D263605 PROJECT(S): 77209M

CONTRACTOR :________________________________________________________________ ============================================================================================ SEC ITEM NUM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY ============================================================================================ 0001 690.03000105 SPECIALTY WORK (HVAC) LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 690.03000205 SPECIALTY WORK (HVAC) LS 1.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 697.03 FIELD CHANGE PAYMENT DC 23000.000 ============================================================================================ 0001 699.040001 MOBILIZATION LS 1.000 ============================================================================================

D263605402

PROPOSAL - New York State Department of Transportation

Documents

Transcript of PROPOSAL - New York State Department of Transportation